Full text of "Barbara Brennan Hands Of Light A Guide To Healing Through The Human Energy Field Bantam( 1988)"

See other formats

*TI IIS BOOK IS A MUST FOR ALL ASPIRING HLALLRS AND DEALT 1 1-CARE GIVERS. AN INSPIRATION
TO ALL WHO WANT TO UNDERSTAND THE TRUE HUMAN BEING.” - ELISABETH KUBLKR-ROSS

HANDS

(FLIGHT

HANDS OF LIGHT

“BARBARA BRENNAN'S WORK [S MIND OPENING. HER CONCEPTS OF
THE ROLE DISEASE PLAYS AND HOW HEALING IS ACHIEVED

CERTAINLY FIT IN WITH MY EXPERIENCE.” i

- BERNIE S. SIEGEL, M.D., |

author of Lore, Mcdidne and Miracles

With the clarity of a physicist and the compassion of a gifted healer with
fifteen years of professional experience observing 5,000 clients and students,

Barbara Ann Brennan presents the first in-depth Study of the human
energy field for people who seek happiness, health and their full potential.

Our physical bodies exist within a larger “body/’ a human energy
field or aura, which is the vehicle through which we create our experience
of reality* including health and illness. It is through this energy field that
we have the power to heal ourselves.

This energy body — only recently verified by scientists, but long known to
healers and mystics - is the starting point of all illness. Here, our most powerful
and profound human interactions take place, the precursor and healer
of all physiological and emotional disturbances.

Hands of Light is your guide to a new wholeness. It offers:

a new paradigm for the human in health, relationships and disease.

an understanding of how the human energy field looks* functions, is
disturbed, healed and interacts with friends and lovers.

training in the ability to see and interpret auras.

medically verified case studies of healing people from all walks of life
with a variety of illnesses.

gu id el i lies for heal i ng the self and Others,

the author^ personal and intriguing life adventure which gives us a model
for growth, courage anti possibil ities for expanded consciousness.

US $24.95 / £35,ys GAN

ISBti Q-55J-3t53*-J

BANTAM NEW AGE HOOKS:
A Search for Meaning,

G rowth and Chrm#;

PLEASE NOTE THAT HANDS OF LIGHT IS DOCUMENTARY
AND REFLECTS THE PERSONAL EXPERIENCE OF THE
AUTHOR. THE BOOK IS NOT TO BE INTERPRETED AS A
GUIDE FOR SELF-HEALING. IF YOU INTEND TO FOLLOW
ANY OF THE EXERCISES OR SUGGESTIONS OF THE BOOK,
DO SO ONLY UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF A MEDICAL
DOCTOR OR OTHER HEALTH CARE PROFESSIONAL.

HANDS OF LIGHT

A Bantam Book
Simultaneous hardcover and
trade paperback edition ! June 198$

PRINTING HISTORY
Pleiades Books edition published 1987

New Age and the accompanying figure design as well a$ the statement
"the search for meaning , growth and change" are trademarks of Bantam
Books, a division of Bantam Doubleday Dell Publishing Group, Inc.

No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by
any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording,
or by any information storage and retrieval system , without permission in
writing from the publisher .

For information address: Bantam Books.

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Brennan, Barbara Ann.

Hands of light.

Bibliography: p. 283

1. Spiritual healing. 2. Aura. I. Title.

BF1275.F3B74 1987 615.8'52 87-31840

ISBN 0-553-05302-7
ISBN 0-553-34539-7 (pbk.)

Published simultaneously in the United States and Canada

Bantam Books are published by Bantam Books , a division of Bantam
Doubleday Dell Publishing Group, Inc. Its trademark , consisting of the
zoords "Bantam Books" and the portrayal of a rooster, is Registered in
U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. Marca Regis -
trada. Bantam Books , 1540 Broadway, New York , New York 10036.

PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA

30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22

This book is dedicated to all travels on the path homeward.

Love is the face and body of the Universe. It is the connective tissue of
the universe, the stuff of which we are made. Love is the experience of
being whole and connected to Universal Divinity.

All suffering is caused by the illusion of separateness, which generates
fear and self-hatred, which eventually causes illness.

You are the master of your life. You can do much more than you
thought you could, including cure yourself of a "terminal illness."

The only real "terminal illness" is simply being human. And being
human is not "terminal" at all, because death is simply transition to
another level of being.

I want to encourage you to step out of the normal "bounds" of your
life and to begin seeing yourself differently. I want to encourage you to
live your life at the cutting edge of time, allowing yourself to be born
into a new life every minute.

I want to encourage you to allow your life experience to be lightly
dusted with form.

CONTENTS

Foreword xv

Part I

LIVING ON A PLANET OF ENERGY

Chapter 1 The Healing Experience 3

Chapter 2 How to Use This Book 9

Chapter 3 A Note on Training and the Development

of Guidance 13

Part II

THE HUMAN AURA

Introduction The Personal Experience 19

Chapter 4 Parallels Between How We See Ourselves and

Reality and Western Scientific Views 21

Chapter 5 History of Scientific Investigation into the Human

Energy Field 29 -

Chapter 6 The Universal Energy Field 37

Chapter 7 The Human Energy Field or Human Aura 41

Part III

PSYCHODYNAMICS AND THE HUMAN ENERGY FIELD

Introduction The Therapeutic Experience 59

Chapter 8 Human Growth and Development in the Aura 61

Chapter 9 Psychological Function of the Seven Major Chakras 71

Chapter 10 Chakra or Energy Center Diagnosis 81

Chapter 11 Observations of Auras in Therapy Sessions 89

Chapter 12 Energy Blocks and Defense Systems in the Aura 101

Chapter 13 Aura and Chakra Patterns of the Major

Character Structures 109

Contents

■

Introduction

Part IV

THE PERCEPTUAL TOOLS OF THE HEALER

The Cause of Illness

131

Chapter 14

The Separation of Reality

133

Chapter 15

From Energy Block to Physical Disease

137

Chapter 16

The Process of Healing, an Overview

147

Chapter 17

Direct Access of Information

153

Chapter 18

Internal Vision

157

Chapter 19

High Auditory Perception and Communication

with Spiritual Teachers

169

Chapter 20

Heyoan's Metaphor of Reality

177

Part V

SPIRITUAL HEALING

Introduction

Your Energy Field Is Your Instrument

185

Chapter 21

Preparation for Healing

187

Chapter 22

Full Spectrum Healing

201

Chapter 23

Healing with Color and Sound

237

Chapter 24

Healing Transtemporal Traumas

243

Introduction

Part VI

SELF HEALING AND THE SPIRITUAL HEALER

Transformation and Self Responsibility

253

Chapter 25

The Face of the New Medicine: Patient

Becomes Healer

255

Chapter 26

Health, a Challenge to Be Yourself

265

Chapter 27

The Development of a Healer

273

Bibliography

283

Illustrations

All colored plates appear as an insert between
text pages 44 and 45. —£-

Figures and tables are listed in order by chapter:

6-1 The Effect of Lapis on Plant's Aura 38

6- 2 Check of Phantom Leaf Effect 39

7- 1 The Normal Aura (Colored plate)

A. Three Layers

B. Seven Layers

7-2 Location of Chakras 44

A. The Seven Major Chakras

B. The Twenty-one Minor Chakras

Text

Page

11-2 Auras Seen in Therapy Sessions (Colored plate)

A. An Eleven-Year-Old Child Playing

B. A Wfoman Experiencing Strong
Feelings Associated with the Death
of Her Father

C. Anger Being Expressed

D. Anger Turned Inward

E. Etheric Mucus Caused by Sniffing
Cocaine

7-3

The Seven Major Chakras, Front and

Back Views

7-4

The Seven Layer Auric Body System 47

7-5

Major Chakras and the Area of the Body

They Nourish

7-6

Metabolic Path of Incoming Primary Energy 49

7-7

The Etheric Body

(Colored plate)

7-8

The Emotional Body

(Colored plate)

7-9

The Mental Body

(Colored plate)

7-10

The Astral Body

(Colored plate)

7-11

The Etheric Template Level

(Colored plate)

7-12

The Celestial Body

(Colored plate)

7-13

The Ketheric Template Level

(Colored plate)

7-14

Aura Around Fingertips

8-1

Normal Aura of a Baby

8-2

Adult and Child's Chakras

9-1

Major Chakras and Associated

Psychological Functions

10-1

Dowsing Chakra with a Pendulum

10-2

Energy Center Diagnosis

10-3

Intensive Retreat Case Study Chakra

Readings

11-1

Auras in Motion:

(Colored plate)

A. Normal Aura

B. Musician Performing

C. Man Lecturing on His Favorite
Subject

D. Man Speaking with Passion
About Education

E. Woman After Core Energetics Class

F. Man Who Often Wears a Shirt
This Color

G. Woman Meditating to Increase Field

H. Pregnant Woman

E Man Who Had Taken Many LSD
Trips

G. Man Who Always Held Head at
an Angle

, H. Aura Appears to Have Weight

11-3 Dissociated Thought Form 96

11-4 Man Working on Bioenergetic Stool 97

11- 5 Woman Defending by Creating a Pink

Cloud of Energy (Colored plate)

12- 1 Types of Energy Blocks: 102

A. Blah Block

B. Compaction

C. Mesh Armor

12-2 Types of Energy Blocks: 103

A. Plate Armor

B. Energy Depletion

C. Energy Leak

12- 3 Energetic Defense Systems 105

13- 1 Major Aspects of Each Character Structure,

Personality Makeup 111

13-2 Major Aspects of Each Character Structure,

Physical and Energetic Systems 112

13-3 Major Aspects of Each Character Structure,

Interpersonal Relations 113

13-4 The Aura of the Schizoid Character 115

13-5 The Aura of the Oral Character 118

13-6 The Aura of the Psychopathic Character 120

13-7 The Aura of the Masochistic Character 122

13-8 The Aura of the Rigid Character 125

15-1 Planes of Reality in Which We Exist 138

15-2 Expression of Consciousness in the

Auric Levels 139

15-3 The Creative Process of Health 140

15-4 The Dynamic Process of Disease 141

xii Illustrations

15-5

Chakras That Have Been Disfigured

Text

Page

144

16-1

The Process of Inner Healing

148

18-1

Shoulder Injury Seen Through Internal

Vision

158

18-2

Healing of Pelvic Inflammatory Disease

and Ovarian Cyst (Internal View)

160

18-3

Internal View: (Colored plate)

A. Pelvic Inflammatory Disease,
Ovarian Cyst and Fibroid

B. Fibroids and Disfigured Pubic
Chakra

18-4

Internal Viewing of Heart Problems

162

18-5

Microscopic Internal Vision

163

18-6

The Anatomy of Internal Viewing

164

19-1

Senses of the Seven Chakras

173

20-1

Our Perceptual Cone:

178

A. Graphic Depiction of Our
Perceptual Cone

B. Spiritual Interpretation of Our
Cone of Perception

20-2 Defining the Boundaries of Our Perceptual

Cone 180

A. Cone of Perception Increased by
High Sense Perception

B. Cone of Perception Limited by
Definition of Personal Reality

21-1

Joint Exercises

189

21-2

Physical Exercises to Charge and

Open Chakras

192

21-3

Breathing/Posture Exercises to Charge and

Open Chakras

196

21-4

Standing Color Meditation

198

22-1

Healing Sequence

202

22-2

Main Point of Foot Reflexology

204

22-3

Chelation Chart

205

22-4

Patient's Aura Before Healing (Colored plate)

22-5

Balancing Right and Left Sides of the Body

and Beginning to Run Energy into Feet

22-6

Balancing Auric Field of Patient, Healer

Text

Page

and Universal Energy Field (Colored

plate)

22-7

Energy Flow During Chelation of Auric

Field

208

22-8

Chelating Aura Between Ankle and Knee

Joint

209

22-9

Chelating Aura Between Knee and Hip

Joint

210

22-10

Chelating Aura Between Hip Joint and

Second Chakra

211

22-11

Chelating Aura Between Second and

Third Chakras

212

22-12

Chelating Aura Between Third and Fourth

Chakra

214

22-13

Spine Cleaning

216

22-14

Running Energy Deep into Auric Field

217

22-15

Etheric Template Healing: Spiritual

Surgery

220

22-16

Ketheric Template Healing of Lymphatic

System

223

22-17

Ketheric Template Healing: Spiritual

Surgery

224

22-18

Celestial-level Healing (Sixth Layer)

227

22-19

Sealing the Ketheric Template Level of

the Aura to Complete the Healing

229

22-20

Patient's Aura After Healing (Colored

plate)

22-21

Setting an Eighth Level Shield (Colored

plate)

22-22

Sealing an Eighth Level Shield

234

23-1

Color Meaning on a Soul-task Level

238

23-2

Color Used in Healing

239

24-1

Past Life Trauma in the Aura (Colored

plate)

24-2

Removing Auric Mucus with

a Crystal (Colored

plate)

24-3

Past-life Lance Revealed as Aura Clears

247

24-4

Golden Threads of Ketheric Template

Healing

248

24-5

Ketheric Level of the Healed Third Chakra

248

25-1

Case Study of David

256

207

List of Exercises to

Text

Pfrge

Chapter 6

See the Universal Energy Field

Chapter 7

See the Human Aura

Chapter 8

Sense psychic spaces

Chapter 10

How to diagnose the chakras

with a pendulum

Chapter 11

Observe other people's auras
Experience the apparent weight

of the energy field

Chapter 12

Find your major defense

106

Chapter 13

Find your character structure

127

Chapter 14

Explore your inner wall

134

To dissolve your wall

134

Chapter 15

Find the personal meaning

of illness

145

Chapter 17

To enhance your kinesthetic sense

153

To enhance your visual sense

154

To enhance your auditory sense

154

Chapter 18

To establish internal vision

165

1) Traveling through body

165

2) Scanning a friend

3) Meditate to open your third

165

eye scanner

166

Chapter 19

Meditations to enhance experience

of each of your auric levels
Receive spiritual guidance

175

Chapter 21

Daily exercises for the healer to

open acupuncture meridians

187

Chapter 22

Chapter 23
Chapter 24
Chapter 26

Chapter 27

Text

P^ge

Physical exercises to open and
charge chakras (Levels 1-3 of
. auric field) 190

Visualization to open chakras

(Level 4 of auric field) 191

Breathing and posture exercises to

charge and open chakras 191

Color breathing meditation to

charge aura 195

Vibrating exercise for grounding 195

Sitting meditations for centering 198

To gather power for a day of

healing 201

Let guides come into your field

for healing work 218

Control the color you send 237

Experience non-linear time 243

Heyoan's meditation on

self-healing 268

Meditation to dissolve

self-limitations 270

Find your fears 274

Find your negative beliefs 274

Find your readiness to be

a Healer 280

Consider the nature of healing 280

FOREWORD

This is a new era and to paraphrase Shakespeare/ "There are more
things twixt Heaven and Earth unknown to man." This book addresses
those who are looking for self-understanding of their physical and emo¬
tional processes beyond the framework of classic medicine. It is focused
on the art of healing through physical and metaphysical methods. It
opens up new dimensions for understanding the concepts of psychoso¬
matic identity first presented to us by Wilhelm Reich, Walter Canon,
Franz Alexander, Flanders Dunbar, Burr and Northrup, and many other
investigators in the field of psychosomatics.

The contents deal with defining healing experiences and the history
of scientific investigations of the human energy field and aura. The book
is unique in connecting psychodynamics to the human energy field. It
describes the variations of the energy field as it relates to personality
functions.

The latter part of the book defines the causes of illness and these are
based on metaphysical concepts which are then connected to the energy
disturbances of the aura. The reader will, also, find here a description of
the nature of spiritual healing as it relates to the healer and the subject.

The book is written from the subjective experiences of the author,
who was scientifically trained as a physicist and as a psychotherapist.
The combination of objective knowledge and subjective experiences
forms a unique method of expanding the consciousness beyond the con¬
fines of objective knowledge.

For those who are open to such an approach, the book has extremely
rich material from which to learn, to experience and with which to ex¬
periment. To those who have major objections, I would recommend
opening their minds to the question, "Is there a possibility of the exis¬
tence of this new perspective which goes beyond logic and objective
scientific experimentation?"

I recommend this book very highly to those who are excited about
the phenomenon of life on the physical and metaphysical levels. It is the
work of many years of devoted effort and represents the evolution of
the personality of the author and the development of her special gifts
of healing. The reader will be entering a fascinating domain, full of
wonders.

Ms. Brennan is to be commended for her courage in bringing her
subjective and objective experiences to the world.

John Pierrakos, Md.
Institute of CORE Energetics
New York City

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I wish to thank my teachers who are many, so I will list them in the
order in which I studied with them. First there was Dr. Jim Cox and Ms.
Ann Bowman, who trained me in bioenergetic bodywork along with
many others. I spent many years training and working with Dr. John
Pierrakos, whose work in Core Energetics built the foundation for my
healing work that followed. He had a great influence on me in training
me to connect the auric phenomena I was witnessing to the psycho¬
dynamic bodywork. Thank you, John. I am forever grateful to Ms. Eva
Pierrakos, who initiated the particular spiritual path I practice, called the
Pathwork. I wish also to thank my healing teachers the Rev. C.B., and
the Rev. Rosalyn Bruyere. I would also like to thank all my students
who, by coming to me to learn, have been my greatest teachers.

In the production of the book itself, I thank all those who helped
with the manuscript, and particularly Ms. Marjorie Bair for her editorial
comments; Dr. Jac Conaway for use of his computer and Maria Adeshian
for typing. I would like to thank Bruce Austin for final word processing.
I am deeply grateful to Ms, Marilee Talman for her invaluable help in text
editing and guiding the entire production process of this book. I am
grateful for the constant personal support given to me by Mr. Eli Wilner,
my daughter Miss Celia Conaway, and my dear friend Ms. Moira Shaw,
who, when I most needed it, would remind me of my value.

And most of all, I wish to thank my dear spiritual teachers who have
guided me every step of the way and who have delivered most of the
truth that lies in this book through me.

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

Barbara Brennan is a practicing healer, psychotherapist and scientist.
She was a research scientist for NASA at the Goddard Space Flight Cen¬
ter following the completion of her M.S. in Atmospheric Physics from
the University of Wisconsin. For the past fifteen years she has been
studying and working with the human energy field and has been in¬
volved in research projects with Drexel University and the Institute for
the New Age. She was trained in Bioenergetic Therapy at the Institute
for Psychophysical Synthesis, Community of the Whole Person, and in
Core Energetics at the Institute for the New Age. She has studied with
both American and Native American healers.

Barbara is currently teaching courses and giving workshops on the
Human Energy Field, Healing and Channelling. She has given work¬
shops in many areas of the United States, Canada and Europe. She
conducts a private practice in New York City and East Hampton, New
York. Barbara is a member of the Pathwork Community, Phoenicia, New
York.

ABOUT THE ARTIST

Joseph A. Smith has contributed illustrations to Time, Newsweek and
Harper's. He illustrated the book Witches written by Erica Jong. A painter
and sculptor, he is Professor of Fine Arts at Pratt Institute in New York.

PART I

LIVING ON A PLANET
OF ENERGY

"I maintain that cosmic religious feeling is the strongest
and noblest incitement to scientific research."

Albert Einstein

Chapter 1

THE HEALING EXPERIENCE

During my years of practice as a healer, I have
had the privilege of working with many delight¬
ful people. Here are a few of them, and their
stories, who make the day in the life of a healer
so f ulfillin g.

My first client on a day in October 1984 was
a woman in her late twenties named Jenny.
Jenny is a vivacious school teacher about 5'5"
tall, with large blue eyes and dark hair. She is
known to her friends as the lavender lady be¬
cause she loves and wears lavender all the time.
Jenny also has a part-time flower business and
makes exquisite floral arrangements for wed¬
dings and other festive occasions. At that time,
she had been married for several years to a suc¬
cessful advertising man. Jenny had had a mis¬
carriage several months earlier and had not been
able to get pregnant again. When Jenny went to
her physician to see why she was unable to con¬
ceive, she received some bad news. After many
tests and opinions from several other physi¬
cians, it was agreed that she should have a hys¬
terectomy as soon as possible. There were
abnormal cells in her uterus where the placenta
had been attached. Jenny was frightened and
distraught. She and her husband had waited to
start their family until they were more finan¬
cially sound. Now, there appeared to be no
chance of that.

The first time Jenny came to me, in August
of that year, she didn't tell me any of her medi¬
cal history. She just said, "I need your help. Tell
me what you see in my body. I need to make an
important decision."

During the healing session, I scanned her
energy field, or aura, using my "High Sense
Perception" (HSP). I "saw" some abnormal cells
inside the uterus on the lower left side. At the
same time, I "saw" the circumstances around
the miscarriage. The abnormal cells were located
where the placenta had been attached. I also
"heard" words that described Jenny's condition
and what to do about .it. What I heard was that
Jenny needed to take a month off, go to the
ocean, take specific vitamins, stay on a specific
diet and meditate daily, spending at least'two
hours a day alone. Then after spending the
month healing herself, she should return to the
normal medical world and be tested again. I was
told that the healing was completed and that
she didn't need to return to me. During the
healing I received information about her psy¬
chological attitude and how that was affecting
her inability to heal herself. She blamed herself
for the miscarriage. As a result, she was placing
undue stress upon herself and was preventing
her body from healing itself after the miscar¬
riage. I was told (and this is the hard part for
me) that she should not go to another physician
for at least a month because the different diag¬
noses and pressures to have a hysterectomy
were adding greatly to the stress. Her heart was
breaking because she wanted a child so badly.
She was somewhat relieved when she left my
office and said she would think about every¬
thing that had happened in the healing session.

In October, when Jenny came again, the first
thing she did was to give me a big hug and a

4 Hands of Light

sweet little poem thanking me. Her medical
tests were normal. She had spent August taking
care of friends' children on Fire Island. She kept
to her diet, took her vitamins and spent a good
deal of time alone practicing self-healing. She
decided to wait a few more months and then try
to get pregnant again. A year later I heard that
Jenny gave birth to a healthy baby boy.

My second client that October day was How¬
ard. He is the father of Mary, whom I treated
some time ago. Mary had had a class-three Pap
smear (precancerous condition) that cleared up
in about six healings. She has had normal Pap
smears for several years now. Mary, a nurse her¬
self, founded and directs a nursing organization
that gives updates of skills training to nurses
and also supplies nurses to hospitals in the Phil¬
adelphia area. She became interested in my
work and regularly refers clients to me.

Howard had been seeing me for several
months. He was a blue-collar worker but had
retired. He is a delightful person to work with.
When he first came to me, he was gray and had
constant heart pain. He had difficulty even
walking across a room without getting tired. Af¬
ter the first healing, his complexion was rosy,
and the pain went away. After two months of
weekly healings, he was dancing again. Mary
and I have worked together to combine healing
by laying on of hands with herbal medications
prescribed by a Naturopathic Physician to clear
his arteries of plaque. On that day I continued to
balance and strengthen his field. His improve¬
ment was obvious to his physicians and his
friends.

Another client I saw that day was Ed. He
first came to me because he had wrist problems.
The joints in his arms and wrist were getting
weaker and weaker. He also had pain when he
had orgasm during intercourse. He had had a
weak back for some time, and now the weak¬
ness had progressed so much that he could not
carry anything, not even a few dishes. In the
first healing I gave him, I "saw" from his auric
field that his coccyx (tailbone) had been injured
when he was about 12. At the time of the injury,
he had a great deal of trouble dealing with the
burgeoning sexual feelings he experienced at

puberty. The accident diminished these, and he
was better able to cope.

His coccyx was jammed to the left and could
not move in its normal way to assist in pumping
the cerebral spinal fluid through its normal
pathway. This caused a great imbalance and de¬
bility in his whole energy system. The next step
in this degenerating process was a weakening of
the lower back, then the middle and then the
upper back. Each time he would weaken from
lack of energy flow in one part of his body, an¬
other part would try to compensate for this
weakness. He started carrying a lot of tension in
the joints of his arms, and finally they gave way
and became weak. This entire weakening pro¬
cess took years.

Ed and I had a successful healing process
over several months' time. First we worked with
energy flow to unjam the coccyx, realign it, and
then increase and balance the energy flow
through his system. Little by little all his
strength had come back. That afternoon the
only symptom he had left was a little weakness
in his left wrist. But before I attended to that, I
again balanced and strengthened his whole en¬
ergy field. Then I spent extra time allowing heal¬
ing energy to flow into his wrist.

The last client I saw that day was Muriel, an
artist and the wife of a well-known surgeon.
This was her third appointment with me. Three
weeks earlier she had appeared in my office
with a greatly enlarged thyroid. In that first ap¬
pointment, I again used my High Sense Percep¬
tion (HSP) to gather information about Muriel's
condition. I could see that the enlarged thyroid
was not due to cancer and that with just two
healings combined with the medication her doc¬
tors had prescribed for her, the enlargement
would disappear. I saw that no surgery would
be needed. She confirmed that she had already
been to several physicians, who had given her
medication to shrink the thyroid. They said the
medication would reduce it some, but she
would still need surgery, and that there was a
chance it was cancer. Surgery was scheduled the
week after our second appointment. I gave her
the two healings a week apart. By the time she
got to surgery, there was no need for the opera-

The Healing Experience 5

tion; the physicians were very surprised. She
came back that day to make sure everything was
restored to normal health. It was.

How do these seemingly miraculous events
take place? What ami doing to help these peo¬
ple? The process I use is called laying~on of
hands, faith healing or spiritual healing. It is not at
all a mysterious process, but very straightfor¬
ward, although many times very complicated. It
is a procedure that involves rebalancing the en¬
ergy field, which I call the Human Energy Field
that exists around each of us. Everyone has an
energy field or aura that surrounds and inter¬
penetrates the physical body. This energy field
is intimately associated with health. High Sense
Perception is a way of perceiving things beyond
the normal ranges of human senses. With it one
can see, hear, smell, taste and touch things that
cannot normally be perceived. High Sense Per¬
ception is a type of "seeing" in which you per¬
ceive a picture in your mind without the use of
your normal vision. It is not imagination. It is
sometimes referred to as clairvoyance. HSP re¬
veals the dynamic world of fluid interacting life
energy fields around and through all things. For
most of my life I have been in a dance with the
living sea of energy in which we exist. Through
this dance I have discovered that this energy
supports us, nourishes us, gives us life. We
sense each other with it; we are of it; it is of us.

My clients and students ask me when I first
saw the energy field around people. When did I
first realize that it was a useful tool? What is it
like to have the ability to perceive things beyond
the normal ranges of human senses? Is there
something special about me, or is it something
that can be learned? If so, what can they do to
broaden their own perception ranges, and of
what value is it to their lives? To answer these
questions well I must go back to the beginning.

My childhood was a very simple one. I grew
up on a farm in Wisconsin. Since there were not
a lot of playmates in my area, I spent a great
deal of time alone. I would spend hours in the
woods alone, sitting perfectly still and waiting
for small animals to come up to me. I practiced
blending in with my surroundings. It was not
until much later that I began to understand the

significance of those times of silence and wait¬
ing. In those quiet moments in the woods I en¬
tered into an expanded state of consciousness in
which I was able to perceive things beyond the
normal human ranges of experience. I remem¬
ber knowing where each small animal was with¬
out looking. I could sense its state. When I
practiced walking blindfolded in the woods, I
would feel the trees long before I could touch
them with my hands. I realized that the trees
were larger than they appeared to the visible
eye. Trees have life energy fields around them,
and I was sensing those fields. Later I learned to
see the energy fields of trees and the small ani¬
mals. I discovered that everything has an energy
field around it that looks somewhat like the light
from a candle. I also began to notice that every¬
thing was connected by these energy fields, that
no space existed without an energy field. Every¬
thing, including me, was living in a sea of en¬
ergy.

This was not an exciting discovery to me. It
was simply my experience, as natural as seeing
a squirrel eating an acorn on the branch of a
tree. I never formulated these experiences into
any theories about how the world worked. I ac¬
cepted it all as perfectly natural, assumed every¬
one knew it, and then I forgot about it.

As I grew into adolescence, I stopped going
to the woods. I began being interested in how
things worked and why things are the way they
are. I would question everything in a quest to
find order and to understand the way the world
worked. I went to college, received a Master of
Science degree in atmospheric physics, and
then worked for NASA doing research for a
number of years. Later I trained and became
a counselor. It wasn't until I was counseling for
a number of years and I began seeing colors
around people's heads that I remembered my
childhood experiences in the woods. I realized,
then, that those experiences were the begin¬
nings of my High Sense Perception, or clair¬
voyant vision. Those delightful and secret
childhood experiences ultimately led me to the
diagnosing and healing of the critically ill.

As I look back, I can see the pattern of devel¬
opment of my abilities starting from birth. It is

6 Hands of Light

as if my life has been guided by some unseen
hand that brought me to and led me through
each experience in a step-by-step fashion, very
much like going through school—the school we
call life.

The experience in the woods helped broaden
my senses. Then my university training helped
develop my logical thinking mind. My counsel¬
ing training opened my eyes and heart toward
humanity. Finally, my spiritual training (which I
will discuss later) gave enough credibility to my
unordinary experiences to open my mind to ac¬
cepting them as "real." I then began to create a
framework with which to understand these ex¬
periences. Slowly, High Sense Perception and
the Human Energy Field became integral parts
of my life.

I firmly believe they can become part of any¬
one's life. To develop HSP, it is necessary to en¬
ter into an expanded state of consciousness.
There are many methods for doing this. Medi¬
tating is fast becoming the most well-known.
Meditation can be practiced in many forms; it is
important to find the form that best suits you. I
will offer some suggested meditations, from
which you may want to choose, later in this
book. I have also found that you can enter an
expanded state of consciousness by jogging,
walking, fishing, sitting on a sand dune and
watching the waves roll in, or sitting in the
woods, as I did as a child. How are you already
doing it, whether you call it meditation or rev¬
erie or something else? The most important
thing here is to give yourself time to listen in to
yourself—time to silence the noisy mind that
constantly talks about what you need to do,
how you could have won that argument, what
you should have done, what is wrong with you,
etc., etc. When that incessant babble is turned
off, a whole new world of sweet harmonious re¬
ality opens up to you. You begin to blend in
with your surroundings, as I did in the woods.
At the same time your individuality is not lost,
but enhanced.

The process of blending in with our sur¬
roundings is another way to describe experienc¬
ing expanded awareness. For example, consider
the candle and its flame again. We normally
identify ourselves as a body (the wax and wick)

with consciousness (the flame). When we enter
a state of expanded consciousness, we perceive
ourselves also as the light coming from the
flame. Where does the light begin and where
does the flame end? There seems to be a line
there but where exactly is it when you look
more closely? The flame is completely pene¬
trated by the light. Does the light in the room
that is not from the candle (sea of energy) pene¬
trate the flame? It does. Where does the light in
the room begin and the light from the candle
end? According to physics, there is no boundary
to a candle's light; it reaches out to infinity.
Where, then, is our ultimate boundary? My ex¬
perience of HSP, resulting from an expanded
consciousness, is that there is no boundary. The
more I expand my consciousness, the more my
HSP expands, the more I am able to see a reality
that already is there but was earlier outside my
perception range. As my HSP expands, more of
reality comes into my view. At first I was able to
see only the coarser energy fields around
things: it reached only about an inch or so be¬
yond the skin. As I became more proficient, I
could see that the field reached further out from
the skin but was apparently of a finer substance
or less intense light. Each time I thought I had
found the boundary, I would, at a later date,
perceive beyond that line. Where is the line? I
have concluded that it would be easier to say
that there are only layers: the layer of the flame,
then the flame's light, then the light of the
room. Each line is harder to distinguish. The
perception of each outer layer requires a more
expanded state of consciousness and a more
finely tuned HSP. As your state of conscious¬
ness expands, the light you previously saw as
dim brightens and becomes more sharply de¬
fined.

As I slowly developed High Sense Percep¬
tion over the years, I compiled my observations.
Most of these observations took place during my
15 years as a counselor. Having originally been
trained in physics, I was rather skeptical when I
first started "seeing" the energy phenomena
around people's bodies. But since the phenom¬
ena persisted, even if I closed my eyes to make it
go away or moved around the room, I began to
observe it more closely. And so my personal

The Healing Experience 7

journey began, taking me into worlds that I
didn't know existed before, completely chang¬
ing the way I experience reality, people, the uni¬
verse and my relationship to it.

I saw that the energy field is intimately asso¬
ciated with a person's health and well-being. If a
person is unhealthy, it will show in his energy
field as an unbalanced flow of energy and/or
stagnated energy that has ceased to flow and
appears as darkened colors. In contrast, a
healthy person shows bright colors that flow
easily in a balanced field. These colors and
forms are very specific to each illness. HSP is
extremely valuable in medicine and psychologi¬
cal counseling. Using HSP, I have become profi¬
cient in diagnosing both physical and psycho¬
logical problems and in finding ways to resolve
those problems.

With HSP, the mechanism of psychosomatic ill¬
ness lies right before your eyes. HSP reveals how
most diseases are initiated in the energy fields
and are then, through time and living habits,
transmitted to the body, becoming a serious ill¬
ness. Many times the source or initiating cause
of this process is associated with psychological
or physical trauma, or a combination of the two.
Since HSP reveals how a disease is initiated, it
also reveals how to reverse the disease process.

In the process of learning to see the field, I
also learned to interact with it consciously, as
with anything else I can see. I could manipulate
my own field to interact with another person's
field. Soon I learned to rebalance an unhealthy
energy field so the person might be returned to
a state of health. Moreover, I found myself re¬
ceiving information about the source of a client's
illness. This information seemed to be coming
from what appeared to be an intelligence higher
than myself or what I normally considered to be
myself. This process of receiving information in
this way is popularly called channelling. Chan¬
nelled information would come in the form of
words, concepts or symbolic pictures that would
enter into my mind when I was rebalancing the
client's energy field. I would always be in an
altered state of consciousness when doing this. I

became proficient in receiving information in a
combination of ways using HSP (i.e., channel¬
ling or seeing). I would correlate what I received
in either a symbolic picture in my mind, a con¬
cept or a direct verbal message with what I saw
in the energy field. For example, in one case I
heard directly, "She has cancer," and I saw a
black spot in her energy field. The black spot
correlated in size, shape and location with
results from a CAT scan taken later. This combi¬
nation of receiving information with HSP has
become very efficient, and I have a very high
accuracy in any particular description of a cli¬
ent's condition. I also receive information as to
what self-help actions the client should take
during the course of the healing process. This
process usually entails a series of healing ses¬
sions that last over several weeks or months, de¬
pending on the seriousness of the disease. The
healing process includes rebalancing the field,
changing the living habits and dealing with the
initiating trauma.

It is essential that we deal with the deeper
meaning of our illnesses. We need to ask, what
does this illness mean to me? What can I learn
from this illness? Illness can be seen as simply a
message from your body to you that says. Wait a
minute; something is wrong. You are not listening to
your whole self; you are ignoring something very im¬
portant to you. What is it? The source of the ill¬
ness needs to be searched for in this way, either
on the psychological or feeling level, on the level
of understanding or simply by a change in one's
state of being, which may not be conscious. A
return to health requires much more personal
work and change than simply taking pills pre¬
scribed by a doctor. Without personal change
you will eventually create another problem to
lead you back to the source that caused the dis¬
ease in the first place. I have found that the
source is the key. To deal with the source usu¬
ally requires a life change that ultimately leads
to a personal life more connected to the core of
one's being. It leads us to that deeper part of
ourselves that is sometimes called the high self
or the spark of divinity within.

Chapter 2

HOW TO USE THIS BOOK

This book is written primarily for those who are
interested in self-understanding and self-
revelation and the new healing method that is
sweeping across this country, the healing art of
laying-on of hands. The work presents an in-
depth study of the human aura and its relation¬
ship to the healing process, both psychological
and physical. It presents a comprehensive view
of a way of life towards health and growth. It is
written for health care professionals, therapists,
clergy, and all those who consider themselves
aspirants to better physical, psychological and
spiritual health.

If you wish to learn self-healing, this book
will be a challenge, for as outlined here, self-
healing means self-transformation. Any illness,
whether it be psychological or physical, will
lead you on a journey of self-exploration and
discovery that will completely change your life
from the inside out. This book is a handbook for
that journey, both in self-healing and in the
healing of others.

For professional healers, in whatever disci¬
pline of the health care field they practice, it is a
reference book to be used throughout the course
of years. For the student, it serves as a textbook
to be used in classes with or under the supervi¬
sion of an experienced healer. There are ques¬
tions at the end of each chapter. I suggest that
the student of healing answer them without
looking back at the text. This means studying
the text and doing the exercises that are in¬
cluded in the text. These exercises focus not
only on healing and seeing techniques, but also

on self-healing and self-discipline. They are fo¬
cused on balancing your life and silencing the
mind to broaden your perceptions. This book is
not a substitute for classes in healing. It should
be used with a class or in preparation for classes
in healing. Do not underestimate the amount of
work it takes to become proficient in perceiving
the energy fields and learning to work with
them. You will need direct hands-on experience
and verification of those experiences by a quali¬
fied teacher-healer. Perceiving the Human En¬
ergy Field (HEF) not only takes study and
practice, but also requires personal growth. It
takes internal changes that increase your sensi¬
tivity so that you can learn to differentiate be¬
tween internal noise and subtle incoming
information that can only be perceived by silenc¬
ing the mind.

If, on the other hand, you have already be¬
gun to perceive beyond the normal sense per¬
ceptual ranges, this book can be used as
verification of those experiences. Although each
person's experience is unique, there are general
common experiences people have when going
through the process of broadening perceptions,
or opening their channel, as it is often called.
These verifications will serve to encourage you
along your way. No, you are not going crazy.
Others are also hearing noises from "nowhere"
and seeing lights that aren't there. It is all part
of the beginning of some very wonderful
changes taking place in your life in a perhaps
unusual but most natural way.

There is abundant evidence that many hu-

10 Hands of Light

man beings today are expanding the usual five
senses into super-sensory levels. Most people
have High Sense Perceptions to some degree,
without necessarily realizing it. Most can de¬
velop them much further with earnest dedica¬
tion and study. It is possible that there is already
a transformation in consciousness taking place
and that more people are developing a new
sense in which information is received on a dif¬
ferent and possibly higher frequency. I did. So
can you. This development in myself was a
slow, very organic process that led me into new
worlds and changed my personal reality almost
entirely. I believe that this process of developing
High Sense Perception is a natural evolutionary step
for the human race, leading us into the next stage of
development where, because of our newly gained
abilities, we will have to be deeply honest with
others. Our feelings and private realities will no
longer be hidden from others. They already are
automatically communicated through our en¬
ergy fields. As everyone learns to perceive this
information, we will see and understand each
other much more clearly than we do now.

For example, you may already know when
someone is very angry. That is easy. With HSP,
you will be able to see a red haze around the
angry person. To find out what is happening
with her on a deeper level, it is possible to focus
on the cause of the anger, not only in the
present, but also on how it relates to childhood
experience and to her relationship with her par¬
ents. Under the red haze will appear a gray,
thick, fluid-like substance that conveys a heavy
sadness. By focusing in on the essence of the
gray substance, you will probably even be able
to see the childhood scene that caused the
deeply rooted pain. You will also see how that
anger is harming the physical body. You will see
that the person habitually reacts in anger to cer¬
tain situations, when perhaps crying is a more
useful emotion to release in order to bring the
situation to a solution. Using HSP you will be
able to find the words that will help that person
let down, connect to the deeper reality, and help
her find a solution. In another situation, how¬
ever, you may see that expression of anger is ex¬
actly what is needed to heal the situation.

Once we have come to this experience, noth¬
ing is ever again the same. Our lives begin to
change in ways we never expected. We under¬
stand the relationship between cause and effect;
we see that our thoughts affect our energy
fields, which in turn affect our bodies and our
health. We then find we can redirect our lives
and our health. We find that we create our own
experience of reality through this field. The HEF
is the medium through which our creations take
place. It can then be the key to finding how we
help create our reality and how we can change
that reality if we so choose. It becomes the me¬
dium through which we find ways to reach in¬
side to our deepest being. It becomes the bridge
to our soul, to our inner private life, to that
spark of the divine within each of us.

I want to encourage you to change yofur per¬
sonal "model" of who you are, as I lead you
through the world of High Sense Perception
into the world of the Human Energy Field. You
will see how your actions and belief systems af¬
fect and help create your reality for better and
for worse. Once you see this, you realize you
have the power to change the things you don't
like and enhance the things you do like about
your life. That takes a lot of courage, personal
search, work and honesty. It is not an easy path,
but it is unquestionably a worthwhile one. This
book will help show you that path, not only
through a new paradigm for your relationship to
your health, but also for your relationship to
your entire life and the universe you find your¬
self in. Give yourself some regular private time
to experience this new relationship. Allow your¬
self to be the light of that candle that expands
into the Universe.

I have divided the book up into sections that
focus primarily on an area of information about
the Human Energy Field (HEF) and its relation¬
ship to you. As you have been reading, this first
section deals with the place of the auric field in
your life. What does this,phenomenon that has
been described by mystics for so long have to do
with you? Where does it fit in your life? Of
what, if any, use is it? Case histories have shown
how knowledge of this phenomenon can change
the face of our reality. Jenny, for example, real-

Haw to Use This Book 11

ized that she needed to take significant healing
time for herself before she could bear children.
Jenny took her health and her life into her own
hands (where it always was anyway) and
changed a possibly unpleasant future into the
much happier one that she preferred. This kind
of knowledge can lead us all into a better world;
one of love born out of deep understanding; one
of sisterhood and brotherhood where those con¬
sidered enemies become friends because of that
understanding.

Part II deals more specifically with the en¬
ergy field phenomena. It describes the phenom¬
ena from the point of view of history theoretical
science and experimental science. After these
are dealt with thoroughly I then proceed to de¬
scribe the HEF from my own view, which is a
mixture of observation and theory combined
with those conclusions of others found in the
literature. From this information is developed a
model of the HEF to use for both psychological
work and spiritual healing work.

Part III presents my findings on the relation¬
ship between the HEF and psychodynamics.
Even though you may not have been interested
in psychotherapy or personal process in the
past, you will find this section very enlightening
in terms of self-discovery. It will help you under¬
stand not only what makes you tick, but also
how you tick. This information is very useful to
those who want to go beyond the normal
bounds of psychology and body psychotherapy
into broader views of us as human beings and of
our energetic and spiritual reality. These chap¬
ters give specific frames of reference for integrat¬
ing the Human Energy Field phenomena into
practical psychodynamics. Drawings of HEF
changes during the counseling process are pre¬
sented. For those interested in self-discovery
this chapter will introduce you to a new realm
where the reality of your energy-field interac¬
tions in daily life will take on new and deeper
meaning. After you read the book, you can find
practical ways to make use of energy-field dy¬
namics in your relationships with loved ones,
children and friends. It will help you under¬
stand more of what is going on in the office in
interactions with those you work with. Parts of

this section are very technical, and the general
reader may want to skip some of the material
(Chapters 11, 12, 13). You may want to go back
when you have more specific questions about
the functioning of the HEF.

Part IV of this book deals with the whole
issue of increasing our perceptual ranges—what
that means on a personal level, on the practical
level and on a broader level in terms of changing
the society we live in. I give dear explanations of
the areas in which perceptions can be broad¬
ened, of the experience of that broadening in
each area and how to do it. I also give a theoreti¬
cal framework in which to place these experi¬
ences and the broad-scale implications for
humankind as we as a group move into these
changes. These changes not only affect us as in¬
dividuals, but they change the entire fabric of
human life as we know it.

Part V deals with the process of spiritual
healing. I call it spiritual healing because it is
always linked to our innate spiritual nature. This
part presents healing experiences and tech¬
niques in relationship to the HEF. It contains
drawings of the auric field changes during heal¬
ings. It clearly delineates techniques of healing
on the different layers of the HEF. It combines
the information on broadened perceptions,
given in Part IV, with healing, to enable the
healer very effectively to initiate the healing
process in self and others.

Because most of these techniques are not
simple to learn, you will probably have to study
them in a class. Written explanations of some¬
thing this specialized serve to help the student
to become familiar with the subject material but
do not claim to teach the techniques. \bu must
have personal instruction from someone who
knows how to do this healing before you will
become proficient in it. Verification of your expe¬
rience by a qualified healer is very important. To
become a professional healer takes a lot of train¬
ing in didactic, practical, and personal work. Ev¬
eryone who really wishes can become proficient
in healing and channelling. You need to study
and practice to develop your skills as in any
other profession. I am sure that someday in the
not too distant future there will be certified

12 Hands of Light

training programs in laying-on-of-hands healing
and channelling. If you wish to become a pro¬
fessional healer now, you must find one and be¬
come an apprentice.

Part VI gives a detailed case study of the
healing of David, in which the client takes an
active role in his own healing. It shows how cli¬
ent becomes healer. Part VI then focuses on

practical self-healing methods and suggests the
next steps for those who want to practice heal¬
ing, showing how to reestablish health and bal¬
ance in your life, and how to maintain it. The
personal developmental stages of becoming a
healer are described, which then lead to the
questions: What is health? Who is the healer?

Chapter 3

A NOTE ON TRAINING AND
THE DEVELOPMENT OF GUIDANCE

I believe it is very important for the healer to
have a lot of technical training: counseling meth¬
ods, anatomy, physiology, pathology, and mas¬
sage technique, as well as some knowledge of
acupuncture, homeopathy and nutritional and
herbal cures. These other counseling methods
are almost always combined with the laying-on
of hands, either by the healer or other health
care professionals who are working on the case.
The healer must have some knowledge of these
methods to understand how they dovetail to
make a healing a whole one, and to be able to
communicate with the other people involved in
the case. Various other health care methods may
be indicated through the channel of the healer.
The healer will need to know anatomy and
physiology to help interpret the information she
is receiving. Above all, the healer should be able
to work with other medical professionals to help
a client heal herself.

My training included a normal B.S. in phys¬
ics and an M.S. degree in atmospheric physics
from a state university. I did research with
weather satellite instrumentation for NASA for
five years. I completed two years of training in
bioenergetic counseling, one year in massage
therapy, two years of anatomy/physiology, two
years of specialization in altered states of con¬
sciousness, specifically in deep relaxation tech¬
niques, one year of homeopathy, three years of
Core Energetic training, five years of Pathwork
Helpership Training and several years studying

with various healers around the country both
privately and in workshops. I also practiced
working with people and their energy fields pri¬
vately and in groups for more than 15 years.
Since I was already a practicing counselor, the
means by which people could see me for heal¬
ing was set up. People just made appointments
with me. More and more people requested heal¬
ing rather than therapy, and the counseling
practice slowly became a healing practice. I fi¬
nally had to leave the psychological counseling
work to others who focused on that, and I be¬
gan to accept people only for healing.

During these years, I was also involved in
various experiments to measure the Human En¬
ergy Field. Only after all of that did I feel quali¬
fied to practice healing in New York City and to
begin to teach classes and workshops myself.

To become a healer is no easy task, just as it
is no easy task to do anything well. One needs
spiritual as well as technical training. One must
go through self-initiated tests that challenge the
weak parts of one's personality and develop
one's creative focus, longing, and intent. The
healer may experience these tests as coining
from the outside, but in reality that is not true.
The healer creates them to see if she/he is ready
and able to handle the energy, power, and clar¬
ity that she/he is developing in her/his own en¬
ergy system as she/he grows as a healer. This
energy and power must be used with integrity,
honesty and love, for cause and effect are al-

14 Hands of Light

ways at work in every action. You always get
back what you put out. That is what is called
karma. As the energy flowing through you as a
healer increases, so does your power. If you put
any of this power to a negative use, you will
eventually experience that same negativity com¬
ing back at you.

As my life unfolded, the unseen hand that
led me became more and more perceptible. At
first I vaguely sensed it. Then I began seeing
spiritual beings, as if in a vision. Then I began to
hear them talking to me and feel them touch
me. I now accept that I have a guide. I can see,
hear, and feel him. "He" says he is not male or
female. "He" says that in his world there is no
splitting along sexual lines and that beings at his
level of existence are whole. "He" says that his
name is Heyoan, which means, "The Wind
Whispering Truth Through the Centuries." His
introduction to me was slow and organic. The
nature of our relationship grows daily, as I am
guided to new levels of understanding. Ydu will
see it build as we go through this adventure to¬
gether. At times, I simply call it metaphor.

Throughout this book, I will share with you
some of the more obvious examples of guidance
and its power. Here I want to show you its sim¬
plicity and the way it works.

The simplest kind of guidance comes every
day, and many times a day in the form of dis¬
comfort. Heyoan says that if we just listened to
this guidance and followed it we would rarely
get sick. In other words, attending to the dis¬
comfort you feel puts you back into balance and
therefore health. This discomfort can be in your
body in physical form, like physical discomfort
or pain; it could be on any level of your being-
emotional, mental, or spiritual. It could be in
any area of your life.

Heyoan asks, "Where is the discomfort in your
body/life? How long have you known about it? What
is it saying to you? What have you done about it?"

If you answer those questions honestly, you
will find how much you disregard the best tool
you have to keep yourself healthy, happy and
wise. Any discomfort anywhere in your body/
life is a direct message to you about how you are
out of alignment with your true self.

Following guidance on this simple level
means to rest when you are tired, to eat when
you are hungry, and to eat what your body
needs when it needs it. It means to take care of
or change a life circumstance that bothers you.
How well have you been able to structure your
life so that you can do these things? Not so easy,
is it?

As you become more attentive to your per¬
sonal needs by listening to internal messages
that come to you in the form of discomfort, you
will become more balanced and clear. This will
bring more health to you. The practice of
listening-in will also bring on the phenomena of
direct or verbal guidance. You may start receiv¬
ing very simple verbal directives from an "in¬
ner" voice—a voice that you hear inside
yourself, but that you recognize as coming from
beyond yourself. There are two important points
about learning to follow guidance. The first is
that you will need to practice receiving guidance
for yourself before you are qualified to receive it
for others. The second is that the information or
directives that you get may be very simple and
seem totally unimportant at first. In fact, it may
seem like a complete waste of time to follow any
of it. I have come to realize that there is a reason
for this. Later, when channelling important in¬
formation about another person's life or specific
information about illness, a professional chan-
neller will get information that doesn't make
any sense or seems irrelevant or just plain
wrong. It may be, but most of the time this is
the rational mind at work. The information com¬
ing through a clear channel is often beyond
what the rational mind of the channeller can un¬
derstand. It is at those times when the channel¬
ler will need a lot of past experience to
remember all the other times the information
didn't make sense when it came through, yet
later the information turned out to be very help¬
ful and understandable when all the informa¬
tion was in. I find now that during the hour
spent healing and channelling I will receive in¬
formation in a nonlinear way that slowly over
the hour creates an understandable picture that
gives more information than was possible in just
a rational or linear mode.

A Note on Training and the Development of Guidance 15

If you look, you will begin to recognize guid¬
ance throughout the greater patterns of your
life. Why has one event followed another? What
have you used from each? It is no accident that I
was first trained as a physicist, then a counselor,
and then became a healer. All this training has
prepared me for my life's work. The training in
physics gave me a background structure with
which to examine the aura. The counseling
training gave me the background to understand
the psycho dynamics related to energy flow in
the auric field, and also gave me an opportunity
to observe the auric fields of many people. I
would not have been able to bring this material
together without those trainings. I certainly
wasn't aware of training to be a healer when I
was at NASA. I had never heard of such a thing,
nor was I interested in illness. What I was inter¬
ested in was the way the world worked, what
made it tick. I looked everywhere for answers.
This thirst for understanding has been one of
the most powerful agents guiding me through¬
out my life. What is your thirst? What is your
longing? Whatever it is, it will carry you to what
you need to do next to accomplish your work,
even if you don't know what that work is yet.
When a thing is easily presented to you, and it
sounds wonderful to do and a great deal of fun,
by all means do it. That is guidance. Let yourself
flow free with the dance of your life. If you
don't, you block guidance and your progress.
There are times when my guidance is more ob¬
vious than other times. One particular time was
so beautiful and profound that it has carried me
through many a rough time since. At that point
I was a counselor in Washington, D.C. During
the sessions I was giving people, I began to see
what might be termed past lives. I would see the
individual I was working with in a completely
different setting in a different time frame. What¬
ever the scene was, it was relevant in some way
to what was going on in the person's life. For
example, a woman who was afraid of the water
had drowned in another lifetime. She also had
difficulty in asking for help in this lifetime. In
the lifetime when she drowned, nobody could
hear her screams for help when she fell off a
boat. This personality difficulty interfered with

her life now more than the fear of the water.
However, I didn't know how to handle all this
information properly. I began praying for guid¬
ance. I needed to find a reliable person, or
group of people, who could handle this infor¬
mation in a professional way.

The answer came one evening when I was
camping on the beach at Assateague Island,
Maryland. It was a rainy night, so I had a trans¬
lucent plastic tarp over my head and sleeping
bag. In the middle of the night I heard someone
calling my name and woke up. The voice was
very clear. "No one is there," I thought, as I
gazed at the overcast sky. Then suddenly, I real¬
ized that I was looking at the plastic tarp over
my head. With a great sweep of my arm, I
pushed it off and fell back in utter awe at the
outstretched stars twinkling above me. I heard
celestial music singing across the heavens from
star to star. I took that experience as an answer
to my prayers. Shortly after, I found the Phoeni¬
cia Pathwork Center, where I moved and got the
training I needed to interpret past life and other
super-sensory material over the next nine years
of my life.

When it was time for me to have a counsel¬
ing practice in New York City, I knew it, because
the internal pull to do so was so strong. Office
space was readily available, and I wanted a
change in my life, so I consulted my guidance
through writing. I received a clear yes, and I
went ahead. I was guided slowly to turn that
counseling practice into one of healing. It hap¬
pened "automatically," as stated before, when
people started coming to me and asking for
healing. Then I received direct verbal guidance
to stop that practice and focus on teaching and
on writing this book to reach a larger audience.
Following these changes is not so easy. Each
new change challenges me. It seems that each
time I have a "secure" life established, if is time
to change—and therefore to grow. What is next,
I really do not know, but I do know that I will be
guided each step of the way.

There is within every human personality a
child. Everyone can remember how it was to be
a child, to feel the inner freedom of a child and
to experience life in a simple way. This inner

16 Hands of Light

child is very wise. It feels connected to all life. It
knows love without question. This inner child
gets covered as we become adults and try to live
by our rational minds only. This limits us. It is
this inner child that must be uncovered to begin
to follow guidance. You must return to the lov¬
ing, trusting wisdom of your inner child to de¬
velop the ability to receive and follow guidance.
We all long for freedom—it is through the child
that it will be gained. After allowing this inner
child of yours more freedom, you can then be¬
gin a dialogue between the adult and the child
parts of your personality. The dialogue will inte¬
grate the free and loving part of your personality
with the sophisticated adult.

Scattered throughout this book you will hear
the child and the healer/counselor/physicist
speaking. It will help loosen your fixed reality
and broaden your experience. This dialogue is a
doorway into wonder. Find it in yourself and
nurture it.

We are all guided by spiritual teachers who
speak to us in our dreams, through our intui¬
tion, and eventually, if we listen, they speak to
us directly, perhaps through writing at first,
then through sound, voice or concepts. These
teachers are full of love and respect for us. At
some point along the way, you, too, may be able
to see them or directly communicate with them
as I do. This will change your life, for you will
find that you are fully and completely loved, as
you are right now in this moment. You are de¬
serving and worthy of this love. You deserve

health, happiness and fulfillment in your life.
You can create it. You can learn, step by step, the
process to change your life and make it full.
There are many paths to this fullness. Ask for
guidance as to where you need to go, or which
path you need to follow now, and you will be
guided. Whether you have a life-threatening ill¬
ness, a marital difficulty, a problem of the will,
depression—or whether you are struggling with
difficult situations in your chosen area of work—
you can start changing now, right in this mo¬
ment. You can realign yourself with your
deepest longing and the greatest good you have
to offer yourself and others. Simply ask for
help. Your requests will be answered.

Chapter 3 Review

1. What kind of technical training does a healer
need? And why?

2. What is the simplest form of guidance in
your life?

Food For Thought

3. What are some of the more profound experi¬
ences of guidance in your life, and what ef¬
fect did they have on your life?

4. How well are you able to follow your guid¬
ance?

5. Do you consciously listen for or ask for guid¬
ance for yourself? How often?

PART II

THE HUMAN AURA

"Miracles do not happen in contradiction to nature,
but only in contradiction to that which is known
to us in nature."

St. Augustine

Introduction

THE PERSONAL EXPERIENCE

As we allow ourselves to develop new sensitivi¬
ties, we begin to see the whole world quite dif¬
ferently. We begin to pay more attention to
aspects of experience that might have seemed
peripheral before. We find ourselves using new
language to communicate our new experiences.
Terms like "bad vibes" or "the energy there was
great" are becoming household phrases. We
start noticing and giving more credence to expe¬
riences like meeting someone and instantly lik¬
ing or disliking him without knowing anything
about him. We like his "vibes " We can tell when
someone is staring at us, and we look up to see
who it is. We may have a feeling that something
is going to happen, and then it does. We begin
to listen to our intuition. We "know" things, but
we don't always know how we know. We sense
that a friend is feeling a certain way, or needs
something, and when we reach out to fulfill that
need, we find we are right. Sometimes during
an argument with someone we may feel as if
something is being pulled out of our solar
plexus, or we may feel "stabbed." We may feel
as if we have been punched in the stomach. Or
it may feel like someone is pouring thick, gooey
molasses on us. On the other hand, we some¬
times feel surrounded by love, caressed by it,
bathed in a sea of sweetness, blessings and
light. All these experiences have a reality in the
energy fields. Our old world of solid concrete
objects is surrounded by and permeated with a
fluid world of radiating energy, constantly mov¬
ing, constantly changing like the sea.

In my observations throughout the years, I
have seen the counterparts of these experiences
as forms within the human aura, which consists
of the observable and measurable components
of the energy field that surrounds and interpen¬
etrates the body. When someone has been
"shafted" by a lover, the shaft is literally visible
to the clairvoyant. When you feel as if some¬
thing is being pulled out of your solar plexus, it
usually is. It can be seen by the clairvoyant. I
can see it. So can you, eventually, if you follow
your intuition and develop your senses.

It helps in the development of this Higher
Sense Perception to consider what modern sci¬
entists have already learned about the world of
dynamic energy fields. It helps us remove the
blocks from our brains that keep us from seeing
that we, too, are subject to all the universal
laws. Modem science tells us that the human
organism is not just a physical structure made of
molecules, but that, like everything else, we are
also composed of energy fields. We are moving
out of the world of static solid form into a world
of dynamic energy fields. We, too, ebb and flow
like the sea. We, too, are constantly changing.
How do we, as human beings, deal with such
information? We adapt to it. If such reality ex¬
ists, we want to experience it. And scientists are
learning to measure these subtle changes. They
are developing instruments to detect these en¬
ergy fields related to our bodies and to measure
their frequencies. They measure electrical cur¬
rents from the heart with the electrocardiogram

20 Hands of Light

(ECG). They measure electrical currents from
the brain with the electroencephalogram (EEG).
The lie detector measures the electropotential of
the skin. They can now even measure electro¬
magnetic fields around the body with a sensitive
device called the SQUID (the superconducting
quantum interference device). This device does
not even touch the body when measuring the
magnetic fields around it. Dr. Samuel William¬
son of New York University states that the
SQUID offers more information about the state
of brain functioning than a normal EEG.

As medicine relies more and more upon
these sophisticated instruments that measure
impulses from the body health and disease;
even life itself, are slowly being redefined in
terms of energy impulses and patterns. As early
as 1939, Drs. H. Burr and F. Northrop at Yale
University found that by measuring the energy
field of a plant seed (which they termed the L,
or Life-field), they could tell how healthy the
plant grown from that seed would be. They
found that by measuring the field of a frog's
eggs, they could discern the future location of
the frog's nervous system. Another such mea¬
surement pinpointed the time of ovulation in
women, suggesting a new birth control method.

In 1959, Dr. Leonard Ravitz at William and
Mary University showed that the Human En¬
ergy Field fluctuates with a person's mental and
psychological stability. He suggested that there
is a field associated with the thought processes.
He suggested that variation of this thought field
caused psychosomatic symptoms.

In 1979, another scientist. Dr. Robert Becker
of Upstate Medical School, Syracuse, New York,
mapped a complex electrical field on the body
which is shaped like the body and the central
nervous system. He named this field the Direct
Current Control System and found that it
changes shape and strength with physiological
and psychological changes. He also found parti¬

cles moving through this field that are the size
of electrons.

Dr. Victor Inyushin at Kazakh University in
Russia has done extensive research with the Hu¬
man Energy Field since the 1950s. Using the
results of these experiments, he suggests the ex¬
istence of a "bioplasmic" energy field composed
of ions, free protons and free electrons. Since
this is a state distinct from the four known states
of matter—solids, liquids, gases and plasma—
Inyushin suggests that the bioplasmic energy
field is a fifth state of matter. His observations
showed the bioplasmic particles are constantly
renewed by chemical processes in the cells and
are in constant motion. There appears to be a
balance of positive and negative particles within
the bioplasma that is relatively stable. If there is
a severe shift in this balance, the health of the
organism is affected. In spite of the normal sta¬
bility of the bioplasma, Inyushin has found that
a significant amount of this energy is radiated
into space. Clouds of bioplasmic particles,
which have broken away from the organism, can
be measured moving through the air.

Thus, we have been plunged into a world of
life energy fields, thought fields and bioplasmic
forms moving about and streaming off the body.
We have become vibrating, radiating bioplasma
itself! But if we look into the literature, this is
not new. People have known about the phenom¬
enon since the dawning of time. It is just that in
our time the phenomenon is being rediscovered.
It was either unknown or rejected by the west¬
ern general public for a time, during which sci¬
entists concentrated on our knowledge of the
physical world. As this knowledge has devel¬
oped, and Newtonian physics given way to rela¬
tivity, electromagnetic and particle theories, we
are more and more able to see the connections
between scientific objective descriptions of our
world and the world of subjective human expe¬
rience.

Chapter 4

PARALLELS BETWEEN HOW WE SEE
OURSELVES AND REALITY
AND WESTERN SCIENTIFIC VIEWS

More than we want to admit, we are products of
our western scientific heritage. How we learned
to think and many of our self-definitions are
based on the same scientific models used by
physicists to describe the physical universe. This
section gives a short history that shows the
changes in how scientists describe the physical
world, and how those descriptions correspond
to the changes in our self-definitions.

It is important to remember that the way the
western scientific method works is to find agree¬
ment between both mathematical and experi¬
mental proof. If the agreement is not found,
then the physicist will look for another theory
until there exists both mathematical and experi¬
mental proof for the explanation of a set of phe¬
nomena. This is what makes the western
scientific method so powerful a tool for practical
use and leads to great inventions like the use of
electricity and the utilization of subatomic phe¬
nomena in medicine like x-rays, CAT scanners,
and lasers.

As our knowledge progresses, there is al¬
ways the discovery of new phenomena. Many
times, these new phenomena cannot be de¬
scribed by the theories held when they are ex¬
plained. New, broader theories, usually based
on all the knowledge that has gone before, are
postulated; new experiments are designed and
performed until agreement between experimen¬

tation and the new mathematical proof is found.
The new theories are accepted as physical laws.
The process of finding new ways to describe
new phenomena is always one that broadens
our views, challenging our current limited
thinking about the nature of physical reality. We
then incorporate the new ideas into our daily
lives and begin seeing ourselves differently.

This whole section shows that the scientific
view of reality supports the idea that we are
composed of energy fields and, in fact, goes far
beyond that into realms that we are just begin¬
ning to experience, that is, a holographic view of
the universe. In this universe, all things are in¬
terconnected, corresponding to a holistic experi¬
ence of reality. But first let us review some of our
history.

Newtonian Physics

Until recently, when the eastern religions began
to have a greater impact upon our culture, much
of our self-definition (largely unconscious) was
based on the physics of a few hundred years
ago. What I am referring to here is our insis¬
tence on seeing ourselves as solid objects. This
definition of the universe, as made up of solid
objects, was held largely by Isaac Newton and
his colleagues in the late 17th and early 18th

22 Hands of Light

centuries. Newtonian physics was extended in
the 19th century to describe a universe com¬
posed of fundamental building blocks called at¬
oms. These Newtonian atoms were thought of
as composed of solid objects—a nucleus of pro¬
tons and neutrons, with electrons revolving
around the nucleus much like the earth travel¬
ing around the sun.

Newtonian mechanics successfully de¬
scribed the motions of the planets, mechanical
machines, and fluids in continuous motion. The
enormous success of the mechanistic model
made physicists of the early 19th century believe
that the universe was indeed a huge mechanical
system running according to the Newtonian
laws of motion. These laws were seen as the ba¬
sic laws of nature, and Newtonian mechanics
was considered to be the ultimate theory of nat¬
ural phenomena. These laws held firm the ideas
of absolute time and space and of physical phe¬
nomena as strictly causal in nature. Everything
could be described objectively. All physical reac¬
tions were seen to have a physical cause, like
balls colliding on a pool table. Energy-matter in¬
teractions, such as a radio playing music in re¬
sponse to invisible radiowaves, were not yet
known. Nor did it occur to anyone that the ex¬
perimenter himself affects the experimental
results not only in psychological experiments
but also in physical ones as well, as physicists
have now proven.

This view was very comforting and still is to
those of us who prefer to see the world as solid
and largely unchanging, with very clear, definite
sets of rules that govern its functioning. Much of
our daily lives still run on Newtonian mechan¬
ics. Except for the electrical systems, our homes
are largely Newtonian. We experience our
bodies in a mechanical way. We define most of
our experience in terms of absolute, three di¬
mensional space and linear time. We all have
clocks. We need them to continue our lives as
we have structured them—mostly linearly.

As we rush about our daily lives, in an effort
to be "on time," it is easy to see ourselves as
mechanical and to lose sight of the deeper hu¬
man experience within. Ask anyone what the
universe is made of, and he or she will most
likely describe the Newtonian model of the atom

(electrons spinning around a nucleus of protons
and neutrons). However, if taken to its literal ex¬
tension, this theory puts us in the rather discon¬
certing position of thinking of ourselves as being
composed of itsy-bitsy Ping Pong balls whirling
around each other.

Field Theory

In the early 19th century, new physical phenom¬
ena were discovered that could not be described
by Newtonian physics. The discovery and inves¬
tigation of electromagnetic phenomena led to
the concept of a field. A field was defined as a
condition in space which has the potential of
producing a force. The old Newtonian mechan¬
ics interpreted the interaction between posi¬
tively and negatively charged particles like
protons and electrons simply by saying that the
two particles attract each other like two masses.
However, Michael Faraday and James Clerk
Maxwell found it more appropriate to use a field
concept and say that each charge creates a "dis¬
turbance" or a "condition" in the space around
it, so that the other charge, when it is present,
feels a force. Thus, the concept of a universe
filled with fields that create forces that interact
with each other was born. Finally, there was a
scientific framework with which we could begin
to explain our ability to affect each other at a
distance through means other than speech and
sight. We all have had the experience of picking
up the phone and knowing who it is before any
words are spoken. Mothers often know when
their children are in trouble, no matter where
they are. This can be explained in terms of field
theory.

In the last 15 to 20 years (100 years behind
the physicists), most of us have just been begin¬
ning to use such concepts in describing our per¬
sonal interactions. We are just beginning to
admit that we ourselves are composed of fields.
We sense another presence in the room without
seeing or hearing them (field interaction); we
speak of good or bad vibes, of sending energy to
others or of reading each other's thoughts. We
immediately know whether or not we like some¬
one, whether we will get along with him or

Parallels Between Haw We See Ourselves and Reality and Western Scientific Views 23

clash. This "knowing" can be explained by the
harmony or disharmony in our field interac¬
tions.

Relativity

In 1905, Albert Einstein published his Special
Theory of Relativity and shattered all the princi¬
pal concepts of the Newtonian world view. Ac¬
cording to relativity theory, space is not
three-dimensional, and time is not a separate
entity. Both are intimately connected and form a
four-dimensional continuum, "space-time."
Thus, we can never talk about space without
time, and vice versa. Furthermore, there is no
universal flow of time; i.e. time is not linear, nor
is it absolute. Time is relative. That is, two ob¬
servers will order events differently in time if
they move with different velocities relative to the
observed events. Therefore, all measurements
involving space and time lose their absolute sig¬
nificance. Both time and space become merely
elements to describe phenomena.

According to Einstein's theory of relativity,
in certain conditions two observers can even see
two events in reverse time; i.e., for observer 1,
event A will occur before event B, while for ob¬
server 2, event B will occur before event A.

Time and space are so basic to our descrip¬
tions of natural phenomena and ourselves that
their modification entails a modification of the
whole framework that we use to describe nature
and ourselves. We have not yet integrated this
part of Einstein's relativity into our personal
lives. For example, when we get a psychic flash
of a friend in trouble, say about to fall down the
stairs, we check the time and call the person as
soon as we can to see if she is all right. We also
want to know if such a thing happened in order
to validate our insight. We call, and she has had
no such experience. We conclude that it was
our imagination playing tricks on us, and we
invalidate our experience. This is Newtonian
thinking.

We must see that we are experiencing a phe¬
nomenon that cannot be explained by Newto¬
nian mechanics, but we are using Newtonian
mechanics to validate our super-sensory experi¬

ence. In other words, what we saw was a real
experience. Since time is not linear, it may have
already occurred. It may occur at the time we
see it, and it may occur in the future. It may
even be a probable occurrence that never mani¬
fests itself. Just because it didn't happen at the
time we tried to correlate it, by no means proves
that our insight about the possibility was wrong.
If, however, within our insight about our friend,
we also saw a calendar and a clock with Newto¬
nian time on it, our insight would be such as to
include that information about the space-time
continuum of the event. It would be easier to
validate in Newtonian physical reality.

It is time to stop invalidating experience that
lies outside our Newtonian way of thinking and
broaden our framework of reality. We all have
had experiences of time speeding up or of losing
track of time. If we become proficient in observ¬
ing our moods, we can see that our personal
time varies with the mood we are in and with
the experiences we are having. For example, we
see that time is relative when we experience a
very long, frightening period just before our car
crashes or barely misses another, oncoming car.
This time, measured by the clock, is a few sec¬
onds; however, to us, time appears to have
slowed down. Experienced time is not measur¬
able by a clock because a clock is a Newtonian
device designed to measure the linear time de¬
fined by Newtonian mechanics.

Our experience exists outside the Newtonian
system. Many times, we have experienced meet¬
ing someone after several years separation; it is
as if we had just seen them yesterday. In regres-
sional therapy, many people have experienced
childhood events as if they were occurring in the
present. We also find our memory has ordered
events in a different sequence from someone
else who has also experienced those events. (Try
comparing childhood memories with your sib¬
lings.)

The Native American culture, which didn't
have clocks to create linear time, divided time
into two aspects: the now and all other time.
The Australian aborigines also have two kinds of
time: the passing time and the Great Time.
What occurs in the Great Time has sequence,
but it cannot be dated.

24 Hands of Light

Lawrence Le Shan, from his experience test¬
ing clairvoyants, has defined two times: the
regular linear time and Clairvoyant Time.
Clairvoyant Time is the quality of time experi¬
enced by clairvoyants when they are using their
gifts. It is similar to the Great Time. What occurs
has sequence but can only be seen from the
point of view of being or experiencing that se¬
quential flow. As soon as the clairvoyant actively
tries to interfere with the sequence of events she
is witnessing, she is immediately thrown back
into linear time and will no longer be witnessing
events outside the normal here-and-now frame¬
work. She must then refocus her attention to
Clairvoyant Time. The rules that govern such
movement from one time frame to another are
not well understood. Most clairvoyants will be
led to "read" a particular time frame of a per¬
son's life or past life according to the needs of
the person. Some clairvoyants can simply focus
on whatever time frame is requested.

Einstein's space-time continuum states that
the apparent linearity of events depends on the
observer. We are all too ready to accept past lives as
literal physical lives that have happened in the past
in a physical setting like this one. Our past lives
may be happening right now in a different
space-time continuum. Many of us have experi¬
enced "past lives" and feel their effects as if they
were a short time ago. But we rarely speak of
how our future lives are affecting the one we are
experiencing right here and now. As we live our
life NOW, it becomes more likely that we are rewrit¬
ing our personal history, both past and future.

Another important consequence of Ein¬
stein's relativity is the realization that matter
and energy are interchangeable. Mass is nothing
but a form of energy. Matter is simply slowed
down or crystallized energy. Our bodies are en¬
ergy. That is what this whole book is about! I
have introduced the concept of energy bodies in
this book but have not stressed that our physical
body is energy also.

Paradox

In the 1920s, physics moved into the strange
and unexpected reality of the subatomic world.

Every time physicists asked nature a question in
an experiment, nature answered with a paradox.
The more they tried to clarify the situation, the
stronger the paradoxes became. Finally, physi¬
cists realized that paradox is part of the intrinsic
nature of the subatomic world upon which all of
our physical reality exists.

For example, one can set up an experiment
that proves light is a particle. A small change in
this experiment will prove that light is a wave.
Therefore, to describe the phenomenon of light,
both the concept of a wave and a particle must
be used. Thus, we now move into a universe
based on the concept both/and. Physicists call
this complementarity. That is, to describe a phe¬
nomenon (if we continue to think in such terms
as particles and waves), one must use both
types of descriptions. These types are comple¬
ments of each other rather than opposites, ac¬
cording to the old concept of either/or.

For example. Max Planck discovered that the
energy of heat radiation (like the radiator in
your house) is not emitted continuously, but ap¬
pears in the form of discrete "energy packets,"
called quanta. Einstein postulated that all forms
of electromagnetic radiation can appear not only
as waves, but also in the form of these quanta.
These light quanta, or energy packets, have
been accepted as bona fide particles. At this
stage of the game, a particle, which is the closest
definition of a "thing," is an energy packet!

As we penetrate deeper into matter, nature
does not show us any isolated "basic building
blocks" as Newtonian physics suggested. The
search for the basic building blocks of matter
had to be abandoned when physicists found so
many elementary particles that they could
hardly be called elementary. Through experi¬
ments in the past few decades, physicists found
matter to be completely mutable, and on the
subatomic level, matter does not exist with cer¬
tainty in definite places, but rather shows "ten¬
dencies" to exist. All particles can be transmuted
into other particles. They can be created from
energy and can be transmuted into other parti¬
cles. They can be created from energy and can
vanish into energy. Where and when this hap¬
pens we cannot determine exactly, but we do
know it is continuously occurring.

Parallels Between How We See Ourselves and Reality and Western Scientific Views 25

On the personal level, as we move more into
the world of modern psychology and spiritual
development, we find the old forms of either/or
also dissolving into the form of both/and. We
are no longer bad or good; we no longer only
hate or love someone. Within us, we find much
broader abilities. We can feel both love and hate,
and all the emotions in between, for the same
person. We act responsibly. V\fe find the old du¬
alism of God/Devil dissolving into a whole in
which we find the Goddess/God within merg¬
ing with the God/Goddess without. Anything
evil is not the opposite of Goddess/God, but re¬
sistance to the God/Goddess force. All is com¬
posed of the same energy. The Goddess/God
force is both black and white, both masculine
and feminine. It contains both, the white light
and the velvet black void.

As the reader can see, we are still using con¬
cepts steeped in dualism, but it is a world of
"apparent" opposites that complement each
other, not "real" opposites. In this system, the
dualism is being used to propel us forward into
unity.

Beyond Dualism—The Hologram

Physicists have found that particles can be
waves at the same time because they are not real
physical waves like sound or water waves, but
rather they are probability waves. Probability
waves do not represent probabilities of things,
but rather probabilities of interconnections. This
is a tough concept to understand, but essentially
the physicists are saying there is no such thing
as a "thing." What we used to call "things" are
really "events" or paths that might become
events.

Our old world of solid objects and the deter¬
ministic laws of nature is now dissolved into a
world of wave-like patterns of interconnections.
Concepts like "elementary particle," "material
substance" or "isolated object" have lost their
meaning. The whole universe appears as a dy¬
namic web of inseparable energy patterns. The
universe is thus defined as a dynamic insepara¬
ble whole which always includes the observer in
an essential way.

If the universe is indeed composed of such a
web, there is (logically) no such thing as a part.
Thus we are not separated parts of a whole. We
are a Whole.

Recently, physicist Dr. David Bohm said in
his book The Implicate Order that primary physi¬
cal laws cannot be discovered by a science that
attempts to break the world into its parts. He
has written of an "implicate enfolded order"
which exists in an unmanifested state and is the
foundation upon which all manifest reality
rests. He calls this manifest reality "the explicate
unfolded order" "Parts are seen to be in imme¬
diate connection, in which their dynamical rela¬
tionships depend in an irreducible way on the
state of the whole system. . . . Thus, one is led
to a new notion of unbroken wholeness which
denies the classical idea of analyzability of the
world into separately and independently exist¬
ent parts."

Dr. Bohm states that the holographic view of
the universe is a jumping-off place to begin to
understand the implicate enfolded and explicate
unfolded orders. The hologram concept states
that every piece is an exact representation of the
whole and can be used to reconstruct the entire
hologram.

In 1971, Dennis Gabor received a Nobel
Prize for constructing the first hologram. It was
a lensless photograph in which a wave field of
light scattered by an object was recorded as an
interference pattern on a plate. When the holo¬
gram or photograph recording is placed in a la¬
ser or coherent light beam, the original wave
pattern is regenerated in a three-dimensional
image. Every piece of the hologram is an exact
representation of the whole and will reconstruct
the entire image.

Dr. Karl Pribram, a renowned brain re¬
searcher, has accumulated evidence over a dec¬
ade that the brain's deep structure is essentially
holographic. He states that research from many
laboratories by sophisticated analysis of tempo¬
ral and/or spatial frequencies demonstrates that
the brain structures sight, hearing, taste, smell
and touch holographically. The information is
distributed throughout the system, so that each
fragment can produce the information of the
whole. Dr. Pribram uses the hologram model to

26 Hands of Light

describe not only the brain, but the universe as
well. He states that the brain employs a holo¬
graphic process to abstract from a holographic
domain that transcends time and space. Para¬
psychologists have searched for the energy that
might transmit telepathy, psychokinesis and
healing. From the point of view of the holo¬
graphic universe, these events emerge from fre¬
quencies that transcend time and space; they
don't have to be transmitted. They are poten¬
tially simultaneous and everywhere.

When we will speak of energy fields of the
aura in this book, we will be using very archaic
terms from the point of view of these physicists.
The phenomenon of the aura is clearly both in¬
side and outside linear time and three-
dimensional space. As in the case studies I have
already presented, I "saw" the events of Ed's
puberty when he broke his coccyx because he
carried that experience with him in his energy
field. The "shaft" of the lover can be perceived
in the present energy field, and the clairvoyant
can apparently go back in time and witness the
event as it happened. A great many of the expe¬
riences related in this book require more than
three dimensions for explanation; many of them
appear to be instantaneous. The ability to see
inside the body at any level with a varying reso¬
lution could imply the use of additional dimen¬
sions. The ability to perceive events from the
past by simply asking for that information, or to
see a probable event and then to change that
event by intervening through the healing proc¬
ess, could imply nonlinear time. The ability to
see an event that will take place in the future
goes beyond linear time.

In using the concept of the fields to describe
the aura, we will be steeped in dualism; that is,
we will separate the field from us and observe
"it" as a phenomenon that exists as a "part" of
us. We will use terms like "my field" and "her
aura," etc. This is dualistic. I must apologize for
this and say that frankly, at this point, I am quite
unable to convey these experiences without us¬
ing the old frameworks.

From the holographic framework of reality
each piece of the aura not only represents, but
also contains, the whole. Thus, we can only de¬
scribe our experience with a phenomenon that

we both at the same time observe and create.
Every observation creates an effect on the ob¬
served pattern. We are not just part of the pat¬
tern; we are the pattern. It is us and we are it,
only the term "it" now needs to be abandoned
and replaced with some other, more appropriate
term to release the blocks we experience in our
brains when we try to communicate.

Physicists have used the terms "probabilities
of interconnections" or "dynamic web of insepa¬
rable energy patterns." When we begin to think
in terms of a dynamic web of inseparable energy
patterns, all the auric phenomena described in
this book do not appear particularly unusual or
strange.

All experience is interconnected. Therefore,
if we become aware of this and allow that inter¬
connectedness into our cognitive processes, we
can be aware of all events independent of all
time. But as soon as we say "we," we have fallen
back into dualism. It is hard to experience this
connectedness when our major experience of
life is dualistic. Holistic awareness will be outside
linear time and three-dimensional space and therefore
will not be easily recognized. We must practice ho¬
listic experience to be able to recognize it.

Meditation is one way of transcending the
limits of the linear mind and allows the connect¬
edness of all things to become an experiential
reality. This reality is very hard to communicate
in words, because we use words in a linear fash¬
ion. We need to develop vocabulary by which
we can lead each other into these experiences.
In Japanese Zen meditation, the masters give
students a short phrase to concentrate on. The
phrase, called a koan, is designed to help stu¬
dents transcend linear thought. Here is one of
my favorites:

What is the sound of one hand clapping?

My reaction to this well-known koan is to
find myself stretching out into the universe on a
pattern of unheard sound that seems to flow on
forever.

Superluminal Connectedness

Scientists are now finding evidence for a univer¬
sal, immediate connectedness within the frame-

Parallels Between How We See Ourselves and Reality and Western Scientific Views 27

work of science, both mathematically and
experimentally.

In 1964, physicist J. S. Bell published a
mathematical proof called Bell's theorem. Bell's
theorem mathematically supports the concept
that subatomic "particles" are connected in
some way that transcends space and time, so
that anything that happens to one particle af¬
fects other particles. This effect is immediate
and does not need "time" to be transmitted.
Einstein's relativity theory stated that it is im¬
possible for a particle to travel faster than the
speed of light. In Bell's theorem, effects can be
"superluminal," or faster than the speed of
light. Bell's theorem has now been supported by
experimentation. We are now talking about a
phenomenon that stands outside Einstein's the¬
ory of relativity. We are trying to go beyond the
wave/particle duality.

So once again, as the state of the art of scien¬
tific equipment advances, allowing us to probe
deeper into matter with more sensitivity, we
find phenomena that cannot be explained by the
current theory. When this kind of probing hap¬
pened in the late 1800s, the discovery of electric¬
ity revolutionized the world and made us think
even more deeply about who we are. When it
happened again in the 1940s, atomic power rev¬
olutionized the worlds It appears that we are
now headed into another period of tremendous
change. If physicists learn how this instantane¬
ous connectedness works, we could conceivably
learn to be consciously aware of our instantane¬
ous connections with the world and each other.
This would obviously revolutionize communica¬
tion. It would also drastically change how we
interact with each other. This instantaneous con¬
nection may provide us with the ability to read
each others' minds whenever we want to. We
could know what is going on in each other and
truly understand each other deeply. We may
also see more clearly how our thoughts, feelings
(energy fields) and actions affect the world
much more than we previously thought.

Morphogenetic Fields

Rupert Sheldrake in his book, A New Science of

Life, proposes that all systems are regulated not
only by known energy and material factors but
also by invisible organizing fields. These fields
are causative because they serve as blueprints
for form and behavior. These fields have no en¬
ergy in the normal sense of the word because
their effect reaches across the time and space
barriers normally applied to energy. That is,
their effect is just as strong at a distance as it is
at close range.

According to this hypothesis, whenever one
member of a species learns a new behavior, the
causative field for the species is changed, how¬
ever slightly. If the behavior is repeated for long
enough, its "morphic resonance" affects the en¬
tire species. Sheldrake called this invisible ma¬
trix a "morphogenetic field," from morph,
"form," and genesis, "coming into being." The
action of this field involves "action at a dis¬
tance" in both space and time. Rather than form
being determined by physical laws outside of
time, it depends on morphic resonance across
time. This means that morphic fields can propa¬
gate across space and time and that past events
could influence other events everywhere else.
An example of this is shown by Lyall Watson in
his book, Lifetide: The Biology of Consciousness, in
which he describes what is now popularly called
the Hundredth Monkey Principle. Watson
found that after a group of monkeys learned a
new behavior, suddenly other monkeys on other
islands with no possible "normal" means of
communication learned that behavior, too.

Dr. David Bohm in the journal Revisions
states that the same thing is true for quantum
physics. He says the Einstein-Podolsky-Rosen
experiment showed that there would be nonlo¬
cal connections, or subtle connections of distant
particles. So there would be a wholeness about
the system such that the formative field could
not be attributed to that particle alone. It could
only be attributed to the whole. Thus something
happening to distant particles can affect the for¬
mative field of other particles. Bohm goes on to
state that "the notion of timeless laws that gov¬
ern the universe doesn't seem to hold up, be¬
cause time itself is part of the necessity that
developed."

In the same article, Rupert Sheldrake con-

28 Hands of Light

dudes: "So the creative process, which gives
rise to new thought, through which new wholes
are realized, is similar in that sense to the crea¬
tive reality which gives rise to new wholes in the
evolutionary process. The creative process could
be seen as a successive development of more
complex and higher-level wholes, through pre¬
viously separate things being connected to¬
gether."

Multi-Dimensional Reality

Jack Sarfatti, another physidst, suggests in Psy-
choenergetic Systems that the way superluminal
connectedness can exist is through a higher
plane of reality. He suggests that "things" are
more connected or events more "correlated" on
a plane of reality "above" ours, and that
"things" in that plane are connected through an
even higher plane. Thus by reaching to a higher
plane we may be able to understand how instan¬
taneous connectedness works.

Conclusion

Physicists state that there are no basic building
blocks of matter, rather that the universe is an
inseparable whole; a vast web of interacting in¬
terweaving probabilities. Bohms work shows
that the manifest universe arises out of this
whole. I suggest that since we are inseparable
parts of that whole, we can enter into a holistic
state of being, become the whole, and tap into
the creative powers of the universe to instanta¬
neously heal anyone anywhere. Some healers
can do this to a certain extent by merging and
becoming one with God and the patient.

Becoming a healer means to move toward
this universal creative power which we experi¬
ence as love by reidentifying self with and be¬
coming universal; becoming one with God. One
stepping stone to this wholeness is to let go of
our limited self definitions based on our Newto¬
nian past of separated parts and to identify our¬
selves with being energy fields. If we can
integrate that reality into our lives in a practical

and verifiable way, we can separate fantasy from
a possible broader reality. Once we associate
ourselves with energy fields, higher conscious¬
ness becomes associated with higher frequency
and greater coherency.

Using Sarfatti's model, we begin to see a
world very much like that described later in this
book: the world of the aura and the universal
energy field. There we exist in more than one
world. Our higher bodies (higher auric frequen¬
cies) are of a higher order and are more con¬
nected to others' higher bodies than are our
physical bodies. As our awareness progresses
into higher frequencies and higher bodies, we
become more and more connected until we are
eventually one with the universe. Using his con¬
cept, the meditative experience, then, can be
defined as an experience of raising our con¬
sciousness to a higher frequency so that it can
then experience the reality of our higher bodies,
our higher consciousness and the higher worlds
we exist in.

So let us look more now at the energy field
phenomena to see what experimental science
can tell us.

Chapter 4 Review

1. How have scientific views influenced our
self-concepts?

2. Why is the view of a fixed physical world im¬
practical to us now?

3. What was so important about Faraday's and
Maxwell's contributions to the ideas about
how the world works?

4. What is superluminal connectedness and
what is its significance in our daily lives?

5. How can the idea of multidimensional reality
help describe the HEF?

Food For Thought

6. Imagine yourself as a hologram. How does
that unlimit you?

Chapter 5

HISTORY OF THE SCIENTIFIC
INVESTIGATION INTO
THE HUMAN ENERGY FIELD

Although mystics have not spoken of energy
fields or bioplasmic forms, their traditions over
5,000 years in all the parts of the globe are con¬
sistent with the observations scientists have re¬
cently begun to make.

Spiritual Tradition

Adepts of all religions speak of experiencing or
seeing light around people's heads. Through
such religious practices as meditation and
prayer, they reach states of expanded conscious¬
ness which open their latent High Sense Percep¬
tion abilities.

Ancient Indian spiritual tradition, over 5,000
years old, speaks of a universal energy called
Prana. This universal energy is seen as the basic
constituent and source of all life. Prana, the
breath of life, moves through all forms and gave
them life. Yogis practice manipulating this en¬
ergy through breathing techniques, meditation
and physical exercise to maintain altered states
of consciousness and youth far beyond their
normal span.

The Chinese, in the 3rd millennium b.c.,
posited the existence of a vital energy which
they called Ch'i. All matter, animate and inani¬
mate, is composed of and pervaded with this
universal energy. This Ch'i contains two polar

forces, the yin and the yang. When the yin and
yang are balanced, the living system exhibits
physical health; when they are imbalanced, a
diseased state results. Overly powerful yang
results in excessive organic activity. Predomi¬
nant yin makes for insufficient functioning. Ei¬
ther imbalance results in physical illness. The
ancient art of acupuncture focuses on balancing
the yin and the yang.

Kabbalah, the Jewish mystical theosophy
which began around 538 b.c., refers to these
same energies as the astral light. Christian reli¬
gious paintings portray Jesus and other spiritual
figures surrounded by fields of light. In the Old
Testament, there are numerous references to
light around people and lights appearing, but
over the centuries these phenomena lost their
original meaning. For example, Michelangelo's
statue of Moses shows kamaeem as two horns on
his head rather than the two beams of light the
word originally referred to. In Hebrew, this
word can mean either horn or light.

John White in his book Future Science lists 97
different cultures that refer to the auric phenom¬
ena with 97 different names.

Many esoteric teachings—the ancient Hindu
Vedic texts, the Theosophists, the Rosicrucians,
the Native American Medicine People, the Ti¬
betan and Indian Buddhists, the Japanese Zen
Buddhists, Madame Blavatsky, and Rudolph

30 Hands of Light

Steiner, to mention a few—describe the Human
Energy Field in detail. Recently many with mod¬
em scientific training have been able to add ob¬
servations on a concrete, physical level.

Scientific Tradition: 500 B.C.

Through 19th Century

Throughout history, the idea of a universal en¬
ergy pervading all nature has been held by
many western scientific minds. This vital en-
ergy, perceived as a luminous body, was first re¬
corded in the western literature by the
Pythagoreans around 500 b.c. They held that its
light could produce a variety of effects in the
human organism, including the cure of illness.

The scholars Boirac and Liebeault in the
early 12th century saw that humans have an en¬
ergy that can cause an interaction between indi¬
viduals at a distance. They reported that one
person can have a healthful or unhealthful effect
on another simply by his presence. The scholar
Paracelsus in the middle ages called this energy
"Illiaster" and said that "Dliaster" is composed
of both a vital force and a vital matter. The math¬
ematician Helmont in the 1800s visualized a uni¬
versal fluid that pervades all nature and is not a
corporeal or a condensable matter, but a pure
vital spirit that penetrates all bodies. Leibnitz,
the mathematician, wrote that the essential ele¬
ments of the universe are centers of force con¬
taining their own wellspring of motion.

Other properties of the universal energy
phenomena were observed in the 1800s by Hel¬
mont and Mesmer, who originated Mesmerism,
which became hypnotism. They reported that
animate and inanimate objects could be charged
with this "fluid" and that material bodies could
exert influence on each other at a distance. This
suggested that a field, in some ways analogous
to an electromagnetic field, might exist.

Count Wilhelm Von Reichenbach spent 30
years during the mid-1800s experimenting with
the "field," which he called the "odic" force. He
found that it exhibited many properties that
were similar to the electromagnetic field that
James Clerk Maxwell had described early in the

19th century. He also found many properties
were unique to the odic force. He determined
that the poles of a magnet exhibit not only mag¬
netic polarity, but also a unique polarity associ¬
ated with this "odic field." Other objects, such
as crystals, also exhibit this unique polarity
without themselves being magnetic. Poles of the
odic force field exhibit the subjective properties
of being "hot, red and unpleasant" or "blue,
cold and pleasant" to the observations of sensi¬
tive individuals. Furthermore, he determined
that opposite poles do not attract as in electro¬
magnetism. He found that with the odic force
like poles attract—or like attracts like. This is a
very important auric phenomenon, as we will
see later.

Von Reichenbach studied the relationship
between electromagnetic emissions from the
sun and associated odic field concentrations. He
found that the greatest concentration of this en¬
ergy lay within the red and blue-violet ranges of
the solar spectrum. Von Reichenbach stated that
opposite charges produced subjective feelings of
warmth and cold in varying degrees of power
that he was able to relate to the periodic table
through a series of blind tests. All electroposi¬
tive elements gave the subjects feelings of
warmth and produced unpleasant sensations;
all electronegative elements fell on the cool,
agreeable side, with the degree of intensity of
sensation paralleling their position in the peri¬
odic table. These sensations varying from warm
to cool corresponded with the spectral colors
varying from red to indigo.

Von Reichenbach found that the odic field
could be conducted through a wire, that the ve¬
locity of conduction was very slow (approxi¬
mately 4 meters/second or 13 feet/second) and
that the velocity seemed to depend on the mass
density of the material rather than on the electri¬
cal conductivity of the material. Further, objects
could be charged with this energy in a way simi¬
lar to charging by the use of an electrical field.
Other experiments demonstrated that part of
this field could be focused like light through a
lens, while another part would flow around the
lens similar to the manner in which a candle
flame flows around objects placed in its path.
This deflected portion of the odic field would

History of Scientific Investigation into the Human Energy Field 31

also react like a candle flame when subjected to
air currents, suggesting the composition is simi¬
lar to a gaseous fluid. These experiments show
the auric field has properties that suggest it to
be both particulate in nature like fluid and also
energetic like light waves.

Von Reichenbach found that the force in the
human body produced a polarity similar to that
present in crystals along their major axes. Based
on this experimental evidence, he described the
left side of the body as a - pole and the right
side as a + pole. This is a concept similar to the
ancient Chinese yin and yang principles men¬
tioned earlier,

Observations by 20th Century
Medical Doctors

We can see from the preceding paragraphs that
studies up to the 20th century were conducted
to observe different characteristics of an energy
field surrounding humans and other objects.
Since 1900 many medical doctors have become
interested in the phenomenon as well.

In 1911, Dr. William Kilner, a medical doctor,
reported’on his studies of the Human Energy
Field as seen through colored screens and fil¬
ters. He described having seen glowing mist
around the whole body in three zones: a) a
quarter-inch dark layer closest to the skin, sur¬
rounded by b) a more vaporous layer an inch
wide streaming perpendicularly from the body,
and c) somewhat further out, a delicate exterior
luminosity with indefinite contours about 6
inches across. Kilner found that the appearance
of the "aura" (as he called it) differs considera¬
bly from subject to subject depending on age,
sex, mental ability and health. Certain diseases
showed as patches or irregularities in the aura,
which led Kilner to develop a system of diagno¬
sis on the basis of the color, texture, volume and
general appearance of the envelope. Some dis¬
eases he diagnosed in this way were liver infec¬
tion, tumors, appendicitis, epilepsy and
psychological disturbances like hysteria.

In the mid-1900s. Dr. George De La Warr
and Dr. Ruth Drown built new instruments to

detect radiations from living tissues. He devel¬
oped Radionics, a system of detection, diagnosis
and healing from a distance, utilizing the hu¬
man biological energy field. His most impres¬
sive works are photographs taken using the
patient's hair as an antenna. These photographs
showed internal formations of diseases in living
tissue, such as tumors and cysts within the liver,
tuberculosis of the lungs and malignant brain
tumors. Even a live three-month-old fetus was
photographed in utero.

Dr. Wilhelm Reich, a psychiatrist and col¬
league of Freud in the early part of the 20th cen¬
tury, became interested in a universal energy
that he named "orgone." He studied the rela¬
tionship of disturbances of the orgone flow in
the human body to physical and psychological
illness. Reich developed a psychotherapeutic
modality in which Freudian analytic techniques
for uncovering the unconscious are integrated
with physical techniques for releasing blockages
to the natural flow of orgone energy in the body.
By releasing these energy blocks, Reich could
clear negative mental and emotional states.

In the period of the 1930s through the 1950s,
Reich experimented with these energies using
the latest electronic and medical instrumen¬
tation at that time. He observed this energy
pulsating in the sky and around all organic
and inanimate objects. He observed pulsations
of orgone energy radiating from microorga¬
nisms using a specially constructed high-
powered microscope.

Reich constructed a variety of physical appa¬
ratuses for the study of the orgone field. One
was the "accumulator," which was capable of
concentrating orgone energy and which he used
to charge objects with this energy. He observed
that a vacuum discharge tube would conduct a
current of electricity at a potential considerably
lower than its normal discharge potential after
being charged for a long period of time in an
accumulator. Further, he claimed to increase the
nuclear decay rate of a radioisotope by placing it
in an orgone accumulator.

Dr. Lawrence Bendit and Phoebe Bendit
made extensive observations of the HEF in the
1930s and related these fields to health, healing
and soul development. Their work stresses the

32 Hands of Light

importance of a knowledge and understanding
of the powerful etheric formative forces which
are the foundations of health and healing in the
body.

More recently. Dr, Schafica Karagulla has
correlated visual observations made by sensi¬
tives to physical disorder. For instance, a clair¬
voyant named Dianne was able to observe the
energy patterns of ill people and to describe
very accurately what the medical problems
were—from brain disorders to obstructions in
the colon. These observations of the etheric
body reveal a vital energy body or field which
forms a matrix which interpenetrates the dense
physical body like a sparkling web of light
beams. This energetic matrix is the basic pattern
upon which the physical matter of the tissues is
shaped and anchored. The tissues exist as such
only because of this vital field behind them.

Dr. Karagulla also correlated chakra distur¬
bance with illness. For example, the sensitive
Dianne described the chakra at the throat of a
patient as being overactive, red and dull gray in
color. When Dianne looked at the thyroid itself,
it was too spongy and soft in texture. The right
side of the thyroid was not functioning as well
as the left. This patient was diagnosed through
normal medical techniques as having Graves'
disease, which causes enlarged thyroid, the
right being the larger lobe.

Dr. Dora Kunz, President of the American
Section of the Theosophical Society, has worked
for many years with the medical profession and
in healing. She has observed in The Spiritual As¬
pects of the Healing Arts that, "when the vital
field is healthy, there is within it a natural auton¬
omous rhythm," and that, "each organ in the
body has its corresponding energetic rhythm in
the etheric field. Between the spheres of the var¬
ious organs, the different rhythms interact as if
a transfer function were occurring; when the
body is whole and healthy, these rhythms trans¬
fer easily from organ to organ. However, with
pathology, the rhythms as well as the energy
levels are changed. For example, the residue of a
surgical appendectomy can be perceived in the
field. The physical tissues that are now adjacent
to each other have an altered energy transfer
function from the one that was previously mod¬

ulated by the appendix. In physics, this is called
impedance matching or mismatching. Each ad¬
jacent tissue is 'impedance matched/ which
means that the energy can easily flow through
all the tissue. Surgery or illness changes the im¬
pedance matching so that the energy is to some
degree dissipated rather than transferred."

Dr. John Pierrakos has developed a system
of diagnosis and treatment of psychological dis¬
orders based on visual and pendulum-derived
observations of HEF. The information from his
observations of the energy bodies is combined
with body psychotherapeutic methods devel¬
oped in Bio-Energetics and with conceptual
work developed by Eva Pierrakos. This process,
called Core Energetics, is a unified process of
inner healing which concentrates working
through the defenses of the ego and personality
to unblock energies of the body. Core Energetics
seeks to balance all the bodies (physical, etheric,
emotional, mental and spiritual) to effect a har¬
monious healing of the whole person.

I conclude from the above, and other, work
that light emissions from the human body are
closely related to health. I propose that it is very
important to find a way to quantify these light
emissions with reliable, standardized light mea¬
suring instrumentation to make this information
available to the medical profession for clinical di¬
agnosis and the energy itself useful for treat¬
ment.

My colleagues and I have conducted a num¬
ber of experiments to measure the HEF. In one.
Dr. Richard Dobrin, Dr. John Pierrakos and I
measured the light level at a wavelength of
around 350 nanometers in a darkroom before,
during and after individuals were there. Results
show a slight increase of light in the darkroom
when people are in it. In one case, the light level
actually decreased; someone who was very ex¬
hausted and full of despair was in the dark¬
room. In another experiment, done with the
United Nations Parapsychology Club, we were
able to show part of the auric field on black and
white television, with the use of a device called
a colorizer. This device enables one to amplify
greatly light intensity variations close to the
body. In another experiment, conducted at
Drexel University, with Dr. William Eidson and

History of Scientific Investigation into the Human Energy Field 33

Karen Gestla (a sensitive who worked with Dr.
Rhine at Duke University for many years), in
which we succeeded in affecting, either bending
or attenuating, a small two-milliwatt laser beam
with auric energy. All these experiments helped
support the evidence for the existence of the en¬
ergy fields but were not conclusive. Results
were shown nationally on NBC television, but
further research was not conducted because of
lack of funding.

In Japan, Hiroshi Motoyama has been able to
measure low light levels coming from people
who have practiced yoga for many years. He did
this work in a darkroom, using a low-light-level
movie camera.

Dr. Zheng Rongliang, of Lanzhou University
in the People's Republic of China, measured en¬
ergy (called "Qi" or "Ch'i") radiated from the
human body by using a biological detector made
from a leaf vein connected to a photoquantum
device (low-light measuring device). He studied
the energy-field emanations of a Qigong Master
(Qigong is an ancient Chinese form of health ex¬
ercise) and the energy field emanations of a
clairvoyant. Results of his studies show that the
detection system responds to the radiation in
the form of a pulse. The pulse emanating from
the hand of the Qigong Master is much different
than that of the clairvoyant.

At Shanghai Atomic Nuclear Institute of Ac¬
ademia Sinica it was shown that some vital-force
emanations from Qigong masters seem to have a
very low frequency sound wave that appears as
a low-frequency fluctuating carrier wave. In
some cases, Qi was also detected as a micropar¬
ticle flow. The size of these particles was about
60 microns in diameter and they had a velocity
of about 20-50 cm/second, (or 8-20 inches/
second).

Some years ago a group of Soviet scientists
from the Bioinformation Institute of A.S. Popow
announced the discovery that living organisms
emit energy, vibrations at a frequency between
300 and 2,000 nanometers. They called this en¬
ergy the biofield, or bioplasma. They found that
persons capable of successful bioenergy transfer
have a much wider and stronger biofield. These
findings have been confirmed at the Medical
Sciences Academy in Moscow, and are sup¬

ported by research in Great Britain, the Nether¬
lands, Germany and Poland.

The most exciting study I have seen on the
human aura was done by Dr. Valorie Hunt and
others at UCLA. In a study of the effects of roll¬
ing on the body and psyche ("A Study of Struc¬
tural Neuromuscular Energy Field and
Emotional Approaches"), she recorded the fre¬
quency of low millivoltage signals from the body
during a series of rolfing sessions. To make
these recordings she used elementary electrodes
made of silver/silver chloride placed on the skin.
Simultaneously, with the recording of the elec¬
tronic signals, Rev. Rosalyn Bruyere of the Heal¬
ing Light Center, Glendale, California, observed
the auras of both the rolfer and the person being
rolfed. Her comments were recorded on the
same tape recorder as the electronic data. She
gave a running report of the color, size and en¬
ergy movements of the chakras and auric clouds
involved.

The scientists then mathematically analyzed
the wave patterns recorded by a Fourier analysis
and a sonogram frequency analysis. Both re¬
vealed remarkable results. Consistent wave
forms and frequencies correlated specifically
with the colors Rev. Bruyere reported. In other
words, when Rev. Bruyere observed blue in the
aura at any specific location, the electronic mea¬
surements would always show the characteristic
blue wave form and frequency in the same lo¬
cations. Dr. Hunt repeated the same experiment
with seven other aura readers. They saw auric
colors that corrolated with the same frequency/
wave patterns. Feb. 1988 results of research in
progress show the following color/frequency cor¬
relations, (Hz = Hertz, or cycles/second):

Blue

Green

Yellow

Orange

Red

Violet

White

250-275 Hz plus 1200 Hz
250-475 Hz
500-700 Hz
950-1050 Hz
1000-1200 Hz
1000-2000, plus 300-400;
600-800 Hz
1100-2000 Hz

These frequency bands, except for the extra
bands at blue and violet, are in reverse order
of rainbow color sequence. The frequencies

34 Hands of Light

measured are a signature of the instrumentation
as well as the energy being measured.

Dr. Hunt says, "Throughout the centuries in
which sensitives have seen and described the
auric emissions, this is the first objective elec¬
tronic evidence of frequency, amplitude and
time, which validates their subjective observa¬
tion of color discharge."

The fact that the color frequencies discov¬
ered here do not duplicate those of light or pig¬
ment does not negate the finding. When we
realize that what we see as colors are frequen¬
cies picked up by the eye, differentiated and al¬
lotted a word symbol, then there is nothing to
indicate that the eye and the brain processing
centers interpret color only in high frequencies.
The ultimate criterion for the experience of color
is the visual interpretation. However, with finer
instruments, improved recording and data re¬
duction techniques, these data, now primarily
up to 1,500 Hz, may very readily contain much
higher frequencies.

Dr. Hunt also stated that "chakras frequently
carried the colors stated in the metaphysical lit¬
erature, i.e., kundalini-red, hypogastric-orange,
spleen-yellow, heart-green, throat-blue, third
eye-violet and crown-white. Activity in certain
chakras seemed to trigger increased activity in
another. The heart chakra was consistently the
most active. Subjects had many emotional expe¬
riences, images and memory recalls connected
with the different body areas rolfed. These find¬
ings give credence to the belief that memory of
experiences is stored in body tissue."

For example, when someone's legs are being
rolfed, he may very well relive early childhood
-experiences of potty training. He will not only
remember the experience, but emotionally relive
it. Many times parents try to potty train a child
before the child's body has made the brain-
muscle connections to actually control the
sphincter muscle that regulates elimination.
Since the child cannot physiologically control
the sphincter, he will compensate by squeezing
the thigh muscles. This puts a great deal of
stress and strain on the body. Many times this
strain is held habitually throughout life, or until
deep bodywork like rolfing or bioenergetics is
done. Then, when the muscle tension and

strain is released, so is the memory. Another ex¬
ample of holding memory-tension is the tight
shoulders that many of us live with. This comes
from holding fear or anxiety in the shoulders.
You might ask yourself, what is it that you are
afraid you will not be able to accomplish, or
what do you think will happen if you don't suc¬
ceed?

Conclusion

If we define the Human Energy Field as all
fields or emanations from the human body, we
can see that many well-known components of
the HEF have been measured in the laboratory.
These are the electrostatic, magnetic, electro¬
magnetic, sonic, thermal and visual components
of the HEF. All these measurements are consis¬
tent with normal physiological processes of the
body and go beyond them to provide a vehicle
for psychosomatic functioning.

Dr. Hunt's measurements show definite fre¬
quencies for definite colors of the aura. These
frequencies may have higher overtones that
were not recorded due to the limitations of the
laboratory equipment involved.

Measurements listed above also show the
HEF to be particulate in nature and to have
fluid-like motion, like air or water currents.
These particles are very tiny, even subatomic ac¬
cording to some investigators. When charged
minute particles move together in clouds they
are usually called plasmas by physicists. Plas¬
mas follow certain physical laws that lead physi¬
cists to consider diem to be a state between
energy and matter. Many of the properties of
the HEF measured in the laboratory suggest a
fifth state of matter which some scientists call
"bioplasma."

These studies show that the ordinary model
of the body consisting of systems (like the diges¬
tive system) is insufficient. An additional model
based on the concept of an organizing energy
field needs to be developed. The model of a
complicated electromagnetic field (EMF) does
not completely serve this purpose. Many of the
psychic phenomena associated with the HEF,
such as precognition or being aware of past life

History of Scientific Investigation into the Human Energy Field 35

information, cannot be explained with an EMF
model.

According to Dr. Valorie Hunt, the body can
be "viewed from a quantum concept of energy
stemming from the atomic cellular nature of the
functioning body, which cuts across all tissues
and systems." She suggests that the holographic
view of the HEF would be a good one. "The
hologram concept emerging in physics and
brain research appears to provide a truly unify¬
ing cosmic view of reality which demands rein¬
terpretation of all biological findings on another
plane."

Marilyn Ferguson declared in Brain Mind
Bulletin that "the holistic model has been de¬
scribed as the 'emerging paradigm,' an integral
theory that would catch all the wonderful wild¬

life of science and spirit. Here at last is a theory

that marries biology to physics in an open sys¬
tem."

Chapter 5 Review

1. How has the HEF been measured?

2. When did human beings first learn about the
auric phenomenon?

3. When was the aura first observed in the 19th
century and by whom?

4. How does the phenomenon of the HEF go
beyond what today's science knows?

5. From the point of view of theoretical and ex¬
perimental science today, what is a good
model to account for the HEF phenomenon?

Chapter 6

THE UNIVERSAL ENERGY FIELD

When I, as an adult, again began to see the life-
energy fields, I became skeptical and confused.
I had not yet found the literature (referred to in
the previous two chapters), nor had I received
any of the guidance referred to in Chapter 3. Of
course, as a scientist I knew about energy fields,
but they were impersonal and defined by math¬
ematical formulae. Were they, really there? Did
they have meaning? Was I fabricating my experi¬
ences? Was it wishful thinking, or was I experi¬
encing another dimension of reality that had
meaning, was orderly and was very helpful in
understanding my present life circumstances
and, in fact, life as a whole?

I'd read about the miracles of old, but they
all happened in the past to someone I didn't
know. A lot seemed hearsay and fantasy. The
physicist part of me needed observation and
control to prove these phenomena "real or un¬
real." So I began collecting data, i.e., personal
experiences, to see if they fit into some logical
form or system, as the physical world does. I
believed, with Einstein, that "God doesn't play
dice with the Universe."

I found the phenomena I observed to be
very much like the world with which I was fa¬
miliar, well ordered in form, shape and color
and also clearly based on cause-and-effect rela¬
tionships. But there was always a little more
there, always something left unknown, unex¬
plainable, a mystery. I came to realize how bor¬
ing life would be without the unknown mystery
always dancing before us as we move
through . . . what? Time and space? That is how

I used to think. Now I see that we move through
personal experiences of "reality"—thinking,
feeling, sensing, being, merging, individuating,
only to merge again in an infinite dance of trans¬
formation as the soul forms, grows and moves
toward God.

What I observed correlated with the many
esoteric books written on the subject of the aura
and energy fields. The colors correlated; the
movements, shapes and forms correlated. Most
of what I read, I usually read after making my
observations, as if that unseen hand made sure I
first experienced a phenomenon before reading
about it so that I couldn't project any mental
image I might form from my reading. I now
firmly believe in this experience of guidance,
which moves through and permeates my entire
life like a song, ever carrying me on to new ex¬
periences, new lessons, as I grow and develop
as a human being.

Exercise to “See" the
Universal Life-Energy Fields

The easiest way to begin to observe the univer¬
sal energy field is to simply relax on your back
in the grass on a nice sunny day and gaze at the
blue sky. After some time you will be able to see
the tiny globules of orgone making squiggly pat¬
terns against the blue sky. They seem to be tiny
white balls, sometimes with a black spot, that
appear for a second or two, leave a slight trail

38 Hands of Light

mark, and then disappear again. When you con¬
tinue this observation and expand your vision,
you will begin to see that the whole field pul¬
sates in a synchronized rhythm. On sunny days
these tiny balls of energy will be bright and
move fast. On cloudy days they will be more
translucent, move slowly and be fewer in num¬
ber. In a smoggy city they are fewer, dark, and
very slow moving. They are undercharged. The
most abundant and most brightly charged glob¬
ules I observed were in the Swiss Alps, where
there are many bright sunny days and the snow
covers everything in thick drifts. Apparently
sunlight charges the globules.

Now shift your gaze to the edge of treetops
against the blue sky. You may see a green haze
around the trees. Curiously, you may also notice

that there are no globules in this haze. But if
you look closer, you will see the globules at the
edge of the green haze changing their squiggly
pattern and flowing into the aura of the tree,
where they disappear. Apparently the tree's
aura is absorbing die tiny globules. The green
around the tree appears in the leafing stage,
during spring and summer. Earlier in the
spring, the aura of most trees has a pink-reddish
hue, similar to the color of the red buds of the
trees.

If you look closely at a house plant, you will
see a similar phenomenon. Put the plant under
bright lights with a dark background behind it.
You may see lines of blue-green flashing up the
plant along the leaves in the direction of growth.
They will suddenly flash; then the color slowly

Figure 6-1: The Effect of Lapis on Plant's Aura

The Universal Energy Field 39

fades, only to flash again, perhaps on the oppo¬
site side of the plant. These lines will react to
your hand, or a piece of crystal, if you bring
them near the aura of the plant. As you draw
the crystal away from the plant, you will see the
aura of the plant and the aura of the crystal
stretch to maintain contact. They pull like taffy.
(See Figure 6-1.)

I once tried to see the phantom leaf effect,
which is so widely talked about in Kirlian pho¬
tography. Through the methods of Kirlian pho¬
tography, people have been able to photograph
an image of an entire leaf after half of it was cut
away. I observed the aura of the leaf. It was a
simple aqua-blue. When I cut the leaf, the aura
of the entire leaf turned a bloody maroon. I re¬
coiled and apologized to the plant. When the
aqua-blue color reestablished itself in a minute
or two, it showed definite signs of the missing
part, but not as clearly as I have seen on the
Kirlian photographs. (See Figure 6-2.)

Inanimate objects also have an aura. Most
personal objects become imbued with the en¬
ergy of the owner and radiate this energy. Gems

and crystals show interesting auras with many
layered and complicated patterns that can be
used in healing. For example, the amethyst has
a golden aura, with golden rays streaking out
from its naturally faceted points.

Characteristics of the Universal
Energy Field

As stated in Chapter 5, the UEF has been known
and observed throughout the ages. It has been
studied as far back in history as we are able to
reach. Each culture had a different name for the
energy field phenomenon and looked at it from
its particular viewpoint. When describing what
it saw, each culture found similar basic proper¬
ties in the UEF. As time progressed and the sci¬
entific method was developed, western culture
began to investigate the UEF more rigorously.

As the state of the art of our scientific equip¬
ment becomes more sophisticated, we are able
to measure finer qualities of the UEF. From
these investigations we can surmise that the

Figure 6-2: Check of Phantom Leaf Effect

40 Hands of Light

UEF is probably composed of an energy previ¬
ously undefined by western science, or possibly
a matter of a finer substance than we generally
considered matter to be. If we define matter as
condensed energy, the UEF may exist between
the presently considered realm of matter and
that of energy. As we have seen, some scientists
refer to the phenomenon of the UEF as bio¬
plasma.

Dr. John White and Dr. Stanley Krippner list
many properties of the Universal Energy Field:
the UEF permeates all space, animate and inani¬
mate objects, and connects all objects to each
other; it flows from one object to another; and
its density varies inversely with the distance
from its source. It also follows the laws of har¬
monic inductance and sympathetic resonance—
the phenomenon that occurs when you strike a
tuning fork and one near it will begin to vibrate
at the same frequency, giving off the same
sound.

Visual observations reveal the field to be
highly organized in a series of geometric points,
isolated pulsating points of light, spirals, webs
of lines, sparks and clouds. It pulsates and can
be sensed by touch, taste, smell and with sound
and luminosity perceivable to the higher senses.

Investigators of this field state that the UEF
is basically synergistic, meaning the simultane¬
ous action of separate agencies that together
have greater total effect than the sum of their
individual effects. This field is the opposite of
entropy, a term used to describe the phenome¬
non of the slow decay that we so commonly ob¬
serve in physical reality, the breaking-down of
form and order. The HEF has an organizing ef¬
fect on matter and builds forms. It appears to
exist in more than three dimensions. Any
changes in the material world are preceded by a
change in this field. The UEF is always associ¬
ated with some form of consciousness, ranging
from highly developed to very primitive. The
highly developed consciousness is associated
with the "higher vibrations" and energy levels.

Thus, we see that, in some way, the UEF is
not so different from everything else we know in
nature. However, it causes us to reach out with
our minds to understand all of the properties
that it has. On some levels it is a "normal" thing
like salt or a stone; it has properties that we can
define with normal scientific methods. On the
other hand, if we continue to probe deeper into
its nature, it evades the normal scientific expla¬
nations. It becomes elusive. We think we have
"put it in its place" along with electricity and
other not-so-unusual phenomena, but then it
slips out of the hand again and causes us to
think: "What is it really? But then, what is elec¬
tricity anyway?"

The UEF exists in more than three dimen¬
sions. What does that mean? It is synergistic
and builds form. That is against the second law
of thermodynamics, which states that entropy is
always increasing, which says, that disorder in
the universe is always increasing and that you
cannot get more energy out of something than
you put in. You always get a little less energy
out of something than you put in. (A perpetual
motion machine has never been built.) That is
not the case with the UEF. It seems that it is
always continuing to create more energy. Like
the cornucopia, it always remains filled, no mat¬
ter how much you take from it. These are excit¬
ing concepts and give us a very hopeful view of
the future as we risk sinking deeper into the
pessimism of the nuclear age. Perhaps someday
we will be able to build a machine that can tap
into the energy of the UEF and have all the en¬
ergy we need without threat of harming our¬
selves.

Chapter 6 Review

1. What is an aura?

2. Does a penny have an aura?

3. What does not have an aura?

4. Describe the UEF.

Chapter 7

THE HUMAN ENERGY FIELD,
OR HUMAN AURA

The Human Energy Field is the manifestation of
universal energy that is intimately involved with
human life. It can be described as a luminous
body that surrounds and interpenetrates the
physical body, emits its own characteristic radia¬
tion and is usually called the "aura." The aura is
that part of the UEF associated with objects. The
human aura, or Human Energy Field (HEF), is
that part of the UEF associated with the human
body. Based on their observations, researchers
have created theoretical models that divide the
aura into several layers. These layers are some¬
times called bodies, and they interpenetrate and
surround each other in successive layers. Each
succeeding body is composed of finer sub¬
stances and higher "vibrations" than the body
that it surrounds and interpenetrates.

Exercise to See the Human Aura

The easiest way to start to sense the HEF is
through the following exercises. If you are in a
group of people, make a circle and holds hands.
Allow the energy of your auric field to flow
around the circle. Sense this pulsating flow for a
while. Which way is it going? See which way
your neighbor feels it going. Do they correlate?

Now, without changing anything or moving
your hands, stop the flow of energy. Keep it
stopped for a while (everyone at once) and then
let it flow again. Try it again. Can you feel the

difference? Which do you like better? Now do
the same with a partner. Sit opposite each other
touching palms together. Let the energy flow
naturally. Which way does it go? Send energy
out your left palm; then allow it to come into
your right. Reverse. Now stop the flow. Next try
pushing it out both hands at once. Now suck it
in both hands at once. Push, pull and stop are
three basic ways to manipulating energy in heal¬
ing. Practice them.

Now, drop hands; hold your palms about
two to five inches apart; slowly move your
hands back and forth decreasing and increasing
the space between them. Build something up
between your hands. Can you feel it? What does
it feel like? Now, take your hands further apart,
about eight to ten inches. Then slowly bring
them back together until you feel a pressure
pushing your hands out so that you have to use
just a slight amount more force to bring your
hands together. You have now touched the
edges of one of your energy bodies together. If
your hands are one to one-and-a-quarter inches
apart, you have touched your etheric body
edges together (first layer of the aura). If your
hands are three to four inches apart, you have
touched the outside edges of your emotional
body together (second layer of the aura). Now,
very carefully move your hands closer until you
can actually feel the outside edge of your emo¬
tional body or energy field of your right hand
touch your skin of your left hand. Move your

42 Hands of Light

right palm about one inch closer to your left
palm. Feel the tingling on the back of your left
hand as the edge of your energy field touches it.
The energy field of your right hand went right
through your left hand!

Now, take your hands apart again and hold
them at a distance of about seven inches. Point
your right index finger at the palm of your left
hand, making sure the fingertip is about one
half to one inch away from the palm. Now, draw
circles on your palms. What do you feel? Does it
tickle? What is it?

With the light dim in the room, hold your
hand so that the tips of the fingers point toward
each other. Hold your hands in front of your
face at a distance of about two feet. Make sure
there is a plain white wall for a background. Re¬
lax your eyes and softly gaze at the space be¬
tween your fingertips, which should be about
one and a half inches apart. Do not look into
bright light. Let your eyes relax. What do you
see? Move your fingertips closer and then fur¬
ther apart. What is happening in the space be¬
tween the fingers? What do you see around the
hand? Slowly move one hand up and the other
down so that different fingers are pointing to
each other. What has happened now? About
95% of the people who try this exercise do see
something. Everyone feels something. For the
answers to the above questions, refer to the end
of the chapter.

After you practice these exercises and the
ones in Chapter 9 on observing other people's
auras, you may begin to see the first few layers
of the aura as shown in Figure 7-1 A. Later, after
you are used to seeing the lower layers, you can
practice the higher sense perception exercises as
described in Chapters 17, 18 and 19. With more
opening in your third eye (sixth chakra), you
will begin to see the higher levels of the aura.
(Figure 7-1B.)

Now that most of you have felt, seen and
experienced the lower levels of the aura, let us
go on to describe them.

The Anatomy of the Aura

There are many systems that people have ere-

ated from their observations to define the auric
field. All these systems divide the aura into lay¬
ers and define the layers by locations, color,
brightness, form, density, fluidity and function.
Each system is geared to the kind of work the
individual is "doing" with the aura. The two
systems most similar to mine are the ones used
by Jack Schwarz, which has more than seven
layers and is described in his book. Human En¬
ergy Systems, and the system used by Rev. Rosa-
lyn Bruyere of the Heeding Light Center in
Glendale, California. Her system is a seven-
layer system, and is described in her book.
Wheels of Light, A Study of the Chakras.

The Seven Layers of the
Auric Field

I have observed seven layers during my work as
a counselor and a healer. At first I could only
see the lower layers, which are the most dense
and easiest to see. The longer I worked, the
more layers I could perceive. The higher the
layer, the more expanded my consciousness
needed to be to perceive it. That is, in order to
perceive the higher layers, like the fifth, sixth
and seventh, I would have to enter into a medi¬
tative state, usually with eyes closed. After years
of practice, I even began to see beyond the sev¬
enth layer, as I will discuss briefly at the end of
this chapter.

My observations of the aura revealed to me
an interesting dualistic field pattern. Every other
layer of the field is highly structured, like stand¬
ing waves of light patterns, while the layers in-
between appear to be composed of colored flu¬
ids in constant motion. These fluids flow
through the form set by the shimmering stand¬
ing light waves. The direction of flow is some¬
what governed by the standing light form, since
the fluid flows along the standing lines of light.
The standing forms of light are themselves scin¬
tillating, as if they are composed of strings of
many tiny, rapidly blinking lights, each blinking
at a different rate. These standing light lines ap¬
pear to have tiny charges moving along them.

Thus, the first, third, fifth and seventh lay-

The Human Energy Field or Human Aura 43

ers all have a definite structure, while the sec¬
ond, fourth and sixth are composed of fluid-like
substances that have no particular structure.
They take on form by virtue of the fact that they
flow through the structure of the odd layers,
and thus somewhat take on the form of the
structured layers. Each succeeding layer inter¬
penetrates completely all the layers under it, in¬
cluding the physical body. Thus the emotional
body extends beyond the etheric body and in¬
cludes both the etheric and physical bodies. Ac¬
tually, each body is not a "layer" at all, although
that is what we may perceive. It is, rather, a
more expansive version of our self that carries
within it the other, more limited forms.

From the point of view of the scientist, each
layer can be considered to be a level of higher
vibrations, occupying the same space as the lev¬
els of vibration below it and extending beyond.
In order to perceive each consecutive level, the
observer must move up in consciousness to each
new frequency level. Thus we have seven bodies
all occupying the same space at the same time,
each one extending out beyond the last, some¬
thing we are not used to in "normal" daily life.
Many people erroneously assume that the aura
is like an onion, where you can peel away con¬
secutive layers. It is not.

The structured layers contain all the forms
that the physical body has, including internal
organs, blood vessels, etc., and additional forms
that the physical body does not contain. There is
a vertical flow of energy that pulsates up and
down the field in the spinal cord. It extends out
beyond the physical body above the head and
below the coccyx. I call this the main vertical
power current. There are swirling cone-shaped
vortexes called chakras in the field. Their tips
point into the main vertical power current, and
their open ends extend to the edge of each layer
of the field they are located in.

The Seven Layers and the Seven
Chakras of the Auric Field

Each layer appears different and has its own
particular function. Each layer of the aura is as¬

sociated with a chakra. That is, the first layer is
associated with the first chakra, and the second
with the second chakra, and so on. These are
general concepts and will get much more com¬
plicated as we delve more deeply into this sub¬
ject. For now we will list them to give you a
general overall view. The first layer of the field
and the first chakra are associated with physical
functioning and physical sensation—feeling
physical pain or pleasure. The first layer is asso¬
ciated with automatic and autonomic function¬
ing of the body. The second layer and second
chakra are in general associated with the emo¬
tional aspect of human beings. They are the ve¬
hicles through which we have our emotional life
and feelings. The third layer is associated with
out mental life, with linear thinking. The third
chakra is associated with linear thinking. The
fourth level, associated with the heart chakra, is
the vehicle through which we love, not only our
mates, but also humanity in general. The fourth
chakra is the chakra that metabolizes the energy
of love. The fifth level is the level associated
with a higher will more connected with the di¬
vine will. The fifth chakra is associated with the
power of the word, speaking things into being,
listening and taking responsibility for our
actions. The sixth level and sixth chakra are as¬
sociated with celestial love. It is a love that ex¬
tends beyond the human range of love and
encompasses all life. It makes the statement of
caring and support for the protection and nur¬
turing of all life. It holds all life forms as pre¬
cious manifestations of God. The seventh layer
and seventh chakra are associated with the
higher mind, knowing and integration of our
spiritual and physical makeup.

Thus there are specific locations within our
energy system for the sensations, emotions,
thoughts, memories and other nonphysical ex¬
periences that we report to our doctors and ther¬
apists. Understanding how our physical
symptoms are related to these locations will
help us understand the nature of different ill¬
nesses and also the nature of both health and
disease. Thus the study of the aura can be a
bridge between traditional medicine and our
psychological concerns.

44 Hands of Light

Location of the Seven Chakras

The location of the seven major chakras on the
physical body shown in Figure 7-2A corres¬
ponds to the major nerve plexuses of the physi¬
cal body in that area of the body.

Dr. David Tansley, a radionics specialist, in
his book Radionics and the Subtle Bodies of Man,
states that the seven major chakras are formed at
the points where the standing lines of light cross
each other 21 times.

The 21 minor chakras are located at points
where the energy strands cross 14 times. (See
Figure 7-2B.) They are in the following loca¬
tions: one in front of each ear, one above each
breast, one where the clavicles meet, one in the
palm of each hand, one on the sole of each foot.

one just behind each eye (not shown), one re¬
lated to each gonad, one near the liver, one con¬
nected with the stomach, two connected with
the spleen, one behind each knee, one near the
thymus gland, and one near the solar plexus.
These chakras are only about three inches in
diameter at one inch distance from the body.
The two minor chakras located in the palms are
very important in healing. Where the lines of
energy cross seven times, even smaller vortices
are created. There are many tiny force centers
where these lines cross fewer times. Tansley
says that these tiny vortices may very well cor¬
respond to the acupuncture points of Chinese
medicine.

Each major chakra on the front of the body
is paired with its counterpart on the back of the

Figure 7-2: Location of Chakras
(Diagnostic View)

i light

Figure 7-12: The Celestial Body

A. Normal aura

C. Man lecturing on his
favorite subject

E. Woman after core
energetics class

G. Woman meditating to
increase field

B. Musician performing

D. Man speaking with passion
about education

F. Man who often wears a
shirt this color

H. Pregnant woman

Soft Pastel Colors are Often
Associated With Femininity

Figure 11-1: Auras in Motion

A. An eleven-year-old
child playing

B. A woi

associated with the death of

G. Man who always held H. Aura appears to

head at an angle have weight

Figure 11-2: Auras Seen in Therapy Sessions

Woman Working in a Core Energetics Session

Figure 11-5: Woman Defending by Creating a Pink Cloud of
Energy

Multi colored

< 0*11

■whir

i J

k . Seven Layers Visible B. Three Layers Visible

Figure 7-8: The Emotional Body

o .?

o 5
c o

Figure 7-9 The Men a’Body Figure 7-10: The Astral Body

Figure 22-21: Setting an Eighth Level Shield Showing Blue Shield Inserted at Patient's Neck, Patient Out
of Body to the Right and Deceased Mother of Patient to the Left.

Figure 24-2: Removing Auric Mucus With a Crystal
Crystal Hooks Mucus and Draws It Out.

Figure 24-6: Hands of Light

Emotional holding

£ £

^ cn

»'Z3 O

■o

E B

CO Q)

CS
5 «
w c

-Q 0)

H£

<« e
£ <0
o w

o
o

J 8

Tear in solar plexus

Blocks in aura show as dark colors
Hernia shows as tear on the 7th level of aura

Figure 22-4: Patient's Aura Before Healing With Insert of
Disfigured Solar Plexus Chakra

Figure 22-6: Balancing Auric Field of Patient, Healer and
Universal Energy Field

Figure 22-20: Patient's Aura After Healing

The Human Energy Field or Human Aura 45

body, and together they are considered to be the
front and rear aspect of one chakra. The frontal
aspects are related to the person's feelings, the
rear ones to her or his will, and the three on the
head to a person's mental processes. These are
shown in Figure 7-3. Thus chakra #2 has a 2A
and 2B component, and #3 has a 3A and 3B
component, and so on through the sixth chakra.
Chakras 1 and 7 may be considered to be paired
if one wishes, because they are the open-ended
points of the main vertical power current that
runs up and down the spine into which all the
chakras point.

The points or tips of the chakras, where they
connect to the main power current, are called
the roots or the hearts of the chakras. Within
these hearts are seals which control exchange of
energy between layers of the aura through that
chakra. That is, each of the seven chakras has
seven layers, each corresponding to a layer of
the auric field. Each chalua looks different on
each of these layers, as will be described in de¬
tail in the descriptions of each layer. In order for
certain energy to flow from one layer to another
through the chakra, it must pass through the
seals in the roots of the chakras. Figuie 7-4
shows the auric field with all seven interpene¬
trating layers, and all seven interpenetrating lay¬
ers of chakras.

Energy can be seen flowing into all of these
chakras from the Universal Energy Field (Figure
7-3). Each swirling vortex of energy appears to
suck or entrain energy from the UEF. They ap¬
pear to function as do fluid vortexes we are fa¬
miliar with in water or in air such as whirlpools,
cyclones, water spouts and hurricanes. The
open end of a normal chakra in the first layer of
the aura is about six inches in diameter at a dis¬
tance of one inch from the body.

The Function of the
Seven Chakras

Each of these vortices exchanges energy with
the UEF. Thus, when we speak of feeling
"open," that is literally true. All the major cha¬
kras, minor chakras, lesser chakras and acu¬

puncture points are openings for energy to flow
into and out of the aura. We are like sponges in
the energy sea around us. Since this energy is
always associated with a form of consciousness,
we experience the energy we exchange in terms
of seeing, hearing, feeling, sensing, intuiting or
direct knowing.

Therefore, we can see that staying "open"
means two things. First, it means metabolizing a
lot of energy from the universal field through all
the chakras, large and small. Second, it means
letting in, and in some way dealing with, all the
consciousness that is associated with the energy
that is flowing through us. That is not an easy
task, and most of us cannot do it. There would
simply be too much input. Psychological mate¬
rial related to each chakra is brought to con¬
sciousness by increasing one's energy flow
through that chakra. Too much psychological
material would be released by a stidden flow of
energy, and we could not process it all. We
therefore wOrk in whatever growth process we
are in to open each chakra slowly, so that we
have time to process the personal material that
is released and integrate the new information
into our life.

It is important to open the chakras and in¬
crease our energy flow, because the more en¬
ergy we let flow, the healthier we are. Illness in
the system is caused by an imbalance of energy
or a blocking of the flow of energy. In other
words, a lack of flow in the human energy sys¬
tem eventually leads to disease. It also distorts
our perceptions and dampens our feelings and
thus interferes with a smooth experience of full
life. We are not psychologically prepared, how¬
ever, to stay open without working and develop¬
ing our maturity and clarity.

Each of the five senses is associated with a
chakra. Touching is associated with the first cha¬
kra; hearing, smelling and tasting with the fifth
(or throat) chakra; and seeing with the sixth (or
third eye) chakra. This is discussed in detail in
the chapter on perception.

The chakras of the auric body have three ma¬
jor functions:

1. To vitalize each auric body and, thus, the

physical body.

Ketherlc body
(mental aspect)

Figure 7-4: The Seven Layer Auric Body System
(Diagnostic View)

48 Hands of Light

2. To bring about the development of different
aspects of self-consciousness. Each chakra is
related to a specific psychological function.
Chapter 11 deals with psychological effects of
opening specific chakras in the etheric, emo¬
tional and mental bodies.

3. To transmit energy between the auric levels.
Each auric layer has its own set of seven ma¬
jor chakras, each located in the same place on
the physical body. Since each progressive
layer exists in ever increasing octaves of fre¬
quency, this is possible. For example, for the
fourth chakra, there are really seven chakras,
each of a higher frequency band than the
lower one. These chakras appear to be nested
within each other like nesting glasses. Each
chakra on each higher layer extends out far¬
ther in the auric field (to the edge of each
auric layer) and is slightly broader than the
one below it.

Energy is transmitted from one layer to
the next through passageways in the tips of
the chakras. In most people these passage¬
ways are sealed. They open as a result of
spiritual purification work and thus the cha¬
kras become transmitters of energy from one
layer to another. Each chakra in the etheric is
directly connected to the same chakra in the
next finer body that surrounds and interpen¬

etrates it. The chakras in the emotional body
are connected to those in the next finer body,
the mental, etc., and so on for all seven lay¬
ers.

In eastern esoteric literature, each of the cha¬
kras is seen as having a certain number of
petals. On closer investigation, these petals ap¬
pear to be small rotating vortices spinning at
very high rates. Each vortex metabolizes an en¬
ergy vibration that resonates at its particular
spin frequency. The pelvic chakra, for example,
has four small vortices and metabolizes four ba¬
sic frequencies of energy, and so on for each of
the other chakras. The colors observed in each
chakra are related to the frequency of energy be¬
ing metabolized at its particular rate.

Since the chakras serve to vitalize the body,
they are directly related to any pathology in the
body. Figure 7-5 lists the seven major chakras
along the spine with the area of the body each
governs. Each chakra is associated with an en¬
docrine gland and major nerve plexus. The cha¬
kras absorb the universal or primary energy
(ch'i, orgone, prana, etc.), break it up into com¬
ponent parts and then send it along energy riv¬
ers called nadis to the nervous system, the
endocrine glands and then the blood to nourish
the body, as shown in Figure 7-6.

The psychodynamic functioning of the cha-

Figure 7-5

MAJOR CHAKRAS AND THE AREA OF THE BODY THEY NOURISH

CHAKRA

NO. OF SMALL
VORTICES

ENDOCRINE

GLAND

AREA OF BODY
GOVERNED

7-Crown

972 Violet-White

Pineal

Upper brain. Right eye

6-Head

96 Indigo

Pituitary

Lower brain. Left eye. Ears,
Nose, Nervous system

5-Throat

16 Blue

Thyroid

Bronchial and vocal apparatus.
Lungs, Alimentary canal

4-Heart

12 Green

Thymus

Heart, Blood, Vagus nerve.
Circulatory system

3-Solar Plexus

10 Yellow

Pancreas

Stomach, Liver, Gall bladder.
Nervous system

2-Sacral

6 Orange

Gonads

Reproductive system

1-Base

4 Red

Adrenals

Spinal column. Kidneys

The Human Energy Field or Human Aura 49

kras, which will be discussed in detail, relates
mainly to the first three bodies of the aura,
those associated with physical, mental and emo¬
tional interactions on the earth plane. For exam¬
ple, when one's heart chakra is functioning
properly, one is very good at loving. When the
first chakra is functioning healthfully, one usu¬
ally has a strong will to live and is connected
well to the ground. This is the person who is
very grounded in his life. When someone's sixth
and third chakras are functioning well, he will
think clearly. If they are not functioning well, his
thoughts will be confused.

Incoming Primary Energy

Endocrine System

\ 1 /

Blood

Figure 7-6: Metabolic Path of Incoming Primary Energy

The Etheric Body (First Layer)

The etheric body (from "ether," the state be¬
tween energy and matter) is composed of tiny
energy lines "like a sparkling web of light
beams" similar to the lines on a television screen
(Figure 7-7). It has the same structure as the
physical body including all the anatomical parts
and all the organs.

The etheric body consists of a definite struc¬
ture of lines of force, or energy matrix, upon
which the physical matter of the body tissues is
shaped and anchored. The physical tissues exist
as such only because of the vital field behind
them; that is, the field is prior to, not a result of,
the physical body. This relationship has been
supported in the observations of plant growth
by Dr. John Pierrakos and myself. Through the
use of High Sense Perception, we observed that
an energy field matrix in the shape of a leaf is
projected by the plant prior to the growth of a
leaf, and then the leaf grows into that already
existing form.

The web-like structure of the etheric body is
in constant motion. To clairvoyant vision, sparks
of bluish-white light move along its energy lines
throughout the entire dense physical body. The
etheric body extends from one quarter to two
inches beyond the physical body and pulsates
about 15-20 cycles per minute.

The color of the etheric body varies from
light blue to gray. The light blue color has been
connected to a finer form than the gray. That is,
a more sensitive person with a sensitive body
will tend to have a bluish first layer, whereas a
more athletic, robust type of person will tend to
have a more grayish etheric body. All the cha¬
kras of this layer are the same color as the body.
That is, they will also range between blue to
gray in color. The chakras look like vortices
made of a net of light, just like the rest of the
etheric body. One can perceive all the organs of
the physical body, but they are formed of this
scintillating bluish light. As in the leaf's energy
system, this etheric structure sets up the matrix
for the cells to grow; i.e., the cells of the body
grow along the lines of energy of the etheric ma¬
trix, and that matrix is there before the cells
grow. If one were to isolate the etheric body and

50 Hands of Light

look only at it, it would look like a man or
woman made of bluish lines of light in constant
scintillation, rather like Spiderman.

By observing the shoulder of someone in
dim light against a plain white or plain black or
dark blue background, you may be able to see
the pulsations of this etheric body. The pulsa¬
tion rises, say at the shoulder, and then makes
its way down the arm, like a wave. If you look
more closely, there appears to be a blank space
between the shoulder and the blue hazy light;
then there is a layer of brighter blue haze that
slowly fades as it extends from the body. But be
aware that as soon as you see it, it will be gone,
because it moves so fast. It will have pulsated
down the arm by the time you take a second
look to check yourself out. Try again. You will
catch the next pulsation.

The Emotional Body
(Second Layer)

The second auric body (Figure 7-8), or next finer
after the etheric body, is generally called the
emotional body, and is associated with feelings.
It roughly follows the outline of the physical
body. Its structure is much more fluid than the
etheric and does not duplicate the physical
body. Rather, it appears to be colored clouds of
fine substance in continual fluid motion. It ex¬
tends one. to three inches from the body.

This body interpenetrates the denser bodies
that it surrounds. Its colors vary from brilliant
clear hues to dark muddy ones, depending on
the clarity or confusion of the feeling or energy
that produces them. Clear and highly energized
feelings such as love, excitement, joy or anger
are bright and clear; those feelings that are con¬
fused are dark and muddy. As these feelings be¬
come energized through personal interaction,
body psychotherapy, etc., the colors separate
out into their primary hue and brighten. Chap¬
ter 9 deals with this process.

This body contains all the colors of the rain¬
bow. Each chakra looks like a vortex of a differ¬
ent color and follows the colors of the rainbow.

The list below shows chakras of the emotional
body and their colors.

Chakra 1 = red

2 = red-orange

3 = yellow

4 = bright grass green

5 = sky blue

6 = indigo

7 = white

Chapter 9 gives a number of observations on
the emotional body during therapy sessions. In
general, the body does appear to be blobs of
color moving within the matrix of the etheric
field and also extending beyond it a bit. At times
a person may throw off color blobs of energy
into the air around him. This is especially ob¬
servable when someone is releasing feelings in a
therapy session.

The Mental Body (Third Layer)

The third aura body is the mental body (Figure
7-9). This body extends beyond the emotional
and is composed of still finer substances, all of
which are associated with thoughts and mental
processes. This body usually appears as a bright
yellow light radiating about the head and shoul¬
ders and extending around the whole body. It
expands and becomes brighter when its owner
is concentrating on mental processes. It extends
from three to eight inches from the body.

The mental body is also a structured body. It
contains the structure of our ideas. This body is
mostly yellow. Within this field can be seen
thought forms. They appear to be blobs of vary¬
ing brightness and form. These thought forms
have additional colors superimposed on them,
actually emanating from the emotional level.
The color represents the person's emotion that
is connected to the thought form. The clearer
and more well-formed the idea, the clearer and
more well-formed is the thought form associated
with that idea. We enhance these thought forms
by focusing on the thoughts they represent. Ha¬
bitual thoughts become very powerful "well-

The Human Energy Field or Human Aura 51

formed" forces that then affect our lives.

This body has been the hardest for me to
observe. This may be partly caused by the fact
that human beings are really just beginning to
develop the mental body and are just beginning
to use their intellects in clear ways. For that rea¬
son we are very conscious of mental activity and
consider ourselves an analytical society.

Beyond the Physical World

In the system I use for healing (Figure 7-4), the
lower three auric layers are associated with and
metabolize energies related to the physical
world, and the upper three metabolize energies
related to the spiritual world. The fourth layer or
astral level, associated with the heart chakra, is
the transforming crucible through which all en¬
ergy must pass when going from one world to
the other. That is, the spiritual energy must pass
through the fire of the heart to be transformed
into the lower physical energies, and the physi¬
cal energies (of the lower three auric layers)
must pass through the transformative fire of the
heart to become spiritual energies. In full spec¬
trum healing, discussed in Chapter 22, we use
the energies associated with all the layers and all
the chakras and pass them through the heart,
the center of love.

So far in this discussion, we have focused on
the lower three layers. Most of the body psycho¬
therapy I have seen in this country primarily uti¬
lizes only the lower three layers and the heart.
As soon as one begins to examine the upper
four layers of the auric field everything changes,
because as soon as you open your perception to lay¬
ers above the third you also begin to perceive people or
beings who exist in those layers who do not have
physical bodies. From my observations and those
of other clairvoyants, there exist layers of reality
or other "frequency bands" of reality beyond
the physical. The upper four layers of the auric
field correspond to four of those layers of reality.
Again, I must reiterate that the discussion that
follows is only an attempt at a system with
which to explain observed phenomena; I'm sure
in the future there will be better systems cre¬
ated. This one is useful to me.

In Figure 7-41 have in general associated the
upper three chakras with the physical, emo¬
tional and mental functioning of the human be¬
ing in her spiritual reality. That is because most
of us only use that portion of ourselves in those
limited types of functions. They are the higher
will, the higher feelings of love and the higher
knowing, where whole concepts are understood
at once. The fourth layer is associated with love.
That is the doorway through which we can enter
into the other states of reality.

However, the picture is actually more com¬
plicated than that. Each of the layers above the
third is an entire layer of reality with beings,
forms and personal functions that go beyond
what we normally call human. Each is an entire
world in which we live and have our being.
Most of us experience these realities during
sleep but do not remember them. Some of us
can go into those states of reality by expanding
the consciousness through meditative tech¬
niques. These meditative techniques open the
seals between the roots of the chakra layers and
thus provide a doorway for consciousness to tra¬
vel. For the following discussion, 1 will focus
only on the description of the auric layers and
their limited functions. Later on in this book
there will be more discussions of the higher lay¬
ers or "frequencies of reality."

The Astral Level (Fourth Layer)

The astral body (Figure 7-10) is amorphous and
is composed of clouds of color more beautiful
than those of the emotional body. The astral
body tends to have the same set of colors, but
they are usually infused with the rose light of
love. It extends out about one half to one foot
from the body. The chakras are the same octave
of colors as the rainbow of the emotional body,
but each is infused with the rose light of love.
The heart chakra of a loving person is full of
rose light on the astral level.

When people fall in love, beautiful arcs of
rose light can be seen between their hearts, and
a beautiful rose color is added to the normal

52 Hands of Light

golden pulsations I observe in the pituitary
gland. When people form relationships with
each other, they grow cords out of the chakras
that connect them. These cords exist on many
levels of the auric field in addition to the astral.
The longer and deeper the relationship, the
more cords and the stronger they are. When re¬
lationships end, those cords are torn, sometimes
causing a great deal of pain. The period of "get¬
ting over" a relationship is usually a period of
disconnecting those cords on the lower levels of
the field and rerooting them within the self.

A great deal of interaction takes place be¬
tween people on the astral level. Great blobs of
color of various forms whisk across the room be¬
tween people. Some, of it is pleasant and some
not so pleasant. You can feel the difference. You
may feel uneasy about someone across the room
who is apparently not even aware of your pres¬
ence; however, on another level a lot is happen¬
ing. I have seen people standing next to each
other in a group pretending not to notice each
other, when on the energy level there is a whole
communication taking place with lots of energy
forms moving between them. You have no
doubt experienced this yourself, especially be¬
tween men and women. It is not just body lan¬
guage; there is an actual energetic phenomenon
that can be perceived. For example, when a man
or woman fantasize about making love with
someone, say in a bar or at a party, there is an
actual testing in the energy fields to see if the
fields are synchronous and if the people are
compatible. More examples of this auric interac¬
tion phenomenon will be given in Chapter 9.

The Etheric Template Body
(Fifth Layer)

I call the fifth layer of the aura the etheric tem¬
plate (Figure 7-11) because it contains all the
forms that exist on the physical plane in a blue¬
print or template form. That is, it looks rather
like the negative of a photograph. It is the tem¬
plate form for the etheric layer, which as was
already stated is the template form for the physi¬
cal body. The etheric layer of the energy field
derives its structure from the etheric template

layer. It is the blueprint or the perfect form for
the etheric layer to take. It extends from about
one and one half to two feet from the body. In
disease, when the etheric layer becomes disfig¬
ured, etheric template work is needed to pro¬
vide the support for the etheric layer in its
original template form. It is the level at which
sound creates matter. It is at this level that
sounding in healing is the most effective. This
will be discussed in Chapter 23 on healing. To
my clairvoyant sight, these forms appear as clear
or transparent lines on a cobalt blue back¬
ground, much like an architect's blueprint, only
this blueprint exists in another dimension. It is
as if a form is made by completely filling in the
background space, and the empty space left cre¬
ates the form.

An example would be to compare how a
sphere is created in Euclidian geometry to the
way one is created in etheric space. In Euclidian
geometry, to create a sphere one first defines a
point. A radius drawn out from that point in all
three dimensions will create the surface of a
sphere. However, in etheric space, which one
might call negative space, to form a sphere the
opposite process takes place. An infinite num¬
ber of planes comes from all directions and fill
in all space, except for a spherical area of space
left empty. This defines the sphere. It is the area
not filled in by all the planes that meet each
other that then defines an empty spherical
space.

Thus, the etheric template level of the aura
creates an empty or negative space in which the
first or etheric level of the aura can exist. The
etheric template is the template for the etheric
body, which then forms the grid structure
(structured energy field) upon which the physi¬
cal body grows. Thus, the etheric template level
of the universal energy field contains all the
shapes and forms that exist on the physical
plane, except on the template level. These forms
exist in negative space, creating an empty space
in which the etheric grid structure grows and
upon which all physical manifestation exists.

By focusing on only the vibratory frequency
of the fifth level when observing someone's
field, one can isolate only the fifth layer of the
aura. When I do this, I see the form of the per-

The Human Energy Field or Human Aura 53

son's auric field, which extends out to about two
and a half feet from the individual. It looks like
a narrow oval shape. It contains the entire struc¬
ture of the field, including chakras, body organs
and body form (limbs, etc.), all in negative form.
All these structures appear to be formed from
transparent lines on a dark blue background,
which is solid space. When tuning into this level
I also can perceive all other forms in my envi¬
ronment in this perspective. That seems to hap¬
pen automatically when I switch my perceptual
mechanism to this range. That is, my attention
is first brought to the general fifth level; then I
focus in on the particular person I am observ¬
ing.

The Celestial Body (Sixth Layer)

The sixth level is the emotional level of the spir¬
itual plane, called the celestial body (Figure 7-
12). It extends about two to two and
three-quarter feet from the body. It is the level
through which we experience spiritual ecstasy.
We can reach it through meditation and many of
the other forms of transformation work I have
mentioned in this book. When we reach the
point of "being" where we know our connection
with all the universe, when we see the light and
love in everything that exists, when we are im¬
mersed in the light and feel we are of it and it is
of us and feel that we are one with God, then
we have raised our consciousness to the sixth
level of the aura.

Unconditional love flows when there is a
connection between the open heart chakra and
the open celestial chakra. In this connection, we
combine the love of humanity, our basic human
love for our fellow humans in the flesh, with the
spiritual ecstasy found in the spiritual love that
goes beyond the physical reality to all the realms
of existence. Combining these two creates the
experience of unconditional love.

The celestial body appears to me in beautiful
shimmering light, composed mostly of pastel
colors. This light has a gold-silver shine and
opalescent quality, like mother of pearl sequins.
Its form is less defined than the etheric template
level in that it simply appears to be composed of

light that radiates out from the body like the
glow around a candle. Within this glow are also
brighter, stronger beams of light.

The Ketheric Template or Causal
Body (Seventh Level)

The seventh level is the mental level of the spir¬
itual plane called the ketheric template (Figure
7-13). It extends from about two and one half to
three and one half feet from the body. When we
bring our consciousness to the seventh level of
the aura, we know that we are one with the Cre¬
ator. The outer form is the egg shape of the aura
body and contains all the auric bodies associated
with the present incarnation an individual is un¬
dergoing. This body, too, is a highly structured
template. It appears to my vision as composed
of tiny threads of gold-silver light of very strong
durability that hold the whole form of the aura
together. It contains a golden grid structure of
the physical body and all the chakras.

When "tuning" into the frequency level of
the seventh layer, I perceive beautiful golden
shimmering light that is pulsating so fast that I
use the term "shimmering." It looks like thou¬
sands of golden threads. The golden egg form
extends out beyond the body some three to
three and a half feet depending on the person
with the smaller tip beneath the feet and the
larger end about three feet above the head. It
can expand even more, if the person is very en¬
ergetic. The outer edge actually looks like an
eggshell to me; it appears to have a thickness of
about a quarter to a half inch. This outer part of
the seventh layer is very strong and resilient, re¬
sistant to penetration and protects the field just
as an eggshell protects the chick. All the chakras
and body forms appear to be made of golden
light on this level. This is the strongest, most
resilient level of the auric field.

It could be likened to a standing lightwave of
intricate shape and form vibrating at an ex¬
tremely high rate. One can almost hear a sound
when looking at it. I'm sure a sound could be
heard if one meditated on such a picture. The
golden template level also contains the main
power current that runs up and down the spine

54 Hands of Light

and is the main power current that nourishes
the whole body. As this golden power current
pulsates up and down the spine, it carries ener¬
gies through the roots of each chakra and con¬
nects the energies that are taken in through each
chakra.

The main vertical power current induces
other currents at right angles to it to form
golden streamers that extend directly outward
from the body. These in turn induce other cur¬
rents that circle around the field, so that the en¬
tire auric field and all the levels below it are
surrounded and held within this basket-like net¬
work. This network shows the power of the
golden light, the divine mind that holds the
whole field together in its entirety and its integ¬
rity.

In addition, in the ketheric template level are
also the past life bands within the eggshell.
These are colored bands of light which com¬
pletely encircle the aura and can be found any¬
where on the eggshell surface. The band found
near the head-neck area is usually the band con¬
taining the past life that you are working to clear
in your present life circumstance. Jack Schwarz
speaks of these bands and how to tell their
meaning by their color. Later, in the past life
healing section, I will describe how to work with
these bands. The ketheric level is the last auric
level in the spiritual plane. It contains the life
plan and is the last level directly related to this
incarnation. Beyond this level is the cosmic
plane, the plane that cannot be experienced
from the limiting viewpoint of only one incarna¬
tion.

The Cosmic Plane

The two levels above the seventh that I am able
to see at this point are the eighth and ninth lev¬
els. They are each associated with the eighth
and ninth chakras located above the head. Each
level appears to be crystalline and composed of
very fine high vibrations. The eighth and ninth
levels seem to follow the general pattern of alter¬
nating between substance (eighth level) and
form (ninth level) in that the eighth appears
mostly a fluid substance and the ninth appears

to be a crystalline template of everything below
it. I have not found references to these levels in
the literature, although they may be there. I
know very little about these levels, except for
certain very powerful healing practices that I
have been taught by my guides. I will discuss
these methods in Chapter 22.

Perceiving the Field

It is important to remember that as you open
your clairvoyant vision, you will probably per¬
ceive only the first layers of the aura. You will
also probably not be able to distinguish between
layers. You will probably just see colors and
forms. As you progress, you will sensitize your¬
self to higher and higher frequencies so that you
can perceive the higher bodies. You will also be
able to distinguish layers and be able to focus on
the layer of your choice.

Most of the illustrations in the next few
chapters show only the lower three or four auric
bodies. No distinction is made between the lay¬
ers. They appear to be mixed within each other
and act together in most of the interactions de¬
scribed. Most of the time we have our lower
emotions, basic thinking processes and interper¬
sonal feelings mixed together and confused. We
are not very good at distinguishing them in our¬
selves. Some of that mixing even shows in the
aura. Many times the mental and emotional
bodies appear to act as one confused form. In
the following descriptions of the therapeutic
processes not much distinction is made in the
bodies. However, through the therapeutic proc¬
ess or any other growth process, the layers of
one's being become more distinct. The client is
much more able to distinguish between base
emotions, thought processes and the higher
emotions of unconditional love associated with
the higher auric levels. This distinction occurs
through the process of understanding the cause-
and-effect relationships described in Chapter 15.
That is, the client begins to understand how his
belief system affects the ideas in the mental
body, how that, in turn, affects the emotions,
then the etheric, and finally the physical body.
With this understanding, one can then distin-

The Human Energy Field or Human Aura 55

Figure 7-14: Aura Around Fingertips

guish between layers of the auric field. The lay¬
ers of the field actually become clearer and more
distinct as the client becomes clearer with more
self-understanding between physical feelings,
emotional feelings and thoughts and acts ac¬
cordingly.

Later, in the healing sections that follow, it
will be very important to distinguish between
the layers of the aura.

Answers to the Questions in .
Exercises To See the Human Aura

The energy almost always moves from left to
right around the circle. It feels very unpleasant
to stop, and usually it is impossible to stop the
entire flow. The feeling of building something

up between your hands is that of a tickling sen¬
sation with pressure, somewhat like static elec¬
tricity. When the energy body edges touch each
other, there is a feeling of tingling and of pres¬
sure. When the energy body edge touches the
skin, there is a feeling of tickling and pressure
on the skin surface. When you draw circles on
the palm, you can feel the tickling outline of the
circle.

Most people see a haze around the fingers
and hands when trying to sense the aura. It
looks somewhat like the heat wave over a radia¬
tor. It is sometimes seen in various colors, such
as a blue tint. Usually, most people see it as col¬
orless in the beginning. The energy bodies pull
like taffy between the fingers as the haze from
each fingertip connects to the haze at the finger¬
tip of the opposite hand. When you move the

56 Hands of Light

fingers so that a different fingertip is facing it,
the haze will at first follow the old finger and
then jump to the closer fingertip. (See Figure 7-
14.)

Chapter 7 Review

1. What is the relationship between the Uni¬
versal Energy Field and the Human Energy
Field?

2. What does the etheric body look like? How
does it differ from the emotional body?

3. What are the three main functions of the
chakras?

4. Why is a chakra a certain color?

5. Where is the heart of the chakra?

6. What anatomical structures are the chakras
related to?

7. Describe the seven lowest layers of the auric
field and their functions.

8. Describe the relationship between the cha¬
kras and the layers of the aura.

9. Where are the eighth and ninth chakras lo¬
cated?

10. Describe a chakra on the seventh layer of the
field.

11. Where is the main vertical power current lo¬
cated?

12. Which layer holds the HEF together?

13. In which layer of the HEF do the emotions
appear?

PART III

PSYCHODYNAMICS AND THE
HUMAN ENERGY FIELD

"The golden light of a candle flame sits upon the throne
of its dark light that clings to the wick."

The Zohar

Introduction

THE THERAPEUTIC EXPERIENCE

It was in the psychotherapeutic setting that I
first consciously started seeing auras again as an
adult. This was a setting where I was not only
"allowed" to closely observe people, but I was
also encouraged to do so. During my long hours
of practice, I observed the dynamics of many
people. This was a real privilege, because nor¬
mal social ethics set very clear boundaries on
such behavior. I'm sure you have all had the ex¬
perience of getting interested in a particular
stranger on a bus or in a cafeteria, when after
only a short observation that person catches
your eye and lets you know in no uncertain
terms with a look that you had better stop look¬
ing. Now, in the first place, how did he know
you were looking? He felt you through the en¬
ergy field. In the second, why did he tell you to
stop? People get very nervous when they are
seen. Most of us do not want our personal dy¬
namics to be known by others. Most of us are
ashamed of what will be seen if another human
being looks closely. We all have problems; we all
try to hide at least some of them. In this section,
I will discuss how our private experiences, in¬

cluding our problems, show up in the aura. I
will relate that to body psychotherapy and to
character structure as defined by bioenergetics.
But first let us start at the basis of psychother¬
apy with childhood development.

There have been a lot of studies done on hu¬
man growth and development. Erik Erikson is
famous for his work on delineating stages of
growth and development related to age. These
various stages have become a part of our every¬
day language, such as the oral stage, adoles¬
cence, pubescence, etc. None of these studies
mention the aura, for it is not known to most
people in the field of psychology. When ob¬
served, however, the aura is very informative
about a person's psychological makeup and her
personal growth process. What is developing in
the aura at any stage of growth is directly related
to the psychological development at that stage.
In fact when looked at from the auric point of
view, that development can be seen as a natural
outcome of what is happening in the auric
fields. Let us look at how our energy field usu¬
ally develops from birth to death.

Chapter 8

HUMAN GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT

IN THE AURA

To span the scope of human experience from
birth to death and beyond, I will utilize both
psychological and metaphysical traditions as-re¬
sources. If the metaphysics disturbs you, please
take it as metaphor.

Incarnation

The process of incarnation takes a lifetime. It is
not something that happens at birth and is then
finished. To describe it, we need to use meta¬
physical terms. Incarnation is organic soul
movement in which higher, finer vibrations or
soul aspects are continually radiated downward
through the finer auric bodies into the more
dense ones and then finally into the physical
body. These successive energies are utilized by
the individual in her growth throughout her life.

Each major stage of life corresponds with
new and higher vibrations and the activation of
different chakras. At each stage, new energy
and consciousness is thus available to the per¬
sonality for her expansion. Each stage presents
new areas of experience and learning. Seen
from this point of view, life is full of exciting dis¬
covery and challenge to the soul.

The process of incarnating is directed by the
higher self. This life pattern, is held in the sev¬
enth layer of the aura, the ketheric template
level. It is a dynamic template which is con¬
stantly changing as the individual makes free¬

will choices in the process of living and
growing. As growth takes place, the individual
opens her ability to sustain higher levels of
vibrations/energies/consciousness coming into
and through her vehicles, her auric bodies and
chakras. Thus, she avails herself of ever greater
expanded realities as she progresses on her path
of life. As each individual progresses, so does
the whole of humanity. Each generation is usu¬
ally able to sustain higher vibrations than the
last so that the whole of humanity moves in its
evolutionary plan toward higher vibrations and
expanded realities. This principle of progression
of the human race is mentioned in many reli¬
gious texts such as the Kabbalah, the Bhagavad
Gita, the Upanishads and others.

The incarnation process before conception
has been discussed by Madame Blavatsky, and
more recently by Alice Bailey, Phoebe Bendit
and Eva Pierrakos. According to Pierrakos, the
incarnating soul meets with her spirit guides to
plan the coming lifetime. In this meeting the
soul and the guides consider the tasks she
needs to accomplish in soul growth, what karma
needs to be met and dealt with, and the nega¬
tive belief systems she needs to clear through
experience. This life work is usually referred to
as a person's task.

For example, the person may need to de¬
velop leadership. That person, on entering into
physical life, will find himself in situations
where leadership is a key issue. The circum-

62 Hands of Light

stances for each person will be entirely different,
but the focus would be on leadership. One per¬
son may be born into a family with rich leader¬
ship heritage, like a long line of respected
company presidents or political leaders,
whereas another person could be born into a
family where leadership is nonexistent and lead¬
ers are seen as negative authorities to be put
down or rebelled against. The person's task is to
learn to accept that issue in a balanced and com¬
fortable way.

According to Eva Pierrakos, the amount of
counseling a soul has from her guides in deter¬
mining her future life circumstances depends on
her maturity. Parents are chosen who will pro¬
vide the needed environmental and physical ex¬
perience. These choices determine the mixture
of energies that will eventually form the physical
vehicle in which the soul will incarnate for its
task. These energies are very precise and equip
the soul with exactly what it needs for its task.
The soul takes on both a personal task of per¬
sonal learning (like leadership) and a "world
task," which entails a gift to the world. The de¬
sign is so unique that by fulfilling the personal
task one becomes prepared to fulfill the world
task. The personal task frees the soul by releas¬
ing energies which are then used for the world
task.

For the example mentioned above on leader¬
ship, the individual will need to learn that qual¬
ity or skill before moving into a leadership role
in her chosen field of work. She may have felt
intimidated from a long line of ancestors who
were brilliant leaders, or her reaction to that her¬
itage may be one wholly of inspiration to go for¬
ward in her own leadership. Each case is
different and very personal according to the
uniqueness of the soul which has come to learn.

The life plan contains many probable reali¬
ties, which allow for wide choices of free will.
Interwoven into this life fabric is the action of
cause and effect. We create our own reality. This
creation emerges from many different parts of
our being. Creation is not always easy to under¬
stand from a simple cause and effect level, al¬
though much of our experience can be
understood from that point of view. You literally

create what you want. What you want is held in
the consciousness, unconsciousness, supercon¬
sciousness and collective consciousness. All
these creative forces mix to create experience on
many levels of our being as we progress through
life. What is termed karma is to me long-term
cause and effect, also from many different levels
of our being. Thus, we create from the personal
source and group source, and, of course, there
are smaller groups within larger groups all add¬
ing to the great fabric of creative life experience.'
From this point of view it is easy to look at the
richness of life with the wonderment of a child.

After the "planning," the soul enters into a
process of slowly losing consciousness of the
spirit world. At conception an energetic link is
formed between the soul and the fertilized egg.
At this time an etheric womb also is formed
which protects the incoming soul from any
outer influences other than those of the mother.
As the body grows inside the mother, the soul
slowly begins to feel the "drag" of it and slowly
becomes consciously connected to the body. At
one point, the soul suddenly is aware of this
connection; there is a strong flash of conscious
energy down into the forming body. The soul
then again loses consciousness, only to rea¬
waken bit by bit into the physical. This strong
flash of consciousness corresponds with the
time of quickening.

Birth

Birth takes place at a unique time for the incom¬
ing soul. At this point, the soul loses its protect¬
ive etheric womb and is for the first time
subjected to the influences of its environment.
For the first time, it is alone in the sea of energy
which surrounds all of us. It is touched by that
field. The greater, stronger fields of the heavenly
bodies also, for the first time, influence the
soul's new energy field at the time of birth.
And, of course, it is at this time that the sea of
energy is now influenced by another new field
which adds to the greater and enriches it. It is as
if another note is sounded and added to the al¬
ready existing symphony of life.

Human Growth and Development in the Aura 63

Babyhood

The process of slowly awakening to the physical
world continues after birth. The baby sleeps fre¬
quently during this time; the soul occupies its
higher energy bodies. It leaves the physical and
etheric bodies disengaged and allows them to be
very busy doing the work of body building.

In the early stages of life, the child has the
job of becoming used to the limitations of physi¬
cal sensation and to the three-dimensional
world. I have seen many newborns struggling
with this process. They still have some aware¬
ness in the spiritual world, and I have seen
them struggling to let go of spiritual playmates

and parent figures and to transfer affections to
the new parents. The newborns I have observed
have very wide open crown chakras (Figure 8-
1). They are struggling to squeeze themselves
into the confinements of the tiny body of a baby.
When I see them leave the physical body, in
their higher bodies, they appear many times to
be spirits of about twelve feet tall. They go
through an enormous struggle in opening the
lower root chakra and connecting to the earth.

One such example of this was a boy born
one month later than expected. After a very fast
birth, he had a fever. The doctors performed a
spinal tap to check for encephalitis. The spinal
tap was administered in the region of the sacral

Figure 8-1: Normal Aura of a Baby
(Diagnostic View)

64 Hands of Light

chakra. The child was struggling to let go of two
playmates and a spirit woman who did not want
to let go either. In his struggle, he would open
and connect with the earth whenever his guide
was present. Then he would lose contact with
his guide, see his playmates and the woman,
and struggle fiercely between the two worlds.
He felt more affinity with the spirit woman than
his own physical mother at those times. In his
struggle not to incarnate, he would throw en¬
ergy out the sacral chakra and to the right to
avoid growing roots straight down through the
root chakra (first chakra). He was able to do this
partly because of the auric hole left from the spi¬
nal tap. After a time of struggle, he would again
connect with his guide and calm down, open
the root and start the incoming process again.

I tried to give him healing. The first time he
accepted some, but after that he refused. When¬
ever I tried to send energy into his aura he made
a fuss. He knew what I was up to and wouldn't
let me get near him. What I tried to do was to
sew the hole in the sacral chakra on the seventh
layer of his aura and redirect the energy down¬
ward. He wouldn't allow it. I even approached
him when he was in deep sleep. When I got to a
distance of about one foot, he would wake up
and scream fiercely. It was clearly a deep strug¬
gle, and he wanted no one to help him with it.
One of the secondary physical problems arising
from this basic struggle was an intestinal prob¬
lem from the constant overuse of the solar
plexus chakra associated with screaming and
crying. He was treated for this problem after he
finally made his choice to stay in the physical
plane. The astrological chart of this child clearly
shows him to be a potential leader.

So, the incoming soul often enters and
leaves the body through the crown chakra as it
begins working on opening the root chakra to
grow roots into the physical plane. The root cha¬
kra looks like a very narrow funnel, and the
crown chakra looks like a very wide funnel at
this stage. The other chakras look like small
shallow Chinese tea cups with a narrow line of
energy leading back into the body to the spine
(Figure 8-1). The general field of a baby is amor¬
phous, formless, and has a bluish or grayish
color.

As a baby fixes his attention on an object in
the physical plane, the aura tenses and bright¬
ens, especially around the head. Then, as his
attention fades, the aura fades in color; however,
it retains some of the experience in the form of
color in the aura. Each experience adds a little
color to the aura and enhances its individuality.
Thus, the work of aura building is also going on
and continues in this way throughout life so that
all of one's life experiences can be found there.

After birth there remains a strong energy
connection between the mother and child. This
connection is sometimes referred to as the germ
plasma. It is strongest between mother and
child at birth and will remain there throughout
life, although it will not be so pronounced as the
child grows. This psychic umbilicus is the con¬
nection through which children remain in con¬
tact with their parents over the years. Many
times one is aware of traumatic experiences the
other is having, although there may be great dis¬
tance between them on the physical level.

The field of the child is entirely open and
vulnerable to the atmosphere in which he lives.
Whether things are "in the open" or not, the
child senses what is going on between his par¬
ents. The child constantly reacts to his energetic
environment in a manner consistent with his
temperament. He may have vague fears, fanta¬
sies, tantrums or illness. The child's chakras are
all open in the sense that there is no protective
film over them which screens out the incoming
psychic influences. This makes the child very
vulnerable and impressionable. Thus, even
though the chakras are not developed like those
of an adult, and the energy that comes into
them is experienced in a vague way, it still goes
right into the field of the child, and the child
must deal with it in some way. (See Figure 8-2
to compare adult and child's chakra.)

At around the age of seven, a protective
screen is formed over the chakra openings that
filters out a lot of the incoming influences from
the universal energy field. Thus, the child is no
longer as vulnerable as before. This stage can be
seen as a child grows and individuates. It is near
the time of the dawning of reason.

Many times one can see how a younger child
sits back and nestles into the lap of the mother

Human Growth and Development in the Aura 65

Figure 8-2: Adult and Child's Chakras

or father. The child is being protected from out¬
side influences by the field of the parent. Be¬
cause of this vulnerability in the child, I am very
conservative about allowing children to be in
therapy groups with adults. The adult has no
idea what it feels like to the child unless he has
regressed to that state of vulnerability. I have
seen parents unwittingly subject their children
to unneeded psychic shock by having them ex¬
perience group therapy, thinking it to be a pro¬
gressive thing, or succumbing to group
pressures. Adult rage shocks the child's system
like physical shock, while grief and depression
swamp it like a fog.

In addition to the physical nourishment,
breast-feeding gives etheric energy tp'the child.
There is a small chakra in each nipple which

supplies the baby with energy. Remember, the
baby's chakras are not developed and so do not
metabolize all the energies from the universal
energy field needed to sustain life.

Early Childhood

As a child grows and the second chakra begins
to develop, the child's emotional life becomes
enriched. The child weaves fantasy worlds in
which to live, she begins to feel like a separate
person from the mother, and these worlds help
create that separation. Within these fantasy
worlds are the child's possessions. She will
send amoeba-like projections from her etheric
field out and around these objects. The more

66 Hands of Light

important the object in building the fantasy
world, the more energy-consciousness from her
field with which she will surround it. The object
becomes part of the self. When this object is
grabbed forcefully from the hand of a child, it
tears the field and causes pain, both physical
and emotional, to the child.

Beginning around the age of two, the child
sees his parents as belonging to him, "me, my
daddy, my mommy, etc." The colors red-orange
and rosy-pink become more visible in the aura.
The child is learning to relate to another, learn¬
ing a basic kind of love. In terms of the field, the
child is able to separate from the field of the
mother, with an etheric umbilicus still connect¬
ing the two. Thus, the process of separation and
independent identity begins. The child creates a
fantasy space, lives in it, but still has mommy
connected through the etheric umbilicus. She
can still look back and see that mommy is not
too far away. This space appears to clairvoyant
vision as composed of energy mostly from the
blue level, or etheric level. It is a space in which
the child prefers to play alone, or if a playmate is
allowed in, the playmate is carefully watched so
as not to allow too much disturbance of the
space. At this stage the child does not have a
strong enough ego to maintain a real clarity be¬
tween self and other. She struggles to find her
uniqueness, and yet still feels very connected to
all things. Personal objects become ways of de¬
fining individuation. The private energy space
helps this definition. Thus, when another child
comes to visit the room of a five to seven year
old, the hostess struggles between wanting the
communication with another and preserving the
image of self. So she struggles to control per¬
sonal objects that help define who she is and
around which she has placed her own energy-
consciousness. The struggle here is to recognize
and maintain self-individuation and still feel
connection to a different "individual."

At around the age of seven, the child begins
to weave a lot of gold energy into this space.
The space becomes freer, larger, less connected
to mommy and more open to visitors. Having a
greater sense of self, the child now begins to see
her similarities to other humans. She can now

allow the "other" a greater self-expression
within her private space. A visitor is allowed to
create all manner of energy forms within her
private space. This makes things more "fun"
and "lively" and enhances fantasy life. Children
go into the "gang" stage. One of the things that
makes this all possible is that, by the age of
about seven, all the chakras now have a protect¬
ive screen over them that filters out many of the
energetic influences from the field around her.
The child feels "safer" because in her auric
bodies she really is.

Exercise to

Sense Psychic Spaces

Adults also infuse their space with their energy.
These psychic spaces are safe nests for people in
which to live and have their being. Try feeling
out psychic spaces that people create. You can
learn a lot from these spaces—both about your¬
self and the owner of the space. Just begin to
tune into the spaces that you regularly visit.
Walk into your friend's room. How do you feel?
Do you like it? Do you want to stay, or do you
want to leave?

If you have children, go into each of their
rooms. Feel the difference in the energy in each
room. How does it match your child? What of
him does it express? Is the color right for him, or
is it a color that you have imposed upon his
space? Think about it.

Try it with different stores that you go into. I
find it impossible to stay in some stores because
of the energy emanating there.

Now do a little experiment with objects. In a
small group of people (preferably people that
you don't know a lot about), put their personal
objects in the center and choose one that you
are attracted to. Hold it in your hand. How does
it feel? Heavy, warm, friendly, unfriendly, sad,;
happy, safe, dangerous, healthy, sick? Do you;;
pick up any images? Give yourself time to tune]
into them. Check it out with the owner of the]
object. I bet you are right about some of the]
things you pick up. Practice and you will do itj
better next time. i

Human Growth and Development in the Aura 67

Latency

As the child grows into latency between seven
and puberty, the development of more mental
faculties occurs, along with the development of
the third chakra. More of the mental color yel¬
low is added to the aura at this time. Although
this chakra is opening the mental energies and
the child is in school, the mental energies are
primarily used to enhance the fantasy life of the
child. Here deep teleological urges and connec¬
tions to the long past development of humanity
come into play. The child becomes the Indian
chief, the princess. Wonder Woman. These are
deep idealistic urges, which reveal the soul's
longing and most likely relate to the soul's
world task. Within these archetypal forms are
found the deep spiritual longings of the individ¬
ual, the goals and aspirations, as expressed by
the qualities played out in the backyard or the
school playground. It is now that the first three
centers—the physical, emotional and mental
centers of the earth plane—are working together
to express the first phase of the soul's incarna¬
tion.

Adolescence

The challenge of adolescence, as in all the stages
of growth, is to find the self and remain true to
the self throughout all the chaos of physical and
emotional changes, sweet longings and painful
rejections.

As the child approaches puberty, large
changes start occurring all through the body
and the surrounding energy field. More green is
added to the aura and the individual's private
space. The space becomes infused with "vibes"
from friends. As the heart chakra opens to new
levels of feelings, and the dawning of eros and
love emerge from deep within the psyche, the
beautiful color of rose fill the field. The pituitary
(third eye chakra) is activated, and the body be¬
gins to mature to that of an adult. All the cha¬
kras are affected by these changes. These new
higher vibrations are sometimes embraced with
e *citement by the individual and at other times

are loathed because they bring with them new
longing and new vulnerability that the individ¬
ual has not yet experienced. At times, the entire
field will be disrupted and the chakras will be
completely out of balance, while at other times
everything will be flowing in harmony. Thus,
the individual goes through great changes of
emotional reality, and his actions express this
confusion. At one moment he is a child, at an¬
other an adult.

The individual now repeats all the stages of
growth that he has experienced but with a dif¬
ference. The first three stages involved the self
as the center of the universe. It was me, my
daddy, my mommy, my friends, etc. Now it is
an "I-thou" relationship. The "I" does not exist
alone, and the "I's" welfare now depends on
proper adjustments to the "not-I." This is parti¬
ally caused by the fact that the individual no
longer "owns" the love object as he did in the
case of his parents or toys. Now his welfare de¬
pends on a balancing of his actions to "con¬
vince" the loved one to love him, or so he
believes. This puts a strain on the psyche be¬
tween who he thinks he is and who he thinks
he ought to be (according to what he thinks she
wants him to be, and vice versa). Of course, this
was already going on with the parents, but it is
brought to the surface more now because at any
moment the loved one may choose another, and
often does, publicly.

Adulthood

By the end of adolescence, the chakras and en¬
ergy pattern used by the individual are now set.
All chakras have taken on an adult form. It is at
this point that the individual may try to settle
down and have no more changes. Some are able
to accomplish this and with it cause their lives to
stagnate into safe, set, patterns of clearly de¬
fined and limited reality. Most people, suffi¬
ciently shaken by their life experiences, see that
reality is not so easily definable and continue a
lifelong search for meaning that leads them
through constant challenge to deeper experi¬
ences of fulfillment.

68 Hands of Light

In maturity, the "I-thou" expands to include
the personal family, which creates its own en¬
ergy form. More energies flowing through the
throat chakra help this personal giving and re¬
ceiving. As time goes on, the "I-thou" can ex¬
pand to include the individual and the group.
The heart can open to include not only love of
the mate and children, but also love of human¬
ity. The color is seen in the aura as a beautiful
lilac. This becomes then the integration of the
self, the other and the group consciousness. As
the third eye opens to higher vibrations, one be¬
gins to see the unity of all things and can see at
the same time the unique preciousness of each
individual soul within that unity.

Maturity

As the individual approaches old age and death,
even more higher-vibration rates can be added
to the energy bodies. People's hair turns bright
white as the white light coursing through their
being increases their affinity with the spirit
world. Now, to the "I-thou" relationship is
added a very deep personal relationship with
God. The lower earthly energy, metabolized
through the lower chakras, decreases and is
steadily replaced by higher finer energies having
much more to do with spirit than life on the
physical plane. The person is preparing to re¬
turn home to the spirit world. When these natu¬
ral processes are understood and allowed to
unfold from within the psyche, serenity and
love fill the personal life of the individual.
Things fall into place from all the growth that
has taken place throughout the years. The solar
plexus chakra, especially, becomes more harmo¬
nious. The person is able to increase his depth
of perception that makes life (despite diminish¬
ing physical power) a thing of ever growing in¬
terest and richer experience. It is unfortunate
that our culture, in general, does not respect
and utilize this great resource of wisdom and
light as do other cultures like that of the Native
American Indians, in which the grandmothers
and grandfathers retained the power of decision
for the community.

Death

According to Phoebe Bendit, at death a lumi¬
nous ray flashes out the top of the head as the
person leaves the earth plane through the crown
chakra. This experience of going out the crown
has often been described as going through the
tunnel between life and death. It is seen as a
long dark tunnel with a bright light at the end.
This "tunnel experience" can also be said to be
the soul going up through the main power cur¬
rent of the body along the spine and leaving at
the bright light of the crown chakra.

At death, the soul is met by old deceased
friends and her spirit guides. At this time, the
soul sees her whole life pass by very quickly and
clearly so that there can be no mistakes as to just
what happened, what choices were made, les¬
sons learned and what lessons still remain for
the next incarnation. There follows a time of cel¬
ebration of a task completed, and some time
spent in the spirit world before the next incarna¬
tion is taken on.

After people die of a long-term illness, I
have often seen them resting, surrounded by
white light for some period of time after death.
They appear to be taken care of in some kind of
hospital on the other side.

I have observed two people who were in the
dying process a couple of days before their
deaths. In both cases, the people were dying of
cancer and had been ill for some time. The
lower three bodies were breaking up and com¬
ing off the body as opalescent cloudy blobs.
This gave the person an opalescent white look.
The lower three chakras were also breaking up,
with long threads of energy coming out of the
solar plexus. The upper four chakras appeared
to be very wide open, almost like gaping holes.
There was no longer a shield over them. The
people who were crossing over spent most of
their time out of the body arid away. Apparently
they were off with their spirit guides some¬
where. When the people were in their bodies,
there were plenty of spirits around the room. In
one case, I saw Azrael guarding the gate. When
the person was in deep pain, I asked Azrael
why he didn't help her die. He said, "I haven't

Human Groivth and Development in the Aura 69

received my orders yet/' (Azrael is the angel of
death and looks very strong and beautiful to
me, not terrifying as some sources have im¬
plied.)

Heyoan On Death

My guide has been lecturing on the death proc¬
ess, and I would like to quote him here. First he
says that death is not what we have understood,
but a transition from one state of consciousness
to another, Heyoan says that we have already
died, in forgetting who we are. Those parts of
us that have been forgotten are walled off from
reality, and we have come into incarnation to re¬
trieve them. So although we fear death, he says
we have already died, and in the incarnation
process of reintegrating with our greater being,
we actually find more life. He says that the only
thing that dies is death.

During our life, we wall off experiences that
we wish to forget. We do this so effectively that
we do not remember many of them. We begin
this walling-off process early in childhood and
continue it throughout our life. These walled-off
pieces of our consciousness can be seen in the
auric field in terms of blocks and will be dis¬
cussed in the chapter on psychodynamics. Hey¬
oan says that the real death has already
occurred in the form of that internal wall.

"As you know, the only thing that separates
you from anything is yourself. And the most im¬
portant thing is that death has already occurred
in those portions of yourself that are walled off.
That would be perhaps from our vantage point
the most clear definition of what the human be¬
ing considers to be death. It is being walled-off
and separate from. It is forgetting. It is forget¬
ting who you are, that is what death is. You
have already died. You have in fact incarnated to
bring to life those pieces of you that are already
in what you call death, if we should ever use
that word. Those parts have already died.

'The process of death, that which we would
call transition to greater awareness, can be seen
as a process in the energetic field. We will de¬
scribe this now to help you understand the

process of death from the auric point of view.
There is a washing of the field, there is a clear¬
ing, an opening of all the chakras. When you
die, you are going to another dimension. There
is dissolution in the three lower chakras. There
is dissolution of, and note we say dissolution, of
the three lower bodies. Those of you who have
watched individuals die have seen the opales¬
cent quality of the hands, of the face, of the
skin. It is an opalescent mother of pearl as the
individual is dying, and the beautiful opalescent
clouds are wafting off. Those clouds are the
lower energy bodies which serve to hold the
physical body together. They are disintegrating.
They waft off, and the chakras there are opened
and there are cords of energy coming out. The
upper chakras are great open holes into other
dimensions. So this is the beginning stages of
death where the energy field begins to separate.
The lower parts of the energy field separate
from the upper parts. And then during the
three hours or so around the hour of death,
there is a washing of the body, a baptism, a spir¬
itual baptism of the body where the energy is
flushed through like a fountain right up the
main vertical power current. A fountain of
golden light flushes through, and all of the
blocks are cleansed. And the aura becomes
white gold. How will this be experienced by the
individual who is dying in terms of memory?
You have already heard it. A person sees his or
her entire life wash by them. Well that's it. There
is a concomitant energy field phenomena of the
washing of the aura. All blocks are let go. All
forgotten experiences of that lifetime are un¬
blocked. They all flow through the conscious¬
ness. Thus, all of the history of that lifetime
flows through the consciousness and when the
person leaves, the consciousness leaves. It is the
dissolution of many of the walls that were cre¬
ated for the process of transformation in this
particular lifetime. It is a tremendous integra¬
tion.

"With the dissolution of the walls of forget¬
ting within you, you remember who you truly
are. You become integrated with your greater
self and feel the lightness and the vastness of it.
Thus death, contrary to popular opinion, is a

70 Hands of Light

very wonderful experience. Many of you have
read the descriptions of those who have been
pronounced clinically dead and have come back
to life. They all speak of a tunnel with a brilliant
light at the end of it. They speak of meeting a
wondrous being at the end of that tunnel. Most
have a life review and a discussion of that life
with that being. Most reveal that they them¬
selves decided to return to the physical world to
complete their learning, even though it was so
beautiful where they went. Most of them no
longer fear death, but look forward to it as a
great release into serenity.

"So it is your wall that separates you from
this truth: What you call death is actually transi¬
tion into light. The death that you imagine you
will experience can be found within your wall.
Every time you separate yourself in any way,
you die a small death. Every time you block
your wonderful life force from flowing, you cre¬
ate a small death. Thus as you remember those
separated parts of your being and reintegrate
them back into yourself, you have already died.
You come back to life. As you expand your
awareness, the wall between the world, the wall
between spiritual reality and physical reality dis¬
solves. Thus death dissolves, it is nothing but
the releasing of the wall of illusion when you are
ready to move on. And who you are is redefined
as the greater reality. You are still your individ¬
ual self; when you drop your body, you will
maintain the essence of self. You can feel that
essence of self in the future/past meditations
that are given in Chapter 27 (Self Healing). Your
physical body dies, but you move into another
plane of reality. You maintain that essence of self
beyond body, beyond incarnation. And when

you leave your body, you may feel yourself to be
a point of gold light, but you will still feel your¬
self."

Chapter 8 Review

1. When does a soul take charge of a body?

2. What is the significance of the moment of
birth with respect to the HEF?

3. What are the two main differences between
the chakras of a small child and those of an
adult?

4. What does the aura have to do with child¬
hood development?

5. Why in relation to the aura, does a child
scream in pain when someone grabs some¬
thing out of its hands?

6. Why does a child like to sit inside of an
adult's aura?

7. What major developments are happening in
the aura during the following stages of de¬
velopment: before birth, birth, babyhood,
early childhood, latency, puberty, maturity,
middle age, advanced age, death?

8. At what age is the process of incarnation
complete?

9. Describe the death experience as witnessed
by HSP observers.

Food For Thought

10. Discuss the relationship of the HEF and a
person's personal space.

11. Discuss the relationship of personal bound¬
aries to the HEF.

Chapter 9

PSYCHOLOGICAL FUNCTION
OF THE SEVEN MAJOR CHAKRAS

As a human being matures and the chakras de¬
velop, each represents the psychological pat¬
terns evolving in the individual's life. Most of us
react to unpleasant experiences by blocking our
feeling and stopping a great deal of our natural
energy flow. This affects the development and
maturation of the chakras, resulting in inhibi¬
tion of a fully balanced psychological function.
For example, if a child is rejected many times
when he tries to give love to another, he will
probably stop trying to give love. In order to do
this, he will probably try to stop the inner feel¬
ings of love that he is responding to with action.
In order to do this, he will have to stop the en¬
ergy flow through the heart chakra. When the
energy flow through the heart chakra is stopped
or slowed down, the development of the heart
chakra is affected. Eventually, a physical prob¬
lem will very likely result.

This same process works for all chakras.
Whenever a person blocks whatever experience
he is having, he in turn blocks his chakras,
which eventually become disfigured. The cha¬
kras become "blocked," clogged with stagnated
energy, spin irregularly, or backwards (counter¬
clockwise) and even, in the case of disease, be¬
come severely distorted or torn.

When the chakras are functioning normally,
each will be "open," spinning clockwise to me¬
tabolize the particular energies needed from the
universal field. A clockwise spin draws energy
from the UEF into the chakra, very much like

the right-hand rule in electromagnetism, which
states that a changing magnetic field around a
wire will induce a current in that wire. Grasping
the wire with the right hand, point fingers in
the direction of the positive magnetic pole. The
thumb will automatically point in the direction
of the induced current. The same rules hold true
for chakras. If you hold your right hand over a
chakra, in such a way that the fingers curl clock¬
wise around the outer edge of the chakra, your
thumb points toward the body and in the direc¬
tion of the "current." Thus we label the chakra
"open" to incoming energies. On the contrary,
if you curl the fingers of your right hand coun¬
terclockwise around a chakra, the thumb will
point outward, in the direction of current flow.
When the chakra spins counterclockwise, the
current is flowing outward from the body, thus
interfering with metabolism. In other words, the
energies that are needed and that we experience
as psychological reality are not flowing into the
chakra when it is spinning counterclockwise.
We thus label the chakra as "closed" to incom¬
ing energies.

Most people I have observed have three or
four chakras spinning counterclockwise at any
one time. Usually these become more and more
open with therapy. Since chakras are not only
metabolizers of energy, but also devices that
sense energy, they serve to tell us about the
world around us. If we "close" chakras, we do
not let that information come in. Thus, when we

72 Hands of Light

make our chakras flow counterclockwise, we send our
energy out into the world, sense what the energy is
that we send out and say that it is the world. This is
called projection in psychology.

The imagined reality that we project onto
our world is related to our "image" of what we
concluded the world was like through our child¬
hood experiences; and through the mind of the
child we were then. Since each chakra is related
to a specific psychological function, what we
project through each chakra will be within the
general area that each chakra functions and will
be very personal to each of us because each per¬
son's life experience is unique. Thus, by mea¬
suring the state of the chakras we can determine
one's overall long-term and current life issues.

John Pierrakos and I have related dysfunc¬
tion in each of the chakras to psychological dis¬
order. Any disturbance in the chakra, as
measured by dowsing techniques, shows a dys¬
function in that particular area of psychological
relating (see Chapter 10 for dowsing technique).
Thus, by measuring the state of the chakras, we
are able to diagnose the client's psychological
needs. I also work directly with the chakras to
effect a psychological change. Conversely, we
have found that the psychological patterns de¬
scribed by therapists are connected to the hu¬
man energy field in predictable locations,
shapes and colors.

Figure 7-3 shows the location of the seven
major energy centers of chakras used for diag¬
nosing psychological states. These are divided
into mental centers, will centers and feeling cen¬
ters. For psychological health, all three types of
chakras: reason, will and emotion should be in
balance and open. The three chakras in the head
and throat area govern the reason; the chakras
on the front of the body govern the emotions;
their counterparts on the back govern the will.
Figure 9-1 gives a table of the major chakras and
their psychological function.

Let us look at the general areas of psycho¬
logical functioning for each chakra. The first
chakra, the coccygeal center (1), is related to the
quantity of physical energy and will to live in
the physical reality. It is the location of the first
manifestation of the life force in the physical
world. When the life force is fully functioning

through this center, the person has a powerful
will to live in physical reality. When the life force
is fully functioning through the three lowest
chakras, combined with a powerful flow down
the legs, there comes with it a clear and direct
statement of physical potency. The coccyx acts
as an energy pump on the etheric level, helping
direct the flow of energy up the spine.

This statement of physical potency, com¬
bined with the will to live, gives the individual a
"presence" of power and vitality. He makes a
statement, "I am here now," and is well-
grounded in physical reality. The "presence" of
power and vitality emanates from him in the
form of vital energy. He often acts as a generator
by energizing those around him, recharging
their energy systems. He has a strong will to
live.

When the coccygeal center is blocked or
closed, most of the physical vitality of the life
force is blocked, and the person does not make
a strong impression in the physical world. He is
not "here." He will avoid physical activity, will
be low in energy and may even be "sickly." He
will lack physical power.

The pubic center (chakra 2A) is related to
the quality of love for the opposite sex that the
person is able to have. When it is open, it facili¬
tates giving and receiving sexual and physical
pleasure. If this center is open, the person will
probably enjoy sexual intercourse and probably
be orgasmic. However, full body orgasm re¬
quires that all centers be open.

The sacral center (chakra 2B) is related to the
quantity of sexual energy of a person. With this
center open, a person feels his sexual power. If
he blocks this particular chakra, whatever sexual
force and potency he has will be weak and dis¬
appointing. He will probably not have much
sexual drive, tend to avoid sex and disclaim its
importance and pleasure, resulting in under¬
nourishment in that area. Since the orgasm
bathes the body in life energy, the body will not
be nourished in this way, and it will not receive
the psychological nourishment of communion
and body contact with another.

Relationship between chakras 2A and 2B.
The sacral acts as a pair with the pubic chakra.
At the two points where the front and rear cen-

Psychological Function of the Seven Major Chakras 73

Figure 9-1

MAJOR CHAKRAS AND ASSOCIATED PSYCHOLOGICAL FUNCTION

MENTAL CENTERS
7 Crown Center.

6A Forehead Center..,.

6B Mental Executive ..

WILL CENTERS

5B Base of Neck...

4B Between Shoulder Blades
3B Diaphragmatic Center....

2B Sacral Center..

1 . Coccygeal Center_

FEEUNGCENTERS

5A Throat Center...

4A Heart Center.

3A Solar Plexus ..

2A Pubic Center.

ters come together, in the heart of the chakra, in
the spine, the life force exhibits its second most
powerful physical urge and purpose—that of the
desire for sexual union. This powerful force
breaks through the self-imposed barriers be¬
tween two people and draws them closer to
each other.

So, each person's sexuality is connected to
his life force. (This is true, of course, of all cen¬
ters: any of them that is blocked also blocks the
life force in that related area.) Since the pelvic
area of the body is the source of vitality, any
center that is blocked in that area will have the
effect of lowering physical and sexual vitality.
For the great majority of humanity, the sexual
energy moves through, charges and discharges
in orgasm through these two sexual chakras.

ASSOCIATED WITH:

Integration of total personality with life, and
spiritual aspects of mankind.

Capacity to visualize and understand mental
concepts.

Ability to carry out ideas in a practical way.

Sense of self, within society and one's
profession.

Ego will, or will towards the outer world.
Healing, intentionality towards one's health.
Quantity of sexual energy.

Quantity of physical energy, will to live.

Taking in and assimilating.

Heart feelings of love for other human beings,
openness to life.

Great pleasure and expansiveness, spiritual
wisdom, and consciousness of universality of
life. Who. you are within the Universe.

Quality of love for the opposite sex, giving and
receiving physical, mental and spiritual
pleasure.

This movement revitalizes and cleanses the
body with an energy bath. It rids the body sys¬
tem of clogged energy, waste products and deep
tension. Sexual orgasm is important for the
physical well-being of the person.

The mutual letting go into deep communion
through giving and receiving in sexual inter¬
course is one of the main ways humanity has of
deeply letting go of the ego "separateness" and
experiencing unity. When done with love and
respect for the uniqueness of your mate, it is a
holy experience culminating from the deep pri¬
mordial evolutionary urges of mating on the
physical level and the deep spirituahyearnings
of uniting with Divinity, It is a wedding-of both
the spiritual and physical aspects of the two hu¬
man beings.

74 Hands of Light

For those who have abeady achieved such
communion and have passed to other stages
along the spiritual path, some spbitual disci¬
plines like Kundalini yoga and Tantric tradition
state that this discharge is no longer necessary
for the well-being of the person. (Most human
beings are not in this category.) Many spiritual
practices use meditation to contain, transform
and redirect the sexual energy along different
energy channels, moving it along the vertical
power current up the spine to be transformed
into higher vibratory energy which is then used
to build the higher spbitual energy bodies. This
is a very powerful and potentially dangerous
practice and must be done with guidance. Gopi
Krishna in his book Kundalini speaks of the
transformation of his physical seed, the sperm,
into spiritual energy, or Kundalini, in this man¬
ner. Many spiritual practices advocate holding
the sperm or spiritual seed for transformation.

Blocks in chakras 2A and 2B. Blocking of
the pubic center may result in an inability to
achieve orgasm in the woman who is unable
to be open to and receive sexual nourishment
from her mate. She will probably not be able to
connect to her vagina and may not enjoy pene¬
tration. She may be more inclined to enjoy clito-
ral stimulation than penetration. She may also
want to always be the aggressive one in the sex¬
ual act, i.e., be on top and initiate the majority
of the movement. Her distortion here is that she
must always be in control. In a healthy state she
would want to be active sometimes and recep¬
tive at other times, but in this case she uncon¬
sciously fears her partner's powers. With gentle,
patient caring and acceptance from her mate,
she can slowly, over a period of time, open her
pubic chakra to receiving and enjoying penetra¬
tion. She must also go through the deeper feel¬
ings of fear and withholding from her mate that
accompany her condition to find the images
from which such feelings come as described ear¬
lier in this chapter. I am not implying that the
woman should not be aggressive in sex. I am
speaking more about a type of imbalance in giv¬
ing and receiving.

A severe block in the male in the pubic cha¬
kra is usually accompanied by premature or¬
gasm or inability to achieve an erection. The

male is afraid on some deep level to give his full
sexual power and, thus, withholds it. His en¬
ergy flow often gets interrupted, dogged or re¬
directed toward the back, out the sacral chakra,
so that in orgasm he shoots energy out the pos¬
terior second chakra instead of out the penis.
This experience is sometimes painful, resulting
in an aversion to orgasm and an avoidance of
intercourse. This precipitates difficulties on
other levels with his mate, as it does with the
nonorgasmic woman. Many times, of course,
through the law of "like attracts like," these peo¬
ple find each other and share this mutual prob¬
lem. Too many times the "pseudo" solution has
been to blame the other person and try to find
another mate. This only perpetuates the situa¬
tion until the "owner" of the problem has to fi¬
nally admit ownership. At this point, the work
of digging out the originating images or beliefs
can begin.

It is a blessing in these cases to have an ac¬
cepting, understanding and strongly committed
mate. If both people, instead of blaming the
other, admit their difficulty, they can then focus
on giving love, understanding and support to
their partner and thus develop a new form of
mutuality. This kind of growth takes time and
patience. It takes true giving without making
demands that one's desires be fulfilled by the
other person. Then, as mutual trust and self-
respect grow from giving up blame and from
giving love, sexuality usually opens up and
grows into a nourishing exchange. It is not unu¬
sual for one of these centers to be dosed when
the other is open. Many times this is just how
the pairs (front/back) of chakras work in people.
There will be an over-functioning in one and an
under-functioning in the other, because the per¬
son cannot tolerate the power of having both as¬
pects of a chakra functioning at the same time.
For example, for some people it is very difficult
to feel both tremendous sexual power and be
very open to giving and receiving from another
in lovemaking. Many times sexual power turns
into fantasy rather than allowing the moment to
unfold by immersing the self into the partner's
depths and personal mysteries. Human beings
are infinitely beautiful and complex wonders.
Very rarely do we allow ourselves to simply

Psychological Function of the Seven Major Chakras 75

wander uninhibited into that beauty and won¬
derment. The accompanying psychological
problems from imbalance in chakra 2A and 2B
result in unsatisfactory life circumstances.

For example, when the rear center is strong
in a clockwise direction and the front center is
weak or dosed, the person will have a strong
sex drive and probably a great demand for sex¬
ual relations. The problem is that the large
amount of sexual energy and drive is not accom¬
panied by an ability to give and receive sexually.
Thus, it will be very hard to satisfy a strong
drive. If the rear center is strong in a counter¬
clockwise direction, the same is true; however,
the drive will probably also be accompanied
with negative images, perhaps even violent sex¬
ual fantasies. This, of course, makes the drive
even harder to satisfy, and the owner of such a
configuration may do a lot of sublimating in or¬
der to avoid the issue altogether because of
shame of such inner feelings. On the other
hand, the person may have many sexual part¬
ners and then miss the possibility of deep com¬
munion between two souls in the sex act. The
person may break commitments or not be able
to make any commitments regarding sex.

The solar plexus (chakra 3A) is assodated
with the great pleasure that comes from deeply
knowing one's unique and connected place
within the universe. A person with an open
chakra 3A can look up to the starry heavens at
night'and feel that he belongs. He is firmly
grounded in his place within the universe. He is
the center of his own unique aspect of expres¬
sion of the manifest universe and from this he
derives spiritual wisdom.

Although the solar plexus chakra is a mental
chakra, its healthy functioning is directly related
to an individual's emotional life. This is true be¬
cause the mind or mental processes serve as reg¬
ulators of the emotional life. The mental
understanding of emotions puts them into a
framework of order and acceptably defines real-
ity.

If this center is open and functioning harmo¬
niously, he will have a deeply fulfilling emo¬
tional life that does not overwhelm him.
However, when this center is open but the pro¬
tective membrane over it tom, he will have great

uncontrolled extremes of emotions. He could be
influenced by outside sources from the astral
which may confuse him. He may get lost in the
universe and stars. He will eventually have
physical pain in that area from overuse of that
chakra and may eventually create a disease,
such as adrenal exhaustion.

If this center is dosed, he will block his feel¬
ings, perhaps not feeling anything. He will not
be aware of a deeper meaning to the emotions
that lends another dimension to existence. He
may not be connected to his own uniqueness
within the universe and his greater purpose.

Many times this center serves as a block be¬
tween the heart and sexuality. If both of those
are open and the solar plexus is blocked, the
two will function separately; i.e., sex will not be
deeply connected to love and vice versa. These
two connect very nicely when one is aware of
one's firmly rooted existence in the physical uni¬
verse and of the long historical line of human
beings who have served to create the physical
vehicle this person now possesses. We must
never underestimate how deeply physical a be¬
ing we each are.

The solar plexus center is a very important
center with regard to human connectedness.
When a child is born, there remains an etheric
umbilicus that is connected between mother and
child. These cords represent a human connect¬
edness. Whenever a person creates a relation¬
ship with another human being, cords grow
between the two 3A chakras. The stronger the
connections between the two people, the
stronger and greater in number these cords will
be. In cases where a relationship is ending, the
cords are slowly disconnected.

Cords develop between other chakras of
people in relationship also, but the third chakra
cords seem to be a reenactment of the depen¬
dent child/mother connection and are very im¬
portant in terms of transactional analysis in the
therapeutic process. Transactional analysis is a
method to determine the nature of an interac¬
tion you have with other persons. Are you inter¬
acting with them as a child would to a parent
(child/parent)? Or are you interacting as if they
are the child and you an adult (adult/child)? Or
are you acting as adults? This type of analysis

76 Hands of Light

reveals a lot about your personal reactions to
other people. The nature of the chakra cords
that you build in your first family will be re¬
peated in all the following relationships that you
create later. As a child, the child/mother cords
represent just that, the child/mother relation¬
ship. As an adult, you will most likely grow de¬
pendent child/mother cords between you and
your mate. As you move through life and ma¬
ture, you gradually transform the child/mother
cords into adult/adult ones.

The diaphragmatic center (chakra 3B), lo¬
cated behind the solar plexus, is associated with
one's intention towards one's physical health. If
someone has a strong health-love toward his
body, and an intent to keep it healthy, this cen¬
ter is open. This center is also known as the
Healing Center and is associated with spiritual
healing. It is said that in some healers this cen¬
ter is very large and developed. It is also a will
center like the one located between the shoulder
blades and is usually smaller than the other will
centers, except on people who have healing abil¬
ities. This center is associated with the solar
plexus center, in the front, and is usually open if
the solar plexus center is open. If a person has
the solar plexus open and therefore is connected
to his place in the universe, accepting that he
fits as perfectly as each blade of grass, and the
"lilies of the field," this person's self-acceptance
will manifest on the physical level as physical
health. Overall health—mental, emotional and
spiritual—requires all centers to be open and
balanced.

You will see, as we move through the chakra
descriptions, the front and rear aspects of each
work together as a pair, and a balance between
each is more important than to try to open only
one very widely.

The heart chakra (chakra 4A) is the center
through which we love. Through it flows the en¬
ergy of connectedness with all life. The more
open this center becomes, the greater is our ca¬
pacity to love an ever widening circle of life.
When this center is functioning, we love our¬
selves, our children, our mates, our families,
our pets, our friends, our neighbors, our coun¬
trymen, our fellow human beings and all our
fellow creatures upon this earth.

Through this center, we connect cords to
heart centers of those with whom we have a love
relationship. This includes children and parents
as well as lovers and mates. You have probably
heard the term "heart strings," which refers to
these cords. The feelings of love that flow
through this chakra often bring tears to our
eyes. Once we have experienced this open lov¬
ing state, we realize how much we have missed
it before and we cry. When this chakra is open,
the person can see the whole individual within
his fellow man. He can see the uniqueness and
inner beauty and light in each individual as well
as the negative or undeveloped aspects. In the
negative state (closed), the person has trouble
loving, loving in the sense of giving love with¬
out expecting anything in return.

The heart chakra is the most important cha¬
kra used in the healing process. All energies
metabolized through the chakras travel up the
vertical power current through the roots of the
chakras and into the heart chakra before moving
out of the hands or eyes of the healer. In the
healing process, the heart transmutes the earth
plane energies to spiritual energies and the spir¬
itual plane energies into earth plane energies to
be used by the patient. This will be discussed in
greater detail in the chapter on healing.

Midway between the shoulder blades, cha¬
kra 4B is associated with the ego will, or outer
will. This is the center from which we act in the
physical world. We go after what we want.

If this center is clockwise, we will have a
positive attitude about accomplishing things in
life and see other people as supports for those
accomplishments. We will then have the experi¬
ences to support this view because we live it. We
will experience our will and the divine will in
agreement. We will see the will of our friends
aligned with our will. For example, if you want
to write a book, you will envision your friends
helping you and it being accepted by the pub¬
lishers in a way that says, "Yes, this is just what
we were looking for."

On the other hand, if this center is counter¬
clockwise, the opposite is true. We will have the
misconception that God's will and that of other
people is opposed to our will. People will ap¬
pear to be blocks in our way of getting what we

Psychological Function of the Seven Major Chakras T7

want or in our accomplishing something. We
will have to go through them or run them over
to get what we want, rather than see them as
helping us. We would believe statements like
"my will over yours" and "my will over God's."
Deep-seated beliefs relating to how the universe
functions are involved here.

An image of the universe as a basically hos¬
tile place where the strong aggressors will sur¬
vive, sometimes boils down to "not getting my
way means my ultimate survival is at stake." The
person functions by control and seeks to make
his world safe by controlling others. The solu¬
tion is for this person to realize how he creates a
hostile environment through his aggression,
and then to take the chance to let go and see if
survival is possible without control. Taking such
a chance will eventually lead to experiences of a
benign, abundant and safe universe in which
the person's existence is supported by the
whole.

In another case, this center may be overac¬
tive. It could measure very large in a clockwise
direction accompanied by a small clockwise or
counterclockwise heart chakra. In this case, the
person's will isn't particularly negative; it is just
used to serve the function the heart center
would serve. Instead of being able to let go,
trust and love, i.e., run more energy through
the heart chakra (4A), the person compensates
with his will. He runs more energy through the
rear aspect of chakra 4 between the shoulder
blades. The person may be saying covertly, "I
want my way without having to consider your
humanity." This person functions mainly from
will rather than love, or power over rather than
power from within. It is the distortion from
which one would "own" one's mate rather than
be an equal.

The throat chakra (5A), located at the front
of the throat, is associated with taking responsi¬
bility for one's personal needs. The newborn is
brought to the breast, but must suck before
nourishment is gained. This same principle
holds throughout life. As the person matures,
the fulfillment of his needs rests more and more
u pon himself. Maturity is reached and this cha¬
kra functions properly when one ceases to
blame others for one's lacks in life and goes out

to create what one needs and desires.

This center also shows what the state of the
person is with respect to receiving whatever is
coming toward him. If the center is measured as
counterclockwise, the person does not take in
what is given to him.

This is usually associated with an image
about what it is that is coming to him in the first
place. That is, if the person sees the world as a
negative, generally hostile place, he will be cau¬
tious and have negative expectations about what
is coming his way. He may expect hostility, vio¬
lence or humiliation rather than love and nour¬
ishment. Since he sets up a negative force field
with his negative expectations, he will attract
negative input to him. That is, if he has expecta¬
tions of violence, he has violence inside of him¬
self and, therefore, attracts it via the law of like
attracts like, as explained in Chapter 6 on the
nature of the Universal Energy Field.

As the person opens his throat center, he
will gradually attract more nourishment until he
is able to receive so much that he will be able to
keep his throat center open most of the time. In
the interim, he may very well attract a negative
input shortly after opening the center due to his
belief that that is what will come. When he is
able to go through this experience, connect to
the original cause within himself and find inner
trust again, he will reopen his throat center. This
process of opening and closing continues until
all the misconceptions of receiving or taking in
are transformed into trust in a benign nourish¬
ing universe.

The aspect of assimilation that occurs at the
back of the fifth chakra (5B), sometimes re¬
ferred to as the professional center, is associated
with the person's sense of self within the soci¬
ety, his profession and with his peers. If a per¬
son is not comfortable in this area of his life,
then this discomfort may very well be covered
by pride to compensate for lack of self-esteem.

The center at the back of the neck is usually
open if one is successful and well suited in one's
work and satisfied with that work as one's task
in life. If the person has chosen a profession that
is both challenging and fulfilling and is giving
his best to his work, this center will be in full
bloom. He will be professionally successful and

78 Hands of Light

will be receiving support for nourishment from
his universe. If this is not the case, the person
will hold back from giving his best. He will be
unsuccessful and conceal his lack of success
with his pride. He secretly "knows" he would
be "better" if he would either give his best or
get a more challenging job. Somehow this per¬
son never does either and keeps a defense of
pride in order to avoid the real despair under¬
neath. He knows that he is really not succeeding
in life. He will probably play the role of the vic¬
tim, stating how life has not given him the op¬
portunities to let him develop his great talent.
This pride needs to be released, and the pain
and despair felt and also released.

In this center, we will also uncover the fear
of failure that blocks taking the chance to move
out and create what one so dearly wants. This
also holds true of one's personal friendships
and social life in general. By avoiding contact,
this person also avoids revealing himself and
feeling the fear of not being liked on the one
hand, and competition and pride like, "I'm bet¬
ter than you; you are not good enough for me,"
on the other. Since our feelings of rejection orig¬
inate inside and we then project them out onto
the other, we avoid the other person to avoid
rejection. Taking the chance of going for the pro¬
fession you long for, moving toward the contacts
you long for and revealing your feelings about it
are ways of releasing these feelings and thus
opening this chakra.

The forehead center (chakra 6A) is associ¬
ated with the capacity to visualize and under¬
stand mental concepts. This includes the
person's concepts of reality and the universe or
how he sees the world and how he thinks the
world is likely to respond to him. If this center is
counterclockwise, one has confused mental con¬
cepts, or images about reality that are not true
and are usually negative. The person holding
them projects them onto the world and creates
his world by them. If this center is clogged and
weak, the person is usually blocked in his crea¬
tive ideas simply because the amount of energy
flowing through this center is small. If this cen¬
ter is strongly counterclockwise, then this per¬
son has the ability to generate strong ideas that
are negative. If this is combined with a strongly

functioning executive center, located at the back
of the head (chakra 6B), this can create havoc in
a person's life.

During the therapy process of purifying or
sorting our negative belief images, when an im¬
age arises in the energy system and begins to
function dominantly, this center will probably
spin counterclockwise, even if it is usually clock¬
wise. This therapy process brings the image to
the fore and causes it to manifest in the life of
the person. With therapeutic help, the person
will understand and see the image clearly for
what it is. The center will then turn around and
will spin clockwise. Usually this type of counter¬
clockwise motion can be detected by the sea¬
soned therapist because of the unstable quality
of feeling accompanied by the counterclockwise
motion. It will be apparent to the therapist that
this is not the normal state of affairs. For exam¬
ple, the chakra may even show a chaotic motion
which tells the practitioner that an issue regard¬
ing one of his client's concepts of reality is
strongly shaking the client's personality.

At the back of the head, the mental execu¬
tive center (chakra 6B) is associated with imple¬
menting the creative ideas formulated through
the center in the forehead. If the executive will
center is open, one's ideas are followed with the
appropriate action to cause them to materialize
in the physical world. If it is not open, the per¬
son has a rough time bringing his ideas into fru¬
ition.

It is especially frustrating to have the front
center (6A) open and the back one closed. One
has many creative ideas, but they never seem to
work out. There is usually an accompanying ex¬
cuse which blames the problem on the outer
world. Usually this person simply needs train¬
ing on how to carry out, step-by-step, what he
wants to accomplish. In doing this type of step-
by-step work, a lot of feelings will emerge. "I
can't stand to wait so long"; "I don't want to
take responsibility for this happening"; "I don't
want to test this idea in physical reality"; "1
don't accept this long process of creation, I just
want it to happen without so much work"; "You
do the work. I'll be the idea man." This person
probably lacked early training in how to take the
simple steps in the physical world to accomplish

Psychological Function of the Seven Major Chakras 79

his chosen purpose. He is also probably resist¬
ant to being in physical reality and in the posi¬
tion of an apprentice.

On the other hand, if this center is clockwise
and the idea center is counterclockwise, we have
an even more upsetting situation. Even if the
person's basic concepts are not in reality, she
will nevertheless proceed to carry the distorted
concepts out with a certain amount of success.
For example, if you believe this world is a nasty
place where "everyone is out for himself so you
just take what you want," and you have the abil¬
ity to do so because you know how to go about
it, i.e., your executive will is functioning, then
you may act like a criminal. In this case the
heart is probably also clogged. Your life will
prove your idea to a certain extent. You will be
successful to a certain extent until you get
caught. Or, with this kind of configuration you
may try to make something happen that is sim¬
ply impossible to do in the physical world. Or,
you may be the mover who carries out another
person's ideas, whatever they are.

The crown center (chakra 7) is related to the
person's connection to his spirituality and the

integration of his whole being, physical, emo¬
tional, mental and spiritual. If this center is
closed, the person probably does not have an
experiential connection to his spirituality. He
probably does not have that "cosmic feeling"
and does not understand what people are talk¬
ing about when they speak of their spiritual ex¬
periences. If this center is open, the person
probably often experiences his spirituality in a
very personal form, unique to that individual.
This spirituality is not one defined by dogma or
easily related with words. It is rather a state of
being, a state of transcendence of the mundane
reality into the infinite. It goes beyond the phys¬
ical world and creates in the individual a sense
of wholeness, peace and faith, giving him a
sense of purpose to his existence.

Chapter 9 Review

1. Describe the psychological function of each
chakra.

2. Explain what is meant by opened and closed
chakras, as described in this chapter.

Chapter 10

CHAKRA OR ENERGY
CENTER DIAGNOSIS

There are several ways to discern the state of the
chakras. In the beginning you will need to ex¬
plore which practice is easiest and most useful
for you.

The best way I have found to start sensing
the states of the chakras is to use a pendulum.
This device helps increase your sensitivities to
the energy flow because it acts as an amplifier.
The best pendulums I have found for this pur¬
pose are made of beechwood and are pear-
shaped. They are one inch in diameter and one
and a half inches long. Their energy field is dif¬
fused, easily permeated, and also pear-shaped.
It is symmetrical around its vertical axis, which
is important for this type of measurement.
(Beechwood pendulums can be purchased from
the Metaphysical Research Group, Archers'
Court, Stonestile Lane, Hastings, Sussex, En¬
gland.)

If you have developed some sensitivity in
your hands, or enjoy touching, you can practice
sensing the energy flowing in and out of the
chakras through feeling them with your hands.
This helps to get a sense of whether the energy
is freeflowing or clogged, weak or strong. You
can do the same thing with an acupuncture
point by simply placing your fingertip over it. In
this type of sensing, you may even get certain
physical feeling responses in your own body
that give you the information you wish to know.

Eventually, after you develop your High
Sense Perception to a greater degree, you may

be able to simply look at the chakras to see how
they are spinning (regularly or irregularly) and
what their colors are (dark and clogged, washed
out and weak, or clear, bright and of a strong
tone). You may also be able to see if, and specifi¬
cally how, they are disfigured. You may eventu¬
ally be able to perceive them on each layer of the
auric field.

But first let us practice using the pendulum.

Exercise to Diagnose Chakras
with a Pendulum

To measure the front chakras, ask your patient
to lie on his back. To measure the back chakras,
ask the patient to lie on his stomach.

To measure the state of the chakra, hold the
pendulum on a string about six inches long over
the chakra and empty your mind of all bias as to
the state of the chakra. (This is the hardest part
and requires practice.) Be sure that the pendu¬
lum is as close to the body as possible without
touching it. Your energy flows into the field of
the pendulum to energize it. This combined
field of the pendulum and your energy then in¬
teracts with the field of the subject, causing the
pendulum to move. (See Figure 10-1.) It will
probably move in a circular pattern, circumscrib¬
ing an imaginary circle above the body of your
subject. It may move back and forth in an ellipti¬
cal movement or a straight line. It may move

82 Hands of Light

erratically. The size and direction of the pendu¬
lum movement indicates the amount and direc¬
tion of energy flowing through the chakra.

Dr. John Pierrakos has found that a clock¬
wise movement of the pendulum denotes a psy-
chodynamically open chakra. That means that
the feelings and psychological experiences
which are governed by and flow through that
chakra are well balanced and full in that per¬
son's life. If the pendulum moves counterclock¬
wise, that chakra is psychodynamically closed,
indicating a problem area in its corresponding
psychological aspect. That means that the feel¬
ings and psychological experiences which are
governed by a flow through that chakra are not
balanced, because the energy is blocked, and
probably the person has negative experiences
associated with them.

The size of the circle made by the pendulum
is related to the chakra's strength and the
amount of energy flowing through it. It is also
related to the amount of energy the healer and
the subject have that day. If a larger circle is cir¬
cumscribed by the pendulum, there is a lot of
energy flowing through it. If the circle is small,
there is less energy flowing through it.

It is important to keep in mind that the size
of the chakra is not the diameter of the circular
figure circumscribed by the pendulum, but is in¬
dicated by it. The size of the pendulum's circle is
a function of the interaction of all three fields,
the field of the subject, therapist and pendu¬
lum, as mentioned earlier. If the energies of
both people are low, all chakras will appear to be
smaller. If the energies are high, all chakras will
appear to be larger. One must focus on compari¬
son of the relative sizes among the chakras.
Health is achieved by balancing the chakras to
create an even flow of energy through them all.
For health then, all chakras should be about the
same size.

There are many variations between the
clockwise and counterclockwise basic forms that
indicate various psychological states. Figure 10-
2 is a table of the various shapes a pendulum
circumscribes. Although at first glance this table
may seem a bit complicated, it is really quite
simple. Each movement circumscribed by the
pendulum is a variation between the extremes of

a fully open chakra (clockwise 6" diameter), C6,
or a fully closed chakra, which is counterclock¬
wise, CC6. I rarely find diameters larger than 6
inches unless the person is overusing a particu¬
lar chakra or is very open after a spiritual experi¬
ence, when most of the chakras are open. I have
measured up to CIO (clockwise with a diameter
of 10 inches).

The only exception to falling between C6
and CC6 is the completely still chakra (S) where
the pendulum exhibits no movement at all. In
this case, either the chakra is reversing its spin,
or the individual has so overused or held down
and blocked the particular psychological func¬
tioning associated with this chakra that it has
ceased to spin altogether and no longer metabo¬
lizes any energy from the Universal Energy
Field. This is a state that, if continued for very
long, will most assuredly result in disease, since
the body cannot function healthily without be¬
ing able to make use of outside energy. (See
Chapter 15 on the relationship between illness
and the chakras.)

Any elliptical swing of the pendulum indi¬
cates a right/left side imbalance of energy flow
in the body. The designations of left or right re¬
fer to the left or right sides of the patient's body,
i.e., the pendulum swings upward to the left
(CEL) or upwards towards the right (CER) side
of the patient's body. This also indicates that one
side of the body is stronger than the other. The
right side (CER, CCER) represents the active,
aggressive, "masculine" or yang nature. The left
side (CEL, CCEL) represents the passive, recep¬
tive, "feminine" or yin nature of the personality.
When the pendulum circumscribes an ellipse
slanted up toward the right side of the subject's
body, Dr. John Pierrakos has observed that the
personality has its masculine aspect more devel¬
oped than the feminine. This person will proba¬
bly be "overactive" in the sense that he would
be aggressive in moments when receptivity is;
more appropriate. This will happen with regardj
to issues directly related to the area of psychoH
logical functioning governed by the particular;
chakra which exhibits elliptical motion. ?

In any chakra where the elliptical pendulurri
swing is up toward the left (CEL, CCEL), the
person is more likely to be passive in situations

Healer's energy field

Figure 10-1: Dowsing Chakra with a Pendulum

84 Hands of Light

Figure 10-2

ENERGY CENTER DIAGNOSIS

SYMBOL*

NOTATION

MEANING OF SYMBOL

PSYCHOLOGICAL INDICATIONS

clockwise, 6" diameter

Open and harmonious with clear
perception of reality.

CER3

clockwise, elliptical, right,

3" diameter

Open. Active/receptive split with active
side of personality more developed than
receptive. Perception of reality biased
toward active, masculine or yang side of
dualism.

CEL3

clockwise, elliptical, left 3"
diameter

Open. Active/receptive split with
receptive side more developed.
Perception of reality biased toward
receptive, feminine or yin side of
duality.

CEV3

clockwise, elliptical, vertical,

3' diameter

Open. With some upward displacement
of energy toward the spiritual to avoid
interaction with people.

CEH6

clockwise, elliptical,
horizontal, 6 " diameter

Open. With some compacting and
holding down of energy to avoid
energetic interaction with people.

CC6

counterclockwise, 6"
diameter

Closed and inharmonious, with active
projections of reality.

CCER3

counterclockwise, elliptical,
right, 3" diameter

Closed. Split, aggressive aspect more
developed than passive with projection
of a passive, yang biased reality.

CCEL2

counterclockwise, elliptical,
left 2 " diameter

Closed. Split, passive aspect more
developed than aggressive with
projection of an aggressive biased
reality.

CCEV3

counterclockwise, elliptical,
vertical, 3" diameter

Closed. With upward displacement of
energy toward the spiritual to avoid
interaction with people.

CCEH5

counterclockwise, elliptical,
horizontal, 5' diameter

Closed. Some holding down and
compacting energy to avoid energetic
interaction with people.

Vertical, 6 ” swing

Moving feelings and energy toward the
spiritual to avoid personal interaction.

—

Horizontal, 4" swing

Holding energy flow and feelings down
to avoid personal interactions. Strong
block indicated.

* Remember that the figure symbols are drawn as you are looking at the front of the patient's body.

Chakra or Energy Center Diagnosis 85

Figure 10-2, Continued

SYMBOL*

MEANING OF SYMBOL

PSYCHOLOGICAL INDICATIONS

Right, 3' swing

Severe aggressive/passive split,
aggressive side more developed than
passive.

Left, 4* swing

Severe aggressive/passive split, passive
side more developed than aggressive.

Still

Chakra not functioning at all, will lead
to pathology in physical body.

CEAS5

Clockwise, elliptical, axis
shift, 5" diameter

Tremendous change taking place in
person who is actively and deeply
working on the issues involved.

Probably preoccupied with relevant
issues as defined by chakra function.
Sensitive chaos.

CCEAS6

Counterclockwise, elliptical,
axis shifting, 6" diameter

Same as CEAS, with negative chaos.

* Remember that the figure symbols are drawn as you are looking at the front of the patient's body.

related to issues involved with the particular
psychological aspects governed by that chakra.
For example, if the will center between the
shoulder blades (4B) reads passive (elliptical to¬
wards upper left), the person will be unable to
reach out for what he wants. This person will
remain passive when aggressive action is called
for. This person will wait for someone else to do
it, or someone else to give it to him. He will also
not be able to stand up for his rights or his turn.
Many times, a false humility is held up as the
reason this person remains passive, but the
truth is that he is afraid to be aggressive, usually
due to some very deep images about what it
means to be aggressive.

The image about aggression comes directly
from childhood experience. For example, a child
may have had a very aggressive father, who
would overpower or humiliate the child every
time he reached out for what he wanted. This
convinced the child that reaching out for what
he wanted was not a good way to get what he
wanted. Children are very creative, so the child
probably experimented with ways of getting
what he wanted, or at least of getting something

as compensation for what he wanted. Whatever
way works is what the child will adopt as natu¬
ral behavior. He will continue this behavior until
it no longer works well in his life. Unfortunately,
the habit is hard to break, and changing to find
new ways takes work, because aggression is
seen primarily as negative. Usually under all the
passivity is a very hostile aggressive component
of the personality that would like to blast out
feelings without restraint and take what it
wants. If this is done repeatedly in a therapeutic
setting, the person will eventually be able to in¬
tegrate his healthy aggression with the rest of
his personality. This aggressive work needs to
be done simultaneously with work that turns
passivity into healthy receptivity.

The more the circular movement of the pen¬
dulum is distorted above any given chakra, the
more severe is the psychological distortion. The
most severe right/left split is shown by the back
and forth movement of the pendulum at a 45
degree angle to the vertical axis of the body (R3,
L4 of Figure 10-2). The larger the pendulum
movement, the greater the amount of energy
contained in the distortion. For example, an R6

86 Hands of Light

measurement for chakra 4B indicates that the
person will simply and aggressively take what
he wants, no matter what the circumstances are.

The same general rule for measuring sever¬
ity holds true of the back and forth pendulum
swing which is either vertical (parallel to the
body's vertical axis [V]) or horizontal (perpen¬
dicular to the body's vertical axis [H]). The verti¬
cal aspect indicates that the individual is
diverting energy upward toward the vertical,
which means he's avoiding personal interaction.
The horizontal pendulum movement indicates
the individual is holding down and compacting
the energy flow and feelings to avoid personal
interaction. For example, a pendulum reading of
V5 at chakra 3A indicates that the person is foc¬
using his personal connection toward the verti¬
cal and spirituality, and avoiding a personal
relationship with another human being. He de¬
fines who he is in the universe from the point of
view of a spiritual belief and cuts out the aspect
of being connected to another human being.
Whereas a pendulum reading of H5 for the
same chakra would indicate that the person is
not connecting to anyone, not on the spiritual
level, not on the human level. This could lead to
personal isolation. This particular motion could
go into a still chakra (S) from underuse and
compaction. Strong physical psychodynamic
work is needed in such a case.

When an individual is focusing his psycho¬
logical work on a particular aspect of his being,
either from deciding to do so from an inner
place or forced to from some outside circum¬
stance, the particular chakra or chakras involved
will probably display chaotic or asymmetrical
movement (CEAS, CCEAS) as in Figure 10-2.
This movement will cause the pendulum to
swing chaotically, usually exhibiting elliptical
motion combined with a shifting axis. At first,
this movement may confuse the beginner; how¬
ever, if the pendulum is held over the chakra for
a longer period of time, the axis shift will be
observable. The circumscribed pattern of the
pendulum will look like the last two items in
Figure 10-2. Whenever this type of movement is
observed, the therapist knows a lot is going on
in the client. It is time to work deeply on the
issues involved, but at the same time giving the

client a lot of personal time and space to do his
own self examination/transformation. If he can
take a few days off from work at this time and be
undisturbed by his daily routine, he will be able
to make the best of this period of great personal
change. I have regularly observed this phenom¬
enon in people undergoing deep personal trans¬
formation work in weeklong intensive retreats.

As the therapist becomes more proficient in
use of the pendulum, he will begin to observe
more "qualities" in his measurements. The rate
of swing (how fast the pendulum moves) indi¬
cates the amount of energy being metabolized
through the chakra. With practice, the therapist
can also "pick up" qualities such as tightness,
tension, exuberance, heaviness, sadness, grief,
peacefulness and clarity. A fast swing can be fast
and tight, indicating overwork, tension and
pressure in that area. A fast swing can also be
combined with an exuberant feeling, indicating
a lot of positive aggression in that area. Thus, by
developing more acute senses to the quality of
the energy flowing through the chakra, the ther¬
apist can be better informed about the client's
state. He can tell how stable a chakra is, approxi¬
mately how long it has been in the state it is in,
whether it changes back and forth between two
states, and more. A chakra may be open 20% of
the time, or 80% of the time. This can be
"picked up" by the sensitively trained therapist.
This, of course, takes practice with verification.

Chakras go through different phases as they
change from closed to open through the inten¬
sive work in therapy. The process of changing
one's belief system redirects chakra movement.
A chakra that is continually closed at a large
diameter (CC6) will sometimes, over a period of
time, decrease its diameter, turn around and
then increase its diameter in the harmonious di¬
rection until it becomes C6. Or, more often a
CC6 chakra, say in the heart or solar plexus,
may, within as little as five minutes of deep cry¬
ing, turn around to C6. This type of change will
not hold long, but, as the person continues his
work over a long period of time, the chakra
tends to stay "open" longer each time it is
opened. This increases its overall percentage
time of harmonious functioning, and the person
will feel himself being happy for longer periods

Chakra or Energy Center Diagnosis 87

of time. Over a long time, the chakra will stabi¬
lize to the open position and will rarely close.
The individual usually then moves on in his
process to work on the next disharmoniously
functioning chakra that interferes with his daily
happiness.

I have found that when a chronically closed
chakra opens during a therapy session, it is
common that another chakra that is usually
open will close briefly in compensation. The
personality is not able to tolerate the new
"opened" state without some degree of imag¬
ined "protection" in the beginning.

Intensive Retreat Case Study

Now let us examine the chakra configurations
actually measured in a case. This is a woman
who came to the Phoenicia Pathwork Center in
Phoenicia, New York, on two separate occasions
to do a weeklong retreat that included very in¬
tensive work on herself. The first was in 1979,
and the second in 1981. The second time she
came, it was with her new husband, and they
did very intensive couples work. The chakra
measurements were taken before the week's
work started, and then again after the week's
work was completed. All measurements were
taken when the woman was in a very quiet state
and had been for some time. They are shown in
Figure 10-3. To interpret these readings you will
need to use both Figures 7-3 and 9-1 and Figure
10-2 of this chapter on the meaning of each cha¬
kra.

As you can see from the readings, the most
harmoniously functioning centers are those of
the reason, next those of feeling, the worst those
of the will. This means that she has a fine mind,
which functions well, especially in its concepts
of reality (6A) and in the integration of her per¬
sonality and spirituality (7).

Her mental executive will center (6B) has a
right/left split most of the time, meaning that
she tends to be aggressive when it is more ap¬
propriate to be receptive in any given situation
that is related to carrying out her ideas in a step-
by-step fashion. She will decide what to do and
proceed to do it in a step-by-step way, regardless

Figure 10-3

INTENSIVE RETREAT CASE STUDY
CHAKRA READINGS

CHAKRA

1979

1981

Before

After

Before

After

Crown

retreat

center (7)
Executive

will (6B)
Professional

CER4

CER6

will (5B)

Outer ego

CC3

CER3

CC3

will (4B)

Health

CC5

wfll (3B)

Sexual

CER3

CC3

CEH4

will (2B)
Conceptual

CC4

(6A)

Receptivity/

responsibility

(5A)

CER4

Loving (4A)

Universal

knowing (3A)
Receptive

CC4

CC3

sexual (2A)

CEAS4

of whether or not it is time to start. When she
arrived for her first retreat, this center was ag¬
gressive. By the time the first reheat was over,
this center had calmed down, was no longer ag¬
gressive, but rather was still. This configuration
of stillness did not hold or change to harmony
as it often does over time. Two years later, when
she came back, the center was again aggressive;
and it did not change during the second retreat.
At the time of the last reading, she still had a
problem with being over aggressive when carry¬
ing out her ideas. This was the only case of no
change in her chakras. All the other chakras
were balanced by the end of the second retreat.

Her other will centers showed problems,
too, with each one of them not functioning at
one or another time during the weeks involved.
When she arrived in 1979, chakras 5B, 3B and

88 Hands of Light

2B were not functioning properly. This means
that she was negatively aggressive in terms of
pride (chakra 5B), self-destructiveness (chakra
3B) and dampening her sexual power. She
dampened her sexual power by splitting the en¬
ergy flow in chakra 2B into four parts (the pen¬
dulum showed four distinct and separate circles)
and using it in negative ways, such as fights
with her ex-husband. After the first retreat, the
only improvement in her will functioning was in
the area of pride, which had let down and be¬
come positive functioning in the area of her pro¬
fession (5B). It still had an overactive
component, which took the place of the pride
used to compensate for feelings of inadequacy
in that area. When she came to the second re¬
treat two years later, she still carried with her
the same issues of will. These got resolved dur¬
ing the course of the second intensive retreat,
and all the will centers started to function nor¬
mally.

The feeling centers showed some difficulties,
but not as much as the will. The heart center
(4A) remained open throughout both years.
(She is very good at loving.) The throat center
(5A) showed trouble with taking in nourishment
and an aggressive denial of her needs. This soft¬
ened by the end of the first week, and when she
came back in two years, it had been resolved,
mostly through establishing a very sweet rela¬
tionship with the man she loves. On the other
hand, the solar plexus center (3A), which relates
to who you are in the universe, was closed
when she first came. It opened during her re¬
treat, but in the second year period, between
retreats, it closed again. By the end of the sec¬
ond retreat, it was open again and metabolizing
more energy.

You will note that her sexual power center
cleared when her relationship with the man she
loves became more stable and clearly defined
through the work in the couples retreat.

During the first retreat, she opened her feel¬
ing centers and began to feel safe in the univer¬
sal world of feelings. In the second retreat.

having done a lot of work on the feeling centers,
which were not as blocked as the will centers,
she was able to deeply confront her misuse of
her will and rebalance it. As you can see from
the readings, most of the chakras showed large
diameters, which means that the person pos¬
sessing this energy system has a lot of power.

It is interesting to note that the crown, third
eye and heart centers all remained open through
the two year period. This means that she is very
connected to her spirituality, conceptual reality,
and is capable of loving. The overall picture of
her personality is that her primary clear func¬
tion is reason and that she compensates for and
defends against vulnerable feelings with the
will, which is too aggressive.

As I said earlier, by the end of the second
retreat, all centers except the executive will cen¬
ter were functioning well. As long as they stay
that way, she will be balanced in her reason, will
and emotional functions and will lead a more
happy and balanced life.

Chapter 10 Review

1. What does a pendulum reading at C6 mean
for the front aspect of the fourth chakra?

2. What does a pendulum reading of CC5 mean
for the rear aspect of the third chakra?

3. What does a pendulum reading of V6 mean
for the front aspect of chakra 2?

4. What does a pendulum reading of CC4 mean
for the front fifth chakra, physically as well as
psychologically?

5. What does a pendulum reading of H5 mean
for the rear aspect of chakra 2?

Food For Thought

6. If you work with someone to open their heart
and sex centers and you succeed, why might
they dose their solar plexus chakra? Is that
OK?

Chapter 11

OBSERVATIONS OF AURAS
IN THERAPY SESSIONS

The aura is really the "missing link" between
biology and physical medicine and psychother¬
apy. It's the "place" where all the emotions,
thoughts, memories and behavior patterns we
discuss so endlessly in therapy are located.
They're not just suspended somewhere in our
imaginations, but they are located in time and
space. Thoughts and emotions move between
people in time and space through the human
energy field, and learning about it is the way to
get a handle on this activity. Let's look at some
of the fluid energy flows of auras as people
move through their daily lives and then in ther¬
apy sessions. We will concentrate on the colorful
moving forms of the lower four layers of the
aura and return to our discussion of chakras in a
later chapter.

Perceiving Colors in the Field

When one first starts to read auras, the meaning
of the colors may not be understood directly.
Then, with practice, general meaning of colors
will become dear. When the practitioner has
more sensitivity through using her gift, she will
also read the meaning of the colors she per¬
ceives. (Color will be discussed in detail in
Chapter 23.)

One of the earliest "explosions" of the hu¬
man energy field I observed remains one of the
most vivid. In 1972 during a bioenergetics-

primal scream intensive workshop, I watched
Linda light up like a Christmas tree as she
screamed about the death of her father from
cancer. Bright beams of red, yellow, orange and
some blues streamed from her head. I blinked
my eyes, but it didn't go away. I squinted; I
moved around the room; I looked for the after¬
image. The phenomenon was still there. I was
seeing something. I could no longer deny the
many experiences I had had observing apparent
colors around people's heads. I began observing
the phenomenon more closely.

As I slowly became more proficient at seeing
the aura, I started trying to correlate my findings
with the personal state of each subject. I found
that people flash bright colors when they are en¬
gaged in feelings or actions. When they are
quiet, the auric field returns to a stable "nor¬
mal" state for that person.

In general I have found that the "normal" or
"quiescent" aura looks like Figure 7-1. It has a
dark bluish-purple or clear pulsating layer out to
one quarter inch or as much as one and a half
inches from the skin. It is constantly pulsating at
the rate of about 15 pulses per minute. The pul¬
sations usually form a wave-like motion down
the arms, legs and torso. First it is surrounded
by a light blue to gray hazy layer which is much
brighter close to the body and fades with dis¬
tance from the body. The blue color generally
turns to a yellow color around the head at about
three to four inches in distance. There are usu-

90 Hands of Light

ally streamers of the lighter blue coming off the
fingertips and toes and out of the top of the
head. I have found that most people are able to
see the streamers off the tips of the fingers with
a few minutes practice and clear instructions.
Although most of the time these streamers are
blue, their colors vary in the red and purple ar¬
eas also. They may be any color.

Exercises to Observe Other
People's Auras

Now that you have done the exercises in Chap¬
ter 7 observing the aura at your fingertips, let's
look at other people's auras.

Again use a darkened room—later evening
light, not real dark. You should be able to see
each other's faces quite easily. Ask your friend
to stand in front of a plain white wall or a
screen. Make sure you do not have any lights
that you may accidentally look into. You want to
relax your eyes.

To see the aura, you want to use your night¬
time vision, as when you are walking in the
dark and you notice that you can see things bet¬
ter if you do not look directly at them. You are
using the rods rather than the cones in your eye.
The rods are much more sensitive to low light
levels than the cones, which are for daytime and
bright color use.

Look at the area of space either near the top
of your friend's head or at the neck-shoulder
area. Unfocus your eyes so that you are looking
at an area of space rather than a fine line. As
you softly gaze at a space four to six inches deep
around the head, allow the light to come into
your eyes. Create a sensation of allowing some¬
thing to come into your eyes, rather than your
eyes reaching out to grasp something as they
sometimes do when you try hard to see some¬
thing. Give yourself plenty of time. Do this with
other people, preferably with someone who
sees auras so that you can correlate what you
see.

You may think you see something, and as
soon as you do, it will be gone before you can
even say, "That's it!" Make sure that if you look

away at a blank spot on the wall, you do not see
the same thing. That is the afterimage effect, in
which your eye will hold an image due to a com¬
plementary color effect or bright contrast inten¬
sity. The auric phenomenon is very fast and
doesn't stay. It pulsates. You may see it flow
down the arm or flash a color upward and out of
the field. You may see a haze around the body
that does not look exciting. Don't be disap¬
pointed; this is only the beginning.

Pick up a pair of aura goggles at the local
holistic book store and follow the instructions
you find in them. They help you develop your
ability to see and have a cumulative effect on the
sensitivity of the eye. Cobalt blue glass is the
best color, but hard to get. Most aura goggles
are dark purple and work fine.

Don't do any of these exercises too long; you
will find yourself getting very tired after a while.
I have found that a group of people get very
excited when they first see something; then as
they continue, doubts come in and each per¬
son's energy system tires. Soon you have a
room full of very quiet, tired people. So just do
a little every day. And check out what you have
seen with the illustrations and descriptions that
follow.

If a person has a strong feeling, his quies¬
cent aura will suddenly be permeated with an¬
other color and form correlating to his emotional
state. Then, after the feeling tones down, the
aura regains its original general appearance. The
length of time this takes varies with the individ¬
ual and depends on several factors. If the per¬
son has not released the feeling, it will remain in
his aura (usually faded) until he does. If he re¬
leases part of the feeling, that part will be re¬
leased. The colors and forms may rapidly flash
and move out of the auric field, or they may
simply fade away over a period of a few minutes
or even a few weeks. They may even be colored
over or masked by other colors and forms in a
layered effect. Some forms, which I will discuss
later, stay in the aura for years. Every thought,
feeling, and experience a person has affects and
changes his aura. Some effect always remains.

Figure 11-1A shows the normal aura of a
man. As he sings (Figure 11-1B), his aura ex¬
pands and brightens. Bright lightning-like

Observations of Auras in Therapy Sessions 91

flashes and sparks of iridescent blue-violet move
off just after the movement of inhaling, before
he starts each new line. As the audience be¬
comes more attentive, its general aura expands.
Great arcs of light reach out from the singer
to the audience, and the two auras connect.
Mutual forms begin to build as feelings flow be¬
tween performer and audience. These energy-
consciousness forms relate in structure and
color to the mutual thoughts and feelings of the
group and the music being created. At the end
of the song, these forms are disconnected and
broken up by the applause, which acts as an
eraser to wipe the field clean for the next crea¬
tion. Both performer and audience are ener¬
gized by absorbing the energy created by the
music. Some of this energy will be internalized
to break blocks held in the body; some of it will
be used for the next creation.

As another person lectures on his favorite
subject, his aura expands and becomes yellow-
gold with silvery-gold or iridescent blue sparks,
shown in Figure 11-1C. The same speaker-
audience phenomenon occurs, this time with an
emphasis on the mental energies, which show
up as yellow-gold. After the lecture, his aura re¬
mains expanded for some time, as he is high
from his work. There has been a mutual ex¬
change of energy consciousness. Some of the
audience now vibrates more at his level. Figure
11-ID shows the aura of a man speaking with
passion about education. Those who listen will
probably pick up some of his pink-maroon color.
This occurs by a process of raising one's own
vibrations to his level through harmonious in¬
duction. Love glows as a soft beautiful rose in
the aura. It sometimes also has gold with it.
Spiritual feelings have a range of colors: blue for
the speaker of truth, purple for spirituality and
silvery gold for purity.

People sometimes radiate colors similar to
those they like to wear. Figure 11-1E shows a
woman after leading a core energetics class (a
physical exercise class focused on bringing out
feelings to help understand their psycho¬
dynamics). This green, which she wears often,
is associated with physical health and healing.
In another example, Figure 11-1F shows a man
who often radiates a lilac color which corres¬

ponds to one of his favorite shirts. This color
appears to correlate with loving feelings and
softness in him. Figure 11-1G shows a woman
meditating to increase the energy in her field,
which displayed many colors, some of which
trickled down her front in fluid motion. Her will
center between the shoulder blades was parti¬
ally visible.

When a woman gets pregnant, her field ex¬
pands and becomes much brighter. Figure 11-
1H shows a woman about six months pregnant
with a girl. The mother-to-be has beautiful soft
balls of blue, pink, yellow and green rolling over
each other down her shoulders.

These are only a few examples of how the
human energy field is bound up with and inher¬
ently connected to everything we see occurring
on a purely physical and psychological level.

Anger and Other
Negative Emotions

Red has always been associated with anger.
However, one day my very happy, energetic 11-
year-old son, full of joy while playing, looked
like Figure 11-1A, with bright red and orange
streamers radiating from his head. The quality
of the color red is what denotes anger. Bright
red orange is not anger; it is related to vibrant
life force. The full-blown reaction of the woman
in the primal scream workshop is depicted in
Figure 11-2B. She is having a large number of
feelings all at once, which accounts for so many
colors. They are of high intensity, which shows
in the aura as brightness and the strong rays
emitted off the body in straight lines.

Someone who is angry has a dark red color.
When this anger is expressed, it shoots off the
person in flashes like bolts of lightning or round
sparks that move away from the person, as
shown in Figure 11-2C. I have seen this many
times in groups and sessions.

In contrast. Figure 11-2D shows an example
in which the person did not release her anger
and pain. As the red spot emerged from the
throat area, it slowly moved outward. A mo¬
ment later the group leader made a comment to

92 Hands of Light

her that was, in my opinion, hurtful. At this
point, the red spot quickly moved back toward
her body and into her heart area. When it hit
her heart, she started crying. The crying was not
of the cathartic type. It was rather "poor me, the
victim." My interpretation of this event is that
she had stabbed herself in her heart with her
own anger.

Fear, on the other hand, has a whitish-gray,
prickly appearance in the aura, as in white with
fear. It is very unpleasant looking and has a re¬
pulsive odor. Envy appears to be dark, dirty
green and sticky, as in "green with envy" Sad¬
ness is dark gray and heavy as in the cartoons of
people with dark clouds over their head. Frus¬
tration and irritability will probably have dark
reddish tones (red with anger), but are mostly
apparent from their irregular vibrations that beat
against another person's energy field, causing
very unpleasant sensations. Usually one's
friends react to this interference by trying to
elicit a direct expression of negative feelings,
which are much more pleasant to deal with. For
example, one will say, "Are you angry?" An¬
other will blurt out angrily, "No!" Thus some of
this annoying interference is released.

Effect of Drugs on the Aura

Drugs like LSD, marijuana, cocaine and alcohol
are detrimental to the brilliant, healthy colors of
the aura and create "etheric mucus," as does
disease. Figure 11-2E shows the effect of snort¬
ing cocaine on one person's aura. Every time he
would snort cocaine on Saturday night, at his
Tuesday afternoon session he would have a lot
of gray, sticky etheric mucus on the right side of
his face and head, while the left side would re¬
main relatively clear. I asked him if he used one
nostril more than the other; he thought not. My
repeated confrontations—I could tell whenever
he did it—and a graphic description of his
"etheric snot" helped him stop this habit.

Figure 11-2F shows an aura of a man who
had taken many LSD trips and drunk a lot of
alcohol. The aura is dirty greenish-brown. The
dirty green spot, which slowly moved down¬
ward and was not released, correlated to his

mixed, undifferentiated, withheld feelings of an¬
ger, envy and pain. Had he been able to sepa¬
rate these feelings, understand their basis,
express and release them. I'm sure the spot
would have separated into brighter clearer
shades of the corresponding colors—red, green
and gray—and then moved off. However, due to
the amount of dark contamination of his field,
this man has a lot of energetic cleansing to do to
remove his etheric mucus before he can raise his
energy level high enough to clarify and move
his feelings.

An "Apparent" Weight
in the Aura

Figure 11-2G shows a man who also had in¬
dulged for years in drugs like LSD and mari¬
juana, with the resulting dirty green aura. The
waste from these experiences appears in the up¬
per right. It appears to exhibit weight because
he always held his head at an angle which
seemed to balance the form. This form always
remained in the same position, week after week.
When I pointed it out to him, he was able to see
it. (He used a mirror.) In order to remove this
form, he would also (in addition to what has
already been mentioned) have to get off drugs
and cleanse his field. In addition to bodywork, I
recommend fasting and a cleansing diet. He
would then be able to increase his energy field
strength and be able to break into this accumu¬
lated waste to dissipate it. .

An interesting display of "apparent" weight
associated with mucous consistency is shown in
Figure 11-2H. This woman had been a "good
girl" type for years and finally just reached her
rebelliousness. She stopped being so "nice" and
got very angry during her session. She knocked
down the chairs in the room and even stomped
on the tissue box, tearing it to pieces. She left
the session feeling liberated. However, the next
week she contracted and withdrew very deeply
and came into my office with a terrible head¬
ache. She moved carefully and held her shoul¬
ders up around her ears. At this point, I
observed a large "blob" of mucus on top of her
head. Apparently the mucus had been released

Observations of Auras in Therapy Sessions 93

in the earlier session and had accumulated
there. (The phenomenon of toxin release from
bioenergetic work is well known. Strong en¬
ergy flow releases toxins held in the tissues.
Sometimes people get "sick" after deep work.
That sickness is called the "Flukey Flu") My
client was no longer "rebellious" but now ex¬
hibited the rather masochistic behavior of self¬
punishment. I suggested starting the session
with physical movement. I asked her to bend
forward in a kind of whipping motion with her
upper half. As she did so, the mucus ball
sprang forward, extending about two and a half
feet in front of her. She started to fall forward as
if from a large weight (Figure 11-2H). She
caught herself, and then the mucus sprang back
to her head as if pulled by elastic. She almost
fell over backwards. She was too afraid to repeat
the movement, so we did a lot of bodywork foc¬
using on feeling her legs, standing firmly on her
feet, and feeling connected to the earth support¬
ing her. This process is called grounding. By the
end of the session the mucus had distributed
itself in a thin layer over her body. Her headache
was gone. It took several weeks of bodywork to
rid her of the entire mucus layer.

Exercise to Experience Apparent
Weight of the Energy Field

An exercise done often in Aikido classes will
help you have an experience of the effect of
weight in the aura.

Have two people stand on each of your
sides. They are going to try to pick you up by
grasping your upper arm at the top and at the
bottom. When they pick you up for all of these
exercises, make sure that they do it in a way that
lifts you straight up, rather than pushing you to
one side first—that may break your roots.

First do it for practice to see how heavy you
feel. Sense how easy/difficult it is for them to
pick you up. Now take some time to send your
energy field upward. Think "up"; focus on the
ceiling. When you have a good focus that you
can keep there, ask them to try to pick you up.
Was it easier?

Now give yourself time to focus on increas¬
ing your connection with the ground. Grow
roots from your fingertips and the bottom of
your feet into the - ground and deep into the
earth. Concentrate on the strong and powerful
energetic connection you have with the ground.
When you have a very good focus, ask them to
pick you up again. Are you heavier and harder
to pick up? Probably.

"Dissociated Thought Forms"
in the Aura

In the course of my years of bioenergetic prac¬
tice, I have observed a phenomenon which 1 re¬
fer to as moving spaces of reality. These
"spaces" 1 find similar to those described in the
study of topography, where a given "set" or
"domain" contains a set of characteristics which
then define the mathematical operations that are
possible within that domain. In terms of psy¬
chodynamics, there exist "spaces of reality" or
"belief systems" containing groups of thought
forms which are associated with conceptions
and misconceptions of reality. Each thought
form contains its own definitions of reality, such
as, all men are cruel; love is weak; being in con¬
trol is safe and strong. From my observations, as
people move through daily experience they also
move through different "spaces" or levels of re¬
ality defined by these groups of thought forms.
The world is experienced differently in each
group or space of reality.

These thought forms are energetic, observ¬
able realities which radiate colors at various in¬
tensities. Their intensity and definition of form
are a result of the energy or importance a person
has given them. Thought forms are created,
built and maintained by their owners through
habitual thoughts. The more definite and clear
the thoughts, the more definite the form. The
nature and strength of emotions associated with
the thoughts give the form its color, intensity
and power. These thoughts may or may not be
conscious. For example, a thought form can be
built from constantly thinking of a fear like
"He's going to leave me." The creator of the

94 Hands of Light

thought form will act as if it is going to happen.
The energy field of the thought form will affect
the field of the person it is about in a negative
way. It will probably have the effect of pushing
the person away. The more this is given power,
by putting energy into it either consciously or
unconsciously, the more effective it will be in
creating the feared result. Usually these thought
forms are so naturally a part of the personality
that the individual doesn't even notice them.
They begin to form in childhood and are based
on a child's reasoning, then integrated into the
personality. They are like extra baggage a person
carries about within himself, not noticing their
effect, which is very great. These conglomerate
thought forms, or belief systems, attract many
"effects" in one's outer reality.

Since these forms are not deeply buried in
the unconscious but are on the edge of the con¬
sciousness, they can be retrieved through such
methods as Core Energetic bodywork, word as¬
sociation games and meditation. When the
forms are brought to the focus of the conscious¬
ness by expressing the feelings associated with
them and releasing those feelings, they are then
possible to change. This process allows a clearer
view of the assumptions about reality which
make up the forms. When the invalid assump¬
tions (remember they are based on logic from
childhood) are uncovered, seen and released,
they can be replaced by a more mature, clear
view of reality, which in turn leads to the crea¬
tion of positive life experiences.

Within some personalities, these forms are
interconnected and the person's consciousness
is rarely immersed totally in one space without
being aware of most of the others, so the person
maintains a high degree of integration in his
daily life.

On the other hand, a different type of per¬
sonality may flow from one space of reality to
the other with alacrity, but may not be aware of
any connectedness between them. He may not
be able to integrate or understand this dynamic
flow and thus lives in confusion, especially
when a particular chronic cyclical flow is trig¬
gered off internally. He may then be caught in
an automatic sequential flow from one thought

to the next while remaining hopelessly entan¬
gled and unable to free himself from this
chronic cycle until the whole thing is played
out.

He may then move to a different state of re¬
ality only because the cyclical action of the
thought form has exhausted all of the available
energy. He will not know how he moved out of
the cyclical pattern and, therefore, will probably
be unable to extricate himself from the cycle the
next time it is triggered. These states of reality
can be euphoric, as in the state in which a per¬
son thinks he will accomplish great things and
become famous or rich but he is not aware of the
tremendous amount of practical work ahead of
him before he can attain such a goal. Or it may
be an opposite effect, in which the person sees
himself in a much worse a state than is the case.
In either state, he is not in truth about himself
or his life situation. In both states he is probably
seeing a part of himself and exaggerating it. He
may have the potential to create all the great
things he sees for himself in the first state, but
much work and time is needed. On the other
hand, in the second negative state, he sees the
parts of himself that he needs to change, but
forgets that change is possible.

William Butler, in his book How to Read the
Aura, has observed that particular thought
forms remain stationary in the energy field until
triggered by an internal or external energy in¬
put . These forms then move through the aura in
a chronic sequence but are not released. They
simply play themselves out and become dor¬
mant until gaining enough energy to move
again. Thought forms gain energy through the
individual's habitual semi-conscious thoughts
and related feelings. They also gain energy by
attracting similar thoughts and feelings from
other people. In other words, if you continually
judge yourself about something, your actions
and feelings will follow your judgments and
soon, through both, the people you know will
get the picture and agree with you, thus send¬
ing you energy in the form of their thoughts and
feelings about you which agree with yours. For
example, if you keep telling yourself that you are
dumb, unworthy, ugly or fat, soon others will

Observations of Auras in Therapy Sessions 95

agree with you. This energy is added to your
personal stockpile until your thought form has
enough energy (reaching critical mass) to be
triggered. You will then fall into a state in which
you are convinced you are dumb, ugly, unwor¬
thy, or fat, until the energy in the thought form
is dissipated for the time being. Or you may, of
course, attract an external event which will trig¬
ger it with an explosion of energy. In either case,
the process is the same. Such a trigger is not
necessarily negative, for if the individual is in a
therapeutic process, he may be able to break out
of his chronic cycle and break up the cyclical
form substantially enough to handle it very well
the next time it gets triggered.

If the therapist is able to perceive these reali¬
ties and describe them or help the client de¬
scribe them, then the therapist may be able to
help the client free himself as he moves from
one reality to the next. The therapist's descrip¬
tion of each reality state, as the client is experi¬
encing it, will give the client an overview of the
whole process. This overview will help the cli¬
ent create for himself an inner objective ob¬
server, who can also define each space as he
goes in and out of it. From this work, the client
and therapist will then be able to define more
clearly the client's chronic cycle and find a way
out of it together. They can then find a mode to
break it next time it starts.

For example, when a particularly schizoid
client (see Chapter 13) is stuck in such a form, I
simply go to the blackboard and start drawing
and labeling these forms the moment he ex¬
presses them. As he repeats thoughts out loud,
I draw an arrow from the previous thought to
the one being expressed. Soon all the cyclical
thoughts are depicted on the board. The outer
surface of these forms is usually quite limited,
meaning that the client experiences a very nar¬
row reality in which definitions and/or distinc¬
tions are seen as negative and sometimes
flat—such as all other people appearing to be far
away or even dangerous. Or the client may com¬
pletely believe that he is a victim in life. The
breaking point comes when the client is able to
hold one of the thoughts, which has particularly
strong emotional content, long enough to ex¬

press this emotion. Usually, if the client is able
to tolerate the anger or pain associated with the
thought, he is able to break out and connect to
the deeper levels inside the thought form.

Figure 11-3 shows such an example. In this
particular case, as I drew the forms, the client
saw the overall picture. This greater understand¬
ing helped her center herself and release herself
from the chronic cycle. She went into her anger,
expressed it, and then saw the deeper issues in¬
volved. Much of the outer level of this particular
thought form is the mask in which the person
does not see or take self-responsibility, but
blames others. She does this in order to appear
"good." This, of course, leaves her powerless
until the deeper reality, which is the heart of the
thought form, is reached. When, from child¬
hood trauma, she felt that she was just plain
"bad" inside and nothing could be done about
it, my client understood that in the future she
had the choice of seeing and understanding the
whole structure, going first into her anger at
feeling trapped, and then into the underlying
pain in the thought form. She usually avoided
this pain by staying on the surface of the
thought form (and, therefore, in unreality). By
feeling the pain, she is able to integrate the child
inside, who feels "bad," with her inner adult,
who knows she is not.

Usually, expressing and releasing the feel¬
ings is the key to breaking out of a cyclical
thought pattern. Most of the time these forms
have become dissociated in the first place in or¬
der for the person not to experience the feelings
contained in them. The individual spends a lot
of effort during his daily life trying to avoid set¬
ting the thought form in motion, because it may
evoke the unwanted feeling. Even though the
person avoids situations that would evoke such
feelings, it does not completely work, because
he is continually recharging the thought forms.
As an individual continues in his therapeutic
process, over time the form becomes more and
more connected with the rest of the personality;
the negative aspects are transformed into posi¬
tive functions and integrated into the "normal"
aura of the person as formless clear bright
colors.

96 Hands of Light

Figure 11-3: Dissociated Thought Form

Cleaning the Aura During a
Therapy Session

Core energetic therapy is designed to help peo¬
ple release blocks from their auric field through
focus and physical exertion. Figure 11-4 illus¬
trates just such a release. By leaning backwards
over a padded stool, the muscles of the torso are
stretched and begin to relax. This brings about
an energetic release, and the block lets go. The
client had a strong energy block in the muscles
just in front of the spine near the diaphragmatic
hinge. While he was working on the bioenerge-

tic stool, this block suddenly released with a
burst of energy. The "energy cloud" quickly
moved up along the spine. When it reached the
head of the client and broke into his conscious¬
ness, I observed his going into another space of
reality. He began to cry and express early child¬
hood pain. As he expressed his feelings, he re¬
leased more and more of the energy cloud, and
it moved out of his field.

The following is a description of what hap¬
pens during a typical therapy session. First
some background information on the client
whom I will call Susan.

Observations of Auras in Therapy Sessions 97

Figure 11-4: Man Working on Bioenergetic Stool

Susan was a beautiful blonde woman in her
late twenties, a professional therapist, married,
with a 2-year-old daughter. She and her hus¬
band, also a therapist, had a very nourishing
and stable marriage and were leaders among
their peers. They met and married very young.
Susan's father had died accidentally two weeks
before she was born. Her mother was left with a
new baby and two young boys to care for. She
had little or no income and had to ask other
people to take Susan into their home to care for
her. Susan grew up in two homes: one a very
clean, ordered and strictly Christian home; the
other, her mother's disheveled home. Her
mother was never able to heal the wound of los¬
ing her husband at such an important time. She
never married again but had many lovers.

Susan's early marriage satisfied her need for
a man to care for her, since she never really had

a father. Susan also carried with her the fear that
she would never really make a marriage work
(like her mother) or that she had to be perfect to
do so (as with the religious family).

When Susan came to her session one morn¬
ing, she was apparently very happy and cheer¬
ful. She spoke about her week with her
husband. As she spoke and moved her arms,
she threw up a pink and white cloud of "happi¬
ness" (Figure 11-5). However, this happiness
was serving to cover deeper feelings revealed by
her energy field. My observations showed there
was a block, seen as a dark gray spot in the solar
plexus (stomach area), related to fear and other
feelings. The secondary block was in the fore¬
head (lighter gray, indicating mental confusion),
which directly connected to emotional pain in
her heart (red). She displayed a lot of mental
activity (high energy) on the sides of the head

98 Hands of Light

(yellow). She also had a lot of vibrant life-sexual
energy held in her pelvis (red-orange).

As she continued to move her arms and talk
cheerfully in a manner that threw up pink and
white soft clouds, the bright yellow radiating en¬
ergy from the sides of the head began to cover
over or mask the gray forehead problem area.
She was literally convincing herself that she was
happy by masking the gray with yellow (mental)
energy. When I described what I was seeing,
she immediately stopped creating the "false"
pink cloud. The gray area in the head regained
its original range.

Susan's composure completely changed to
fear and emotional pain. Then she began to
share what was really going on. Shortly before
Susan had come to her weekly session, she had
found out that her mother was in the hospital
with a kind of paralysis of the eyes. The physi¬
cian in charge had suggested that it was a symp¬
tom of a serious disease, such as multiple
sclerosis. Susan was very upset about this situa¬
tion and needed to have her strength to go
through all the various feelings she was having
about her mother. By blocking her life-sexual en¬
ergy in her pelvis and not allowing it to flow
down her legs, she was blocking herself off from
the ground and her foundation as a human be¬
ing on the earth. So it was important at this
point in the session to move that energy down
into the earth and connect her to her energetic
foundation, the power in her legs and pelvis.

Through leg and pelvic exercises we started
moving the pelvic energy down her legs to build
a base for more difficult work. This energy
moved rapidly down the legs to connect her
with the ground. It then flowed over the whole
body and charged the system more evenly. As
the pelvic block released, the change in energy
gave her a feeling of security within her own
sexual and life force feelings. This pelvic block
was related to her mother, who did not deal well
with her sexual energy. Susan was still afraid of
being like Mom. Since Susan had a strong
heart-sex connection, there was really no danger
of this, which is why the energy moved so rap¬
idly down the legs and into the ground. Once
that energy was grounded, Susan knew she

could have those pleasurable feelings and still
control them so she could choose to do with
them what she wanted.

Next, Susan was able to talk about the pain
she was feeling in her heart about her mother's
illness. She started to cry. This released the red
from the heart area. We then proceeded to work
on the major block located in her solar plexus,
which was related to unfulfilled childhood
needs, for which she in turn rejected her
mother. Thus her energy field showed her inter¬
nal conflict. On the one hand, she felt pain and
love feelings for her mother, who was at that
time very ill, and, on the other, she felt the an¬
ger of rejection, as in, "You didn't take care of
me; now why should I take care of you?" Bring¬
ing this conflict to consciousness and under¬
standing began releasing the gray area in the
forehead.

To release the dark spot in the solar plexus
took strong bodywork. Susan bent backwards
over the bioenergetic stool to stretch and loosen
the block. Then she did strenuous movements
thrusting the upper half of the body forward
and down to regurgitate the block and all it sym¬
bolized. It symbolized not only the rejection of
her mother, but also Susan's intent to blame her
mother for all the deprivation she had ever expe¬
rienced. Susan maintained a "safe" state of dep¬
rivation in her current life; the childhood
deprivation had been replaced through habit by
self-deprivation. The dark spot (four inches in
diameter) in the solar plexus lightened and
spread to a larger area (eight inches in diame¬
ter), but some of it remained in the energy field,
indicating that this issue was not resolved com¬
pletely. This dark spot would take a long time to
release because it contained major life issues.

What I am referring to when I say a "safe"
state of deprivation is that she felt comfortable
with some deprivation. That seemed normal to
her. We human beings feel safest in whatever we
consider the norm to be, whether or not it is
actually normal; that norm is established in our
childhood environment.

For example, with Susan that "norm" was
manifesting itself through her living space. As a
child there was confusion about her home.

Observations of Auras in Therapy Sessions 99

Which was her real home? Neither really was.
The problem persisted. She had lived in an un¬
finished house for almost all of her eight-year
marriage. She had never really had a completely
finished and furnished home that was hers.

As her therapy progressed, Susan's living
space became more harmoniously furnished
and beautifully finished. It was truly, in her
case, an outer manifestation of an inner state.

From these energy-field observations you
are probably beginning to see the connection be¬
tween illness and psychological problems more
dearly. We stop our feelings by blocking our en¬
ergy flow. This creates stagnated pools of energy
in our systems which when held there long
enough lead to disease in the physical body.
This will be discussed in greater detail in Part IV.
The connection between therapy and healing
becomes obvious when disease is seen in this
way. The broad view of the healer encompasses
the totality of the human being. In healing there
is no separation between body and mind, emo¬
tions and spirit—all need to be in balance to cre¬
ate a healthy human being. The healer focuses
on physical, psychological and spiritual mis-
function. It is impossible to do healing without
affecting the psychological levels of the person¬
ality. The more the healer understands the psy¬
chodynamics of her dients, the more the healer
will be equipped to help the clients heal them¬
selves.

Chapter 11 Review

1. What is an energy block?

2. How is an energy block created in the HEF?

3. How can you tell when a block in the HEF is
released?

4. How can you tell someone is releasing feel¬
ings as opposed to holding them?

5. Which happens first—the auric phenomena
or the physical?

6. In what color/colors do the following emo¬
tions appear in the aura? Fear, anger, love,
joy, confusion, envy, hatred.

7. Which color is best in the aura? Vibrant,
bright red near the pelvis or nice, rich green
near the chest-solar plexus area?

8. What is the effect of marijuana smoking on
the aura? Short-term? Long-term?

9. What is a dissodated thought form?

Food For Thought

10. Do exerdses (observing other people's au¬
ras) and describe what you see.

11. Trace from beginning to end the cycle of one
of the thought forms that you get caught in.
What initiated it? What is its origin? How
can you break out of it? What deeper feel¬
ings does it cover and defend you against
feeling?

Chapter 12

ENERGY BLOCKS AND DEFENSE
SYSTEMS IN THE AURA

After observing many blocks in people's fields, I
began to categorize them into types. I found six
general types of energy blocks. I also began to
notice that people use their fields in defensive
ways to protect them from an imagined unpleas¬
ant experience. They organized their entire auric
fields into what I call an energetic defense sys¬
tem.

First let us look at the six types of energy
blocks I have observed.

Types of Energy Blocks

Figures 12-1 and 12-2 show how these blocks
appear to me. The "blah" block (Figure 12-1 A)
is a result of depressing one's feelings and en¬
ergy till they stagnate and cause an accumula¬
tion of body fluids in that area. The body tends
to bloat there. This block usually does not have
high energy but is rather of low intensity, which
is usually associated with despair. If this block
continues, a possible resulting disease would be
colitis or angina pectoris. Its color is usually
gray-blue. It feels sticky and heavy, like mucus.
There is anger there also, usually the blaming
kind. The person has given up and feels power¬
less. For example, a woman who was unhappily
married and gave up her career for the marriage
had such a block. Now in her fifties, she found
it impossible to go back into the business world
and start a career. Instead she simply blamed

her husband for her unhappiness. She de¬
manded that her daughters do what she had
never done. She tried to live her life through
them, but of course it didn't work.

The compaction block (Figure 12-1B), which
suppresses feelings, on the other hand, contains
a lot of accumulated rage, like a volcano. It is
dark red in color, usually appearing quite omi¬
nous to the observer, who normally does not
want to be the recipient of the volcanic eruption.
This energy block results in an accumulation of
body fat or body muscle in the area. If this com¬
paction continues long enough, it may result in
diseases like pelvic inflammatory disease. The
person is usually aware of the rage and feels
trapped because release of rage is associated
with humiliation. One woman I saw concluded
in childhood that to have sexual feelings would
bring on humiliation. Her father humiliated her
with regard to her sexuality when she was
young. The result was that she blocked her
powerful sexual feelings and held them tightly
in her pelvis. The held sexual feelings slowly
turned to rage. When the rage was not released,
due to fear of humiliation, the accumulation of
stagnated energy in her pelvis brought on infec¬
tion. After years of chronic small infections, she
was finally diagnosed as having pelvic inflam¬
matory disease.

The mesh armor (Figure 12-1C) is an effec¬
tive block in that it helps the person avoid feel¬
ings, especially fear, by quickly moving the

101

102 Hands of Light

A. Blah block

B. Compaction

Figure 12-1: Types of Energy Blocks

blocks around when she is challenged either in
a life situation or in therapy. For example, if the
therapist tries to release a block through exercise
or deep massage, the block will simply move to
another part of the body. This type of blocking
probably will not initiate disease as readily as
the other types of blocks. Everything will ap¬
pear to be wonderful in this patient's life. She
will be successful in the world, have a "perfect"
marriage and model children, yet she will have
the vague sense that something is missing. This
person will be able to tolerate deep feelings for
only a short period of time before pulling herself
out of them. Finally, she will probably create
some crisis in her life to break into her deeper
feelings. This crisis can take any form, like a

sudden unexpected illness, an accident or an af¬
fair.

The plate armor, shown in Figure 12-2A,
holds all types of feelings by freezing them.
They are held in place around the body by a
field of generalized high tension. It effectively
helps the person build a well-structured life on
the outer level. The body will be well con¬
structed; muscles will tend to be hard. On the
personal level, life will not be so fulfilling, be¬
cause the plate armor effectively nullifies all feel¬
ings. This creates high tension all over the body,
which can result in several different types of dis¬
ease: ulcers from overwork or heart problems
from physical "pushing" in life without per¬
sonal nourishment. Because the person cannot

Energy Blocks and Defense Systems in the Aura 103

Figure 12-2: Types of Energy Blocks

feel his body well, e.g., the tension in his long
muscles, he will probably overstress his mus¬
cles, causing shin splints or tendonitis. This per¬
son will also have a "perfect" appearing life that
is lacking a deeper personal connection. He will
also probably eventually create some kind of life
crisis, like those mentioned above, that will help
him connect to his deeper reality. A heart attack
does this nicely for some men. For example, I
know a very successful businessman who
owned several magazines with very large circu¬
lations. He was so busy working that he became
disconnected from his family. After his heart at¬
tack, his children came to him and said, "You
have to stop or you will die. Teach us to help
you run your business." He did, they learned

and the family was brought back together.

The energy depletion block (Figure 12-2B) is
simply a decrease of energy flowing down the
limb in the direction of the distal end. The per¬
son cuts off the limbs by simply not allowing the
energy to flow there. This results in weakness of
the limb and, in some cases, even physical un¬
derdevelopment in that area. This person will
avoid use of the limb to avoid the feelings of
weakness, and then the deeper associated feel¬
ings, like not being able to stand on his own feet
in life, or the feeling of failing in life.

The energy leak (Figure 12-2C) occurs when
the person squirts his energy out of the joints
instead of allowing it to flow down the limb. He
does this (unconsciously) to decrease the energy

104 Hands of Light

flow through his limbs to the point where he
will not have the strength or feeling to respond
to certain experiences in his environment. The
reason he does not want to respond is based on
a childhood conclusion that response is either
improper or even dangerous. For example, as a
child, if he reached for something he wanted, he
may have been slapped on the hand. Again,
weakness in the limb (and also poor coordina¬
tion) results, with avoidance of the use of the
limb. Both of these latter types of blocks also
result in coldness in the limbs. The person is
usually very vulnerable in the areas where the
energy leak occurs. This type of block results in
joint problems.

Just what kind of blocks a person develops is
dependent on many things, including personal¬
ity and childhood environment. All of us use a
combination of several of these blocks. Which
are your favorites?

Energetic Defense Systems

We all create blocks because we see the world as
unsafe. We block in patterns that involve our
whole energy system. Our energetic defense
systems are designed to repel, to defend aggres¬
sively or passively against an incoming force.
They are designed to show power and thus
scare off an aggressor, or they are designed to
get us attention indirectly, without admitting
that is what we want.

Examples of energetic defense systems
which I have observed are shown in Figure 12-
3. These defense systems are employed when
the individual feels endangered.

With the "porcupine" (usually whitish-gray
in color), the person's aura becomes spiny and
painful to touch. It is sharp. Many times, when I
have put my hand on someone when he did not
want it there, I could feel the spines going
through my hand. Most people respond to this
defense by distancing.

In the "withdrawal" form of defense, the
portion of the person's consciousness and aura
that is being threatened simply leaves his body
in a cloud of light blue energy. The eyes will

have a glazed look, although he pretends to be
fully there listening to you.

The same is true for the person who is "be¬
side himself." This particular configuration is
more long-term than withdrawal, which may
last only for a few seconds up to hours. The
"beside himself" manifestation usually lasts for
a longer period, perhaps days or even years. I
have seen people who have been partially out of
their bodies for years from some trauma or early
surgery. In one case, a young woman had open-
heart surgery at the age of two years. She was
twenty-one when I worked with her to help her
energy fields to seat themselves more firmly in
her body. Her higher bodies would partially dis¬
connect and float out, up and behind her. This
disconnection resulted in a disconnection from
her feelings.

Verbal denial is associated with much en¬
ergy, usually yellow, in the head, a severe neck
block and depleted energy in the lower half,
which is pale and still. In order to keep the sta¬
tus quo, the person stays active verbally so as to
sustain some feeling of being alive. This verbal
exchange keeps the energy flowing in the head.

Oral sucking is closely related to verbal de¬
nial in that it is effective in sucking energy from
those around in order to fill the person's own
field, which he usually is unable to do from the
natural surrounding environment. In other
words, there is something amiss in the person's
ability to metabolize the orgone supply from the
surrounding atmosphere, causing him to need
predigested energy from others. One can feel
this form of sucking in verbal prattle that is bor¬
ing and exhausting to the recipient, or see it in
the "vacuum cleaner" eyes that some people
possess. These people love to be around others
in some form of socializing. There are other peo¬
ple who need to discharge an excess of energy
(masochist types) who make good partners with
the oral suckers. Together, they fill each other's
needs quite nicely. (See Chapter 13.)

The hooks I have seen on some people's
heads usually are on people who have a psycho¬
pathic character structure and who are in the
process of being confronted by, say, a group of
people. They become very threatened in such a

106 Hands of Light

situation and form a "hook" on the top of the
head. If things really get hot, they will throw the
"hook" at whomever they see as the aggressor.
This "hook" is usually accompanied with a ver¬
bal statement. On the other hand, if this type of
person wants to confront someone, she may
very well try to grasp the other by the head with
mental energy. The possible effect on the person
being confronted is to be held within the con-
fronter's energy field until the latter is sure her
point is being made and accepted as she wishes.
This type of defense/offense is very threatening
to the recipient because, from all appearances,
she is being approached logically with very ra¬
tional steps leading to the "right" conclusion,
but the "between-the-lines" message being con¬
veyed is that the recipient had better agree. This
kind of exchange is usually accompanied with
the underlying implication that the person being
confronted is "bad" and wrong, and the con-
fronter is "good" and right.

'Tentacles" are oozing, slippery, silent and
heavy. They reach for your solar plexus in an
effort to capture your essence and pull it out, to
be devoured by the seeker of security. This per¬
son is full of his own essence but doesn't know
what to do with it, because he feels that allow¬
ing it to move means humiliation. Thus he is
caught in despair and even loses touch with his
own essence. He may adopt the silent, brooding
stance for a while. Then the "tentacles" work at
his own essence, pulling him down. The silent
brooding is very noisy, however, on the ener¬
getic level. He stands out in a room full of peo¬
ple who are actively having fun. Soon he will be
surrounded by those who wish to help him, and
he will unconsciously, but cleverly and gra¬
ciously, thank each person for the help offered,
saying why it won't work and ask for other sug¬
gestions. And so the game goes on. The tenta-
cled person thinks he needs something from the
outside, but what he needs is to give out. He
may then try verbal arrows to provoke someone
to anger. These arrows are not only verbally
painful, but also energetically painful, flying
through the air and striking the recipient very
precisely and effectively. The archer uncon¬
sciously hopes this will cause enough pain to
elicit anger, which will then give him an excuse

to release his own anger in such a way as to
avoid humiliation. In this willful, precise, men¬
tal way, he tries to humiliate the other person
and, at the same time, avoid having feelings in
the lower half of his body.

The person who uses "hysterical defense"
will gladly respond to the "arrows" by explod¬
ing. The hysterical type will explode in a way
that will impinge upon everyone's field with
lightning bolts and explosions of color in such
fury as to threaten and intimidate with the sheer
force of power and chaos. His purpose is to clear
the room of everyone.

The person using "boundary containment"
will simply remove himself from the situation,
while strengthening and thickening his bound¬
ary in order to remain unaffected. The message
thus conveyed is one of superiority! Another
may simply state his supremacy with a strongly
ordered, well-controlled, power/will display
which blows up and lights up his aura, so that
there is no question of who is in charge here,
and who is not to be tampered with!

Exercises to

Find Your Major Defense

Try each of these defense systems out; which
ones do you use? Try it with a group of people.
Everyone walk around the room in each of the
defense systems. How familiar is each one?
Which ones do you use for different occasions?

There are probably many more defense sys¬
tems in use. You can undoubtedly think of some
others yourself—ones that you use, and ones
used by your friends. The important thing to re¬
member is that all of us use them, and that we
all agree, whether consciously or unconsciously,
to interact with each other in these ways. No
one is forced into these interactions; they are all
voluntary. On some levels of our personalities,
we even enjoy them at times. We need not be
frightened when we see them in each other. We
always have the choice to respond tolerantly
rather than defensively. We must remember that
there is always a reason why someone is
defending—to protect some vulnerable part of

Energy Blocks and Defense Systems in the Aura 107

himself that he wishes to keep under control
and hidden, either from us or himself, or both.
We develop most of these systems early in life.
As shown in Chapter 8, the aura of a child is not
fully grown any more than his body. It, too, de¬
velops and goes through stages of development
as the individual grows, and, as it does, basic
character patterns, representing both strengths
and vulnerabilities, become clear.

Chapter 12 Review

1. Name and describe six major types of energy
blocks.

2. List the major defense systems and how they
work. Which do you use? Are the ones you
use effective for you? What would be a better
way for you to handle your life experience?

Food For Thought

3. Upon what personal belief system is your
major defense based?

4. How would your life be better/worse if you
didn't use your defense system?

5. List the types and locations of blocks you
have created in your body/energy system.
What childhood experiences is each related
to?

Chapter 13

AURA AND CHAKRA PATTERNS

OF THE

MAJOR CHARACTER STRUCTURES

Character structure is a term that many body
psychotherapists use to describe certain physical
and psychological types of people. After much
observation and study, Wilhelm Reich con¬
cluded that most of the people he treated could
be fitted into five major categories. He found
that people with similar childhood experiences
and child/parent relations had similar bodies.
He also found that people with similar bodies
had similar basic psychological dynamics. These
dynamics were dependent not only on types of
child/parent relations, but also on the age at
which the child first experiences life so traumati-
cally that it begins to block its feelings and
therefore the flow of energy and to develop the
defense system that will become habitual. A
trauma experienced in the womb will be ener¬
getically blocked or defended against very dif¬
ferently than one experienced in the oral stage
of growth, in toilet training or in latency: This is
only natural because the individual and his field
are so different at different stages of life. (See
Chapter 8.)

In this section, I will give some basic de¬
scriptions of each character structure, including
etiology, body forms and their auric configura¬
tions. I will also discuss the nature of the higher
self and personal life task of each structure as far
as that can be done. Each person's higher self

and life task is unique, but some generalizations
can be made.

The higher seif of a person is seen as the
divine spark, within, of the Godself within each
individual, the place where we are already one
with God. There is a divine spark in every cell of
our physical and spiritual being which contains
this inner divine consciousness.

The life task is seen in two forms. First, on
the personal level, there is a personal task,
which has the purpose of learning to express a
new part of one's identity. The parts of the soul
that are not one with God help form the specific
incarnation in order to learn how to be one with
the creator and still remain individuated. The
world task is a gift that each soul comes into this
physical life to give to the world. Many times it
is the same as the life's work that comes natu¬
rally early on. An artist brings his art, a physi¬
cian the gift of healing, a musician his music, a
mother her nurturing and love, etc. At other
times the person has to strive, through many
changes of work, to step into what she can fi¬
nally realize is her life's work. The power and
clarity with which the life task is taken on de¬
pends a great deal on accomplishing the per¬
sonal task of learning.

The individual's body is the crystallization in
the physical world of the energy fields that sur-

109

110 Hands of Light

round and are part of each person. These en¬
ergy fields contain the task of each soul. The
character structure can then be seen as the crys¬
tallization of the basic problems or personal task
a person has elected to incarnate and to solve.
The problem (task) is crystallized in the body
and held there so that the individual can easily
see and work with it. By studying our character
structure as it relates to our bodies, we can find
the key to heal ourselves and find our personal
and world task.

The basic malady I have found in all the peo¬
ple I have ever worked with is self-hatred. Self-
hatred is, in my opinion, the basic inner illness
in all of us, but just how that self-hatred and
nonacceptance of the self manifests is shown in
the different character structures. As we work to
understand our dynamics on a daily level, we
can learn to accept ourselves through this proc¬
ess. We can go through years of living by God's
will (the God within), by the truth, and by
love—these are all steps to self-realization—but
until we can love unconditionally we are not yet
home. This means starting with the self. Can we
love ourselves unconditionally even though we
see our shortcomings? Can we forgive ourselves
when we make a mess of things? Can we, after
making a mess, get right up and say, "Well, I'll
have to learn from that one." "I am a woman/
man of God." "I realign myself with the light
and keep going through whatever it takes to
find my way back to my Godself inside and
home." So with that in mind, let us turn to the
character structures, knowing that to address
the deeper issues that relate to why each of us is
a certain type or combination of types of charac¬
ter structure in the first place, will probably take
a lifetime.

Working together Drs. A1 Lowan and John
Pierrakos originally categorized the major as¬
pects of the character structures on the physical
and personality levels. To these John Pierrakos
added the spiritual and energetic aspects. He
changed the meaning of the character structures
by adding the spiritual dimension of human¬
kind to the purely biological and disease ele¬
ments that Reich had developed. As part of this
work, Pierrakos related chakra function to the
character structures. I carried that work further

and developed the general auric patterns of each
character structure, as shown in Figs. 13-5
through 13-8 and the energetic defense systems
given in Chapter 12.

Figures 13-1, 13-2 and 13-3 give tables
showing the major characteristics of each struc¬
ture. These tables were compiled by the bioener-
getic training class given by Dr. Jim Cox in 1972
and by the core energetic training class given by
Dr. John Pierrakos in 1975, in which I was
studying. I have added the energy field informa¬
tion from my own work.

The Schizoid Structure

The first character structure (first in the sense
that the major cutoff of life energy flow took
place earliest) is called the schizoid structure. In
this case, the first traumatic experience took
place before or at birth, or within the first few
days of life. The trauma is usually centered
around some hostility received directly from a
parent, such as anger in a parent, a parent not
wanting the child or trauma during the birthing
process—such as the mother becoming emotion¬
ally disconnected from the child and the child
feeling abandoned. The range of such events is
great; a slight disconnection between mother
and child for one child could be very traumatic,
whereas it may not have the slightest effect on
another. This is related to the nature of the in¬
coming soul and what task it has chosen for it¬
self in this lifetime.

The natural energetic defense used against
this trauma at this stage of life is simply to draw
back into the spirit world from which the soul is
coming. The defense is developed and used for
this type of character structure, until it is very
easy for the person simply to withdraw into
someplace "away," which is into the spirit
world. (See Figure 12-3.) This defense becomes
habitual, and the person uses it in any situation
in which he feels threatened. To compensate for
his defense of flying away he tries to hold him- ;
self together on the personality level. His basic-
fault is fear—fear that he has no right to exist. In*
interacting with others, be they the therapist orj
friends, he will speak in a depersonalized lan-j

Aura and Chakra Patterns of the Major Character Structures 111

Figure 13-1

MAJOR ASPECTS OF EACH CHARACTER STRUCTURE

PERSONALITY MAKEUP

SCHIZOID ORAL PSYCHOPATHIC MASOCHISTIC RIGID

ARREST OF Before or at Birth Babyhood Feeding Early Childhood Autonomy Stage Puberty Genital

DEVELOPMENT

TRAUMA

Hostile Mother

Abandonment

PATTERN

Hold Together

Hold On

SEXUALITY

Sex to Feel

Sex for Closenei

Life Force,
Fantasy

& Contact

FAULT

Fear

Greed

DEMANDS THE

Be/Exist

Be Nurtured

RIGHT TO

& Fulfilled

PRESENTING

Fear/Anxiety

Passivity

COMPLAINT

(Fatigue)

NEGATIVE INTENT

"I will be split."

"I'll make you
give it."

"I won't need"

DEVICES BEHIND

Unity vs,

Need vs.

NEGATIVE INTENT

Splitting

Abandonment

NEEDS TO

Strengthen

Own Needs &

Boundaries

Stand on Own
Two Feet

guage, in absolutes, and tend to intellectualize.
This only brings on more experience of being
separate from life and not truly existing.

When he presents himself for therapy, the
presenting complaint will be a great deal of fear
and anxiety. In working in therapy, the issue
will be that to feel that he exists, he must feel
unity, but to survive he believes he must split.
Thus he has a negative intent to split. This cre¬
ates the double bind: 'To exist means to die." To
resolve this problem in therapy, he needs to
strengthen the boundaries that define who he is
and to feel his strength in the physical world.

In the therapeutic process, after the client
stops trying to be a nice guy to the therapist and
begins to work, the first layer of personality en¬
countered will be the blaming part, sometimes
called the mask, which says, "I'll reject you be¬
fore you reject me." After the work of digging
deeper into the personality has been done, base
emotions sometimes called the lower self or

Seduction

Control

Sexual Denial

Betrayal

Forced Feeding
& Evacuation

Betrayal of Heart

Hold Up

Hold In

Hold Back

Hostile/Fragile

Impotence

Sex with

Homosexual

Strong Interest

Contempt

Fantasy

in Pornography

Untruthfulness

Hatred

Pride

Be Supported

Be Independent

Have Feelings

& Encouraged

(Love/Sex)

Feelings of

Defeat

Tension

No Feelings

"My will

"I love

"I won't

be done."

negativity."

surrender"

Will vs.

Freedom vs.

Sex v$. Love

Surrender

Submission

Trust

Be Assertive

Connect Heart

Be Free

to Genitals

Open Spiritual
Connections

shadow self will say, "\bu don't exist either."
Then, when resolution begins, the more highly-
developed part of the personality, sometimes
called the higher power or higher self of the per¬
sonality, emerges to say, "I'm real."

People with schizoid characters can leave
their bodies easily and do so quite regularly. On
the body level, the result is a body that appears
to be a combination of pieces, not firmly held
together or integrated. These people are usually
tall and thin, but in some cases can have heavy
bodies. The tension in the body tends to be in
rings around the body. Joints are usually weak,
and the body is usually uncoordinated, with
cold hands and feet. The person is usually hy¬
peractive and ungrounded. There is a main en¬
ergy block at the neck, near the base of the
skull, which usually looks dark gray blue. There
is usually energy squirting out the skull base.
Many times there is twisting in the spine,
caused by a habitual twisting away from mate-

112 Hands of Light

Figure 13-2

MAJOR ASPECTS OF EACH CHARACTER STRUCTURE

PHYSICAL AND ENERGETIC SYSTEM

PSYCHOPATHIC MASOCHISTIC

PHYSICAL

BUILD

BODY TENSION

BODY

CIRCULATION
ENERGY LEVELS

ENERGY

LOCATION

PRIMARY

FUNCTIONING

CHAKRAS

ENERGETIC
DEFENSE SYSTEM

SCHIZOID

Elongation

Right/Left

Imbalances

"Ring" Tension
Uncoordinated
Weak Joints

Cold Hands/Feet

Hyperactive

Ungrounded

Frozen at
the Core

7th

6th Front
3rd Front
2nd Rear
Asymmetrical

Spiritual

Mental

Will

Withdrawal
"Porcupine"
Beside Himself

ORAL

Thin

Collapsed Chest
Flaccid

Smooth Muscles
Hold

Cold Chest

Hypoactive
Low Energy

In the Head
Generally
Depleted
7th

6th Front
2nd Front
Aspect

Spiritual

Mental

Love

Oral Sucking
Verbal Denial
Hysteria

Inflated Chest
Top Heavy

Top Half
Compacted
Lower Half
Spastic

Cold Legs/Pelvis

Hyperactivity
Followed by
Collapse

Upper Half
of Body

7th

6th

4th Rear Aspect

Mental

Will

"Hook"

Mental "Grasp"
Hysteria

Head Forward
Heavy

Compressed

Cold Buttocks

Hypoactive
(Internalized
Energy)
Boiling Inside

6th Front
3rd Front

Mental

Feeling

Will

Silent Brooding
"Tentacles"

RIGID

Rigid Back
Pelvis Tipped
Back

Spastic
Plate Armor
Mesh Armor

Cold Pelvis

Hyperactive
(High Energy)

On Periphery
Withheld from
the Core

Will Centers
6th Front

Will

Mental

Power/Will

Display

Boundary

Containment

PSYCHODYNAMICS
OF OPEN CHAKRAS

rial reality as the person partially flies out of the
body. The body has weak, thin wrists, ankles
and calves and usually is not connected to the
ground. One shoulder may be larger than the
other (even without playing tennis). Many times
the head is held to one side and there is a vague
look in the eyes, as if the person is partly some¬
where else. He is. He may be sometimes re¬
ferred to as "flaky." Many of these people
started masturbating early in childhood, finding
that a way to connect to the life force was
through their sexuality. It helped them feel
"alive" when they could not connect to others
around them.

What the person with a schizoid character
has avoided through the use of his defense sys¬
tem is his inner terror, the terror of annihilation.

Of course he could not deal with it as a baby
because he was completely dependent upon
those whom he found terrifying, or by whom he
had felt completely abandoned in his greatest
hour of need the birthing process. As a baby the
schizoid character felt direct hostility from at
least one of his parents, the people he de¬
pended on for survival. This experience initiated
his existential terror.

The schizoid character can find release from
his inner terror of annihilation when he, as an
adult, realizes that his terror is now more related
to his inner rage than to anything else. This rage
comes from continuing to experience the world
as a very cold, hostile place where isolation is
forced upon anyone who wants to survive. A
part of the schizoid being fully believes this to

Aura and Chakra Patterns of the Major Character Structures 113

Figure 13-3

MAJOR ASPECTS OF EACH CHARACTER STRUCTURE

INTERPERSONAL RELATIONS

SCHIZOID

ORAL

PSYCHOPATHIC

MASOCHISTIC

RIGID

evokes

Intellectualization

Mothering

Submission

Teasing

Competition

COUNTER

Withdrawal into

Passivity

Exertion

Guilt

Withdrawal into

transference

reaction

Away

Neediness

Dependency

of Control

Shame

Holding

a Holding Back

COMMUNICATES

Absolutes

Questions

Dictates

Whining Disgust

Qualifiers

ill

LANGUAGE

Depersonalized

Indirect

Direct

Manipulation
("You should")

Indirect

Manipulation

(Polite

Expressions)

Seductive

double bind

"T<b exist means
to die."

"If I ask, it's not
love; if I don't
ask, I won't
get it."

"I have to be
right or I die"

"If I get angry.

I'll be

humiliated; if I
don't. I'll be
humiliated."

"Either choice
is wrong."

MASK STATEMENT

'Til reject you
before you
reject me."

"I don't
need you"

"I won't ask"

"I'm right;
you're wrong."

"I'll kill (hurt)
myself before
you do."

"Yes, but. . . "

LOWER SELF

"You don't

'Take care

"I will

"I will spite and

"I won't

STATEMENT

exist either."

of me."

control you."

provoke you."

love you."

HIGHER SELF
STATEMENT

"I'm real."

"I'm satisfied,
fulfilled."

"I give in."

"I'm free"

"I commit."

"I love."

be the essence of material reality. Under this
rage is the great pain of knowing that what he
needs is loving, warm connection and nourish¬
ment from other humans; but in many cases he
has not been able to create that in his life.

His terror is that his own rage will cause him
to blow apart into pieces that will scatter into the
universe. The key for him is to face his own rage
little by little without flying away in defense. If
he can stand on the ground and allow the terror
and rage to come out, he will release the inner
pain and the longing for connection with others
and make a place for self-love to come in. Self-
love takes practice. We all need it no matter
what combination of character structures we
way be. Self-love comes from living in ways that
do not betray oneself. It comes from living ac¬
cording to one's inner truth, whatever that may
be. It comes from not betraying oneself. It can
be practiced through simple self-love exercises
given in the final section.

The Energy Field of the
Schizoid Structure

The schizoid structure is characterized mainly
by energy-field discontinuities like imbalances
and breaks. The main energy of the person is
held deep within the core of the person and is
usually frozen there until therapy and healing
work is done to free it. Figure 13-4 shows the
thin and breaking line of the etheric body of this
structure with energy leaks at the joints. Its
color is usually very light blue. The next layer
and mental bodies are seen to be either tightly
held and frozen at times or, at other times, mov¬
ing around randomly without a balanced energy
between front and back, right and left. The field
is usually brighter with more energy on one side
and on the back of the head. The spiritual
bodies of the schizoid are usually strong and
bright with many brilliant colors on the sixth
layer of the aura, or celestial body. The oval

114 Hands of Light

form, or ketheric template layer, is usually very
bright in appearance, with a color more of silver
than gold. It usually has diffuse boundaries and
is not fully inflated with a narrowing of the egg
shape at the feet, where there is sometimes
weakness.

The aura's imbalance, which is found pri¬
marily in the lower three bodies, extends to the
chakras in the schizoid person who has not be¬
gun process work; many chakras are counter¬
clockwise. This means that they send more
energy out than they take in. The disturbed cha¬
kras correspond to qualities in the character
structure that need transformation. Chakras that
are clockwise (open) are usually asymmetrical,
meaning that those chakras are also not func¬
tioning in a balanced manner even though they
are "open." More energy will flow through one
part of the chakra than another part. This im¬
balance is usually lateral; that is, there may be
more energy flowing through the right side of
the chakra than the left side. The person would
therefore tend to be more active or possibly even
more aggressive than receptive in the area of life
governed by that chakra. This asymmetry has
been described in Chapter 10 in terms of active/
receptive splitting. A diagonal or elliptical figure
measured by the pendulum indicates an asym¬
metrical chakra that appears to clairvoyant vi¬
sion as shown in Figure 13-4.

The chakras that are usually open are the
rear sexual center (second), the solar plexus
(third), the forehead (sixth) and the crown (sev¬
enth). The sixth and seventh centers are associ¬
ated with mental and nonphysical spirituality to
which the person is usually very oriented in his
life. He also functions through will (second cha¬
kra). These chakra configurations are variable
and change during a person's transformational
work. As the individual opens more to being in
the third dimension and living in the physical,
more of the chakras open. Many times the rear
sex center is not open in the beginning of the
work.

The lower part of Figure 13-4 shows the rela¬
tive degree of bright energy active in the brain
area. The brightest, most active place is the oc¬
cipital or rear area, and the least is the frontal
area. The second most active chakra is the third

eye and third ventricle area of the brain, which
are connected by a bridge of brightness between
the two. Then come the side lobes, which are
associated with language. There are large gen¬
eral areas of the brain that appear to have low
activity.

The low energy in the frontal area can be
seen by the blank, "gone" look often seen in the
schizoid. He usually directs his energy up the
spine and out the back of the head in the occipi¬
tal region, creating the energy bulge towards the
back of the head. This is a way of avoiding here-
and-now contact in the physical plane.

The energetic defense systems primarily
used by the schizoid are the porcupine, with¬
drawal, and being beside oneself, as described
in Chapter 12, Figure 12-3. Of course a person
with any structure can use the various defenses
at various times.

The Higher Self and Life Task
of the Schizoid Character

In the personal growth process, it is always im¬
portant to be very honest with the self as to the
self's shortcomings, to work on them to trans¬
form them. But it is not healthy to dwell on the
negativities of the self for very long. One must
always balance the attention to these parts that
need transforming with attention to finding the
nature of the higher self, supporting it, enhanc¬
ing it and allowing it to come forth. After all,
that is what transformation is all about, isn't it?

People who are or have some schizoid char¬
acter in their personality makeup are usually
very spiritual people. They have a deep sense of
the profound purposes of life. Many times they
seek to bring the spiritual reality into the mun¬
dane lives of those around them. They are very
creative people, with many talents and many
creative ideas, who could be compared to ^
beautiful mansion with many rooms, each roor$
tastefully and richly decorated in a different
style, culture or period. Each room is elegant ii)
its own right because the schizoid has had man)
lifetimes in which he has developed this wick
range of talents (decorated rooms). The probleri]

116 Hands of Light

is that the rooms do not have doorways between
each other. To get from one room to the other,
the schizoid must climb out a window and
down a ladder and up another ladder and into
the window of the next room. This is very in¬
convenient. The schizoid needs to integrate his
being, to build doorways between the beautiful
rooms so that he has easier access to all the
parts of his being.

In general, one might say that the personal
task of the schizoid character is related to facing
his inner terror and rage, which blocks his abil¬
ity to materialize his tremendous creativity. His
terror and rage actually keep the parts of his
person separate because he fears the powerful
coming together of all his creative talents. His
task is also related to materializing, or making
manifest, his spirituality in the material world.
This may be done through expressing the spirit¬
ual reality through his creativity, e.g., writing,
inventions, helping people, etc. These tasks are
very individual and must not be generalized.

The Oral Structure

The oral character is created when normal devel¬
opment is arrested during the oral stage of
growth. The cause is abandonment. In child¬
hood he experienced the loss of his mother, ei¬
ther by death, illness or withdrawal. The mother
gave to the child, but not enough. Many times
she "pretended" to give—or gave in spite of her¬
self. The child compensated for the loss by be¬
coming "independent" too early, many times by
talking and walking very early. Thus, he be¬
comes confused about receptivity and is afraid
to ask for what he really needs because deep
inside he is sure it will not be given. His feelings
of needing to be taken care of result in depen¬
dency, tendency to cling, grabbiness and de¬
creased aggressiveness. He compensates by
independent behavior that collapses under
stress. His receptivity then becomes a spiteful
passivity, and aggression becomes greed.

The person with an oral structure is basically
deprived, feels empty and hollow and doesn't
want to take responsibility. The body is undevel¬

oped with long, thin, flaccid muscles and
slumps in weakness. The person does not look
adult and mature, has a cold depressed chest
and shallow breathing, and his eyes may suck
your energy. Psycho dynamically, the personal¬
ity holds on and clings to others against the fear
of being abandoned. He is not able to be alone
and experiences an exaggerated need for the
warmth and support of others. He tries to get it
from the "outside" in order to compensate for
the tremendous feeling of inner emptiness. He
suppresses his intense feelings of longing and
aggression. His rage over the abandonment is
held in. Sexuality is used to get closeness and
contact.

The oral person has experienced many dis¬
appointments in life, many rejections of his at¬
tempts to reach out. He thus becomes bitter and
feels that whatever he gets is never enough. He
cannot be satisfied because he is trying to satisfy
an inner longing which he denies by compen¬
sating with something else. On the personality
level, he demands to be nurtured and fulfilled.
In interacting with others, he will speak in indi¬
rect questions that evoke mothering from an¬
other. But this does not fill him because he is an
adult, not a child.

His presenting complaint when entering
therapy is passivity and fatigue. In working in
therapy the issue will be to find nourishment in
his life. But to get his needs met, he believes he
must risk abandonment by or pretense from an¬
other. Thus his negative intent will be "I'll make
you give it to me" or "I won't need." This in
turn creates the double bind, "If I ask, it's not
love; if I don't ask, I won't get it." To resolve this
problem in therapy, he needs to find and own
his needs and to learn to live his life in such a
way that his needs get met. He needs to learn to
stand on his own two feet.

In the therapeutic process, the first layer of
personality encountered will be the mask. It
says, "I don't need you" or "I won't ask." After
the work of digging deeper into the personality
is done, the lower self or shadow self will say,
'Take care of me." Then, when resolution be¬
gins, the higher self of the personality emerges
to say, "I'm satisfied and fulfilled."

Aura and Chakra Patterns of the Major Character Structures 117

The Energy Field of the
Oral Structure

The Oral Character (Figure 13-5) tends to have a
depleted field, which is calm and quiet. The
main energy is located in the head. The etheric
is held tightly near the skin and is also light blue
in color. The emotional body is also held in,
with not much color, and has a generally de¬
pleted quality. The mental body is bright and
usually yellowish. The higher levels of the aura
are not very bright. The outer egg form (seventh
layer) is not entirely inflated, not bright, with a
silvery-golden glow more to the silvery side and
depleted around the feet area.

The chakras may be mostly closed or de¬
energized in an oral person who has not done
much process work. He will most likely have the
crown and the forehead center open, which ac¬
counts for his mental and spiritual clarity. If he
has done personal growth work, he may have
his front sexual center open as well. Thus he is
interested in sex and has some sexual feelings.

The configuration of activity in his energy
field in the head is shown at the bottom of the
page, Figure 13-5. This shows that most of the
energy is located in the frontal and side lobes of
the brain, and the least energy at the rear in the
occipital regions. Thus the oral character is cen¬
tered on intellectual and verbal activity and not
on physical activity.

The defense mechanisms primarily used by
the oral are those of verbal denial, oral sucking
and possible verbal arrows used to get attention,
rather than to provoke rage—that is, unlike the
way the verbal arrows are used by the person
with a masochistic structure as stated in Chapter
12 .

The Life Task and High Self
of the Oral Structure

The oral character needs to learn trust in the
abundance of the universe and reverse the proc¬
ess of grabbing. He needs to give. He needs to
give up the role of the victim and to acknowl¬

edge what he does get. He needs to face his fear
of being alone, go deep into the void within and
find it teaming with life. When he owns his own
needs and stands on his own two feet, then he
will be able to say, "I have it," and allow the core
energy to open up and flow.

The inner landscape of an oral character is
like a fine musical instrument, like a Stradivar-
ius. He needs to finely tune his instrument and
compose his own symphony. When he plays his
unique melody in the symphony of life, he will
be fulfilled.

When the higher self is released, the oral
characters can make good use of his intelligence
in creative work in the arts or sciences. He will
be a natural teacher, because he is very inter¬
ested in so many things, and can always connect
what he knows with love direct from the heart.

The Displaced or
Psychopathic Structure

In his early childhood, the person with a dis¬
placed structure experienced a covertly seduc¬
tive parent of the opposite sex. The parent
wanted something from the child. The psycho¬
path was in a triangle with the parents and
found it hard to get support from the parent of
the same sex. He sided with the parent of the
opposite sex, could not get what he needed, felt
betrayed and then compensated by manipulat¬
ing that parent.

His response to that situation was to try to
control others anyway he could. To do this he
must hold himself up, and even lie if need be.
He demands to be supported and encouraged.
But in interacting with others he will dictate di¬
rect manipulation like, "You should . . to
evoke submission. This does not lead to sup¬
port.

In its negative aspect, the person with this
structure has a tremendous drive for power and
need to dominate others. He has two ways of
getting this control: by bullying and overpower¬
ing or by undermining through seduction.
Many times his sexuality is hostile with a lot of

Figure 13-5: The Aura of the i
(Diagnost

Aura and Chakra Patterns of the Major Character Structures 119

fantasy. He has invested in an ideal picture he
has of himself and has strong feelings of super¬
iority and contempt, which covers deep inferior¬
ity feelings.

His presenting complaint when entering
therapy are feelings of defeat. He wants to win.
But to be supported means to surrender, and
that, he believes, means defeat. Thus his nega¬
tive intent is, "My will be done." This creates
the double bind of, "I have to be right or I die."
To resolve this problem in therapy, he needs to
learn to trust.

In the therapeutic process, the first layer of
personality encountered will be the mask. It
says, "I'm right; you're wrong." After digging
deeper into the personality, the lower self or
shadow self will say, "I will control you." When
resolution begins, the higher self of the person¬
ality emerges to say, "I give in."

The upper half of the body seems blown up,
and there is a lack of flow between the upper
and lower half of the body. His pelvis is under¬
charged, cold and tightly held. There is severe
tension in the shoulders, base of skull and eyes;
his legs are weak, and he is not grounded.

The psychopathic structure holds up against
fear of failure and defeat. He is torn between his
dependency on people and his need to control
them. He fears being controlled and used and is
afraid to be put in the position of victim, which
is totally humiliating to him. Sexuality is used in
power play; pleasure is secondary to his con¬
quest. He tries not to express his needs by mak¬
ing others need him.

The Energy Field of the
Psychopathic Structure

The main energy is located in the upper half of
the body. His energy level is first hyperactive
and then collapses. The person with a displaced
structure (Figure 13-6) has a general field that is
depleted at the bottom in all auric levels and en¬
ergized at the top; thus the egg shape is dis¬
torted in this way also. The etheric decreases in
fullness toward the feet and is generally of a
darker blue color and stronger tone than that of
the schizoid and the oral. The emotional body

also is fuller at the top. The mental body pro¬
trudes toward the front of the body more than
towards the back, whereas the emotional body
may appear to have a bulge at the will center
located between the shoulder blades, which is
usually greatly enlarged. The higher auric layers
are also stronger and brighter on the upper half.

The chakra configuration in a psychopathic
structure generally shows open will centers at
the shoulder and neck base, with the will cen¬
ters between the shoulder blades extremely
large and overused, open frontal center and
crown center, with most of the others closed,
especially the feeling centers. The rear sexual
center may be partially open. Thus he functions
primarily through mental and will energy.

The energy activity in the brain is strong and
bright in the frontal lobes. This energy activity
decreases towards the back of the head and is
very still and usually rather dark in the occipital
region. This indicates the person is interested
primarily in intellectual pursuits and not in
body activity other than in a way that serves the
active will. The intellect is also used to serve the
will.

It is from these powerful frontal lobes that
the psychopath sends out energy arches that
reach toward another's head to hold him in the
mental grasp type of defense. He also engages
in some verbal denial. He may explode into a
volcanic rage similar to that used in the hysteri¬
cal defense system, but in a controlled, balanced
energy form that does not contain that same
kind of chaos.

The Life Task and Higher Self
of the Psychopathic Character

The psychopath needs to find true surrender by
gradually deflating and letting go of his upper
half and his tendency to control others and by
giving in to his deeper being and sexual feel¬
ings. With this, he can satisfy his deep longing
to be in reality, make contact with friends and
feel like a human being. .

The inner landscape of the psychopathic
character is full of fantasy and adventures of
honor. Here those who win are the ones with

Aura and Chakra Patterns of the Major Character Structures 121

the most truth and honesty. The world revolves
around noble values, which are upheld through
perseverance and valor. How he longs to bring
this into the physical environment of his real
world. He will someday.

When his higher self energies are released,
he is very honest and has a lot of integrity. His
highly developed intellect can be put to use to
solve disagreements by helping others find their
truth. Through his honesty, he can lead others
to their honesty. He is very good in managing
complicated projects and has a big heart full of
love.

The Masochistic Structure

In childhood, the love the masochistic personal¬
ity was given was conditional. His mother was
dominating and sacrificing—even to the extent
of controlling his eating and excretory functions.
The child was made to feel guilty for any self-
assertion or attempt to declare his freedom. All
his attempts to resist the tremendous pressure
put on him were crushed; he now feels trapped,
defeated and humiliated. His response to this
situation was to hold in his feelings and his crea¬
tivity. In fact he tried to hold everything in. This
lead to anger and hatred. He demands to be in¬
dependent, but when he interacts with others,
he uses polite expressions delivered with whin¬
ing disgust to indirectly manipulate others. This
evokes teasing from others. The teasing then al¬
lows him to become angry. He already was an¬
gry, but now he has been given the right to
express it. Thus he is caught in a cycle that
keeps him dependent.

On the negative side, this person is one who
suffers, whines and complains, remains submis¬
sive on the outside, but will never really submit.
Within are blocked strong feelings of spite, neg¬
ativity, hostility, superiority and fear that he will
explode into violent rage. He may be impotent
and have a strong interest in pornography. A
woman is likely to be nonorgasmic and feel her
sexuality is unclean.

His presenting complaint when entering
therapy is tension. He wants release from his
tension, but unconsciously believes that releas¬

ing it and accepting what is inside leads to sub¬
mission and humiliation. Thus his unconscious
negative intent is to remain blocked and to "love
negativity." This leads to the double bind of "If I
get angry. I'll be humiliated; if I don't. I'll be
humiliated." To resolve this problem in therapy,
he needs to become assertive, be free and to
open his spiritual connectedness.

In the therapeutic process the first layer of
personality encountered will be the mask that
says, "I'll kill (hurt) myself before you kill (hurt)
me." After some therapy work is done exploring
this inner landscape, the lower self will become
conscious. It says, "I will spite and provoke
you." This will eventually release the higher self
which resolves the situation with, "I'm free."

Physically he is heavy and compacted with
overdeveloped muscles and shortening of the
neck and waist. He carries strong tensions in the
neck, jaw, throat and pelvis, which is tucked un¬
der. His buttocks are cold. His energy is choked
in the throat area, and his head thrusts forward.

Psychodynamically, he holds in and gets
stuck in a morass in which he whines, com¬
plains, holds back feelings and provokes. If his
provocation is successful he will have an excuse
to explode. He is not conscious of his provoca¬
tion and thinks he is trying to please.

The Energy Field of the
Masochistic Structure

His main energy is internalized. He is hypoac-
tive and yet boiling inside. The masochistic
structure's field (Figure 13-7) is fully inflated.
The etheric body is dense, thick, coarse and
shaded to the gray colors rather than the blue.
The emotional body is full, multicolored and
fairly evenly distributed, as is the etheric body.
The mental body is large and bright even on the
lower part of the body. The intellect and emo¬
tions are more integrated. The celestial body is
bright all around the body with colors of mauve,
maroon and blue. The egg is fully inflated and
has a dark golden color. The egg is a bit over¬
weight toward the bottom and forms more of an
oval shape than an egg. Its outer edge is

activity pattern
in brain

of the Masochistic Character
iagnostic Views)

Aura and Chakra Patterns of the Major Character Structures 123

strongly defined with somewhat too much ten¬
sion and thickness.

The chakras that are usually open in a maso¬
chist before starting core process work are the
forehead, the solar plexus and, possibly, a parti¬
ally opened rear sexual center. He thus func¬
tions in the mental, emotional and will aspects
of the personality. The energy activity pattern of
the brain shows activity in the frontal, parietal
and ventricle areas, with some of this activity
extending to a small central area in the occiput,
which is surrounded by a less active area. De¬
fense systems commonly employed by the mas¬
ochist are the tentacles, silent obvious brooding
and verbal arrows.

The Life Task and Higher Self
of the Masochistic Character

The masochist needs to free himself from humil¬
iation by freeing his aggression. He needs to ex¬
press himself actively in whatever way suits his
fancy whenever he wants to.

The inner landscape of a masochistic charac¬
ter is like filigreed silver and gold. His creative
force expresses itself in delicate intricate de¬
signs, each of personal distinction and taste.
Each nuance is important. When he brings this
highly developed creativity out, the world will
be awed.

His higher self energies are full of caring for
others. He is a natural negotiator. His heart is
big. He is very supportive and has a lot to give,
both in energy and understanding. He is full of
deep compassion and at the same time has a
great capacity for fun and joy. He is capable of
creative playfulness and lightness. He will bring
out all these gifts and excel in whatever he
wants to do.

The Rigid Structure

In childhood, the person with a rigid character
structure experienced rejection by the parent of
the opposite sex. The child experienced this as a
betrayal of love because erotic pleasure, sexual¬

ity and love are all the same to the child. To
compensate for this rejection, the child decided
to control all the feelings involved—pain, rage
and good feelings—by holding them back. To
surrender is a scary thing for this person, be¬
cause it means releasing all these feelings again.
Thus he will not reach out for his needs directly,
but will manipulate to get what he wants. Pride
is associated with feelings of love. The rejection
of sexual love hurts his pride.

Psychodynamically, the rigid person holds
back feelings and actions in order not to look
foolish. He tends to be worldly, with a lot of
ambition and competitive aggression. He says,
"I'm superior, and I know everything." Inside is
a deep terror of betrayal; vulnerability is to be
avoided at all costs. He is afraid of being hurt.

He holds his head high and backbone
straight with pride. He has a high degree of
outer control and a strong identification with
physical reality. This strong ego position is used
as an excuse to avoid letting go. This person
fears the involuntary processes within the hu¬
man being that are not determined by the ego.
The inner self of the individual is walled off
from the outpouring and inpouring of feelings.
He will have sex with contempt, not love.

In holding back his feelings, he only creates
more pride. He demands love and sexual feel¬
ings from others, but when he interacts with
them, he seductively uses qualifiers to remain
uncommitted. This leads to competition, not
love. His pride is then hurt, and he becomes
more competitive. He is in a vicious cycle that
does not get him what he wants.

His presenting complaint in therapy (if he
comes at all) is that he has no feelings. He wants
to surrender to feelings, but he believes they will
only hurt, so his negative intent is, "I won't sur¬
render." He chooses sex over love but that
doesn't satisfy him. This leads to the double
bind of "Either choice is wrong." To surrender
will hurt; to remain in pride will not allow feel¬
ings. To resolve this problem in therapy, he
needs to connect his heart to his genitals.

In the therapeutic process, the mask will say,
"Yes, but. . ." After some time, the lower self or
shadow self will emerge into the conscious. It
will say, "I won't love you." Then as feelings be-

124 Hands of Light

gin to flow as a result of bodywork, the higher
self will resolve the situation by stating, "I com¬
mit, I love."

The body is harmoniously proportioned,
highly energized and integrated. It can have two
types of blocks—plate armor, like steel plates on
the body, or mesh armor, like a suit of chain
mesh over the body. The pelvis is tipped back
and cold.

The Energy Field of the
Rigid Structure

The main energy is held on the periphery and
away from the core. He is hyperactive. The per¬
son with a rigid structure (Figure 13-8) is char¬
acterized by his balance and integration, shown
in the aura by a strong bright aura that is for the
most part evenly distributed over and through¬
out the body. The etheric field is strong, wide
and even, with a bluish-gray color and medium
coarseness. The emotional body displays a calm
balance and is evenly distributed. It may not be
as colorful as some of the other structures if the
person has not worked to open his feelings. It
may be larger in the back of the person, since all
the centers are open there. The mental body is
developed and bright. The celestial body may
not be very bright if the person has not opened
much to unconditional love or his spirituality.
The causal or ketheric template egg is strong,
resilient, very well shaped and brightly
colored—golden-silvery with a predominance of
gold.

The chakras of the rigid character that are
probably open before beginning process work
are the rear will and sexual chakras and the
mental chakras. He thus lives primarily by his
mind and will. The crown and solar plexus may
or may not be open. As the person starts proc¬
ess work and opening to his feelings, the front
feeling centers begin to open.

The brain activity pattern shows a lot of ac¬
tivity on the sides and the central rear portion of
the brain. In some cases the frontal lobes are
just as active, depending on the area of life the
person has decided to concentrate on. If it has

been intellectual pursuits, then this area will
also be as bright and active; if not, it will usually
be the second most active area. If the person has
pursued development in the arts, like painting
or music or other creative forms, I find the side
lobes brighter. I find that as people work in their
process, grow and become more enlightened,
the activity patterns of the brain become more
balanced with activity at the side, frontal and
occipital area. The bridges begin to build di¬
rectly through the head to form a cross when
observed from the top. When a person begins to
develop his spirituality and have spiritual expe¬
riences, say in meditation, I find more activity
growing in the central brain area.

Energetic defense systems most used by the
rigid person are power-will display, boundary
containment and sometimes hysteria (shown in
Figure 12-3).

The Life Task and Higher Self
of the Rigid Character

The rigid character needs to open the feeling
centers and allow his feelings to flow and be
seen by others. He needs to share his feelings,
whatever they are. This will allow energies to
flow into and out of the core of his being and
release the uniqueness of the Higher Self.

The inner landscape of the rigid character
holds adventure, passion and love. There are
mountains to climb, causes to champion and
loves to be romanced. Like Icarus, he will fly to
the sun. Like Moses, he will lead his people to
the promised land. He will inspire others with
his love and passion for life. He will then be a
natural leader in most any profession he desires.
He will be capable of deep contact with others
and the universe. He will be able to play in the
universe and enjoy life fully.

It is very helpful to keep the general charac¬
ter structure of your patient in mind when giv¬
ing a healing. This will help you as a healer to
approach the healing specifically for each per¬
son and to make the healing most efficient. Just
approaching the healing in terms of each pa¬
tient's relationship to boundaries is very helpful.

126 Hands of Light

The person with a schizoid character structure
will need to have his boundaries identified and
strengthened. He also will need to have his spir¬
itual reality confirmed. High Sense Perception
helps a lot with this. The schizoid's aura also
needs to be charged up, and he needs to be
taught how to hold a charge. The energy leaks
need to be stopped. The oral character's aura
needs to be charged up and the chakras need to
be opened. The boundary needs to be strength¬
ened. The person needs to be taught how it feels
to be open, so that he can learn to keep the cha¬
kras open through exercise and meditation. The
oral person needs a lot of touching. The person
with displaced character structure needs to
charge the lower half of his field, open the lower
chakras and learn to live more through the heart
rather than the will. It is very important to be
very tender with sexual issues with the dis¬
placed character structure. The second chakra
must be dealt with with care, understanding
and acceptance. The healer must be very sensi¬
tive and careful when touching the lower half of
the body. The person with a masochistic energy
field needs to learn to move and release all the
energy he has blocked. His boundaries must be
respected above all. Never touch without per¬
mission. The more of the healing he can do for
himself, the faster and better he will heal. His
healing will always be related to creativity,
which is hidden inside and needs to be brought
out and expressed. The rigid character's aura
needs softening. This person needs to open the
heart chakra and connect to love and other feel¬
ings. The second layer of the aura needs to be
activated and its activity brought to conscious¬
ness. This must be done slowly by the healer,
allowing feelings to be experienced for short
periods at a time. The deeper core energies of
the personality need to be reached through
laying-on of hands. It is important for the healer
to lovingly accept the personality when her
hands are on the body.

Beyond Character Structure

As each person works on himself psycho-
dynamically, physically and spiritually, the aura

changes. The aura becomes balanced, the cha¬
kras open more and more. Images and miscon¬
ceptions about reality within our negative belief
system clear away, creating more lightness, less
stagnation and higher vibrations in the energy
field. The field becomes more resilient and fluid.
Creativity increases as the efficiency of the
energy-metabolizing system grows. The field ex¬
pands and deeper changes begin to occur.

Many people begin to have a beautiful
golden-silvery point of light in the center of the
head that grows into a brilliant ball of light. As
the person develops, this ball grows larger and
extends beyond the body. It seems to be the
seed kernel that brings light to and develops the
celestial body into a brighter more advanced or¬
gan, which begins to perceive and thus to inter¬
act with reality beyond the physical world. The
location of this light seems to be in the root area
of the crown and third eye chakras, where the
pituitary and pineal glands are located. As the
mental body grows brighter, sensitivities to real¬
ity beyond the physical develop. One's way of
life changes to a natural flow of energy exchange
and transformation with the universe. We begin
to see ourselves as a unique aspect of the uni¬
verse, completely integrated with the whole.
Our energy system is seen as an energy trans¬
formation system, which takes in energy from
the environment, breaks it down, transforms it
and then resynthesizes it and sends it out into
the universe in a higher spiritual state. Thus, we
are each living transformation systems. Since
the energy we transform has consciousness, we
are transforming consciousness. We are truly
spiritualizing matter.

Character Structure and Life Task

Each character structure is a model of a transfor¬
mation system gone awry. First we block the en¬
ergy. It becomes clogged and slowed down
within our energy systems. We do that by living
according to our negative beliefs. We really are
out of reality a lot of the time because we live
and react to the universe as we think it is, not as
it really is. But this does not work for long. We

Aura and Chakra Patterns of the Major Character Structures 127

create pain in our lives by doing this. Sooner or
later we hear the message that we are doing
something wrong. We change ourselves and our
energy systems to alleviate the pain. We unclog
our systems and transform the energy. In doing
this we not only help to clear away our personal
negative beliefs, but we also affect those around
us in a positive way. We thus transform energy.

When we begin releasing our blocks, we do
our personal task. This frees our energy so that
we can do what we have always wanted to do in
life: that deep longing we have had since child¬
hood, that secret dream, that is one's life task.
That which you have wanted to do more than
anything in your life is your life task. It is what
you came here to do. By clearing away your per¬
sonal blocks, you pave the way to accomplish
your deepest longing. Let your longing lead
you. Follow it. It will bring you happiness.

You have designed your body and your en¬
ergy system as a tool to perform your life task. It
is made up of a combination of energy-
consciousness that best suits what you have
been incarnated to do. No one else has that
combination, and no one else wants to do pre¬
cisely what you want to do. You are unique.
When you block the flow of energy in your en-
ergy system that you created for your task, you
also block your task. The general patterns of
blocking that people do is called character struc¬
tures and defense systems. These are all ways
by which you habitually separate yourself from
what you came to do on the world task level.
They are also direct manifestations of what you
don't know about life that you have come here
to learn. Therefore you have your lesson crystal¬
lized into your body and your energy system.
You have built and fashioned your schoolroom
according to your own specifications. You live
inside it.

As you will learn, energy blocks lead eventu¬
ally to physical disorder. Conversely, these dis¬
orders can be traced to your character structure
or the way you block your creative energies.
Therefore whatever your illness may be, it is di¬
rectly related to your life task. Your illness is di¬
rectly related, through your energy system, to
your deepest longing. You are sick because you
are not following your deepest longing. So I ask

again, what is it that you most long to do with
your life—more than anything else in the world?
Find how you stop yourself. Clear away those
blocks. Do what you wish to do, and you will
get well.

Exercises to Find Your
Character Structure

Observe yourself in a mirror. Which body type
does your body look like? Read over each table
and each character structure. Then answer ques¬
tions 7-10.

Chapter 13 Review

1. Describe the general HEF configuration of
each of the five major character structures.

2. Describe the highest qualities of each of the
main character structures.

3. According to auric vision, which areas of the
brain are most active in each different char¬
acter structure?

Food For Thought

4. What is the life task of each character struc¬
ture?

5. How is character structure related to life
task?

6. How is illness related to a person's life task?

7. Proportionately list each character structure
that makes up your personality/body self.
For example:

50% Schizoid
20% Oral
15% Displaced
5% Masochistic .

10% Rigid

8. Go through Figure 13-1. Find your person¬
ality traits for each item listed.

9. Go through Figure 13-2. Find your physical
and energetic traits for each item listed.

10. Go through Figure 13-3. Find how you re¬
late with other people from your character
structure for each item listed.

128 Hands of Light

11. From the answers to the preceding three them to question 11 above.

items, what could your personal task be? 13. Now do items 7-12 for each of your pa-
Your world task? tients.

12. If you have any physical disorders, relate

PART IV

THE PERCEPTUAL TOOLS OF

THE HEALER

"And though the Lord give you the bread of adversity, and the water of affliction, yet shall
not thy teachers be removed into a comer any more, but thine eyes shall see thy teachers.

"And thine ears shall hear a word behind thee, saying, this is the way; walk ye in it, when
ye turn to the right hand, and when ye turn to the left."

Isaiah 30:20-21

Introduction

THE CAUSE OF ILLNESS

From the perspective of a healer, illness is the
result of imbalance. Imbalance is a result of for¬
getting who you are. Forgetting who you are
creates thoughts and actions that lead to an un¬
healthy lifestyle and eventually to illness. The
illness itself is a signal that you are imbalanced
because you have forgotten who you are. It is a
direct message to you that tells you not only
how you are in imbalance but also shows you
the steps that will take you back to the real self
and health. This information is very specific if
you know how to secure access to it.

Illness can thus be understood as a lesson
you have given yourself to help you remember
who you are. Immediately you will think of all
kinds of exceptions to this statement. But most
of them will limit you to a perception of reality
that only includes this particular lifetime and
only life in the physical body. My scope is, how¬
ever, a more transcendental one. The above
statements can only be understood in a whole
and healthy way if you already accept yourself
as existing beyond the physical dimensions of
time and space. The statements can only be felt
as loving, if they also include you as a part of
the whole, and therefore the whole. They are
based upon the idea that individuation and
wholeness are the same. That is, a priori the
whole-is made up of the individual parts, and
the individual parts are therefore not only part
of the whole, but like a hologram are in fact the
whole.

During my own personal growth process
that took place over the years while I was mak¬

ing energy-field observations as a counselor,
two major changes occurred that drastically
changed my way of working with people. The
first was that I began to receive guidance during
sessions from spiritual teachers as to what to do
in the sessions, and I began to look and ask for
specific kinds of information pertaining to dif¬
ferent levels of the aura. The second was that I
began to develop what I call "internal vision";
that is, I could see into the body somewhat like
an x-ray machine. My practice slowly turned
from that of a counselor to that of a spiritual
healer.

Healing became first an extension of the
therapy and then the central core of all therapy
because it reaches all the dimensions of the soul
and body far beyond that which the therapy was
able to do. My work became clear. I was healing
the soul or becoming a channel to help the soul
remember who it is and where it is headed in
those times it forgets and gets off track in dis¬
ease or illness. This work has, for me, become
very fulfilling, full of ecstasy in the experience of
high energies and angelic beings who come to
heal. At the same time, it is challenging to face
the pain of terrible physical illness, which the
healer must experience to some extent in order
to heal. I had to let myself see the tremendous
energy and soul imbalances that many people
live with. Humanity carries with it terrible pain,
loneliness and deep longing to be free. The
work of the healer is a work of love. The healer
reaches into these painful areas of the soul and
gently reawakens hope. S/he gently reawakens

131

132 Hands of Light

the ancient memory of who the soul is. S/he
touches the spark of God in each cell of the
body and gently reminds it that it is already
God and, already being God, it inexorably flows
with the Universal Will towards health and
wholeness.

In the next few chapters, I will discuss the
process of illness and the process of healing as

seen from the point of view of the Spiritual
Teachers. I will share with you some of my expe¬
riences of spiritual guidance in the professional
setting and discuss in detail High Sense Percep¬
tion, how it works and how you can learn it. I
will also present Heyoan's view of reality. All of
this is important to understand in order to learn
the healing techniques presented in Part V.

Chapter 14

THE SEPARATION OF REALITY

As can be seen in Chapter 4, the idea presented
by Newtonian mechanics that the universe is
composed of separated building blocks of matter
became outmoded in the early 20th century.
Much evidence has been presented by our scien¬
tists that shows that we are all always intercon¬
nected. We are not separate beings; we are
individuated beings. It is only our old Newto¬
nian habits of thinking that lead us to these con¬
cepts of separation from the whole. They simply
are not true. Let me show you an example of
what interpreting self-responsibility from the
point of view of separateness can do.

Suppose a small child contracts AIDS from a
blood transfusion, for example. If that event is
interpreted from the separation point of view,
one may say, "Oh, poor victim." From the popu¬
larized version of self-responsibility one might
say, "Oh, he created it, so it is his fault" But
from holism one would say, "Oh, what a hard
lesson that brave soul and family have chosen to
learn from their greater reality. What can I do to
best help them? How can I best love them? How
can I help them remember who they are?" Any¬
one who approaches life in this manner finds no
contradictions between responsibility and love
and a great deal of difference between responsi¬
bility-and blame.

The view from individuation and holism
promises respect and acceptance of whatever
other fellow human beings experience. On the
contrary, statements like "Oh, you created your
cancer; 1 wouldn't do a thing like that" are
niade from the perspective of separation, not in¬

dividuation. Separation promotes fear and vic-
timhood; fear and victimhood only support the
illusion of powerlessness. Responsibility and ac¬
ceptance promote power, power from within to
create your reality. For if you unconsciously had
something to do with making things the way
they are, then you can have a great deal to do
with creating things the way you want them to
be. Let us look at the processes of forgetting
more clearly.

As children, only a small portion of our in¬
ternal experience is verified by those around us.
This creates an internal struggle between self-
preservation and confirmation from others. As
children, we needed a lot of confirmation; we
were m a learning stage and that learning was
based on confirmation from the outside world.
As a result we either created secret fantasy
worlds, or we rejected much of our unconfirmed
inner reality and found a way to store it for later
verification. Another way to explain the process
is that we blocked off our experiences, be they
images, thoughts or feelings. Blocking effec¬
tively walls us off from that portion of experi¬
ence, at least temporarily. We wall ourselves off
from ourselves. This is another way of saying
we forget who we are. In Chapters 9 and 10 we
dealt extensively with blocks in the auric field.
The effect of these blocks when seen from the
auric point of view is to disrupt the healthy flow
of energy throughout the auric field and eventu¬
ally to cause disease. They become what is
sometimes called stagnated soul-substance.
They are "blobs" of energy-consciousness that

133

134 Hands of Light

are cut off from the rest of us. Let us look at this
process using the Gestalt idea of the wall.

Whenever you experience discomfort, you
are in some way experiencing the wall you built
up between the greater integrated you and a
part of yourself. That wall serves to hold back a
portion of yourself that you do not want to enter
into your experience of the moment. With time,
the wall grows stronger, and you forget that it is
a portion of yourself that is walled off, i.e., you
have created more forgetting. It begins to appear
that what is walled off is something from the
outside, that the wall appears to hold back some
dreaded force from the outside. These internal
walls are created over eons of soul experiences.
The longer they stand, the more they appear to
be keeping something other than self away from
the self. The longer they stand, the more they
appear to create safety, but the more they solid¬
ify the experience of separation.

Exercises to

Explore Your Inner Wall

To explore your walls, you can use the following
exercise. Bring to memory a particularly un¬
pleasant situation, either one you are struggling
with currently or an unresolved one from the
past. Begin to experience what that situation felt
like, picture it in your mind, hear the words or
sounds associated with that experience. Find
within that experience the fear it contains. Fear
is the feeling of being separated. As you are able
to bring yourself back into that state of fear, be¬
gin to perceive also a wall of fear. Feel it, taste it,
see it, smell it. What is its texture, its color. Is it
light or dark, sharp or hard? What is it made of?
Become the wall. What does it think, say, see,
feel? What does this portion of your conscious¬
ness believe about reality?

Heyoan has given the following explanation
of the wall:

"We will go back to the idea of the wall that
you yourself have fashioned in order to maintain
what you considered at the time of fashioning
an inner equilibrium, but that actually maintains
an outer disequilibrium, as in a dike, or in locks.

where one level of water is higher than the
other. So you may see yourself behind this wall
and a great flood, a great pressure of power of
some form on the outside, with you inside. Your
wall then makes up for that which you feel you are
lacking on the inner level. In other words there is
this great power coining towards you and you
think you have less power than it has. Then you
make a wall to protect you as, when in the medi¬
eval ages, the walls of the castles were being
stormed. You who are inside the wall must first
explore the essence of this wall, for it is fash¬
ioned of you. It is fashioned of your essence and
it is full of statements, statements of what you
must do in order to remain safe. Now, the won¬
derful point about all of this is that this wall is
fashioned of your essence and contains power
within it. That power can be transformed and
redistributed as a foundation for the power of
the inner self. Or it can be seen as a stairway
into the inner self where that power already ex¬
ists. That is another way of saying it, depending
upon which metaphor suits you best. And so
you sit behind your wall of safety, and at the
same time you sit in your wall of safety, because
you are that wall. It is, then, the bridge of con¬
sciousness between what you as the wall say
and what you as the inner person who is being
protected say.

Exercise to
Dissolve Your Wall

Hold a conversation between you the wall and
you the person inside. When that is thoroughly
done, then we suggest you hold the same con¬
versation between you and what is beyond the
wall and even the wall and that which is beyond
and continue these conversations until there be¬
comes a flow through that wall.

"Now you can see this wall symbolically on
the psychodynamic stage. You can also see it as
representative of that wall between who you are
and who you think you are, for you are that
power on the other side of the wall, too, in
whatever form it is. You have power within it,
not power over it. The wall represents the belief

The Separation of Reality 135

in power over, the power of separation, which is
one of the greatest maladies of the earth plane at
this time, the disease of power over. And so, if
you can find this metaphor within you and
without you on not only the psychodynamic
level but the spiritual level and the world level,
you can use it as a tool for self exploration and
healing. You can use it as a tool for remembering
who you are."

Let us look at the wall from the auric field
point of view. As was said earlier, the wall can
be seen as an energy block in the aura. In the
process of going into the wall, experiencing it
and enlivening it, you are also enlightening the
block. The block seen in the auric field begins to
move and stops disrupting the natural energy
flow.

These blocks exist on all the levels of the
aura. They affect each other from layer to layer.
Let us now look at how a block in one layer of
the aura—which, of course, would be expressed

in the reality of that layer, i.e., thought, belief or
feeling—can eventually cause an illness in the
physical body.

Chapter 14 Review

1. What is the cause of illness?

Food For Thought

2. What is the nature of your inner wall?

3. Hold a conversation with your wall. What
does your wall say? What does the part of
you that sits behind the wall say? What does
the part of you that sits without the wall say?
What is the wall protecting you against?
What is the nature of your power that you
have locked away in your wall? How can you
release it?

Chapter 15

FROM ENERGY BLOCK
TO PHYSICAL DISEASE

Dimension of Energy
and Consciousness

Looking at ourselves with a broader perspective
than we did before, we see that we are much
more than our physical bodies. We are com¬
posed of layer upon layer of energy and con¬
sciousness. We may sense that internally. A
clear graphic description of our self-experience
of feelings and thoughts is presented in this
chapter.

Our inner spark of divinity exists in a much
higher plane of reality and advanced conscious¬
ness than that of our everyday consciousness.
We are this higher consciousness just as much
as we are our everyday consciousness. This
higher consciousness can be tapped into with
practice. Once it is found, it is no surprise. One
has the sensation of "Oh, yes! I knew that all
along." Our divine spark has supreme wisdom;
we can use it to guide our daily life, growth and
development.

Since the aura is the medium through which
creative impulses from our higher realities are
precipitated down into the physical reality, we
can use the auric field to bring our conscious¬
ness back up (in vibration) through its layers
into the reality of the Godself. To do this, we
need to know more specifically how these crea¬
tive impulses are transmitted, layer by layer, into
our physical world to help create our daily expe¬
rience of life.

First, let us consider again just what the aura
is. It is much more than a medium or a field. It
is life itself. Each layer is a body, just as real,
alive and functioning as is our physical body.
Each body exists in a conscious reality that is in
some ways like, and in some ways unlike, the
physical reality. Each layer is, in a sense, in a
world of its own, yet these worlds are intercon¬
necting and exist immersed within the same
space in which we experience our physical real¬
ity.

Figure 15-1 lists the planes of reality in
which we exist and which correlate with each of
the auric layers or bodies shown in Chapter 7.
The physical plane is composed of four levels:
the physical, etheric, emotional and mental lev¬
els. The astral plane is the bridge between the
spiritual and physical, and the spiritual plane is
above it and has gradations of enlightenment
within it. As already stated in Chapter 7, we
have at least three layers in our spiritual
bodies—the etheric template level, the celestial
level and the ketheric template level.

Creation or manifestation takes place when a
concept or a belief is transmitted from its source
in the high levels down into the more dense lev¬
els of reality until it becomes crystalized into
physical reality. We create according to our be¬
liefs. Of course what is taking place on the lower
layers also affects the higher ones. In order to
understand the process of creating health or dis¬
ease, let us look again more closely at how con-

137

138 Hands of Light

Figure 15-1

PLANES OF REALITY IN WHICH WE EXIST

(as related to the layers of the aura)

Spiritual Plane

-M

<Z)

•H

Lh P
QJ O
X! *4J

60 fO
Lh

*§>

Astral Plane

Gradation of Light

Physical Plane
Mental Level
Emotional Level
Etheric Level
Physical Level

Ketheric Template Level
Celestial Level
Etheric Template Level

sciousness manifests on each layer of the auric
field.

Figure 15-2 lists how consciousness ex¬
presses itself on each auric layer and the state¬
ment that consciousness makes. On the physical
level, consciousness takes the form of instinct,
automatic reflexes and the automatic function¬
ing of internal organs. Here consciousness
makes the statement, "I exist." At the etheric
level, consciousness is expressed in terms of
sensations like physical pleasure or pain. Un-
pleasurable sensations such as cold and hunger
are signals that something is needed to rebal¬
ance our energy in order to flow once again in
harmony. At the emotional level, consciousness
is expressed in basic primal emotions and reac¬
tions like fear, anger and love. Most of these
emotions relate to the self. On the mental level,
consciousness is expressed in terms of rational
thinking. This is the plane of the linear analytic
mind.

On the astral level, consciousness is experi¬
enced as strong emotions that extend beyond
the self and the other to encompass humanity.
The astral plane, an entirely different world, is

the plane where astral travel takes place, and, as
described by people who have experienced it,
that plane differs from the physical plane in the
following ways: objects have fluid form; light is
radiated from objects rather than being primar¬
ily reflected off them; and to travel, one need
only concentrate on where one wants to go and
stay focused on that place. The direction shifts
with the focus, so that if you shift your focus,
you shift your direction. Concentration power is
very important on this plane!

The differences and similarities between the
physical and astral planes would not be surpris¬
ing to the physicist, since the laws that govern
the astral plane would be based on natural law
governing a medium of finer substance, higher
energy and faster vibrations. These laws would,
of course, correlate with those we know in our
physical world. I propose that our physical laws
are, in fact, simply special cases of general laws,
the cosmic or universal laws which govern the
entire universe.

On the spiritual plane there is yet another
world with its own reality, one that seems, from
my limited view of it, to be far more beautiful/

From Energy Block to Physical Disease 139

Figure 15-2

EXPRESSION OF CONSCIOUSNESS
IN THE AURIC LEVELS

Statement

Level

Expression of
Consciousness

Consciousness

Makes

Ketheric

Higher

I know.

Level

Concepts

I am.

Celestial

Higher

I love

Level

Feelings

universally.

Etheric

Template

Higher

Level

Will

I will.

Astral

I-Thou

I love

Level

Emotions

humanly.

Mental

Thinking

I think.

Level

Emotional

Personal

I feel

Level

Emotions

emotionally.

Etheric

Physical

I feel

Level

Sensation

physically.

Physical

I exist.

Level

Functioning

I am

becoming.

full of light and loving than ours. On the fifth

layer, the etheric template, consciousness ex¬
presses itself as higher will, with which we will
things into being through the power of naming
and defining them. On the celestial level, con¬
sciousness expresses itself as higher feelings like
universal love, that is, love that goes beyond hu¬
man beings and friends into a universal love for
all life. On the seventh level, consciousness is
expressed in higher concepts of knowing or be¬
lief systems. This is where the initial creative im¬
pulse begins from our knowing, not just linear
knowing, but integrated knowing.

The basic primary creative force is initiated
in the highest spiritual body and is then moved
into the astral body. Or, from another point of
view, one might say that the finer substances
and energies in the spiritual bodies induce har¬
monic resonance in the astral which then in¬
duces harmonic resonance in the lower three
bodies. This process continues all the way down
into the frequency level of the physical body.
(The phenomenon of harmonic induction is that
which occurs when you strike one tuning fork
and another in the room will sound.) Each body
expresses this impulse in terms of its conscious
reality at its own level. For example, a creative
impulse from the spiritual moving into the astral
will be expressed in terms of broad feelings. As
it moves into the lower frequency layers, it will
be first expressed in terms of thoughts, then
specific feelings, then physical sensation, and
the physical body will respond automatically
through the autonomic nervous system. It will
either relax if it reads a positive impulse or will
contract if it receives a negative one.

The Creative Process of Health

Health is maintained when the creative force
coming from human spiritual reality is directed
according to universal or cosmic law (Figure 15-
3). When the ketheric body is aligned with
greater spiritual reality, it manifests the divine
knowing of that reality. The statement made is,
"I know I am one with God." It is the experience
of being one with the creator, yet being individ¬
uated at the same time. This reality then in¬
duces the feeling of universal love in the
celestial body. This feeling of being one with
God in turn creates an alignment of the individ¬
ual will in the etheric template with the Divine
will. This in turn is expressed in the astral level
as love for humanity. The experience of love for
humanity will influence the mental layer and in¬
form the perceptions of reality in the mental
body. This vibration in the mental body is then
transmitted by the laws of harmonic induction
and sympathetic resonance down into the mat¬
ter and energy of the emotional body, which
then expresses itself as feelings. If perception of

140 Hands of Light

Figure 15-3

THE CREATIVE PROCESS OF HEALTH

KETHERIC TEMPLATE BODY .... Divine Knowing:

CELESTIAL BODY.Divine Loving:

ETHERIC TEMPLATE BODY.Divine Will:

ASTRAL BODY.. Loving:

MENTAL BODY.Clear Thinking:

EMOTIONAL BODY.. Real Feeling:

I know I am one with God.

I love life universally.

Thy will and mine are one.

I love humanity.

Clear thinking used to implement love and
will

Natural unblocked flow of feelings
corresponding with Divine Reality,
creates: love

ETHERIC BODY.I exist:

PHYSICAL BODY

Natural metabolism of energy, which
maintains the structure and function of the
etheric body; yin/yang balanced, creates:
We're OK.

Beingness: Natural metabolism of chemical energies,

balanced physical systems, creates: physical J
health.

reality is consistent with cosmic law, the feelings
will be harmonious and accepted by the person
and allowed to flow. They will not be blocked.

This flow then is transmitted down into the
etheric body, which responds in a natural har¬
mony. The result is pleasurable body sensations
that promote natural metabolism of energy from
the Universal Energy Field. This energy is

needed to nourish the etheric body and to main¬
tain its structure and function. A natural balance
of the yin/yang energies in the etheric body is
also maintained. With this balance, the natural
sensitivity in the body, coming from the natural
flow of feelings, leads to increased awareness of
body sensations, which in turn leads to follow¬
ing proper diet and exercise. The healthy etheric

From Energy Block to Physical Disease 141

Figure 15-4

THE DYNAMIC PROCESS OF DISEASE

KETHERIC

I believe I am

Believes he is

Tangle or teat

TEMPLATE

superior 1

to others

in 7th layer

CELESTIAL

I love what

Loves being superior

Weak or blocked

LEVEL

I believe

Celestial Light

ETHERIC

I will my beliefs

Tries

to be

Distortion in

TEMPLATE

into being

superior

Etheric Template

ASTRAL

I desire according

Desires to

1 3

Blocks in Astral

to my beliefs

be superior

dark forms,

stagnated energy

MENTAL

I think according

I think can

superior

Disturbance of

to my beliefs

I think can't be superior

form of mental

Yes/No

(impass)

body, dissociated

thought forms

EMOTIONAL

I feel according

Fe;

Dark blocks of energy

to my beliefs

stagnated of depleted

Anger

Grief

energy

1 /

ETHERIC

I am according

Physical

Tangles, breaks or

to my beliefs

pain

disruptions in etheric

layer (imbalance of

yin/yang) overcharge in

solar plexus

PHYSICAL

I exist according

Dis-<

?ase f

Physical illness

to my beliefs

like ulcers

body then supports and maintains a healthy
physical body, in which the chemical and physi¬
cal systems remain balanced and functioning
normally, perpetuating physical health. In the
healthy system, the energies in each body re-
main balanced and support the balance in the
°ther bodies. Health is thus maintained; i.e.,
health attracts more health.

The Dynamic Processes
of Disease

In the diseased system (Figure 15-4) the same
step-down process is at work. However, after
the primary creative force moves out from hu¬
man spiritual reality, it becomes distorted and
then acts against universal law. This distortion

142 Hands of Light

occurs when the primary creative impulse im¬
pinges upon an energy block or distortion
within the aura. As soon as the primary creative
impulse becomes distorted on its way into the
denser layers of the auric bodies, it continues to
be distorted as it is transmitted to succeeding
levels. I have seen the primary distortions as
high as the seventh layer of the aura, where they
appeared as tears or tangled lines of light. These
"spiritual distortions" are always related to be¬
lief systems acquired in this lifetime, or in other
lifetimes, and are therefore karmic. I see karma
simply as life experience created from belief sys¬
tems that have been carried over from one life¬
time to the next until they are cleared and
realigned with the greater reality.

A distorted seventh layer is related to a dis¬
torted belief system. An example could be, "I
believe I am superior." This distortion affects the
celestial layer by blocking celestial love and dis¬
torting it. Then the person may love being supe¬
rior. Light on the celestial level might appear
very weak. This will affect the fifth layer of the
field, which will be distorted. The person will
try to be superior. The astral level will respond
with the desire to be superior, which will cause
blocks or dark blobs of stagnating energy in the
astral body. The mental body will give the per¬
son the thought that he is superior. Luckily no¬
body can fool himself all the time, so sooner or
later the opposite is brought to mind. If I'm not
superior, then I must be inferior. A mental im¬
passe is created in the person, which is also a
distortion in the structure of the mental body.
There is a splitting of the life force into two di¬
rectly opposing currents, and the person falls
into a dualistic split. Another example of this
conflict is, "I can't do it" yet "I can do it." Thus,
we have a mental impasse set up in the mental
body. This impasse is expressed in energy and
vibrations. If the impasse is not solved by the
individual, it may become a dissociated thought
form and fall into unconsciousness. This will af¬
fect the emotional body (through inducted vi¬
bration as described earlier) and cause fear,
because the person cannot solve the problem.
This fear is based on unreality and is unaccepta¬
ble to the person. It is therefore blocked and af¬
ter some time may also become unconscious.

Since there is no longer a free flow of feelings in
the emotional body, where more dark blobs of
stagnated or very weak energy will appear, this
disruption will be precipitated down into the
etheric body in the form of tangled or torn lines
of light force. Since these are the lines of force,
or the grid structure, upon which the cells of the
physical body grow, the problem of the etheric
body will be transmitted into the physical body
and become disease in the physical body.

In our example (Figure 15-4), this fear could
disrupt the etheric at the solar plexus, causing
an overcharge of yin in that area if the person is
not able to solve this particular dilemma. This
disruption, if allowed to continue, will cause a
disruption of the metabolism of chemical ener¬
gies in the physical body, causing physical sys¬
tems to become imbalanced and eventually
diseased. In our example, the overcharge of yin
in the solar plexus could cause increased acidity
in the stomach and eventually ulcers.

Thus, in the diseased system the imbalanced
energies in the higher bodies are progressively
transmitted down into the lower bodies, eventu¬
ally causing disease in the physical body. In the
diseased system, the sensitivity to the body sen¬
sations is decreased and can lead to insensitivity
to the body's needs, manifesting through im¬
proper diet, for example, which can create a
negative feedback loop of more imbalanced en¬
ergies. Each body that is disrupted or imbal¬
anced also has a disruptive effect on the
neighbor above it. This disease tends to create
more disease.

The observations I have made through High
Sense Perception show that on the even-numbered
layers of the field, disease takes the form of the blocks
described earlier in this book—undercharged, over¬
charged or clogged dark energy. On the structured
layers of the field, disease takes the form of disfigura¬
tion, disruption or entanglement. There may be holes
in the grid structure on any of the odd-numbered lay¬
ers of the aura. Drugs affect the aura a great deal.
I have seen dark energy forms in the liver left
from drugs taken for various previous diseases.
Hepatitis leaves an orange-yellow color in the
liver years after the disease is supposedly cured.
I have seen the radiopaque dye used to observe
the spine that was injected into the spinal

From Energy Block to Physical Disease 143

column to diagnose injury ten years after injec¬
tion although it is supposed to be cleared by the
body in a month or two. Chemotherapy clogs
the whole auric field, but especially the liver,
with greenish-brown mucus-like energy. Radia¬
tion therapy frays the structured layers of the
auric field like a burned nylon stocking. Surgery
causes scars in the first layer of the field and
sometimes all the way to the seventh layer.
These scars, disfigurations and clogs can be
healed by helping the physical body heal itself;
if they are left distorted, the physical body will
have a much more difficult time healing itself.
When an organ is removed, the etheric organ
can still be reconstructed and serve to keep har¬
mony in the auric bodies above the physical
body. I would imagine that someday, with more
knowledge of the auric field and biochemistry,
we may be able to cause organs that have been
removed to grow again.

Since the chakras are the points of maxi¬
mum energy intake, they are very important fo¬
cal points of balance within the energy system.
If a chakra is imbalanced, disease will result.
The more imbalanced a chakra is, the more seri¬
ous the disease. As shown in Chapter 8, Figure
8-2, the chakras appear to be vortices of energy
made up of a number of smaller spiral cones of
energy. Adult chakras have a protective screen
over them. In a healthy system these spiral
cones spin rhythmically in synchronicity with
the others, drawing energy from the UEF into
their center for the body's use. Each cone is
"tuned" to a specific frequency that the body
needs to function healthfully. However, in a dis¬
eased system these vortices do not work syn¬
chronistically. The spiral cones of energy that
make up these vortices may be fast or slow,
jerky or lopsided. Sometimes breaks in the en¬
ergy pattern can be observed. A spiral cone may
be fully or partially collapsed or inverted. These
disturbances are related to some dysfunction or
pathology of the physical body in that area. For
example, in a case of brain disorder, Schafica
Karagula observed in Breakthrough to Creativity
that one of the smaller vortices of the crown cha¬
kra was drooping down instead of standing up¬
ward in a manner she had found to be normal.
The matrix within the brain of the individual

also showed "gaps" where the energy had to
jump across. This "spark gap" corresponded to
the part of the brain that had been surgically
removed. John Pierrakos in "The Case of the
Broken Heart" reports observing disorder in the
heart chakras of patients with angina pectoris
and coronary heart disease. The chakras, in¬
stead of being bright, whirling vortices, ap¬
peared to be clogged with a dark, sluggish
substance.

Some specific examples of my observations
of disfigured chakras are given in Figure 15-5.
The first (Figure 15-5A) shows the configuration
of every hiatal hernia I have observed. The solar
plexus chakra has eight smaller vortices. The
small vortex located on the left side of the body,
in the upper left quadrant, looks like a spring
that has been sprung. This disfiguration appears
all the way out to the seventh layer of the field.
Figure 15-5B shows the tip of one of the smaller
vortices has been pulled out. I have witnessed
this in many chakras. It appears in the first cha¬
kra when there has been some damage to the
coccyx. It appears in the solar plexus chakra
when there has been a severe psychological
trauma. Many times it appears as postsurgical
trauma in a chakra in the area where the surgery
has been performed. Figure 15-5C is a clogged
chakra. Everyone who has angina has clogged,
darkened energy in the heart chakra. The three
people who have AIDS that I have observed
have the first and the second chakras clogged,
and sometimes the entire field, including all
seven layers, depending on how far the disease
has progressed. A torn chakra, like that shown
in Figure 15-5D, has appeared in every cancer
patient I have seen. Again the configurations
listed here go out to the seventh layer. A chakra
can be torn, and the cancer may not appear in
the body until two or more years later. The pro¬
tective shield is completely ripped away from
this chakra. In people who have very serious
forms of cancer, I have seen the seventh layer
torn from the feet all the way through chakras
one, two and three and into the heart chakra.
The effect of a torn seventh layer is loss of a lot
of energy from the field. In addition to energy
loss, the patient is subject to all kinds of outside
influences that affect him not only psychologi-

L44

From Energy Block to Physical Disease 145

cally, but physically. The field is unable to repel
incoming energies that are not healthy for the
system to assimilate. Figure 15-5E shows an ex¬
ample where the entire chakra is pulled to one
side. I have seen this often in the first chakra,
where people have connected their energy to
the ground mainly through one leg, while the
other leg is weak. This is also usually associated
with a coccyx that has been jammed over to one
side.

I am beginning to think that each vortex of a
chakra supplies a specific organ with energy. I
have noticed that every time there is a distur¬
bance in the pancreas, there is also a distur¬
bance in a certain vortex on the left side of the
solar plexus chakra just below the one associ¬
ated with hiatal hernia, whereas when the dis¬
turbance is in the liver, a different vortex in the
same chakra is affected, one near the liver.

Figure 15-5F shows a disfiguration that oc¬
curred from a heavy therapy marathon. After
spending a week in group therapy with her son
who is a drug addict, this woman came home
with one vortex of the solar plexus chakra
wedged open. It was pale with almost no spin
and no protective screen. Since I saw the prob¬
lem the week after the experience, I was able to
repair the aura before additional damage oc¬
curred. If I had not, eventually this woman
would have had problems in the liver, the organ
related to the weakened vortex, or she would
have healed it somehow herself.

There are many more configurations that can
occur. Many, as you can see, are simple struc¬
tural misalignments. I have seen chakras that
are actually pulled inside out, greatly expanded
or greatly reduced in size. All eventually result
in disease, and all are related to an energy-
consciousness or expression of the individual's
belief system and experience, as discussed ear¬
lier. In other words, disease at any layer of the
field will express itself in that level of conscious¬
ness. Each expression is some form of pain, be it
physical, emotional, mental or spiritual. Pain is
the built-in mechanism that alerts us to correct a
situation. It brings our attention to the fact that

something is wrong and makes us do something
about it. If we have not listened to ourselves be¬
fore, if we have continued to ignore what we
know we want or need to do, eventually pain
will help us do it. Pain teaches us to ask for help
and healing and is, therefore, a key to the edu¬
cation of the soul.

Exercise to Find the

Personal Meaning of Your Illness

A key question in this healing-education process
is: "What does this illness mean to me? What is
the message to me from my body? How have I
forgotten who I am?" The disease is a specific
answer to the question, "How does this pain
serve me?"

We all create disease to some extent in our
physical bodies. If you look back at the original
cause, it is always based on forgetting who we
are. As long as we believe that we must be sepa¬
rated in order to individuate, we will continue to
create disease. Again, we are right back to
where we started from—the holistic or holo¬
graphic view of the universe.

Chapter 15 Review

1. What is the relationship between psychoso¬
matic illness and the aura?

2. What is the basic cause of all disease as seen
from the HEF point of view?

3. Describe how disease is created through the
Human Energy Field.

Food For Thought

4. Take a few minutes to meditate on how the
disease process may be occurring in your
body. Describe it.

5. How have our beliefs shaped our experiences
and what role does our HEF play in this crea¬
tion?

Chapter 16

THE PROCESS OF HEALING,
AN OVERVIEW

What the healer has to offer the patient and the
medical profession are three things: a. different
and broadened view of the causes and cures of
disease; access to information about any given
life or medical situation that may not be availa¬
ble through other means; and working directly
with the patient to enhance the patient's healing
abilities. No matter how miraculous the result,
the healer really induces the patient to heal him¬
self through natural processes, even though
they are beyond what is considered to be natural
for those who are not familiar with healing. Your
body and your energy system move naturally to¬
ward health. The healer has ways and means to
evoke health. The physician, of course, also
works with these principles. But with the bur¬
den of so many impersonal cases, and con¬
stantly being faced with illness, many medical
doctors become oriented towards the cure of a
specific set of symptoms, which sometimes may
not be the same as orientation towards health.
To the healer, health not only means health in
the physical body, but also balance and har¬
mony in all parts of life.

The process of healing is really a process
of remembering—remembering who you are.
Within the aura the process of healing is a proc¬
ess that rebalances the energies in each body.
When all the energies in each body are bal¬
anced, health occurs. The soul has learned its
particular lesson and, therefore, has more cos-
mic truth.

There are two major approaches to healing
today. One is "inner" healing, which establishes
balance and health in all levels of the person by
focusing on and dealing directly with the physi¬
cal, emotional, mental and spiritual aspects of
the human being, how he creates his belief sys¬
tems and reality. The other is "outer" healing,
which helps reestablish balance in the different
layers of the aura, including the physical body
systems, by applying energy distilled from the
Universal Energy Field.

I suggest the "inner" healing is most impor¬
tant but that the "outer" healing methods are
needed to supplement this process.

The Process of Inner Healing

The process of inner healing rebalances the en¬
ergies in each body by focusing on the expres¬
sion of that imbalance, correcting it and
repairing the appropriate layer of the aura
through laying-on of hands. (See Figure 16-1.)
This realignment in each body helps reestablish
balance in the others.

The process of inner healing, called full
spectrum healing, is discussed at length in
Chapter 22. Here we will briefly describe it.

In the healing of the ketheric template level,
the faulty belief system is brought to conscious¬
ness and challenged. Healing is done on the
seventh layer of the field. This healing consists

147

148 Hands of Light

Figure 16-1

THE PROCESS OF INNER HEALING

KETHERIC TEMPLATE BODY

7th layer
healing

Challenges faulty belief system.

CELESTIAL BODY

6th layer
healing

Sits in Universal Love.

ETHERIC TEMPLATE BODY

5th layer
surgery

Realigns individual will to
Divine Will.

ASTRAL BODY

4th layer
chelation, love

Gives love and acceptance.

MENTAL BODY

Chelation and
repatterning
of thinking

Challenges dualistic thinking
patterns.

EMOTIONAL BODY

Chelation and
redirection of
emotional flow

Reexperiences blocked feelings
and pain to release energetic
flow of feelings.

ETHERIC BODY

Chelation and
structure repair

Releases energy flow and
vibrations in etheric body.
Restructures it. Rebalances
metabolism of orgone in etheric.

PHYSICAL BODY

Massage

Revitalizes and nourishes
physical body with energy,
rebalances chemical processes,
which rebalance physical
systems. Health.

mainly of repairing and restructuring this body
wherever needed. Repair of the seventh layer
automatically opens the sixth layer for more ce¬
lestial love.

On the celestial level, the healer sits in celes¬
tial or universal love and simply channels it to
the patient.

On the etheric template level, the auric body
is realigned through spiritual surgery. This has
the effect of realigning the will to the Divine
Will.

On the astral level, healing takes place
through chelation and love. The healer sits in
the reality of love of humanity and channels en¬
ergy to the patient. This allows the mental level
to begin relaxing and letting go of some de¬
fenses.

On the mental layer, the healer challenges
the faulty thinking processes that create im¬
balance on that level. These thinking processes
are based on the logic of the child who experi¬
enced the trauma. When the adult becomes
aware of them, they are easily seen for what
they are and can be replaced by more mature
thinking processes. The healer works to restruc¬
ture that layer of the auric field by helping the]
client to imagine new solutions to old problems.j
On the emotional layer, using a chelatiort
technique, the healer helps the client to deal
blocked feelings. Sometimes the patient relive|
old traumas and experiences all the blocked feelf
ings during the healing. Sometimes the traumajD
are removed without the patient's becoming
aware of them. .fa

The Process of Healing, an Overview 149

On the etheric layer, there is straightening
and repair to be done to restructure that layer, to
reestablish a sense of well-being and strength.

To work directly on the physical body, exer¬
cises, body positions and voice are used to re¬
lease physical blocks, for example, muscle
tension, fat or weakness.

In the process of full spectrum healing, all
the bodies are worked on together. This process
is done in private sessions or sometimes in
groups with a healer. In this process, health in
the physical body usually appears last, after the
other bodies have been balanced. This may take
one session or a year of sessions.

You may wonder how healers can do all this.
It is because they have access to an enormous
amount of information through an expanded
state of consciousness.

The Process of Outer Healing

To enhance and accelerate this basic healing,
outer healing methods are used (and in many
cases very much needed), for the physical
symptoms generated by the faulty belief sys¬
tems cannot be left alone until the belief system
is corrected. It is sometimes necessary to pro¬
vide outer healing to save the person's life.
However, if the "inner" healing is not also done
and the faulty belief system not challenged, ill¬
ness will again precipitate into the physical
body, even after present symptoms have been
removed.

With the advancement of the practice of ho¬
listic medicine, many healing methods are being
developed and are proving to be reliable. Many
physicians are emphasizing diet, food supple¬
ments like vitamins and minerals, exercise and
health maintenance programs to keep people
healthy. Health care professionals like homeo¬
paths, chiropractors, acupuncturists, kinesiolo¬
gists, masseuses and other body workers are
practicing all over the country to help people
maintain their health. People are becoming
more conscious of regular fitness programs of
^ercise and regular health checkups to catch
an y possible difficulty before it becomes serious.

Laying-on of hands healing is now being prac¬
ticed around the country in many forms. People
are interested in shamanism and other ancient
forms of healing. Psychic surgeons regularly
visit this country and work with hundreds of
people. We are in a health care revolution. Why?

With the advent of modern technology and
the loss of the family doctor, medicine became
depersonalized. The family doctor took respon¬
sibility for a family's health by being familiar
with the family's history, sometimes for genera¬
tions. Today a physician can't even remember
the names of his patients because he has so
many. With this change to what is many times a
wonderful technology that saves many lives, the
physician cannot possibly take responsibility for
each patient's health. That responsibility has
fallen back on the patient himself, where it
ought to be. This is the basis for the health care
revolution. Many people want to take more re¬
sponsibility now for their health. To make this
change a smooth one, the best way is to inte¬
grate the methods that are available, so that
healing can become very personal again, as it
was at one time in our history.

How Healers and Physicians
Can Work Together

With healers and physicians working together, it
is possible to take advantage of the best technol¬
ogy and the best personal attention available for
each patient. Let us see how it would work.

Healers can assist physicians in the three
ways mentioned in the introduction to this sec¬
tion. They are: giving a broader view of the
causative factors involved in any illness; provid¬
ing information that cannot be obtained through
the present standard methods or that cannot be
obtained by those methods in the time required;
and providing laying-on of hands to balance the
energy system of the patient and to enhance
and accelerate the healing. Many times this last
effort helps the patient gain the strength neces¬
sary to save his life.

In clinical practice, the healer can work di¬
rectly with physician and patient in making the

150 Hands of Light

first diagnosis to pinpoint the problem, give an
overall view of how the energy system is out of
balance (and thus how serious the problem is),
provide a broader view of the causative factors
involved and work with the patient on the
meaning the illness has in his life.

The healer's methods of diagnosis will be
discussed in the next chapter. The healer can re¬
ceive recommendations through use of High
Sense Perception about the kinds and amounts
of specific drugs to be taken, supplementary
healing techniques, diet, food supplements and
exercise. The healer can follow the case with the
doctor and again through the use of High Sense
Perception, make recommendations as to how
that dosage and other supplements need to be
changed week to week, day to day, or even hour
to hour. In this fashion, the healer and physi¬
cian together can achieve a level of "fine-tuning"
in the care of the patient never before imagined.
The healer can observe the patient's energy field
to tell how the drug or other healing methods
used are affecting the patient overall.

I have done a little of this work and it has
been very effective. I have met a healer, Mietek
Wirkus, who worked in this way for three years
with physicians in a clinic affiliated with the
"IZICS" Medical Society in Warsaw, Poland,
that was set up specifically to do this work. It
was very successful and is still in operation. Rec¬
ords kept by this clinic show that laying-on of
hands, called bioenergotherapy (BET), is most
effective in nervous system diseases and the dis¬
eases which were consequences of migraine, in
healing bronchial asthma, noctural enuresis,
hemicrania, nervous illness, psychosomatic dis¬
eases, gastric ulcer, some kinds of allergies, liq¬
uidation of ovarian cysts, benign tumor, sterility,
arthritic pains, and other kinds of pain. BET
helps to relieve the pain caused by cancer and
decrease the amount of pain medication or tran¬
quilizers taken by the patient. Good effect has
also been observed in treatment of deaf chil¬
dren. In almost every case the doctors discov¬
ered that after BET treatment, patients became
more quiet and relaxed, pain was gone or re¬
lieved, and the rehabilitation process (especially
after surgery or infection) was accelerated. In
this country, many healers are beginning to

work with physicians. Dr. Dolores Krieger intro¬
duced laying-on of hands to the nurses at New
York Medical Center years ago, and they prac¬
tice it in the hospital. Rosalyn Bruyere, director
of the Healing Light Center in Glendale, Califor¬
nia, has entry to many hospitals to practice heal¬
ing and is involved with several research
projects to determine the effectiveness of laying-
on of hands for various types of illness.

Another type of research would be through
the use of High Sense Perception to help re¬
searchers find the causes and cures of illnesses
that now seem incurable, such as cancer. With
internal vision, which is discussed in the next
chapter, the healer can observe the disease proc¬
ess at work inside the body. What a wonderful
tool to assist research!

With the use of High Sense Perception, the
healer can tell which of the many holistic heal¬
ing methods will work best for each patient by
observing its effect on the aura. By recommend¬
ing that the patient focus on the most effective
methods for him, healing will be accelerated.
For example, in my observations I have noted
that different methods or remedies work on dif¬
ferent levels of the auric field. Aubrey Westlake
in his book The Pattern of Health has designated
which of the Bach Flower remedies heal which
auric levels. I have observed that the higher the
potency of the homeopathic remedy, the higher
the auric body it affects. The higher potencies
above 1M work on the higher four layers of the
auric field and the lower potencies work on the
lower auric levels. Because of the tremendous
power of the higher potencies, young practition¬
ers are always taught to start with the lower po¬
tencies (lower energy bodies) first, and then
work up into the higher bodies when the correct
remedy is found. In the process of laying-on of
hands, many healers are able to choose which
body to work on. The same holds true for self-
healing meditation, where one can work on all
of the bodies. Radionics is a method to distill the]
healing energies from the UEF with the use of
machines which generate "rates" or "frequent
cies." Along with radiathesia, radionics broad;
casts energies through the UEF to patient^
located at considerable distances from the prac
titioners. A blood sample or a piece of hair froir

The Process of Healing, an Overview 151

the patient is generally used as an "antenna."
The radionics practitioner can choose which au¬
ric layer to work with.

Chiropractic certainly reaches up through
the first three levels of the aura, as do herbs,
vitamins, drugs and surgery. Of course laying-
on of hands, healing meditations and healing
with light, color, sound and crystals all reach the
upper levels of the auric field. Through re¬
search, we could learn more about how to use
them for the best results.

Many books have been written on these
types of healing. For further reading, I suggest
the following books: The Science of Homeopathy
by George Vithoulkas, M.D., Dimensions of Radi¬
onics by David Tansely, M.D., Chiropractic, A
Modem Way to Health by Julius Dontenfass,
M.D., Traditional Acupuncture: The Law of the Five
Elements by Dianne M. Connelly, Ph.D.

The medical profession in this country has
focused primarily on the physical body and has
become expert in this field, especially in specific
organ and organ-system diseases. Drugs and
surgery are the major methods applied. One of
the major problems in the use of drugs and sur¬
gery in healing is the tremendous side effects
which they very often create. Drugs are pre¬
scribed from knowledge of the physical body's
functioning, but they also contain energies in
the higher realms which then, of course, affect
the higher bodies. The effects of these drugs on
the higher bodies have not been studied directly
when the drugs are tested for use. Rather, the
effects of these higher energies are only seen
when they are finally precipitated down into the
physical body. I have seen the aftereffect of
drugs remaining in the aura for as many as ten
years after the drug was taken. For example, a
drug that was once used to cure hepatitis was
seen to be causing immune deficiencies five
years later. A red dye placed in the spinal
column for exploratory purposes was inhibiting
the healing of spinal nerves ten years later.

Toward a Holistic System
of Healing

1 believe the holistic healing systems of the fu¬

ture will combine the tremendous body of the
"analyzed" knowledge of the traditional medi¬
cal profession with the "synthesized" knowl¬
edge of the higher body energy systems. The
future holistic healing systems will diagnose
and prescribe healing for all the energy bodies
and the physical body simultaneously as
needed by the patient and incorporate both the
inner and the outer healing processes. Medical
doctors, chiropractors, homeopaths, healers,
therapists, acupuncturists, etc. will all work to¬
gether to aid the healing process. The patient
will be seen as a soul on its journey back home
to the true self, the Godself, and disease will be
seen as one of the ways to point the traveler in
the right direction.

To do this, we need to use the analytic meth¬
ods developed by the medical profession to
delve into the mysteries of the higher body in
order to gain a practical knowledge of their
functioning and structure. We need joint re¬
search projects in which the higher body heal¬
ing methods are tested along with current
allopathic scientific medicine to see the com¬
bined effects. How do allopathic drugs and ho¬
meopathic remedies work together? Which are
in harmony with each other, supporting and en¬
hancing a cure? Which are inimical and should
not be used together?

We must concentrate on finding a detection
method to observe the energy bodies. Since the
etheric is of the coarsest matter, is most like the
physical body and is probably the easiest to de¬
tect, we should concentrate first on it. What a
tremendous tool we would have if we could pro¬
duce a picture of the grid structure of the etheric
to show energy balances and imbalances. With
this information and further study, we could
then find more practical and efficient methods
to rebalance the energies in the etheric. In the
future we would move on to discover methods
to apply to the higher bodies.

Thus we could heal the disorder before it is
precipitated into the physical body as physical dis¬
ease.

Most of all, I would seek to teach health care
professionals, especially physicians, to perceive
the fields, so that they also can see the disease
process in action inside the living body of the

152 Hands of Light

patient. Some physicians are already reaching
out for help. They send their hardest cases to
healers. Usually they do it covertly. It is time to
come out of the closet and work openly as
teams.

With highly trained and qualified people
able to see the inner processes of the body by
simply looking, imagine how far those people
could carry medical research. Rather than plac¬
ing the emphasis on observing animals in a lab¬
oratory, research could be focused on the actual
patient and his personal needs. When one is
able to access directly ("read") the kind of treat¬
ment a patient needs, programs will be de¬
signed on a personal level for each individual's
healing.

Heyoan has stated that "the precise sub¬
stance given in the precise dosage at the precise
time for each individual acts as a transmutive
substance to create health in the most efficient
way, with the least side effects, and in the short¬
est time possible." Health here is not just physi¬
cal health; it is complete balance at all levels.

Given such a potential, let us now look at

the many different ways of securing information

on all levels of the aura.

Chapter 16 Review

1. Describe the process of inner healing.

2. Describe the process of outer healing.

3. Upon what levels of the HEF do medicines
work?

4. Upon what levels of the HEF are the effects of
medicine tested in normal medical practices?

5. How is the potency of a homeopathic remedy
related to the aura? Upon what auric levels
do what homeopathic remedies act?

Food For Thought

6. What are the major effects of understanding
the disease process through the HEF on med¬
ical practices? Include applications, psycho¬
dynamic functioning, patient responsibility
and self-perception.

7. How can healing through the auric fields be
integrated into normal medical procedures?

Chapter 17

DIRECT ACCESS OF INFORMATION

Accessing information beyond the normal
means can help a healing enormously. It is pos¬
sible to get almost any kind of information one
needs through this method. Direct access means
just what it implies. You directly connect with
and receive the information that you wish to
have. This process has been labeled High Sense
Perception, clairaudience, clairvoyance, clairsen-
tience or psychic reading. Let us take a clearer
look at just what that process is.

The information coming to you comes
through your five senses. These have been la¬
beled traditionally as sight, touch, taste, hearing
and smell. Most people have developed some of
these means to access information more than
others. Your internal processes of thinking, feel¬
ing and being have a great deal to do with your
modes of accessing information as the neurolin¬
guistic programmers Richard Bandler and John
Grinder have stated in their book. Frogs to
Princes. Your internal experience runs through
certain habitual channels. You may work pri¬
marily with a combination of visual and kines¬
thetic processes, or auditory and kinesthetic, or
visual and auditory. Any combination is possi¬
ble. You use different combinations for different
internal process. You may know whether or not
you think primarily in pictures, sounds or feel¬
ings. I recommend that you find out, because
the way you access through the normal senses is
the way that I would recommend that you begin
learning to develop your High Sense Perception.

For example, if I am given a name, first I
hear the name, then I search kinesthetically in

all directions until I feel a connection being
made to that person. From that point I see pic¬
tures and hear information about the person
who was named. Several years ago I could not
do that.

The first High Sense I developed was the
kinesthetic one. I spent many hours doing body
psychotherapy, touching people and their en¬
ergy fields. Then my discernment moved into
"seeing." I began seeing things that correlated to
what I was feeling. After a lot of practice I began
to hear information. Each of these ways of ac¬
cess can be learned through exercises and medi¬
tations. By entering into a calm quiet state and
concentrating on one of your senses, you en¬
hance it. It only takes practice. The hard part is
to learn to enter into a calm state and stay fo¬
cused on your purpose.

Exercises to

Enhance Your Perceptions

To enhance your kinesthetic sense, sit in a com¬
fortable meditative position and focus on feeling
the inside of your body. Focus on body parts
and organs. If it helps, touch the part of your
body you are focusing on. If you tend to be vis¬
ual, you may want to look at the body part. If
you tend to be auditory, you may want to listen
to your breathing or heartbeat to help you focus.

Now do the same for the space around you.
With eyes closed, sit and feel the room you are
in. Focus on, reach for or beam towards different

153

154 Hands of Light

locations in the room and different objects. If
you need help, open your eyes or touch the ob¬
jects in the room, then go back to simply sitting
and feeling. Now have a friend lead you blind¬
folded into an unfamiliar room. Sit and feel the
space kinesthetically the same way you tuned
into your body. What have you learned about
the room? Take the blindfold off and check it
out. Do the same for people, animals and
plants.

To enhance your visual sense, sit again for
meditation and, with eyes closed, look at the in¬
side of your body. If you have trouble doing
this, find the sense that will help you. Touch the
part or listen to your internal processes until you
can get a picture of it. Now do the same for the
room. First, with eyes open, examine details in
the room; then, with eyes closed, create a pic¬
ture of the room in your mind. Now go to an
unfamiliar room and start with eyes closed.
What can you "see"?

Remember, we are speaking of visual per¬
ception. This is different from the process of vi¬
sualization, which is a creative act in which you
visualize what you want to create.

To enhance your auditory sense, sit in medi¬
tation. Listen to the inside of your body. Again,
if you need help with this sense, put your hand
on the part you are listening to and feel it, or
look at it. Then go outside and listen to all the
sounds around you. If you do this in the woods,
you will begin to hear the synchronicity of the
sounds. Together they make a symphony. Listen
even more closely. What else can you hear?
Sounds that don't exist? Listen more carefully—
someday they may have meaning for you.
Itzhak Bentov in his book Stalking the Wild Pen¬
dulum writes of a high-pitched sound that many
meditators hear. It is above the normal range of
hearing. He was able to measure the frequency
of this sound.

As I developed my "seeing" abilities, I dis¬
covered that the pictures came in two forms.
One is symbolic, the other literal. In the case of
the symbolic picture, one simply sees an image
that has meaning to the person for whom one is
"reading." For example, one might see a nebula
swirling in the sky or a large chocolate cake. In
the case of the literal picture, one sees pictures

of events or things. One can witness an experi¬
ence that the patient had in the past. In both the
symbolic vision and the "reading" of an event,
the healer takes the position of witness. That is,
the healer enters into that time frame and wit¬
nesses events as they occurred. The same is true
for the symbolic vision. The healer watches the
vision unfold and describes it as it is unfolding.
I call this receptive channelling. It is very impor¬
tant that the vision not be interpreted or dis¬
turbed by the healer as it unfolds. The meaning
the vision has may be different for the healer
and the patient. For example, if you see a sym¬
bolic picture, say of a scene of a blue car driving
down the road, you don't immediately say,
"Oh, what does that mean?" You just watch the
car drive down the road and let the scene unfold
before you. In this process, you will gather in¬
formation piece by piece and will slowly build
an understandable picture. You may not know if
the picture has symbolic meaning or if it is literal
(i.e., something that actually happened or may
happen) until later. This type of information re¬
ceiving takes a lot of faith. You may take as long
as a half to one hour to build that picture into
something that is understandable.

On the other hand, some readers use their
own symbols and give readings by interpreting
them. This works only with a lot of practice, be¬
cause the reader must first build a dear set of
symbols through which she can receive informa¬
tion.

In another type of literal seeing the healer
sees a picture of an internal organ of the patient.
The picture either appears on a screen in the
healer's mind, which I call the mind-screen, or
appears to be located inside the patient's body,
as if the healer can see through the layers of the
body and into the organ like an x-ray machine.
This type of seeing I have labeled internal vi¬
sion. It is a very powerful tool to help describe
an illness. With internal vision you use active
direct access. This means you go after some spe¬
cific information you wish to access. For exam¬
ple, by using internal viewing I can look
wherever in the body I wish to. I can decide
where to look, at what depth, at what level of
the aura and in what resolution or size, macro-
to microscopic.

Direct Access of Information 155

Long-distance Perception

I have found that direct access works whether
the person is in the same room with you or at a
distance. The longest-distance aura reading I
gave was during a phone conversation between
New York City and Italy. At this point in my
experience, my long-distance readings appear to
be pretty accurate, but the healings are not as
powerful as when I am in the room with the
person.

Direct Access and Precognition

There have been many times when people have
asked my guide questions regarding the future.
He always responds by saying that it is possible
to talk about probable future reality, but not ab¬
solute future realities, because all of us have free
will to create what we want in the future. He
also says he will not predict the future, but then
he goes ahead many times and answers the
question that has been asked. So far most of
these possible futures have occurred. For exam¬
ple, Heyoan has told someone that perhaps she
would be interested in getting involved with the
United Nations. She has since received two invi¬
tations that got her involved with the UN. An¬
other person was told that he could get involved
with the diplomatic service of Mexico and that
he would make a contact when on vacation in
Portugal. It happened. Others were told that
they needed to finish certain things in their lives
because they would probably be moving. They
are moving now, although they had not thought
of it before. At the beginning of one particular
healing, I was told that the person had cancer
and was going to die. She did. It was not even
suspected when she came to the healing, and it
was not found until after four CAT scans, and
about four months later. The CAT scan results
showed the same shape, size and location of
cancer tumor I had seen with internal vision. Of
course I was very upset when I accessed this
information. I did not tell the patient. I told her
to go to her physician immediately. Unfortu¬
nately, I had no access to the physician. Experi¬
ences like these bring up issues of where the

responsibility of the healer lies, which will be
discussed later in this book.

The best measuring of the process of direct
access of information is the work done on re¬
mote viewing by Russell Targ and Harold
Puthoff of Stanford Research Institute. They
found that a viewer in the basement of the lab at
Stanford could fairly accurately draw a map of
the location of a target team of people, who
were sent to various predetermined points. Targ
and Puthoff began their experiments with
known psychics and then found that anyone
they chose, even the most skeptical, could do it.
I believe that what I am doing is very similar,
only applied to healing.

In short, I believe most people can use some
kind of direct accessing of information in their
daily lives. What information would help you
run your profession better? You can probably
perceive it through the use of your own Higher
Sense Perception. All of this is another way of
saying that the human being has many ways to
receive information and guidance—if we will
only ask for it or be open to receiving it.

Direct access of information has many impli¬
cations for the future. If we, as a species are
learning to access information as evidence sug¬
gests, it will affect our entire educational sys¬
tem, and of course the society in which we live.
We will go to school not only to learn deductive
and inductive reasoning, to gather information
and enhance memory, but we will also go to school
to leant how to access anything we want to know at a
moment's notice. Rather than spending hours
memorizing things, we will learn how to access
the information already stored in the "memory"
of the universal energy field. In esoteric terms
this information storage is called the akashic re¬
cords. These records are the energetic imprint
fixed within the universal hologram of every¬
thing that has ever happened or has ever been
known. In this type of brain function, informa¬
tion is not stored in our minds; it is simply ac¬
cessed. In this type of brain function, to
remember means to tune in again to the univer¬
sal hologram and to read the information again,
not to search one's own mind to retrieve the in¬
formation.

Since this information exists outside the lim-

156 Hands of Light

itation of linear time, as shown in Chapter 4, we
will probably to some degree be able to read the
future, as Nostradamus did when he predicted
the rise of a dictator named Histler in Europe
some two hundred years before Hitler,

Chapter 17 Review

1. What are the maip. ways of directly accessing
information?

2. Describe ways to enhance your visual, audi¬
tory and kinesthetic senses.

3. If a person is kinesthetic, which type of med¬
itation and direct access would be best for

him to focus on?

4. What is the difference between actively look¬
ing at the aura and perceiving it symboli¬
cally?

5. Does direct accessing of information work at
a distance? How far? Using physics, what ex¬
planations is there for this phenomenon?

6. What is the difference between active and re¬
ceptive channelling or accessing of informa¬
tion?

Food For Thought

7. Are you primarily visual, auditory or kines¬
thetic?

Chapter 18

INTERNAL VISION

My first internal vision experience happened
early one morning as I was lying in bed observ¬
ing the interesting musde and bone structure on
the back of my husband's neck as he lay asleep
on his side beside me. I thought it was very in¬
teresting the way the muscles connected into the
cervical vertebrae. Suddenly I became aware of
what I was doing and quickly cut off such see¬
ing. I would not "return" to that level of reality
for some time, saying that I had made it all up.
Of course, eventually, it came back. I began
"seeing" inside my clients. At first it was dis¬
concerting, but my internal vision persisted and
so did I. The internal viewing correlated with
other information I could obtain about the pa¬
tients, either from them or their physicians.

Internal vision is the human version of the
x-ray or nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR)
process and is just as sophisticated. Internal vi¬
sion includes the ability to look into the body at
whatever depth and resolution (within a certain
range) one wants to see. It is a new way of per¬
ceiving things. If I want to see an organ, I focus
on it. If I want to see inside the organ or a spe¬
cific part of it, I focus on that. If I want to see a
microorganism that is invading the body, I focus
on that. I receive pictures of these things that
look like normal pictures. For example, a good
healthy liver looks dark red, just as it does with
normal vision. If the liver has been or is jaun¬
diced, it will look a sickly yellow-brown. If the
person has had or is having chemotherapy, the
liver usually looks green-brown. Microorga¬

nisms look somewhat the way they look under
the microscope.

My experiences of internal viewing, which
happened spontaneously at first, later became
more controllable. I began to understand that to
see this way I had to be in a particularly open
state, in which my third eye (sixth chakra) was
activated and the rest of my mind was in a com¬
paratively calm, focused state. I later found tech¬
niques that would bring on this state, so I could
look inside the body when I chose to, provided I
was able to get into that mental and emotional
state. If I was tired, I might not be able to do so,
partly because it is harder to focus and quiet the
mind when one is tired. It is also harder to raise
One's vibrational rate when one is tired. I also
discovered that whether or not my eyes were
open mattered little, except for the interference
of additional information that would come
through the open eyes. Sometimes this addi¬
tional information helps the focus; sometimes it
hinders it. For example, I sometimes use my
eyes to help me focus my mind on where I am
looking. At other times, I will close my eyes in
an effort to shut out other information that may
be distracting my attention.

Examples of Internal Viewing

An example of such viewing is shown in Figure
18-1. The upper left shows the front exterior au-

157

Front view

Exterior scan

Interior scan

Back view

Figure 18-1: Shoulder Injury Seen Through Internal Vision
(Diagnostic Views)

Internal Vision 159

lie view, the upper right shows the interior view
and the lower illustration shows the rear exter¬
nal view. In this case, a friend of mine fell on the
ice and hurt her shoulder. As I worked on her, I
could see the ''auric hemorrhage" out the front
of the shoulder where she was losing energy.
The rear area lines of energy along the trapezius
muscle were tangled up and needed to be
straightened. I cupped my right hand over the
hemorrhage to stop it and combed out the tan¬
gles on the back. As I was doing this, I could see
die crushed end of the humerus, which was
later confirmed by x-rays. This "short" (half
hour) session healed the hemorrhage and the
tangles to help a faster healing of the crushed
bone.

Another example, shown in Figure 18-2, is
an ovarian cyst which I observed to bfe about the
size of a tennis ball, 7 cm in diameter. On Janu¬
ary 3 (Figure 18-2A), it looked dark bluish gray.
This cyst had already been diagnosed by a phy¬
sician, but the PID (Pelvic Inflammatory Dis¬
ease) which showed up as dark red in the aura
had not. By January 15 (Figure 18-2B), the cyst
had shrunk to four centimeters, and the PID
had been diagnosed by the physician. By Janu¬
ary 21 (Figure 18-2C), it was two centimeters,
but getting blacker, and showed a strange spiral
configuration connected to it. The patient was
on a cleansing diet that was clearing away the
problem. (I was not administering healing at
this time; I was only observing the progress.)
On January 29 (Figure 18-2D), the cyst grew to
three centimeters, the size of a quarter, at the
onset of menses (a common occurrence with
cysts). By February 6 (Figure 18-2E), the cyst
was down to one centimeter; by March 3 (Figure
18-2F), it was completely gone, with a lot of
good, healthy premenstrual energy to take its
place. All these observations correlated in size
with that of a physician's observations by pelvic
examination.

Because of the darkness of the cyst's appear¬
ance in the aura on January 21, both the physi¬
cian and I advised that this woman take
antibiotics. This type of illness, pelvic inflamma¬
tory disease (PID), over a long period of time
(three years in this case) has been known to pre¬

cede the development of cancer, which we
wanted to prevent by getting rid of the infection.
The patient remained on a cleansing diet
throughout the treatment. She may very well
have been completely free of infection without
the antibiotic, but we did not want to take a
chance. To my internal vision the cyst was al¬
most black. In its early stage, cancer looks dark
gray-blue. As it progresses, it turns to black in
the aura. Later, white spots appear in the black.
When the white spots sparkle and move out like
a volcano, the cancer has metastasized. In this
case, the cyst was getting too dark to wait for
the cleansing diet alone to do the work needed.

Figure 18-3A shows another case of PID,
ovarian cyst and a fibroid tumor. As you can
see, with HSP cysts are easily distinguishable
from fibroid tumors, which show up in the field
as reddish brown.

Figure 18-3B shows an example of the use of
remote internal viewing. At the end of one of
my classes, a student asked if I would give her
friend, who had two fibroids, a healing. As she
asked, I immediately saw an internal view of her
friend's pelvic region. I drew it on the black¬
board. Two months later that drawing was con¬
firmed when I gave the patient a healing. What I
had seen was confirmed by the physician's diag¬
nosis. She had two relatively small fibroid tu¬
mors which appeared reddish brown in the
aura. The one on the right was higher up and
on the outside of the uterus, whereas the one
on the left was lower and partially embedded in
the uterus. What I had not seen remotely, but
observed during the healing, was that the front
second chakra had a break in it, probably par¬
tially due to the removal of the left ovary. This
chakra was most likely disturbed before the
ovary was removed, causing the dysfunction in
the first place. I am sure that the surgery caused
more trauma to the chakra. Adding to the surgi¬
cal trauma, women usually withdraw their en¬
ergy from the area where an ovary has been
removed because they do not want to feel the
emotional pain of losing an ovary. This type of
blocking inhibits the natural healing process in
that area of the body, only to make the trauma
worse eventually.

160

Figure 18-2: Healing of Pelvic Inflammatory Disease and
Ovarian Cyst (Internal View)

(Diagnostic Views)

Internal Vision 161

Precognition with
Internal Viewing

An example of precognition, or warning from
the spirit teachers, happened one day when I
was going to visit a friend. I was three blocks
from her office when I was told that she
wouldn't be there, that she might have had a
heart attack and that I was needed to give her a
healing. I found the office locked, so I went to
her apartment where I found her in a state of
physical pain, holding her left arm to her body.
She had spent the morning in the emergency
room having cardiograms. Figure 18-4 shows
what my vision revealed to me. There was emo¬
tional pain and fear held in the throat and solar
plexus, and there was stagnated energy in the
heart area, which permeated her body and then
went straight back through to the rear aspect of
the heart chakra. Thoracic vertebra #5 (T5) was
displaced to the left. This vertebra is not associ¬
ated with the nerves that innervate the heart,
but is located at the root of the heart chakra. I
could also observe a weakness in the aorta just
above the heart. As we worked together to clear
the stagnated energy around the heart, my
friend let go the emotional holding in the throat
and solar plexus areas by sharing her pain with
me and crying. The dark energy cleared; T5
went back into place. She felt a lot better. The
weakness in the aorta was still there when I left,
but has cleared considerably with time.

Microscopic Internal Vision

Two examples of microscopic internal viewing
are shown in Figure 18-5A and B. Figure 18-5A
shows the tiny rod-shaped organisms that per¬
meated the shoulder/arm area of a person who
had been diagnosed as having a leprosy-like in¬
fection. I could see these organisms penetrating
this area—both muscle and bone. As we worked
to heal, a very strong lavender and then silver
light flowed into the body and filled the infected
area. The light caused the organisms to vibrate
at a high rate. It appeared to knock them loose.
Then the energy flow turned around and
sucked them out of the body.

In the case of an AML (acute myeloblastic
leukemia) patient named Rose, who had been
on chemotherapy, I could see strange-looking,
flat, white, seedlike objects that appeared to be
squishing the red blood cells (Figure 18-5B).
About a year before she came to me, she had
been told by several physicians that she would
probably die within two weeks. At that time she
was immediately put into intensive care and
went on chemotherapy. She said that when they
told her of the remaining two weeks, she saw a
white-gold light in the room and knew that she
was not going to die. On the label of every bottle
of fluid, including the chemotherapy, that went
into her during her hospital stay she wrote
"pure love." She had no side effects from the
chemotherapy. She went into remission.

When she became an outpatient and contin¬
ued her chemotherapy, she also started having
channelling sessions with a friend of mine, Pat
Rodegast, who channels a guide named Em¬
manuel. Emmanuel told Rose to stop chemo¬
therapy because it was making her sick. The
physicians said if she stopped chemotherapy,
she would die very quickly because her blood
tests showed she was still in remission—not
cured. It was not an easy thing to do, but she
decided to stop. At this point she came to me,
and I saw the seedlike objects in her blood. Dur¬
ing the first healing, the seedlike objects were
knocked loose with a blast of lavender and then
silver light, then were all sucked out. Her next
blood test showed her blood to be completely
clear and normal for the first time since her di¬
agnosis.

I clearly was not the main instrument in her
healing; my role was one of support and clear¬
ing the blood. Thanks to the internal viewing, I
could reassure her that there was nothing ab¬
normal in her blood. This continued to be cor¬
roborated by her blood tests until we decided it
was no longer important for her to see me and
have this support. It was not easy for her to
stand up for her truth. She needed this support
because at the time the medical doctors, in all
their sincerity, were quite afraid that she would
die very quickly if she went off chemotherapy
and told her this regularly. This is not meant to
criticize the medical doctors; they were doing all

Internal Vision 163

they could do to save her life. But in this case
there were other factors at work of which they
were not aware. I, as a healer, had access to that
information. They did not. This is an example
where open collaboration between spiritual
healers and medical doctors would serve the pa¬
tients well. We have a lot to give to each other to
aid the healing process.

The Process of Internal Viewing

I have the following explanation of how this
kind of seeing works. I have observed the path
of light coming into the body with my internal
or x-ray vision. And what I have seen is this.
Light enters both through the third eye and

B. The blood of a leukemia patient

through the physical eyes and flows along the
optic nerves as shown in Figure 18-6. This light
is of higher vibration than visible light and can
pass through skin. The light passes through the
optic chiasm and goes round the pituitary,
which sits right behind the optic chiasm. The
light then takes two paths. One path goes to the
occipital lobes for normal vision, and the other
into the thalamus for oculomotor control. It has
been my observation that by certain meditative
and breathing techniques, one can cause the pi-
^ tuitary to start vibrating and radiating gold auric
light (or rose light if the person is in love). This
vibration and gold light increase the amount of
light branching into the thalamus area. Accord¬
ing to my seeing, this auric light arcs over the
bottom of the corpus callosum and is directed
into the pineal gland, which acts as a detector
for internal vision. By breathing in a certain con¬
trolled manner that rasps air against the upper
back throat and soft palate, located just the
other side of the pituitary, I can stimulate the
pituitary into this vibration. This meditative
breathing also helps to focus my mind and to
quiet it. It also brings gold light up the back of
my spine from the base and rose light up the
front. These two streams arc over each other in
the thalamus area. This brings more energy to
the central forehead and central areas of the
brain with which I see. The subjective feeling of
this type of seeing is allowing something (en¬
ergy, information) to come into the third eye re¬
gion of the head. This type of vision brings with
it the ability to scan to whatever depth one
chooses, with a wide range of resolution, down
to the cellular and even viral level.

My subjective feeling is that I have a scanner
inside my head. It is located at the central brain
area behind my third eye and about two inches
back, where a line straight back from the third
eye would intersect a line drawn between my
temples. This seems to be the heart of the scan¬
ner. From this point, I can look in any direction I
choose without moving my head; however, it
usually helps to look directly at whatever I am
scanning.

When a patient comes to me, I do a very
general scan over the entire body to pick up ar¬
eas of interest. I am attracted to the areas of the

Internal Vision 165

body that need attention. Then I tune in more
finely to that area and scan it at a finer resolu¬
tion. To do fine scanning, I sometimes put my
hands on the area in question. I find it easier to
see this way.

Sometimes I use another method. I just ask
to see a picture of what the problem is, and I
will receive a mental picture of the situation.

Exercises to Establish
Internal Vision

1. Traveling through the body.

The best way to practice learning internal vision
is through deep relaxation exercises that include
what is called traveling through the body.

First, lie down and loosen all tight clothing.
Deep breathe and relax. Try it again. Now take a
deep breath and tense your whole body as
tightly as you can. Hold your breath; then
breathe out and let all the tension go. Do it
again. Now repeat the tension-breath exercise,
but tense your body only half as tight, equally
all over the body. Breathe out and let go.

Now, take a deep breath, and relax as you let
it go. Repeat three times without tensing your
body. Visualize the tension oozing off your body
like thick honey onto the surface beneath you.
Feel your heart slow down to a nice, slow,
healthy beat.

Now, imagine yourself very tiny, like a point
of light, and enter your body wherever you
choose. Your tiny self flows to your left shoul¬
der, relaxing all the tension as it goes. Your tiny
self flows down your left arm and into your
hand relaxing all the tension with a slight tin¬
gling sensation, warmth and energy. Your left
arm is heavy and warm.

Now your tiny self flows back up your left
arm and down into your left leg relaxing all the
tension there, then up your left leg into your
right leg and back up into your right arm. Your
whole body is heavy and warm. Now you begin
to explore your body systems with your tiny
self. Enter your heart and follow the blood as it
18 pumped through your body. Does that system
look well? Does it feel healthy? Now, travel

through your lungs and look at the lung tissues.
Go into your digestive organs. Follow the course
that food takes as it enters your body. Go from
your mouth down your esophagus into your
stomach. How does it look? Is it getting enough
energy? Is it balanced in the amount of digestive
enzymes it needs? Now, follow the food out of
your stomach into the lower stomach, then into
the small intestine, and then into the large intes¬
tine. Is everything well? Now, go back up into
your liver, your pancreas, your spleen. Are they
all functioning well? Travel through your geni¬
tals. Are they getting the loving care they de¬
serve?

If there is any place in your body that you
are concerned with, send the tiny self into that
area with love and energy. Take a good look at
that area. If it is lacking in anything, let your
tiny self do something about it. If it needs to be
cleaned out, clean it out. If it needs energy, let
the tiny self send it energy.

When you have satisfied yourself with the
exploration and care of your body, allow the tiny
self to grow to your normal size and merge with
your real self.

You can return to this type of self¬
exploration any time you wish.

Bring yourself back to a normal state of
awareness, but allow yourself to remain deeply
relaxed, self-confident and aware. You have
been scanning your own body.

2. Scanning a friend.

Sit opposite a friend in a chair. One person can
be the observer, and the other open to being ob¬
served. Do a meditation to silence the mind.
Gently allow yourself to focus on your friend.
Keep your eyes dosed. Remember what it felt
like to travel through your own body. Now you
can visually travel through your friend's body.
This will feel a bit different, because you are
scanning from outside the body this time.

First, scan the body to find an area you are
attracted to. You may use your hands at first,
but do not touch your friend. Later you will not
need to use your hands. When you are drawn
intuitively to an area on your friend, simply put
more of your focus there. Allow yourself to fo-

166 Hands of Light

cus on the organs of that area. Believe what you
see. You may get a color, a texture, a sensation
or just a vague sense of something. Allow the
pictures to come into your head.

When you feel satisfied with what you've
found, allow yourself to be drawn to another
area of the body and repeat. If you are not
drawn to another part of the body, just start
scanning the body.

You can scan the body by body area or, if
you are familiar with anatomy (which you ought
to learn if you want to be a healer), scan the
body systems. Note what you see in your mind.

When you are satisfied with your explora¬
tion, slowly come back into yourself and open
your eyes.

Discuss what you were able to pick up with
your friend. How does what you picked up cor¬
relate with what she knows about herself? What
doesn't correlate? Can you explain why? Per¬
haps the answer is in your assumptions. Per¬
haps the problem is in your own body. Perhaps
you are right and your friend doesn't know
about the situation you "saw." Now switch roles
and let your friend observe you. Let yourself be
passive to make it easier for her.

3. Meditation to open your third eye scanner.

An exercise suggested by one of my teachers,
the Rev. C.B., is to lie on your back or sit with
your back straight. Make sure you are comfort¬
able. Take a deep breath through your nose.
First, fill your lower abdomen with air, then
your middle chest, and then your upper chest.
Now open your mouth as wide as you can. Hold
the back of your tongue toward the back of your
throat and hold your throat in such a way as to
allow the air to escape only if it rasps against the
upper back part of your throat near the soft pal¬
ate. Try to get it to rasp as far back as you can.
The rasping sound should be fine, not gurgly.
Do not throw your head back. Keep it directly
on top of your spine. Slowly allow the air to
escape from your body, first the air in the lower
abdomen, then in the middle chest, and then in
the upper chest. Let all the air out. Take a breath
and relax. Repeat the rasping breath. When you

get the hang of it, add the following visualiza¬
tion.

As the breath leaves your body, visualize a
golden stream of light start in the rear pelvic
area and run up your spine into the central brain
area. Repeat three times with three rasping
breaths. Now focus on the front of your body.
The stream of light looks pink on the front of the
body. Repeat three times with three rasping
breaths. Notice that the two streams of light arc
over and into the center of the brain.

Once you have learned this exercise, do not
do this more than three to four breaths for each
side of your body or you may get very dizzy.
Please treat this last exercise with a great deal of
respect since it is very powerful. Take everything
at a slow pace. You cannot speed up your evolu¬
tion in a nonorganic way. It never works (al¬
though most of us wish it would).

Many times during a healing I do quick
breathing exercises that help me raise my vibra¬
tions and energy so that I can see into the aura
better, see higher levels of the aura and also
transmit higher frequencies through my field.
To do this, I rasp the air against the upper back
part of my throat, but I do it by taking very
short, fast breaths through my nose. Because I
have practiced the above exercises so many
times, this is now easy for me to do. I also
sometimes take long, steady, even, in/out
breaths without pause, and rasp air on the back
of my throat to center my focus, clear my mind
and balance my energy field. I call this breath¬
ing technique the nasal rasp breath.

When High Sense Vision is coupled with
High Sense Hearing, information received be¬
comes even more useful.

Finding the Cause of the Illness:
Rolling Backwards in Time

I have discovered a way to "read" the cause of a
particular physical problem. It combines two
techniques. The first is the normal way we
evoke memory. Simply remember back to when
you were younger. Now pick a certain age, or a
certain place you have lived in, and remember

Internal Vision 167

it. Now remember an even earlier time. What is
your internal process to evoke memory? What
does it feel like? When I remember something of
my past, I use my mind in a particular way. I
know what it feels like. I hold memories in ei¬
ther feelings, pictures or sounds. It is easy to
"roll backwards" in time; we all do it. Most of us
believe we can only do it for ourselves, and not for
others. That is just a limited belief. I have discov¬
ered that it is this internal process, of rolling
backwards in time, that is used to "read" the
past history of an illness.

The second technique is to use kinesthetic
connection and internal vision. First, I connect
with the particular body part in question using
my kinesthetic sense. Then I get a picture of the
problem area to describe its present condition. I
hold the connection and then roll backwards in
time, reading the past and witnessing the his¬
tory of the body part. As I keep witnessing back
into the past, I finally "read" the cause of the
problem. For example, I will see a trauma occur
to a body part at an earlier time in the patient's
life. Then I will see another, at an even earlier

time, and so on. Most serious illnesses result
from a long series of such traumas. I simply
keep going backwards until a time before any
trauma occurred to that part of the body. The
first trauma that occurred is the initiating cause
of the present problem.

Chapter 18 Review

1. What can be seen with use of internal view¬
ing? Where in the body can you see? What
depth?

2. With internal viewing, what size ranges of
objects can a viewer perceive?

3. Can internal vision be used at a distance?

4. List three exercises to learn internal viewing.

5. What endocrine gland is the sensor for inter¬
nal viewing?

Food For Thought

6. What is the difference between visualizing
and perceiving?

Chapter 19

HIGH AUDITORY PERCEPTION
AND COMMUNICATION WITH
SPIRITUAL TEACHERS

The information I received auditorially was at
first general, and then with practice it became
specific. For example, I would hear words of
love and assurance for the individual who had
come for a healing. Later this information would
get as specific as naming people, diseases a pa¬
tient had, or in some cases a diet, vitamins,
remedies or drugs that would benefit the pa¬
tient. Many people who chose to follow these
verbal instructions became well.

The best way I know to enhance High Audi¬
tory Perception is to sit for guidance. Take pencil
and paper, sit in a comfortable meditative posi¬
tion, center yourself and lift your consciousness.
Formulate a question in your mind as clearly as
you can. Focus now on wanting to know the
truth about that question, no matter what the
answer is. Then write the question on the paper.
Set the pen and paper down within reaching
distance. Focus and silence the mind. Wait for
an answer to come to you. After some time in
silence you will begin to receive an answer. That
answer will come in the form of pictures, feel¬
ings, general concepts, words or even smells.
Write down the answer, no matter what it is.
You may think it is irrelevant, but keep writing.
The form through which the information comes
will vary. Stay with it and write. The writing will
eventually begin to orient the incoming informa¬

tion to sounds. Focus on hearing directly the
words that are coming to you. Practice, practice,
practice. Write everything that comes to you. Do
not leave anything out. After you are finished
writing, put the paper aside for at least four
hours. Later, go back and read what you have
written. You will find it of interest. Keep a note¬
book for this purpose.

After I did this every morning at sunrise for
three months, the verbal information came so
quickly that I couldn't write fast enough. The
voice suggested that I buy a typewriter. Soon I
couldn't type fast enough. The voice suggested
that I buy a tape recorder. I did. At first, it was
hard to go from writing to speaking the words
out loud. The sound of my voice interfered with
the quiet I, by that time, was able to hold in my
mind. With practice I became clear again. The
next step was to do it for another person, and
then in front of a group. This was especially em¬
barrassing, because the way verbal channelling
works is that the channeller can only hear the
first few words of what is going to be said. It
takes a lot of faith to jump into the beginning of
a sentence, and allow the unknown rest of it to
flow out.

The experience of accessing information ver¬
bally inevitably leads to the question, "Who is
talking?" I certainly hear a voice. Is it one I make

169

170 Hands of Light

up, or does it have another source? Best place to
find out? Ask the voice! I did. It said, "My name
is Heyoan, your spiritual guide."

What does Heyoan mean?

"The Wind Whispering Truth Through the
Centuries."

Where does it come from?

"Kenya."

It is true that I had seen visions of spirits
and angels before, but I had categorized them as
visions. Now they were talking to me. Soon I
could feel their touch, and sometimes when I
saw them in the room, I could smell a wonder¬
ful fragrance. Just a metaphor, or reality? All of
my personal reality comes to me through my
senses, and now that they are expanded, a
greater, broader reality exists for me. Others
with expanded sense perceptions experience it
too. To me it is real. You can only decide from
your experience.

Receiving information from a guide is differ¬
ent in that you enter into the metaphor that you
are asking for information from a person who is
wiser and more advanced than you are. The in¬
formation that comes through is beyond your
understanding, but if you allow it to continue to
come through, you will eventually understand
it. Channelling a guide can give information be¬
yond the linear mind and can touch people very
deeply; it reaches the soul beyond the human
limitations. Usually, in the beginning of a read¬
ing my guide Heyoan will speak. That means I
am doing a passive direct access. Then at a cer¬
tain point, Heyoan will suggest that the patient
ask questions to make things clearer. I feel that
this is the best sequence because guides usually
know more about where the problems really lie
than we do. They go right under an individual's
defense and into the heart of the matter. There¬
fore, when Heyoan starts a reading, we don't
waste time getting to the deeper information
that is waiting to assist us.

I also ask Heyoan questions during read¬
ings. I usually do this silently. I can ask for a
picture of the situation or any specific part of the
body, or I can ask to have a certain problem de¬
scribed. I even ask questions like, "Is this can¬
cer?" Usually I get pretty specific answers, but it
is not always easy, especially if I am uneasy

about what the answer might be. It is then that I
will block the information coming through.
Then I must recenter to go on. Now it is time for
you to try it.

Exercises to Receive
Spiritual Guidance

Sit in a meditative position with your back
straight, but with a slight hollow in the small of
your back. You may sit in a chair, using the back
of the chair to rest on, or you may prefer the
yoga position of sitting on a pillow on the floor
with your legs crossed. Be sure it is a comfort¬
able position for you.

1. If you are a kinesthetic type, close your eyes
and simply follow your breath as it flows into
and out of your body. Now and then you may
want to repeat a reminder to yourself, "Follow¬
ing breath to center." With your mind's eye, fol¬
low your breath into your body and all the way
to your center. Your senses may become height¬
ened, and you may want to start following the
energy flow throughout your body.

2. If you are a visual type, imagine a golden
tube up and down your spine where the main
power current of the aura is. Visualize a white-
golden ball above your head. As you calmly
breathe, the ball slowly sinks down through the
tube and into the central part of your body to
the solar plexus. Then watch the golden ball
grow like a sun inside your solar plexus.

You may want to continue the growth of the
golden ball on the solar plexus. Allow it to first
fill your body with golden light. Then let it fill
your auric field with golden light. Continue the
expansion to fill the room you are in. If you are
meditating in a circle of people, see their golden
balls expand to create a golden ring, filling the
room. Let it expand, growing larger than the
room, to the size building you are in, the area
outside the building, the town or city, the state,
the country, the continent, the earth, and be¬
yond. Do this slowly. Move your consciousness
to expand the golden ball of light out to the
moon and the stars. Fill the universe with bright]

High Auditory Perception and Communication with Spiritual Teachers 171

golden light. See yourself as part of that uni¬
verse and as one with it and therefore one with
God.

Now, keep the light just as bright and bring
it back in, step by step, just as you sent it out.
Fill your being with all that light and knowledge
of the universe. Be sure to do this slowly, going
step by step back in. Feel the tremendous charge
your auric field has now. You have also brought
back into your field the knowledge that you are
one with the Creator.

3. If you are an auditory type, you may simply
want to use a mantra for the entire meditation.
You may want to use a sacred name as the man¬
tra, such as Om, Sat-Nam, Jesus or "Be still and
know that I am God." Or you may want to
sound a note. I find that on some days it takes
more effort to center myself, so I may use a com¬
bination of the above meditations to get my
mind free of its chatter. On another day, all I
need is a simple mantra.

For more meditations and practices for get¬
ting into that quiet self-accepting state and to
increase your sensitivity, I highly recommend
the exercises in the book Voluntary Controls by
Jack Schwarz. This book contains a whole series
of such exercises geared to the western mind
and is very effective.

Now that you are centered and your mind is
quiet, you are ready to sit for spiritual guidance.

Channelling Personal Spiritual
Teachers for Guidance

Each person has several guides who stay with
him and guide him throughout many lifetimes.
In addition, one has teacher-guides who stay
during times of specific learning and are chosen
because of that specific learning. For example, if
you are learning to be an artist, you are bound
to have a few artist-type guides around for in¬
spiration. In whatever kind of creative work you
are involved in, I am sure you are inspired by
guides who are connected to that type of work
in the spirit world, where the forms are more
perfect and beautiful than we are able to mani¬
fest on the earth plane.

To contact your guide, simply sit in the
quiet, peaceful understanding that you are one
with God, that a spark of God exists in every
part of your being and that you are perfectly
safe. This attitude allows you to reach a state of
inner quiet that allows you to hear.

In general, when entering a lifted state for
guidance, I go through the following internal ex¬
perience.

I feel an excitement because I sense the pres¬
ence of a guide full of light and love. Then I
become aware of a beam of white light above
me, and I start lifting myself up into it. (One
might say, I go up into it with my mind's eye.)
My excitement diminishes as I become aware of
a pink cloud of love coming down over me. I
become filled with a feeling of love and security.
I then feel myself being lifted into a higher state
of consciousness. At this point, my body may
make a few adjustments, like the pelvis curling
under more (to the forward position), and my
backbone straightening more. I may involuntar¬
ily yawn to help my throat chakra open. (This is
the chakra through which one hears one's
guides.)

After more lifting, I enter into a state of holy
serenity. Then I will usually both hear and see
the guides. Throughout the beginning of the
reading I will continue lifting. I usually have
about three teachers that guide me. The person
who has come to me for help will usually be
accompanied by his guide or guides.

It is the experience of light, love and serenity that
confirms your connection to the guides. If you do not
have it when trying to channel, then you are most
likely not connected to your guides.

The guide will communicate in whatever
form is easiest for you to receive. It will either be
in a general concept, direct words, symbolic pic¬
tures or direct pictures of happenings like past
experiences or past lives. When one form of
communication does not reach you, or you be¬
come afraid of what is being conveyed, the
guides will simply shift to another form or ap¬
proach the subject from another angle. For ex¬
ample, if I fear that the words that are coming
through have a certain meaning, or if someone
has asked a particularly controversial question, I
will "run away" from that place of inner peace

172 Hands of Light

and harmony and no longer be able to hear
what the guide is saying. I then have to take a
minute or two to find that place inside again. If I
cannot pick up the words again, the guides will
probably send me a general concept that I then
try to explain in my own words. This slowly
merges with their words again, and I am "back
on line." If that doesn't work, they will come in
with a picture that I will begin describing and
allow the client to help find the meaning of the
symbolic picture for himself.

My internal experiences of verbal channel¬
ling is as follows. I sit in a cross-legged position,
palms down on my thighs. First I center myself.
To me this means kinesthetically anchoring in
my body. It feels as if I build a strong energetic
foundation around my lower half. Once this
foundation is set, I begin to lift my conscious¬
ness by kinesthetically feeling it raise and visu¬
ally focus upward into the light. I also turn my
palms upward when I do this. At a certain point
when I am lifted, contact with the guide is
made. Again I feel it kinesthetically. I see the
guide behind my right shoulder, and I hear the
first few words from that direction. When I and
the guide are ready to begin, I lift my hands and
hold fingertips together in front of my solar
plexus or my heart. This balances my energy
field and helps maintain a lifted state. The rasp
nasal breath also helps. At this point, I usually
begin to channel verbally. At first the words
come from the right shoulder area. The more
connected to the channelling process I become,
the closer-in the words are. The guide also ap¬
pears to come closer. Soon, there is no lag time
between hearing and speaking the words, and
the apparent direction they are coming from
moves to above and inside my head. The guide
also visually appears to fit over me like a glove.
The guide begins to move my arms and hands
in coordination with the conversation. "He"
also uses my hands to balance my energy field
and to run energy into my chakras while "he" is
talking. This keeps the energy high and fo¬
cused. My personality self seems to be floating
off and above, listening and watching it all. At
the same time, I feel merged with the guide, as
if I am the guide. As the guide I feel much big¬
ger than the personality me, Barbara.

At the end of the conversation, my experi¬
ence is one of the guide lightly disconnecting
and lifting off, while my consciousness sinks
downwards into my body and my personality
self. At this point I am usually quite shy.

The Chakra Senses

So far I have mentioned only accessing through
four of the normal five senses of sight, sound,
feel and smell. It is rare, but I suppose one
could channel through taste also. In studying
the accessing process, I have seen that each
mode or sense is related to a chakra; i.e., we
access information through the sensing mecha¬
nism of each chakra. Figure 19-1 lists the seven
chakras and the sense that is active through
each one. When I observe someone channelling,
I am able to perceive which chakra they are us¬
ing to get their information. That chakra is usu¬
ally very active and has more energy running
through it when they are channelling. Note that
we do not normally distinguish between the
kinesthetic sense, feeling and intuition, but in
my opinion, they are very different as described
in Figure 19-1. We also don't call loving a sense,
but I believe it is. Just begin to pay more atten¬
tion to what is going on when you are loving or
"sensing love." Loving is not in the same cate¬
gory as other feelings. Of course loving is more
than just a sense. It is also a way of being in
synchronidty with other human beings.

The kind of information you receive through
each of your chakras is different. The first cha¬
kra yields kinesthetic information—feelings in
your body like a feeling of balance or imbalance,
shivers running up and down the spine, physi¬
cal pain in a body part, a feeling of illness or
health, safety or danger. This information can be
utilized by the healer to know what state the
patient is in. If the healer feels illness, and she
knows it is not hers, she will know that it is the
patient's. She may feel the patient's leg pain in
her own leg or in her hand when she places it
on the patient's leg. All this kind of information
comes through the first chakra and can be used
very successfully if the healer clears herself so
that her own body is a sounding board. She can

High Auditory Perception and Communication with Spiritual Teachers 173

Figure 19-1

SENSES OF THE SEVEN CHAKRAS

Chakra

Perception

Nature of Information

Meditation

Practice

Knowing

whole

concept

Receiving a whole concept that goes
beyond each of the senses listed below

Be still
and know

I am God

Seeing

Visualizing

Seeing clear pictures, either symbolic or
literal

Messianic
- or Christ

Consciousness

Hearing

Speaking

Hearing sounds, words or music and also
taste and smell

Sounding

Listening

Loving

A sense of loving another

Rose light
of love

Love a flower

Intuition

A vague sense of knowing that is not
specific—a vague sense of size, shape and
intent of being that is sensual

One-

pointedness
of mind

Emotional

Emotional feeling—joy, fear, anger

Meditate on
peaceful sense
of well-being

Touch
Movement
and presence
Kinesthetic

Kinesthetic feeling in your body—like
feeling of balance, shivers, hair standing
on end, energy running, physical pleasure
or pain

Walking

Meditation

Touching

Deep

relaxation

distinguish between her body and the body of
her patient. If the healer feels pain in her leg,
she had better be aware of whether it was there
before the patient arrived or if she is picking it
up from the patient. Of course there are disad¬
vantages to this method of accessing inforina-
tion. One tires very fast of feeling everyone
else's physical pain.

The second chakra yields information about
emotional states, either of the healer or others.
Again the healer must use her own energy field
to distinguish between her own emotional feel¬
ings and those of the patient. This can be
learned with practice and a lot of good feedback.
For example, the healer will sense what the cli¬
ent feels emotionally about the pain in her leg.
The client may be angry about being sick, or she

may be very fearful about it. She may be afraid
that the leg pain really indicates a very serious
condition. It is important to use this information
because all illness is accompanied by etnotional
feelings that need to be Cleared in some way.

The third chakra gives vague information
such as when someone says, "I thought you
were going to call, and you did" or "My intui¬
tion tells me that I shouldn't fly on that plane
today; something might happen." If one is sens¬
ing beings from another level, and the third cha¬
kra is being used to sense them, the person will
get a vague sense of another presence in the
room, its location, its general shape and size
and its intent, i.e., friendly or unfriendly. The
first chakra would reveal kinesthetic information
about the presence, and the second would re-

174 Hands of Light

veal the feelings of the being. In the example of
the leg pain, the third chakra will give a vague
idea of what deeper meaning the pain has in the
client's life and also some intuition of its causes.

The fourth chakra yields feelings of love.
Love that reaches out beyond the self, mate or
family to humanity and life itself. When you are
sensing with the fourth chakra, you can sense
another's love and the quality and quantity of
that love, whether they be in a physical body or
not. One can feel the collective love of human¬
ity. In the example of leg pain, one would feel
love for the client and the client's quality of love
for herself. The chakra also gives the sense of
connectedness to all creatures who have ever
had leg pain.

The fifth chakra gives the sense of sounds,
music, words, smells and taste. This informa¬
tion can be very specific, depending upon
which level of the auric field it is coming from.
(See next section.) For example, for the client
with the pain in her leg, the healer may very
well receive a description of the problem in
physiological terms like "It is phlebitis" or "It is
a strained muscle due to a new pair of shoes
that cause the leg to twist when the client is
walking." The fifth chakra may also reveal a
sound that would be very effective to use on the
leg for healing it.

The sixth chakra reveals pictures. These pic¬
tures can be either symbolic, with a very per¬
sonal meaning for the patient, or literal. Literal
pictures are pictures of events that have hap¬
pened, are happening or will happen. They are
also images of things that exist. When I say im¬
ages, I don't necessarily mean you see them as
you do with your eyes, but you do receive a pic¬
ture in your mind that gives a strong enough
impression and allows you to observe it in a way
that might allow you to draw or reproduce it if
you wished. For example, in the case of the leg
pain, the sixth chakra might reveal an image of
the blood clot associated with phlebitis, or the
healer might simply see the strained muscle, de¬
pending on what the cause of the pain is. The
image could appear on a screen in the healer's
mind, as on TV, or it could appear to be coming
directly from inside the leg, as it would to nor¬

mal sight. The sixth chakra could also reveal a
symbolic picture that would have some meaning
for the client but most likely not much meaning
for the healer. The symbolic picture would ap¬
pear on the healer's mind-screen. The sixth cha¬
kra could also reveal, in picture form, the
patient's past experience that is connected to the
leg pain, such as an image of a child falling off a
tricycle and bumping her leg right where the
pain is now, say twenty years later. This kind of
direct access is rather like watching a movie.

Note that I have been referring to receiving
pictures. Perceiving means receiving. Perception
is receiving what is already there, either in sym¬
bolic form or in literal form. Visualizing is an
entirely different function. The process of visu¬
alization is actively creating. In visualization you
create a picture in your mind and give it energy.
If you continue to hold it clearly in your mind
and give it energy, you can eventually create it
in your life. You have thus given it form and
substance. The clearer the image and the more
emotional energy you project into it, the more
you will be able to create it in your life.

The seventh chakra reveals information in
the form of a whole concept. This information
goes beyond the limited human senses and
communication system. The channelled after
absorbing and deeply understanding the con¬
cept, must then use her own words to describe
what she understands. Many times, as I start to
explain something in my own words, Heyoan
will come in (from the fifth) and explain it in
much dearer words than I can. The whole con¬
cept gives a complete sense of knowing. It is the
experience of being one with the concept. In our
leg pain example, the seventh chakra will reveal
the whole life situation that the leg pain is asso¬
ciated with.

Chakra Sense of Different Levels
of Reality

Now that you have an idea of the information
coming through each of the chakras, let us look
at the different levels of reality that were dis-

High Auditory Perception and Communication with Spiritual Teachers 175

cussed in Chapters 7 and 15. There I discussed
the physical level of reality, the astral, the
etheric template level, the celestial level, the
ketheric template level and the beings who exist
on each of these levels. I also stated that there
are levels beyond the seventh. In order to per¬
ceive on any one of these levels, the chakra
through which you wish to perceive must be
opened on that level. If you want to see any par¬
ticular auric layer, then you must open your
sixth chakra to that layer. If you want to see the
first level of the auric field, you must open your
sixth chakra on the first level of your aura. If you
want to see the second level of the aura, you
must open your sixth chakra on the second layer
of your aura. When beginners start to see the
aura, they usually see the first layer, because
they open their sixth chakra on the first level of
their aura. As they progress, they open the sixth
chakra on the next consecutive layer and can
then see that layer.

Opening the chakras on levels above the
fourth also means that you will start to perceive
beings on other planes of existence. This is
rather disruptive to your personal life when it
first occurs and takes some getting used to. For
example, many times you must choose between
carrying on the conversation you are having and
stopping and listening to the guide who is try¬
ing to talk to you at the same time. I have spent
a lot of time in this double world existence.
Someone who perceives the presence of beings,
and responds to them, appears very flaky to
those who don't.

In order to hear a being who lives on the
astral level you must open your fifth chakra on
the astral level. If you want to hear a guide on
the fifth level, then you must open your fifth
chakra on the fifth level of your auric field. If
you want to see an astral guide, then you must
open your sixth chakra on the fourth level. To
see a fifth level guide, you must open your sixth
chakra on the fifth level, and so on.

As was stated in Chapter 7, there are doors
or seals between the chakra levels deep within
the hearts of the chakras. These seals or doors
must be opened in order to move from one level
to the next. This is done by raising the vibra¬

tional level of your energy system. To increase
and maintain your field at a higher vibrational
level means purification work. You must keep
your field dear and highly cleared to perceive
the higher levels of the auric field. Doing this
also means increased sensitivity in your daily
life. This means a lot of self-care in terms of diet,
exercise and spiritual practices—to be discussed
further in Part VI.

Each level represents another octave higher
in vibration than the one below it. To bring your
conscious awareness to a higher level means to
increase the vibrational rate at which your
awareness functions. This is not necessarily an
easy task, for as you have seen in the material
presented in the chapters on psychodynamics,
every increase in energy in the system knocks
loose blocks that take you through experiences
that you have buried within your subconscious
because the events were too threatening to be
felt at the time they occurred.

Meditations to Enhance
Experience of Each of Your
Auric Levels

I have found different meditation practices that
will enhance your experience of each of your au¬
ric levels. These are also given in Figure 19-1. To
enhance your experience on the first layer of
your aura, do walking or touching meditations
or deep relaxation. To enhance your experience
of the second layer of your aura, meditate on a
peaceful sense of well-being. To enhance your
experience of the third level of your auric field,
do one-pointedness-of-mind exercises. To en¬
hance your experience of your fourth level, med¬
itate on the rose light of love or focus on loving a
flower. To enhance your experience of being at
the fifth level of your auric field, use sounding
or listening meditations. To enhance your expe¬
rience of your celestial body, meditate on be¬
coming one with the Messianic or Christ
Consciousness. To experience your seventh layer
of being, sit in meditation and use the mantra,
"Be still and know that I am God."

176 Hands of Light

Chapter 19 Review

1. What is a good way to learn High Auditory
Perception?

2. How can you sit for spiritual guidance?
Practice it at least three times this week.

3. In what forms will your guides try to com¬
municate with you? Describe the process,

4. Describe the sense associated with each of
the seven chakras.

5. If you want to "see" a guide on the ketheric
template level, which chakra do you need to
open on what level of the auric field?

6. If you want to "hear" a guide on the astral
level, which chakra do you need to open on
what level of the auric field?

7. If I were to say that I had a vague sense that
a being was in a certain comer of the room
and that being was not very friendly,
through what chakra would I be sensing it?
Upon what level of the auric field would
that being exist?

8. How do you open a particular chakra on a
particular level of your field?

9. What is the main difference between inter¬
nal viewing and channelling-guided infor¬
mation?

Food For Thought

10. How would your life be different if you
sought and followed guidance more?

11. What are your main resistances to actively
seeking guidance in your life?

12. Ask for guidance to learn how to utilize
guidance better in your life. What is the an¬
swer?

13. What is your negative belief or image of
what bad things will happen to you if you
follow guidance? How does that relate to
your childhood experiences with authori¬
ties? How does that relate to your relation¬
ship to or image of God?

14. How can precognition work if we have free
will?

15. How can using this kind of perception
change your life?

16. What is the difference between visualizing
and perceiving?

Chapter 20

HEYOAN'S METAPHOR OF REALITY

The Cone of Perception

In the last chapter I discussed opening your per¬
ception to higher levels of reality by increas¬
ing the vibratory rate of your auric field. This
idea was based on the concept of a multi¬
dimensional universe composed of levels of vi¬
brational rates existing within the same space.
The more advanced or refined that level of real¬
ity, the higher the vibrational rate. I would now
like to discuss this multi-dimensional universe
in terms of levels of perception.

Heyoan says that each of us has a cone of
perception through which we perceive reality.
One can use the metaphor of frequency to ex¬
plain this concept, meaning that each of us is
able to perceive within a certain frequency
range.

As humans, we tend to define reality by
what we can perceive. This perception not only
includes all the normal human perceptions, but
also the extensions of those perceptions through
the instruments we have built like the micro¬
scope and the telescope. Everything inside our
perceptual cone we accept as real, and every¬
thing outside that cone isn't real. If we can't
perceive it, then it doesn't exist.

Each time we build a new instrument, we
increase our cone of perception, and more
things are perceived and therefore become real.
The same thing is happening here with High
Sense Perception, but the instrument in this
case is our own body and energy system. As we

perceive more things through High Sense Per¬
ception, more things become real to us.

I have attempted to draw a graph using the
familiar bell-shaped curve to help describe this
phenomenon (Figure 20-1 A). The vertical axis
shows clarity of perception, and the horizontal
depicts frequency range of perception. The bell¬
shaped curve shown in the middle of the graph
can be used to depict the normal perceptual
range of a human being, a group of human be¬
ings or, for that matter, the whole of humanity.
Most of us have clear perceptions as defined by
the dotted lines. Outside the dotted lines, our
clarity is so low that we tend to discount what
we perceive. However, if we accept everything
we perceive, then the space under the bell¬
shaped curve also defines what we call the real
universe. The dashed line shows the increase in
perception that our instruments give us. We, at
least most of us, accept that as reality also.

Let us look at this from the point of view of
what is called the Brahman and the Maya of the
Buddhist tradition. Maya is the manifest world,
which according to Buddhism is illusion. Brah¬
man is the basic reality that lies beneath Maya
and supports what is manifest. It is not to be
confused with Brahmin, the educated priest
class in the Hindu caste system. Meditation is
practiced in Buddhism in order to get beyond
the illusion of Maya which encompasses all pain
and to become Brahman or enlightened. Here
we have a concept very similar to the cone of
perception. Figure 20-1B shows the cone of per-

177

Clarity of perception ^ Clarity of perception

100 %

i I

1 I

I I

A. Graphic depiction of our perceptual cone

B. Spiritual interpretation of our cone of perception

Figure 20-1: Our Perceptual Cone

178

Heyoan's Metaphor of Reality 179

ception again, now interpreted from the point of
view of Brahman and Maya. The manifest world
of Maya lies within our cone of perception,
while the unmanifest world of Brahman lies out¬
side the cone of perception. Physicist David
Bohm's Explicate Unfolded Order (see Chapter
4) lies within our cone of perception, and his
Implicate Enfolded Order lies outside our cone
of perception.

Figure 20-2A shows the effect that High
Sense Perception has. I have now labeled what
we used to call unreal and nonexistent as the
spiritual reality. As we increase our perceptual
range to a higher levels of vibration, more of the
spiritual (nonphysical) world becomes real to
us. The more we use our HSP, the more we are
able to perceive (which makes more of the spirit¬
ual world accessible to us), the more we come
out of illusion and into Brahman or enlighten¬
ment. From this point of view, the line of the
bell-shaped curve becomes the veil between the
spiritual and the material worlds. Heyoan says
healing is ultimately dissolving the veil between
the spiritual and material worlds.

Another very important point is that, since
our self-definitions are based on what we define
as real, as our reality broadens, so do we. Figure
20-2B again shows the bell-shaped curve, but
now I have labeled it in terms of self-definition.
Inside the curve we have a limited self¬
definition—who we think we are based on our
limited view of reality. Outside, we have a self¬
definition without limits, which is ultimately
God. The line of the curve becomes the veil be¬
tween who we think we are and who we really
are. Heyoan repeatedly has said that these two
veils (between the spiritual and material worlds
and between who we think we are and who we
really are) are the same. It is also the veil be¬
tween what we call life and death. When we
know we are spirit, we do not cease to live at
death; rather we simply leave our physical body,
the vehicle which we as spirit made in order to
incarnate in the first place. At a person's death I
have witnessed (with HSP) his spirit leaving the
body to join other spirits in the room. At death
the veil dissolves, and we go home to who we
really are.

The Manifest World

During a reading some time ago Heyoan led me
through an experience that explained manifesta¬
tion. Here is the transcript of that tape.

Heyoan: "And what then is manifestation?
It is related to the ability to sense what has been
manifest. That ability relates to the One and re¬
lates to each person's individuation and where
her sensing window is. What is perceived
within that window of sensing is what you have
defined as the manifest world. When that nar¬
row view through which you sense manifesta¬
tion expands, then the manifest world expands.
For example, when you begin to hear our voice,
then you can experience more of the manifest
world. That world appears to be less solid or
thinner, but it is still of the manifest. The ap¬
pearance of thinness has more to do with your
ability to sense higher frequencies than the real¬
ity of higher frequencies having a quality of
thinness. This limitation on your sensing, which
makes the higher realities appear thinner, also
gives you the impression that the higher fre¬
quencies appear to be fading back into the un¬
manifest. However, that is not the case."

Barbara: "So what I am seeing is this whole
range of sensing into what we call manifest. It is
simply a set of sensing, when you call it mani¬
fest. As that range becomes higher and wider, or
(one could use the analogy) the more the angle
of view increases, or the more our experience
broadens, then we are able to sense more of
what we call the unmanifest world . . . Oh, it
works both ways, so that when one expands to
lower vibrations, the same is also true."

Heyoan: "For some reason or other, human¬
ity has chosen to see or describe the lower vibra¬
tions as negativity, as darkness, as unpleasant
forms. That is one way to do it, although it is
simply based on the dualistic nature of the hu¬
man being and his perception mechanism. It is
part of the sensing system that then sees the
lower vibrations as negative."

Barbara: "What about the whole long hu¬
man evolutionary scale?"

Heyoan: "In terms of evolution, we would
be speaking simply of the ability to expand the

Clarity of perception | Clarity of perception

Spiritual reality

100 %

.. Cone of perception increased by high sense perception

Frequency of perception-►

B. Cone of perception limited by definition of personal reality

Figure 20-2: Defining the Boundaries of Our Perceptual
Cone

180

High sense perception
increases perceptual
range

Heyoan’s Metaphor of Reality 181

sensing window. One might say that concrete
reality falls within the largest part of the bell¬
shaped curve of your perception. People tend to
disbelieve their perceptions when they reach out
beyond one standard deviation, or beyond the
maximum part of the bell curve. As humanity
progresses along its evolutionary path, the bell
curve of perception becomes wider and wider.
[See Figure 20-1.] The bell curve of perception
could be considered to be a curve that shows the
limitations of the human mind in this time of its
evolution. We would seek to have the entire
range of perception of the human mind func¬
tioning at the peak of the bell curve over all fre¬
quencies of perception so that expanded reality
becomes as concrete as, say, this tape recorder
you are holding. The bell curve of perception
would then expand to its peak until it becomes
flat. When the whole is reached, the manifest
and unmanifest become one.

"Another way to say it is: As you expand
your cone of perception, our world becomes
more and more manifest to you and you will
then relate to it as part of the manifest world.
Thus, as you continue to expand your percep¬
tion through your personal evolution, more and
more of the Universe becomes manifest to you
and you approach the Universal Oneness. In a
sense, you are coming back home.

'Through the expansion of perceived reality,
the human being could and does then choose
what frequency to perceive in and even exist in
the manifest universe. It is a tool for under¬
standing the implicate order. This process is the
game of life, one might say. When the implicate
and the explicate order become one, due to the
expansion of perception in the human being,
then the state of enlightenment is reached.

"For example, let us use this analogy: white
chalk drawing on a white board could be like the
unmanifest. A blackboard with white chalk
could be like the unmanifest first breaking into
dualism. A cream board with colored chalk
could be like the multi-dimensional universe.
These could be seen as steps in the evolutionary
process of perception of the human being, or of
who you are, or of the God/Goddess within
perceiving him/her self. Thus, as we reach into
broader dimensions of reality, the colors become

more distinct and more dimensional, as in
multi-dimensional colors within each other.

"That is what this discussion is all about:
teaching a new perception (High Sense Percep¬
tion) in humankind. Your internal vision gives
you the choice of where to look, and what size,
and in what frequency band. Would you look at
the physical manifestation, or what you call the
physical reality? Or do you want to look at the
lower etheric, or the emotional, or up into the
higher etheric, or even the ninth or eighth levels
of the aura? Where do you choose to place your
perception? You also decide on the resolution.
Do you choose to look at a microorganism or do
you choose to look at a macroorganism? The
manifest God chooses to manifest only through
perception, that is, chooses upon which part of
the face of the dark to manifest through percep¬
tions. There are beings among you who cannot
see you and whom you cannot see. They have
chosen to live in a different window of percep¬
tion. Do you understand, my dear?"

Barbara: "No, I'm getting tired. This talk is
too linear."

Heyoan: "That is because we are again
squeezing this information into your narrow
perception. Allow your perception to expand as
we lead you into another realm of light. As you
enter this room, see the lightness, feel the
joy. . . ."

From here I was led into what appeared to
be higher and higher realms. Each realm was
more magnificent than the one before. Each was
harder and harder to perceive. Each was becom¬
ing apparently thinner and of less form. My
guide Heyoan led me.

We reached as high as I could perceive, at
which point Heyoan said, "And here we stand
before the door of the Holy of Holies, where
every human longs to enter."

I could see my past lifetimes floating by be¬
neath me as the wafted scent of jasmine in
the night air. As each did, I could feel a pull
to look back into the reality. Each time that pull
felt like falling. I tried to stay with a sense of
being, beyond Barbara, beyond time, beyond
lifetimes . . .

I tried to reach into the door of the Holy of
Holies.

182 Hands of Light

Heyoan: "It is not a matter of trying to
reach; it is a matter of allowing oneself to be
where one already is. There is tremendous room
here. It is a state of being beyond time and
space. No need to rush. This is what the soul is
asking for."

Then I found myself entering a door be¬
tween two paws of the Great Sphinx. Before me
sat Heyoan on a throne.

Heyoan: "So, my dear, when you speak of
healing, know that healing is opening the doors
of perception so that one can enter into the Holy
of Holies and be one with the Creator. It is noth¬
ing more, nothing less than that. It is a process,
step-by-step, in that direction. Enlightenment is
the goal; healing is a by-product. So, whenever
a soul comes to you for healing, know deep in¬
side that this is what the soul is asking for.

"Remember that whenever someone comes
to you for help or healing, their words come
through their doorway of perception. It may be
a narrow one, or a broad one. A sore toe, a life-
threatening illness, or a seeking of the Truth,
that which is asked comes through the doorway
of perception, but that which needs to be given
is simply this: It is the answer to the longing of
the soul. The soul is saying, 'Help me find my
way back home. Help me find my way into the
Holy of Holies, into the peace of the ages, into
the Wind Whispering Truth Through the Centu-
nes.

At this point during the meditation, I shud¬
dered and wept with joy. Heyoan had often told
me that the meaning of Heyoan is the "Wind
Whispering Truth Through the Centuries." Now

I understood. Through the meditation Heyoan
had led me into an understanding that I and
Heyoan are one. I could experience this with
every cell of my body, that I am Truth Whisper¬
ing Through the Centuries.

Heyoan continued: "And so here I sit, Hey¬
oan, crown of jewels, each being a truth, a
known truth. So here I exist, have always ex¬
isted and will always exist; beyond space and
time, beyond confusion; manifest, yet unmani¬
fest; known, but not known. And so sit you
here also every one of you. You simply long to
know this, from where you stand within your
limited perception."

Chapter 20 Review

1. Explain the concept of the window of percep¬
tion.

Food For Thought

2. Given Heyoan's description of reality here,
discuss the relationship between your inner
wall of fear as described in Chapter 14, the
wall between who you think you are, and
who you really are; the veil between the spir¬
itual and material worlds; and the veil be¬
tween life and death.

3. What is death?

4. From Heyoan's last statement, what is the re¬
lationship between your guide and you?
How is that different from your higher self?
Your Divine spark?

PARTY

SPIRITUAL HEALING

"Even greater miracles than these,
ye shall do also."

Jesus

Introduction

YOUR ENERGY FIELD IS
YOUR INSTRUMENT

Now that we have a good idea of what healing is
all about from the personal, human, scientific
and spiritual levels, let us explore the various
healing techniques I have learned throughout
my years of practice.

As always, healing starts at home. The first
prerequisite for any healer is self-care. If you do
healing and don't take care of yourself, you will
probably get sick faster than in any other situa¬
tion. This is because healing requires a lot of
work from your energy field, in addition to its
importance for your own life. What I mean by
this is that in addition to keeping you healthy
and balanced, your field will be used as a con¬
duit for the healing energies that are needed by
others. Your field may not necessarily need the
frequencies that you will be transmitting, but
your field will have to transmit them anyway. In
order to transmit a certain frequency required in
healing, your field must vibrate in that fre¬
quency or its harmonic. Thus in order to give
healing, you will run your field like a roller
coaster. You will be constantly varying its fre¬
quency of vibration. You will be constantly
transmitting diff erent intensities of light. This
will affect you. It will be good in the sense that it
will speed up your own evolutionary process,
because changes in frequency and intensity will
break your normal holding patterns and will re¬
lease the blocks in your field. It may deplete you
if you do not keep yourself in top condition. In

healing, you do not generate the energy you
transmit, but you must first raise your frequency
to that needed by the patient in order to entrain
the energy from the Universal Energy Field.
This is called harmonic induction and takes a lot
of energy and focus to do. As long as your volt¬
age of energy is higher than the patient's, you
will transmit to him. If, however, you try to heal
when you are very tired, the voltage you are
able to produce may be weaker than the pa¬
tient's. Current flows from a high voltage to a
lower one. In this way you could pick up nega¬
tive energies of disease from your patients. If
you are very healthy, your system will just clear
them by energizing them or by repelling them.
If you are worn out, you may take longer to clear
the low energies you pick up. If you already
have a tendency toward a particular illness, you
could exacerbate your own situation. On the
other hand, if you take care of yourself, healing
someone with the same particular disease that
you have tendencies toward may very well help
you learn to generate the frequencies needed to
cure yourself.

Studies done by Hiroshi Motoyama mea¬
sured the strength of a healer's and a patient's
acupuncture lines before and after healing. In
many cases, the healer's lines for a particular or¬
gan were low after the healing. However, they
recovered their original strength a few hours
later. Motoyama also showed that usually the

185

186 Hands of Light

healer's heart meridian was stronger after a
healing, indicating that the heart chakra was al¬
ways used in healing, as will be discussed in the
following chapters.

In the following section I will discuss healing
techniques for different layers of the aura,
present some examples of healings and give
techniques for self-care of the healer.

Chapter 21

PREPARATION FOR HEALING

Preparing the Healer

In preparing to give a healing, the healer must
first open and align herself with the cosmic
forces. This means not only just before the heal¬
ing, but in her life in general. She must be dedi¬
cated to the truth and be meticulously honest
with herself in all areas of her being. She needs
the support of friends and some form of spirit¬
ual discipline or purification process. She needs
teachers, both spiritual and physical. She needs
to keep her own body healthy through exercise
and healthy nourishment, balanced diet (includ¬
ing high intake of vitamins and minerals, which
the body uses more of when running high en¬
ergy), resting and playing. Through this nour¬
ishment, she maintains her own physical vehicle
in a condition that allows her to raise her vibra¬
tions to reach up and out to the universal en¬
ergy field and those spiritual healing energies
that will then flow through her. She must first
raise her own vibrations to connect with the
healing energies before channelling can take
place.

Before starting a day of healing, it is good to
do some form of physical exercise in the morn¬
ing, as well as a meditation to center oneself and
open the chakras. This does not have to take a
long time. Thirty to forty-five minutes is suffic¬
ient. The following exercises are the ones that I
find very effective. I change them periodically to
suit the constantly changing needs of my energy
system.

Daily Exercises for the Healer to
Open Acupuncture Lines

1.. Lie flat on your back with your arms at your
sides, palms facing upwards. Move your feet
slightly apart to a comfortable position. Close
your eyes. Relax your whole body by focusing
on each part of it, one after another. Breathe nat¬
urally, Focus on your breath and count—one in,
one out, two in, two out, and so on—for five
minutes. If your mind starts to wander, bring it
back to the counting; if the number is forgotten,
start at one again.

As your attention is kept for a few minutes
on counting breaths, your mind and body are
gradually relaxed.

2. The best exercise to start the day can be
done before you get out of bed (if it doesn't
bother your sleeping partner, but it probably
will). Lie flat on your back, spread your arms
out perpendicular to your body and bring your
knees up with your feet flat on the bed. Keeping
your shoulders down, allow your knees to fall to
the right while you roll your head to look left.
Now bring your knees up and let them fall to
the left while you roll your head to the right.
Repeat this movement until your back feels well
stretched out.

Joint exercises are especially good to create a
smooth flow of energy in the acupuncture chan¬
nels through adjustment of the joints. Since all

187

188 Hands of Light

the meridians flow through the joints, moving
the joints activates the meridians. These joint
exercises were developed by Hiroshi Motoyama
to open the acupuncture channels. They are
given in his pamphlet, "The Functional Rela¬
tionship Between Yoga Asanas and Acupuncture
Meridians."

3. Sit erect on the floor with your legs
stretched straight out in front. Place your hands
on the floor beside your hips and lean back¬
wards using your straight arms for support.
Place your attention in the toes. Move only the
toes of both feet. Slowly flex and extend them
without moving your legs or ankles. Repeat ten
times. See Figure 21-1A.

4. Remain in the sitting position described
above. Flex and extend your ankle joints as far
as possible. Repeat ten times. See Figure 21-1B.

5. You are still in the sitting position given in
#3. Separate your legs slightly. Keeping your
heels in contact with the floor, rotate your ankles
ten times in each direction.

6. Still sitting in the starting position, bend
and raise the right leg as much as possible at the
knee bringing the heel near the right buttock.
Straighten the right leg without allowing the
heel or toe to touch the ground. Repeat ten
times and then do the same process with the left
leg. See Figure 21-1C.

7. In the same sitting position, hold the thigh
near the trunk with both hands and rotate the
lower leg in a circular motion about the knee ten
times clockwise and then ten times counter¬
clockwise. Repeat the same procedure with the
left leg.

8. Bend the left leg and place the left foot on
the right thigh. Hold the left knee with the left
hand and place the right hand on the left angle.
Gently move the bent leg up and down with the
left hand, relaxing the muscles of the left leg as
much as possible. Repeat the same process with
the right knee. See Figure 21-ID.

9. Sitting in the same position as in #8, rotate
the right knee around the right hip joint ten
times clockwise and then ten times counter¬
clockwise. Repeat the same process with the left
knee. See Figure 21-1E.

10. Sitting in the starting position with legs
stretched out, raise the arms forward to shoul¬
der height. Stretch and tense the fingers of both
hands. Close the fingers over the thumbs to
make a tight fist. Repeat ten times. See Figure
21-1F.

11. Maintain the position in #10 above. Flex and
extend the wrists. Repeat ten times. See Figure
21-1G.

12. From the same position as in #10, rotate the
wrists ten times clockwise and ten times coun¬
terclockwise.

13. Taldng the same position as #10 above,
stretch out the hands with the palms upwards.
Bend both arms at the elbows and touch the
shoulders with the fingertips and straighten the
arms again. Repeat ten times and then perform
the same exercise ten times but with the arms
extended sideways. See Figure 21-1H.

14. Remaining in the same position with the
fingertips in constant contact with the shoul¬
ders, lift elbows as high as possible. Then lower
them. Repeat ten times. Now point elbows for¬
ward. Repeat. See Figure 21-11.

15. In same position as #14 above, make a circu¬
lar movement of the elbows by rotating the
shoulder joints. Do this ten times clockwise and
then ten times counterclockwise. Make the cir¬
cular movement of each elbow as large as possi¬
ble, bringing the two elbows together in front of
the chest, bee Figure 21-1J.

Once you learn these exercises, you can
probably do the fingers/toes, ankles/wrist at the
same time.

16. Now do several sit-ups, breathing out each
time you sit up. Dp at least ten to start with.
Work your way up to twenty.

190 Hands of Light

17. Reach over and touch your toes without
bending your legs. Do this from a sitting up
posture with your legs together, straight and in
front of you. Do this ten times. Now simply stay
over and hold your toes without bending your
knees. Do this for three minutes without getting
up.

18. Spread your legs as wide as they will go and
repeat the above exercise, first reaching for the
left toes, then switch to the right side and reach
for the right toes. Now repeat by reaching
straight out in front of you. Hold this position
for three minutes without getting up.

19. Do some head and neck rolls. First look up
and then down with your face. Repeat ten
times. Now look to each side ten times. Then
roll your head around first clockwise and then
counterclockwise several times till your neck
feels more flexible.

20. Stand up. With your body straight and your
feet about two feet apart, bend over to the left
side reaching your right arm over your head and
to the left. Repeat several times. Now bend over
to the right reaching over with your left arm.

Daily Exercises to Open
and Charge Chakras

There are three different sets of exercises that I
know to charge and open chakras. The first set
of physical exercises opens the chakras very well
on the lower three levels of the aura. The second
set opens the chakras well on the astral level.
And the third set is a combination of breathing
and postures that open the chakras on the
higher levels of the auric field.

Physical Exercises to Open
and Charge Chakras
(Levels 1-3 of Auric Field)

These exercises are shown in Figure 21-2.

Chakra 1. Stand with feet wide apart and

toes and knees pointed out to an angle that is
comfortable for your knees. Now bend your
knees as deeply as you can. You should eventu¬
ally be able to go down so that your buttocks are
as low as your knees. Move up and down sev¬
eral times. Now add a swing motion to your pel¬
vis. Push your pelvis as far forward and as far
back as you can. Emphasize the forward move¬
ment. Rock back and forth this way three times
as you go down. Stay down and rock back and
forth three times while you have your knees
bent; then rock back and forth three times on
the way up. The most important movement of
this exercise is the rocking when your knees are
deeply bent. Repeat the whole thing at least
three times.

Chakra 2. Stand with your feet shoulder
width apart and parallel. Now rock your pelvis
back and forth bending the knees slightly. Re¬
peat several times.

Now make believe you are inside a cylinder
that needs to be polished. Polish it with your
hips. Put your hands on your hips. Move then
in a circular fashion, making sure you polish all
sides of the cylinder evenly.

Chakra 3. Jumping. This requires a partner.
Hold each other's hands firmly. While one per¬
son supports, the other jumps up and down.
Bring your knees up as high as possible into
your chest when you jump. Jump continuously
without stopping for several minutes. Rest. Do
not bend over to rest. Switch, let your partner
jump while you support him.

Chakra 4. This is an isometric posture exer¬
cise. Get on your hands and knees as shown in
Figure 21-2. In this position, your elbows do not
touch the floor. Your arms are used as a fulcrum.
Vary the angle of your legs and buttocks until
you feel pressure between your shoulder blades
(some men with big shoulder muscles will feel it
more in the shoulders, so be careful). When you
succeed in getting pressure between your shoul¬
der blades, then put isometric pressure in that
place by pushing your whole body forward for a
while, then pull backward. You can do this from
the hips and legs. This exercise works the back
of the heart chakra or the will center.

For the front of the heart chakra, find some¬
thing large and round like a barrel, a soft couch

Preparation for Healing 191

back, or a bioenergetic stool to lean backwards
over. Lean backwards over it, with your feet
firmly planted. Relax and let the muscles of your
chest stretch out.

Chakra 5. Head and neck rolls. Move your
head several times in the following directions.
Facing forward, up and down, side to side. Up
to the left, then down to the right. Reverse. All
the way up to the right, all the way down to the
left. Now roll your neck and head all the way
around several times in both directions.

The throat chakra also responds very well to
sound. Sing! Make any kind of noise you like to,
if you don't sing.

Chakra 6. Repeat the movements for chakra
5 with the eyes.

Chakra 7. Rub the crown of your head in a
clockwise direction with your right hand.

Visualization to Open Chakras
(Level 4 of Auric Field)

To do this exercise, sit in a comfortable chair or
in the lotus position on a pillow on the floor.
Keep your back straight. First, after calming the
mind with one of your meditation exercises,
bring your awareness to your first chakra. Visu¬
alize it as a vortex of red light spinning clock¬
wise. (Clockwise as defined by looking at the
chakra from the outside of your body.) It is posi¬
tioned directly under you with the larger end of
the spinning cone open to the earth and the tip
of the cone pointing into the bottom of your
spine. As you watch it spinning, breathe in red.
Breathe out red. Visualize the breath as red on
the inbreath. On the outbreath, do not visual¬
ize, just watch what color it is. Repeat until you
can clearly see red both on the inbreath and on
the outbreath. If the color red is either lighter or
muddy on the outbreath, that means you need
to balance your red energies. If it is lighter, you
need more red in your field. If it is muddy, you
need to clean your lower chakra. Do this by re¬
peating the exercise until the ingoing and outgo¬
ing colors are the same. This is true for all the
chakras.

Maintaining your picture of the first chakra,
move to the second located about two inches

above your pubic bone. Visualize two vortices.
One on the front of your body and one on the
back of your body. See them spinning clockwise
with with a bright red-orange color. Breathe in
red-orange. Breathe it out. Repeat. Check to
make sure the ingoing and outgoing colors are
the same before moving on.

Maintaining the visualization of the first two
chakras, move up to the third at the solar
plexus. Here visualize two yellow spinning vor¬
tices. Breathe in yellow. Breathe it out. Repeat
until the yellow is bright on the inbreath and
outbreath.

Move to the heart. See the clockwise spin¬
ning vortices in green. Breathe green in and out
until the colors are balanced. Look down to
make sure you can see all the other chakras (that
you have already charged) spinning before mov¬
ing to the throat chakra.

At the throat, breathe in and out blue
through the clockwise spinning vortices.

At the third eye chakra, see the clockwise
spinning vortices on the front and back of the
head as violet. Repeat the breathing exercises.

Then move to the crown. It is opalescent
white and sits on top of your head. It spins
clockwise. Breathe in white. Breathe it out. Re¬
peat. See all seven chakras spinning clockwise.
See the vertical power current flowing up and
down your spine. It pulsates with your in
breath. As you breathe in, it pulsates up. As you
breathe out, it pulsates down. See all the cha¬
kras connected to it at their tips, with the crown
chakra forming the top entrance and exit, and
the root chakra forming the base entrance and
exit for energy to flow through your field. See
the pulsating energy flowing in through all your
chakras with your inbreath. Your whole field is
now filled with a lot of light energy. This is a
good exercise to do before healing to open and
charge all your chakras.

Breathing and Posture Exercises
to Charge and Open Chakras
(Levels 5-7 of Auric Field)

The most powerful exercises I have seen to
charge up the auric field, brighten it, clear it and

Chakra 3

Figure 21-2: Physical Exercises to Charge and Open Chakras

Front aspect

Chakra 6. Repeat above movements for chakra 5 using eyes rather than head.

Chakra 7. Stand on your head.

Figure 21-2: Physical Exercises to Charge and Open Chakras (continued)

194 Hands of Light

strengthen it are those taught by the Kundalini
Yoga people, who focus on position, breathing
and spine flexibility. I would recommend that
you learn them directly from a Kundalini
Ashram if you have the opportunity. If not, I
have simplified some of what they teach to add
to this book. These are shown in Figure 21-3.

Chakra 1. Sit on the floor on your heels. Place
the hands flat on the thighs. Flex spine forward
in pelvic area with the inhale, and backward
with the exhale. If you like, use a mantra with
each breath. Repeat several times.

Chakra 2. Sit on the floor with your legs
crossed. Grab the ankles with both hands and
deeply inhale. Flex the spine forward and lift
the chest; rotate the top of the pelvis back. On
exhale, flex the spine backwards and the pelvis
forwards near your "sit bones" Repeat several
times, using a mantra if you like.

Chakra 2—Another Pose. Lying on back, prop
yourself up on your elbows. Raise both legs
about one. foot above the floor. Open legs and
breathe in; as you breathe out, cross legs at
knees keeping legs straight. Repeat several
times. Slightly raise legs and repeat again. Do
this until your legs are about two and a half feet
above the floor, then lower them following the
same procedure. Rest. Repeat several times.

Chakra 3. Sit with crossed legs; grasp the
shoulders with fingers in front, and thumbs in
back. Inhale and twist to the left; exhale and
twist to the right. Breathing is long and deep.
Make sure spine is straight. Repeat several times
and reverse direction. Repeat again. Rest one
minute.

Repeat entire exercise sitting on the knees.

Chakra 3—Another Pose. Lie on back with legs
together and raise the heels six inches. Raise the
head and shoulders six inches; look at your
toes; point to your toes with your fingertips,
arms straight. In this position pant breath
through your nose to a count of 30. Relax; rest
for a count of 30. Repeat several times.

Chakra 4. Sitting up with legs crossed, lock fin¬
gers in a bear grip at the heart center, elbow
pointing out to the sides. Elbows move in a see¬
saw motion. Breath long and deeply with the
motion. Continue several times, and inhale, ex¬
hale and pull on the grip. Relax one minute.

Repeat sitting on your heels. This raises the
energy higher.

Be sure to tuck in your pelvis.

Chakra 5. Sit with crossed legs, grasp knees
firmly. Keep the elbows straight. Begin to flex
the upper spine. Inhale forward; exhale back.
Repeat several times. Rest.

Now flex spine by shrugging shoulders up
with inhale and down with exhale. Repeat sev¬
eral times. Inhale and hold 15 seconds with
shoulders pressed up. Relax.

Repeat the above exercises while sitting on
the heels.

Chakra 6. Sitting with crossed legs, lock fingers
in bear grip at throat level. Inhale; hold your
breath; then squeeze your abdomen and sphinc¬
ters and push energy up, as if you were pushing
toothpaste up out of the tube. Exhale the energy
out the top of your head, as you raise your arms
above your head, holding same bear grip. Re¬
peat.

Repeat sitting on your heels.

Chakra 7. Sit with crossed legs with arms
stretched over the head. Interlock the fingers ex¬
cept for the two index fingers, which point
straight up. Take an inbreath by pulling the na¬
vel point in, saying "sat." Let the breath out,
saying "nam" while relaxing the navel point.
Repeat in rapid breaths for several minutes.
Then inhale and squeeze the energy from the
base of the spine to the top of the head by
squeezing and holding the sphincter muscles
first, and then the stomach muscles. Hold your
breath. Then let it out maintaining all muscle
contractions. Relax. Rest. If "sat nam" does not
feel right for you, use a different mantra.

Repeat, sitting on your heels. Rest.

Repeat without using mantra. Instead take
short fast pant breaths through the nose.

Preparation for Healing 195

Chakra 7—Another Pose. Sit with legs crossed.
Hold arms up at a 60-degree angle with wrists
and elbows straight, palms facing up. Pant
breathe through the nose, with a rasping breath
against upper back part of throat for about one
minute. Inhale, hold the breath and pump the
abdomen in and out 16 times. Exhale; relax. Re¬
peat two or three times. Rest.

Color Breathing Meditation
to Charge Aura

With your feet parallel and shoulder width
apart, slowly bend and unbend your knees.
Each time you bend your knees and go down,
breathe out. As you come up, breathe in. Allow
yourself to go down as far as you can without
having your heels come up. Relax your arms.
Keep your back straight and do not bend for¬
ward. Allow the lower half of your pelvis to jut
forward a bit.

Now stretch your arms out in front of you,
palms down. Add a circular motion with your
hands to the up-and-down motion you are al¬
ready making. Your arms are stretched out as far
as possible on the upward motion. As you reach
the top of your movement, bring your arms into
the body (palms down) and allow them to re¬
main close to your body on the downward mo¬
tion. At the bottom of your movement, again
stretch your arms out. (See Figure 21-4.)

Add a visualization to this movement. You
will breathe in colors from the earth up through
your hands and feet and in from the air all
around you. As you breathe out, you will
breathe out the colors. Breathe each color sev¬
eral times.

Start with red. When you reach the bottom
of the next movement, breathe in red. See the
whole balloon of your aura fill up with red. Af¬
ter you reach the top of your movement and be¬
gin moving down, breathe the color out. Now
try it again. Can you see the red clearly with
your mind's eye? If not, repeat the exercise till
you do. Colors that are hard to visualize are
most likely the ones you need in your energy
field. Again, as in exercise 22, just watch the

color as you breathe out; don't control it. When
it is bright and clear, move on to the next color.

Now breathe in orange as you move up¬
ward. Let it come into you from the earth up
into your feet, into your hands and into you
from the air all around you. If you have trouble
visualizing these colors in your mind, get some
color samples to look at; or it might be easier for
you to do this with your eyes closed. Repeat the
exercise with orange again.

Continue the exercise through the following
sequence of colors: yellow, green, blue, violet
and white. Make sure you see the whole egg
form of your aura filled with each color before
moving to the next color. These are good colors
for each of the chakras. If you would like to add
even higher vibrations to your aura, continue
with the following colors: silver, gold, platinum
and crystalline; then come back down to white.
All colors of this second group should have an
opalescent quality.

Vibrating Exercise for Grounding

Vibrating your body means to hold your body in
a position of tension that sets up involuntary
physical vibrations in the body. This will in¬
crease energy flow and release blocks. These ex¬
ercises are well known in core and bioenergetic
therapy.

Stand with your feet parallel and shoulder
width apart. After you complete the aura charg¬
ing exercises given above, stand and again sim¬
ply breathe out when you go down and in when
you go up. Bend your knees as much as you
can; let your legs begin to feel tired. If you keep
doing this long enough, your legs will begin to
physically vibrate in an involuntary way. If they
do not, start a vibration by quickly bouncing up
and down on your heels. Allow the vibrations to
work up into the upper part of your legs and
your pelvis. With practice, these vibrations will
spread over your whole body. This is a very
good way to create a strong energy flow
throughout your body. Once you get the feel of
it, you can devise exercises to cause any part of
your body to vibrate in order to increase the en-

198 Hands of Light

Figure 21-4: Standing Color Meditation

ergy flow through that part. In this case, one
usually needs the pelvis to vibrate in order to
enhance the earthly energies flowing through
the first and second chakras. Later, when you
are in a healing situation, you can slowly roll
your pelvis back and forth (while in a sitting po¬
sition), then add a little short, fast vibration to
the rolling motion. This should help the pelvis
vibrate. You will feel the increased energy flow
throughout your whole body.

Sitting Meditations for Centering

Now sit for meditation for 10 to 15 minutes. Be
sure your back is straight and comfortable.

A good mantra to repeat to yourself to si¬

lence the mind for this meditation is: "Be still
and know that I am God." Simply keep your
consciousness focused on that mantra. If your
mind wanders, simply bring it back.

Another good meditation to still the mind is
simply counting to ten. Count one on the in¬
breath, two on the outbreath, three on the in¬
breath, four on the outbreath, until you reach
ten. The hard part is that every time you allow
your mind to wander and think another thought
other than the counting, you go back to one and
start all over again! This type of meditation re¬
ally lets us know just how sloppy our minds
are! Very few people can get to ten on the first
try!

Now you are ready (after a large glass of wa¬
ter) to begin a day of healing.

Preparation for Healing 199

Caring for the Healing Space

It is important to work in a dean room that has
been cleared of low energies/ bad vibes or dead
orgone energy (DOR) as Wilhelm Reich called it.
If possible choose a room that is full of direct
sunlight and has access to open air. You may
also keep the room dean by smoking it in the
Native American Indian tradition with sweet-
grass and cedar or with sage and cedar.

To smoke a room with cedar and sage, put
some dried green cedar and dried sage plant
into a container and set it afire. It is a Native
American Indian tradition to use an abalone
shell for the smoking so that all four elements—
fire, earth, air and water—are represented.
However, if you do not have an abalone shell,
you can use a frying pan. When a large amount
of the cedar and sage are burning, put out the
fire. A lid works best. There will be a great deal
of smoke, sending it into all the corners of the
room. It is also a Native American Indian cus¬
tom to start at the easternmost part of the house
or room and cover the room in a sunrise direc¬
tion (clockwise). Be sure that a door is open be¬
fore you start the smoking. The smoke attracts
the DOR energy and carries it out the door.

To complete the smoking, you can give a
small offering of corn meal into the fire as a
thank you. To learn more about these Native
American Indian traditions, I refer you to Oh-
Shinnah of the Four Corners Foundation, 632
Oak Street, San Francisco, California 94117. Oh-
Shinnah, by the way, smokes each of her pa¬
tients before working with them. This clears
away a lot of the DOR before she starts. You can
smoke yourself if you feel dogged. Some people
bum epsom salts by pouring a little alcohol over
them in a saucepan and then lighting it. Using
the saucepan, walk around the room, patient or
yourself.

Crystals sitting around the room help collect
dead orgone energy. They are then deaned by
simply putting them in a bowl of one-quarter
teaspoon sea salt and one pint spring water to
soak overnight. Negative ion generators also
help dear the room. Never work in a room with¬
out ventilation or with fluorescent lights. These

lights generate a frequency that interferes with
the normal pulsation of the aura causing a beat
frequency to be set up in the field. The spectral
range is also unhealthy.

If you work in an unventilated or fluorescent
lighted room, you will probably get sick. You
will start accumulating DOR in your body; your
vibrations will slow down and slowly get
weaker. Eventually you will have to stop your
work, probably for several month's time until
your energy system can clear itself out again.
You may not even notice your energy frequen¬
cies decreasing because your sensitivity will de¬
crease with them.

Caring for the Healer

If you find yourself accumulating DOR in your
body, to dean your aura take a 20-minute bath
in a warm tub of one pound sea salt and one
pound baking soda. This may make you very
weak as it draws large quantities of energy out
of the body, so be prepared to rest afterward to
replenish yourself. Lying in the sunshine helps
recharge your system. Just how long to take a
sunbath entirely depends on your system. Be in¬
tuitive; trust when your body says it has had
enough. You may have to take these baths sev¬
eral times per week to clear yourself.

One should always drink a full glass of
spring water after each healing; so should the
patient. Running water through your system
helps carry away the DOR and prevents bloat¬
ing. Bloating, paradoxically, is caused by not
drinking enough water in the first place. Your
body will retain the water in an effort to hold
the DOR in the water rather than let it go deeper
into the tissues of your body.

Crystals also help protect the healer's energy
system. A clear quartz or amethyst crystal can
be worn over the solar plexus to strengthen your
field and make it less permeable. Rosy quartz
helps protect the heart when worn over the
heart chakra. There is much to be said about
healing with crystals. I generally use four crys¬
tals on the client in healing, in addition to the
ones I wear, which are an amethyst and a rosy

200 Hands of Light

quartz. I put a large rosy quartz in the left hand
(heart meridian) of the patient and a large dear
quartz in the right hand. These soak up DOR
that is released in the healing. I use a large ame¬
thyst with iron deposits in it on the second or
first chakras to keep the patient's field pulsating
strongly. The iron helps keep the patient
grounded. The crystals tend to hold the patient
in the body. A smoky quartz at the solar plexus
is very good for this.

If you wear a crystal, you should be sure that
you wear the right one for your body. If the crys¬
tal is too strong, it will increase your field vibra¬
tions and eventually deplete your field, because
your basic metabolism rate will not be strong
enough to keep up with the rate that the crystal
induced on your field; i.e., you will not be able
to supply enough energy to your field to keep
up the higher vibrations. You will eventually
lose energy. If, however, you choose a crystal
that is slightly stronger than your field, you will
then enhance your field.

If you wear a crystal that vibrates slower
than your field, it will put a drag force on your
field and slow your vibrations down. You simply
need to be aware of how each crystal affects
you. As you become stronger you will be able to
wear stronger crystals. You will also need differ¬
ent crystals at different times of your life, de¬
pending on the circumstances.

Crystals in the form of old jewels or keep¬
sakes have imbued the energy of their former
owners in them and should be thoroughly
cleaned for a week in one-quarter teaspoon sea
salt to one quart of spring water or in ocean wa¬
ter. Many crystal workshops are being presented
now. I suggest if you want to use crystals, attend
one and learn about them before using them.

I use a massage table and a secretary's chair
when healing. This way I do not have to stand
all day, and my back gets plenty of support. The
wheels on the chair allow free movement, and I
can stand or sit whenever appropriate during a
healing. I also use oil to anoint the feet. This
helps the energy enter the body.

One of the most important things a healer
needs to stay healthy is private personal time
and space. TTiis is not easy, for most healers are
in great demand by their patients. It is impera¬

tive that the healer be able to say, "No, I need
time for myself now," no matter how great the
demand is. This means that when you need
time you give it to yourself no matter what. If
you do not, you will get depleted and have to
stop practicing for a while anyway. Don't wait
till there is nothing more to give. Rest now. Give
time to your hobbies and other personal plea¬
sures. It is very important that a healer lead a
full personal life that provides for her needs. If
she does not, she will eventually try to get those
needs met by her patients. She will develop de¬
pendencies on her patients, which will then in¬
terfere with the healing process. The golden
rule for the healer is: first, the self and what nour¬
ishes the self ; then, deep pause for consideration;
then, the nourishment of others. Healers who dp
not do this will eventually suffer from burnout
and may risk disease from energy depletion.

Chapter 21 Review

1. Describe exercises to open acupuncture
channels. Why do they work?

2. Describe exercises to clear the healer's auric
field.

3. What two things should a healer do before
beginning a healing?

4. Why must a healer drink a lot of water?

5. How can you clear a room of dead orgone
energy (DOR)? Give three ways.

6. Why does a healer need to care for the heal¬
ing space? Her own energy system? What
will happen if she doesn't?

7. How can you prevent yourself from picking
up DOR in a healing? In normal life circum¬
stances?

8. What three things does a healing space
need to keep it dean?

9. Why is it usually easier to heal in a healing
space than in the home of a patient?

10. How can you dear your field if you have
picked up DOR in a healing?

11. Describe at least three ways to heal with
crystals.

12. How can you get sick from wearing a crys¬
tal? What effect does it have?

Chapter 22

FULL SPECTRUM HEALING

An important thing to know about healing is
that one heals or works on different layers of the
aura in a healing and that for each layer the
work is very different from that for other layers.
This will be understood more as I go into a de¬
tailed description of what takes place in a heal¬
ing, The other main point is that the energies for
healing do go through the fire crucible of the
heart chakra for transformation from spirit to
matter and from matter to spirit, as stated earlier
in Chapter 16.

Exercises to Gather Energy
for a Day of Healing

Before you begin a session with any patient, it is
important to align yourself with the highest en¬
ergies available and to do several of the exercises
given in the last chapter to dear and charge all
your chakras to allow the energy to come into
your field. Do these meditation exercises for sev¬
eral months until you are comfortable with
them. Before you begin a day of healings, it is
very important for you to gather energy and fo¬
cus on your purposes. Meditate the evening be¬
fore or the morning of the healing day. Allow
one minute per patient. Hold your mind com¬
pletely blank while drawing in energy for one
minute for each patient. Another technique is to
focus your mind, without other thoughts, on
each patient while drawing in energy. Again
concentration time is one minute per patient.
Visualize or feel energy flowing into you. You

also need to have lots of experience in discern¬
ment, which is discussed in Chapter 19. Be sure
you are supported by a few friends who are ex¬
perienced in these matters. These two things
(discernment and support) are not electives but
prerequisites for anyone who wants to be a
channel during healing. This is very profound
work and should never be taken lightly or as a
party game. Misuse of these techniques can,
and often does, lead to very unpleasant experi¬
ences, which have the possibility of causing
harm to the person trying to channel without
the appropriate spiritual discipline. Channelling
is actually a by-product of spiritual discipline.
Once these requirements are fulfilled, one can
proceed with the exercise to let the guides come
into your field given later in this chapter. For
now, do exercises in Chapter 21 before meeting
with your patient.

After greeting your patient, be sure to de¬
scribe briefly what you will be doing if the per¬
son has not worked with you before. It is
important that the healer communicate as much
as possible in the patient's language. Be as sim¬
ple as possible. If you discover the patient al¬
ready understands a lot regarding the aura and
healing, then talk at that level of understanding.
Quickly determine the general level of under¬
standing about healing and the aura to establish
common ground for communication. This will
set the patient at ease so you can begin work.

In a healing session, I usually work with the
lower auric bodies first and then move on to the
higher bodies. A brief outline of the healing se-

201

202 Hands of Light

quence, given in Figure 22-1, may be useful as
you follow the detailed description below.

Figure 22-1

HEALING SEQUENCE

1. General analysis of the patient's energy
system

2. Alignment of the three energy systems to be
used in the healing: that of the healer, patient
and guides and the Universal Energy Field

3. Healing the lower four bodies (1st, 2nd, 3rd
and 4th layers of the aura)

A. Chelation: Charging and clearing the
patient's aura

B. Spine cleaning

C. Cleansing specific areas of the patient's
aura

4. Healing the etheric template (spiritual
surgery) (5th layer of aura)

5. Healing the ketheric (7th layer of aura)
template (restructuring)

A. Ketheric template organ restructuring

B. Ketheric template chakra restructuring

6. Healing of the celestial level (6th layer of
aura)

7. Healing from the cosmic level (8th and 9th
layers of aura)

DETAILED HEALING SEQUENCE

1. General Analysis of Patient's
Energy System

To begin a healing for the first time, I usually do
a quick energetic body analysis to determine
how the patient utilizes his energy system in
general, noting the physical characteristics of
the body to determine character structure. Once
I can see that structure, I know I will probably
be working a lot with the chakras that are habit¬
ually blocked. I simply have the person stand
with his feet parallel and shoulder width apart. I
then ask him to bend and unbend the knees
while breathing in harmony with this move¬
ment. This reveals a lot about how the person
directs and misdirects his energy, which ulti¬
mately causes the physical problem. For exam¬
ple, the energy will usually not be flowing

evenly up the legs; it is usually stronger on one
side of the body than another; there are areas of
the body that get more energy than others. All
these imbalances are related to emotional and
mental issues the person needs to meet and
work through. For example, someone who is
afraid to love will probably send more energy to
the rear part of the body near the heart area (the
will center), misdirecting energy that is needed
to nourish the loving heart center.

After getting a good idea of how the person
utilizes his system, I used to do a chakra analy¬
sis by dowsing with the pendulum. Now I sim¬
ply psychially "read" the problem.

For the beginner, I suggest that you look at
the structure of the physical body. Compare
it to what you have learned about character
structure. Which character structures are most
predominant? What, then, will be the psycho¬
dynamics involved? Which chakras are most
likely to be misfunctioning? Review the tables in
Chapter 13. This information reveals a lot about
the balance of reason, will and emotion and
about the active and receptive principles in the
personality. It also tells a lot about the way
the person is functioning in each of the areas
that each chakra represents psychodynamically.
Look at the structure of the physical body. All
this information can be used to guide the person
to a deeper understanding of the self and how
he functions from day to day.

I now ask the patient to remove his shoes
and any jewelry (which may interfere with his
normal lines of energy) and lie on my massage
table on his back. (At this point you may wish to
do a chakra reading with your pendulum as
given in Chapter 10.) I usually get out my crys¬
tals if it feels appropriate for the patient. As
mentioned in the last chapter, when I use crys¬
tals, I put a large rose quartz crystal in the left
hand of the patient and a large dear quartz in
the right hand. I use a large amethyst with iron
deposits in it on the second or first chakras to
keep the patient's field pulsating strongly and to
keep the person grounded in the body. A fourth
crystal is my scoop. It is a dear quartz crystal
about one and a half inches wide by three and a
half inches long. A larger one gets very heavy in
the hand, and a smaller one cannot take as

Full Spectrum Healing 203

much energy out. This crystal has a very strong
beam of white light coming out its tip that acts
like a laser beam in cutting loose accumulated
junk in the aura. I use it in the "cleansing" part
of the healing.

2. Alignment of Energy System of Healer,

Patient and Guides

It is very important before first making contact
physically with the patient to align oneself with
the ever present higher energies. To do this, I
again bring my energy quickly up the chakras as
described in exercise 22. I make an affirmation
to align myself with the Christ and the universal
forces of light. I pray, either silently or out loud.
"I pray to be a channel for love, truth arid heal¬
ing in the name of the Christ and the universal
forces of light." If you do not have a connection
with the Christ, please use the connection that
you do have to the Universal Wholeness, God,
the Light, the Holy of Holies, etc. I then silence
my mind by closing my eyes and taking long,
low, deep breaths through the nose while rasp¬
ing the air against the soft palate. 1 sit at the
patient's feet and hold my thumbs on the solar
plexus reflex point on the bottom of the feet.
This point, as defined by the system of foot re¬
flexology, is located on the bottom of the foot
just below the ball of the foot. (See Figure 22-2.)
I then focus on my patient to adjust the three
energy systems involved: his, mine and the
greater forces of light. This can be done by scan¬
ning up through the crown of the healer's body
and then up through the body of the patient to
his crown. After this is done, one may make a
quick survey of the organs of the body through
touching the reflex points on the feet and sens¬
ing the state of the energy of each. The most
important ones usually turn out to be the major
organs of the body and the spine.

The imbalanced points on the bottom of the
foot will feel either too soft or too hard. The
flesh of the foot may stay indented after you
have pushed it with your finger tip, needing
more resiliency. It may be too resilient and not
indent at all. It may feel like a muscle spasm.
Another way to describe the feeling you may
pick up from imbalanced points in terms of en¬

ergy flow is that they will feel as if a little foun¬
tain of energy is squirting out of them or a little
vortex of energy is going into the skin at that
point. The same is true for imbalanced acupunc¬
ture points. The acupuncture points look like lit¬
tle vortexes of energy or tiny chakras. An
imbalanced acupuncture point will have energy
squirting out of it, or it will feel like a tiny whirl¬
pool that sucks energy in. You may want to run
energy specifically into the points that need it.

A. Channelling for Healing

As you progress through the healing se¬
quence, you may add another dimension to the
channelling used to receive information. In
channelling for the healing itself, you allow the
guides to utilize more of your energy field in
two major ways. The first is simply to allow dif¬
ferent levels or vibrations of light to be chan¬
nelled through your field. Usually these colors
and intensities are chosen by the guide. The
person channelling simply keeps aligned with
the white light or Christ light. A second way is
to allow the guides to partially come into your
field and do work on the patient's field through
direct manipulation. In both case, allow your
hands to be guided by the spiritual teacher. In
the first case, the guidance and hand move¬
ments are general and may begin as soon as you
put your hands on the patient's feet. In the sec¬
ond, they are both very intricate and very pre¬
cise and are usually done on the higher levels of
the field (5-7). Many times the guide will reach
his hand through the healer's hand and beyond,
going right into the body of the patient. This
requires the utmost attention of the healer to
what the guides are doing, so as not to interfere.
For example on fifth auric level healing, if your
just get tired of holding your hand or moving it
in a certain way and you want to stop, you must
make it very clear to the guide and give him
time to adjust the healing to allow for such an
energetic break. Drawing a hand away prema¬
turely usually causes an energetic shock to the
patient, who will usually jump. Then you have
to go back and fix up the disruption you have
caused. With experience you will become famil¬
iar with sequences of energetic phasing that al¬
low pauses if necessary.

Full Spectrum Healing 205

3. Healing the Lower Four Auric Layers

A. Chelation: Charging and Clearing the
Patient's Aura

To "chelate," derived from the Greek word
chele, or "claw," means to claw out. Rev. Rosalyn
Bruyere, who founded and developed this tech¬
nique, adapted this word to mean simply to
clear the field of the patient by removing auric
debris. Chelation also fills the aura up with en¬
ergy, as in blowing up a balloon, and generally
balances it. This is done by running energy into
the body in steps starting at the feet. It is best to
run energy in the most natural way; that creates
balance and health in the whole system. Energy
is therefore run into the body from the feet up
because energy is normally drawn up from the
earth through the first chakra and the two cha¬
kras on the bottom of the feet. These earth ener¬
gies are always needed in healing the physical
body because they are of the lower physical vi¬
brations. Thus you are pouring energy into a de¬
pleted system in the most natural way it goes.
This way, the energy body takes in the energy
and carries it to where it is needed. On the other
hand, if you start at the area of complaint, the
energy body may very well carry the energy to
another location before it actually begins nour¬
ishing the area of entry. Since that is not a natu¬
ral flow, it is not as efficient. Please see the
chelation chart in Figure 22-3. Succeeding fig¬
ures in this chapter will show how one person's
aura changed through a complete healing.

When Mary first came to me, her auric field
was clogged, dull and imbalanced (Figure 22-4).
There were blocks shown as dark red and
brownish colors at her knees, pelvic area, solar
plexus and shoulders. She had disfiguration in
the solar plexus chakra that looked as if the
small vortex in the upper left section was pro¬
truding like a spring that had been sprung. This
disfiguration extended through the fifth and
seventh layers of the field. This configuration is
associated with a hiatal hernia. Mary com¬
plained of pain in that area of her body and also
had problems in her personal life in connecting
deeply with people. The process of healing,
which took place over a few weeks, not only re¬
balanced, charged and restructured her energy

field, but also helped Mary to learn to connect
to people better. This was done through chan¬
nelling information about her childhood experi¬
ences in which she had learned to block her
energy field habitually and thus eventually cre¬
ated her psychological and physical problem.

Let us now go over each step of the healing
as if you are the healer.

Figure 22~3: Chelation Chart

206 Hands of Light

Sit with your hands on the feet of the patient
(Mary) until the general field is cleared and bal¬
anced (Figure 22-5). Energy flowing from this
position activates the whole field. Do not try to
control the color you are channelling; allow it to
flow automatically. If you focus on a color, you
will probably interfere rather than help, because
the fields are smarter than your linear mind.

As long as you clear your field so that your
chakras are clear and can thus metabolize all col¬
ors from the Universal Energy Field, the field of
the patient will simply absorb what it needs. If
one of your chakras is blocked, then you will
have difficulty channelling the color or fre¬
quency of light that is transmitted through that
chakra. If this is the case, repeat the chakra
opening exercise till all your chakras are open.
Figure 22-6 shows the flow of energy into the
healer's chakras through the healer's. vertical
power current into the heart chakra and then
out through the healer's arms and hands into
the patient's auric field.

As the energy is flowing, clearing, charging
and generally rebalancing the energy field of the
patient, you will probably feel it flowing
through your hands. It is as if a fountain flows
forth from them. It may feel warm or tingling to
you. You may feel the pulsations which are slow
and rhythmic. If you are sensitive in this way,
you will sense the changes in this flow. Some¬
times there will be more energy flowing up one
side of the body. Then the frequency of pulsa¬
tion will change, and so will either the direction
of flow or the general location the energy is fill¬
ing in the patient's energy field. At this point,
the flow is into general auric body areas.

After several minutes work, the intensity of
flow will diminish, and there will simply be an
equal flow of energy up both sides of the body.
This means that the overall field is generally bal¬
anced, and you are ready to move to the next
position. Note that Mary's aura as shown in Fig¬
ure 22-5 is already a lot clearer than her present¬
ing aura shown in Figure 22-4.

Now, move around to the right side of the
patient. With one hand always on the patient's
body, to maintain the connection, put your right
hand on the bottom of the patient's left foot and
your left hand on the patient's left ankle. You

will have to reach across the patient's body to do
this (Figure 22-7). Allow energy to flow from
your right hand to your left hand through the
foot of your patient. First the flow of energy may
be weak; then as the rivers of energy flow fill
up, the flow of energy becomes strong. As the
foot fills with energy, the flow between your
hands will again decrease. Now move your
hands to the right foot and ankle and repeat the
same procedure. Fill it with energy the way you
did the left foot. Now move your right hand to
the left ankle of the patient and your left hand to
her left knee. Run energy from your right hand
through the patient's lower left leg and into your
left hand. At first the flow may be weak and
probably stronger on one side of the leg than
the other. When the filling is complete, move to
the right ankle/knee position (Figure 22-8). As
you chelate between the ankle and knee, the
dark clouds on the right thigh and hip clear, and
the field there brightens. Then some of the
darkness on the left side of the solar plexus be¬
gins to clear. Continue working up the legs,
joint to joint, knee to hip, left side, right side
(Figure 22-9). As you continue to work up the
body, the patient's aura will continue to clear
and she will enter into an altered state of con¬
sciousness. Move from the hip to the second
chakra (Figure 22-10). Now the patient's field in
the pelvic area clears, especially in the area be¬
tween your hands. In this position your right
hand is on the patient's hip and your left is in
the center of the second chakra right above the
pubic bone. Repeat on each side of the body.
You will be aware of the changes clearing in the
aura by the rising and falling of energy flow as
you move from one place to the next. As you
place your hands on a new place, the energy
will first flow slowly until the connection be¬
tween your field and the patient's is made. The
flow will increase and peak, then slowly de¬
crease, and either stop or continue at a very low
rate. This means it is time to move. The energy
flow will feel like tingling or heat waves. Always
make sure you get an even flow of energy up
both sides of any part of the body before moving
on. This includes both sides of each leg as well
as both sides of the body.

After the second chakra is thoroughly

_ \

f'j t ■» -s> .•* *■ \

*i .-tt *• *, e» ^ ift- * *• • •'«' <

■*i *• «t tr a» * '!*■ > ■> *

V# v* ■<<■ * t* * "* * * 1 «■ V;

:»■ * ■■*. # .# ♦ * * i \

■'* %' * «p -9 * ?■: \

-4‘ i vs* «v* -v *J* ^ i

* * # & #■ ■■* ■♦***' "f X' .*" *5 $

V .<i? ^ >»< * P $ •*' ?! -$-*'**

»> * * ■# * **f * > *■

-.• SI *•*>*■*■* ^ ? * ? ■»: <\

•:• » ¥ >' V « £ ■* * '•* % ** M
f ''* •«*&'* ** V-* -* **•»
yu v « 4- * .<# ..'ft**** S 4

*•. * »• fj 1 ■;,’* A <5 >■ #■ < iJ ““e v i- :;

> «, * v > /V «•' '> *f -V ft .S tr Vi

■1 *v i- > . >-' ■** ♦ A A Y *'* ■*■*■

S6£#f^

lrit( «d«n*S*

oat****' 9 '*®"

%:h'

Rim T£ne r 8V

Balancing

208 Hands of Light

cleared, charged and balanced, move the right
hand to the second chakra and the left to the
third (Figure 22-11). With Mary, you would
need to spend more time on the second and
third chakras because they are the ones that
have the most blockage. When you have cleared
this area, put your right hand on the third cha¬
kra and your left on the fourth.

As you begin to chelate directly into the cha¬
kras, you will enter into a deeper communion
with your patient. You may find yourself breath¬
ing at the same rate she is. This means you are
"mirrored." Once you have become mirrored,
you can pace her breathing by simply changing
your own; hers will follow. It may be important
to do this at this point in the healing, because

you will begin opening up emotional material
when you move into the chakras. As soon as
emotional material begins to release, the person
will try to hold her breath in an effort to hold
down the feelings.

Mary is now beginning to try to hold her
feelings as the second and third chakras become
more connected. You encourage her to breathe.
She does; and she cries. She feels her loneli¬
ness. So do you. You may feel or see Mary's
childhood experiences that relate to it. Share
them with her. She understands the connection
now and cries some more. Her second and third
chakra open and dear more as a result of ex¬
pressing her feelings. If you have trouble tolerat¬
ing the feelings, change your breathing to stop

Figure 22-7: Energy Flow During Chelation of Auric Field

r###$Ns*1

t#.*g#***3

>***##.**

r***ft#$*
********
ISM#***.*
l* *#**•*» ; .
'*** **#*<

'*•***'*%**

»**»■■**»#*

ig*r*3****

r» **»-»**
s% *******
k*W*«af»*

r« *******

r** »J*Jfc4{* '1
t«# •*-%****
I*.* *&$***•
: «f * * * V $ * £

‘ ,*> * » ** » *
"V*- V TV «%: »* ■

Ik** **%*f

Between

oi_R; Chelating

Ij .A • JP J A

Solar plexus clearer ;

^ 'V'<

Second chakra clearing’ j

k ,: +*\ _ ■ •» • At

'jjV' 7

"'m

_ ^ t v 2 * i/j v v o

¥'.. .,r

Figure 22-10: Chelating Aura Between Hip Joint and Second Chakra

Full Spectrum Healing 213

pacing and lift your consciousness to a higher
lever. Continue to send energy. As Mary's cha¬
kras clear, she becomes calm and quiet. Figure
22-12 shows that the chelation has cleared the
lower four levels of Mary's field, but it has not
repaired the tear. The third chakra will need
special attention on the fifth and seventh layers
where the tear is. To chelate chakras four, five
and six simply continue up the body, putting
your left hand on the upper chakra and your
right on the lower one. When you get to the fifth
chakra, most patients are more comfortable if
you put your left hand under the neck instead of
on top of it. Then after that is finished, move
each hand to each shoulder, as you slip your
body into a sitting position above the head of
your patient. Balance the right and left sides of
Mary's energy field. Then slowly move your
hands up the sides of the neck to the temples,
running energy all the while. At this point, if
you are a student, you will move to sixth level
healing described under point six. Do sixth level
healing and a closure on the seventh level as de¬
scribed under the heading Sealing Ketheric Tem¬
plate Level. In the beginning do not expect to do
any more than this until you become more profi¬
cient in healing. At first, this will probably take
you a good hour to complete. After many hours
of practice, you will begin to perceive the upper
layers of the auric field and will then begin to
work on them as described under points four
and five. Even later, you may perceive above the
seventh layer and begin to work on the eight
and ninth levels as described under points seven
in the text that follows.

I ask all new students to do a complete che¬
lation to ensure that they will not miss anything
that needs to be cleared this way. Later, when
they become more proficient in both running
energy and perceiving the field, they will no
longer need to chelate all the chakras. They will
know how far up it is necessary to chelate. For
heart patients it is important to reverse-chelate.
That is, you draw energy away from the heart
chakra, because usually it is clogged with dark
energy.

At this point I will give a few more pointers
about chelation. Remember, you are channel¬
ling, not radiating. This means that you raise

your vibrations to the level of energy that is
needed and then you simply connect yourself to
the Universal Energy Field and let it flow (like
putting an electrical plug into a wall socket). If
you don't heal in this manner, you will get tired
very fast. You cannot radiate or direct enough
energy from inside your own field to heal; you
must channel it. (Your job in channelling is only
to raise your level of vibrations so that you can
complete the circuit with the UEF.) To raise your
vibrations to a higher energy level, the chakra
opening exercises that you have done are very
useful. By preparing for a healing ahead of time,
you will start at a high energy and frequency
level. Throughout the healing you will slowly
rise to higher and higher levels simply because
you are in a lifted state of consciousness. Most
likely, the longer you stay in it, the higher you
will be able to get, especially if you stay centered
and focused with good breathing. The best type
of breathing I use is taking long, continuous in-
and outbreaths, with very little pause in the
middle. Breathing is done through the nose,
rasping the air against the soft palate, as in the
exercises given in Chapter 18. You can also focus
on expanding your auric field. The most impor¬
tant thing to do is to remain in a sensitive syn¬
chronic flow with the energy fields around you.
A pause in energy flow may indicate that a
higher frequency is about to come through. Wait
a bit. If it doesn't come, then move on as stated
earlier. As you become more attuned, you will
begin to feel changes in frequency of the energy
flowing through you. Eventually you will be
able to hold certain frequency levels by adjust¬
ing your breath and focus.

Hold your hands, slightly tensed, firmly on
the body; direct the energy that you are receiv¬
ing with all your chakras through your hands
and into the body, You may want to vibrate your
body to get your chakras pumping more energy,
using exercise 25 described in Chapter 21.

In this part of the healing, you are probably
using the energy through your lower chakras
more than through your upper chakras. A lot of
energy also comes up from the earth through
the bottom of the feet. Be sure to have your feet
well planted on the floor. Visualize growing
roots to the center of the earth and drawing en-

.. ~«***&$*# sissifti'Hf^

tr - ‘ »**##*#H*4fr**WS#*•#####jfc*JMWl*

%* tr*MMOT***4s #***#********SfiSSSSSi

<*.-*> £ * ji%4*$w£«re*#*#**»*#*.***«#***#*#M

4 * * * * sfc 2 *-* % mSg!m 5 #* ** **Mr** * * # * »*

J-* I * 4 * w 5 3 $ * • $SS %&> 4 # * 3 *«-«*#**’* #•

53®W1aK 2* ***5fp** *** * ** *•♦** **** **f i

: ift ;K &*%*?* 4 *4#**W*^*#** £'* *4* *•**■•#

Si¥55SpM3%w*S^#5€5^ **«*•*

5@5I * * *> * *m IS 4 * * v * * *• 4. ■*-** <5 «* * 4 * ;

.J»- if S- *3 «■ «• 4 « * •#/* V * * #-M *-# ***

- fi.^ * at* 4 w 4*4 r#¥ 4 * 4 * * * A* * A =4 * w %*..

*. Sta* 4 . *.w # 4 ^ 4 * *» 4 4 354** *«* * £■*#♦ *#£* *

- '- ?W* ** *- 4 a 1» »■* ** 4 # ^«vi^ #mm* * * *'«■*•# * *■* * *

■4 *.*- *•- -r 4 ’. '4KTJ 4 * *• -A- 4 * &M&* *■# **4 j* *A *■***♦#*

■"‘ *'* :-j? -r Ev *. * * **#"+ W «■* **• ^2

“ • ' ‘4,,r .#4 ■» * * k "* '¥ 4 ; 'f 0 ^ * € ■a&Jt #“- *

rrj > < *4441 fX^ 14 >*.*;* *•#•

-.«&. * «*. ■■* *v •>« *1« #. *■ ^rf '* ■■* * w*t-£ * S’-.^‘ ^ .4! # # i

M@|t .v -■■ >•■ .-/ *> .«. v -f- 4 4*4 eff* 241 * 4'4 <? tr # *4

'• • * if %.&<**. IV••«•<> # 4:24 4 * * 4 *'# .*

•-. 4^-4# * *■•• ;S w1&% *H •* '* * 4>- <fe # ##!' # #

'•, -v ^ ^ fc * »tf 4 ^ H m* 4 4 •

x -- - ;• V > * i* «-* <? a 4 «#■*

Tj&V'^v .. f -.-;■ .*■ J 4 +..., r- w* 4 **4& <^h* * * ***►•*«*

4 •: ■ .n «• ^*W-- Jf 4 *fg» <» 4 * A

JL ihr jfc 4 - 5 e»i 4 *> 4 * *?,*.***.**•

^ * .v? ^ A *: *» 4 ' ^ * $- V

* tfSr** 4 s- * :*J

# « •- *• ❖

^ k- S ■* vl. ■;<■ ^ -“j;% rt ■»*»

■ ^,, f .,. ,^.,, 5 *

^igvite

tl-W

,. cfceV**8 Mta

^e etx

tVo^

a tvd^ r

2^4

Full Spectrum Healing 215

ergy up through those roots. This process nour¬
ishes and charges the lower energy bodies.
Always make sure your body is in a comfortable
position to ensure free flow of energy.

The patient's energy system will take the en¬
ergy and automatically move it to the area in the
body where it is needed. For example, although
your hands may be at the feet, the energy could
be going up the spine and into the back of the
head. While the chelation is being done and to
prepare the patient for more specific work, the
healer can use this vital time to read the patient
psychically and communicate with the patient.
This is the time the patient starts opening up
and sharing personal history more deeply. A
greater mutual trust occurs as soon as the healer
puts her hands on the patient. The healer will
also continue to scan the body for problem ar¬
eas.

In Mary's case, her aura has cleared and is
much lighter, as can be seen in Figure 22-12.
During the chelation of the second, third and
fourth chakra area, her emotional release has
brought her into a deeply relaxed state. The first
four levels of her field are clear enough to sup¬
port fifth and seventh layer work. Another pa¬
tient might not be, even after a full chelation
through the sixth chakra, and might still need to
have his field cleared more in specific locations
of heavy disturbance. There are two major ways
of such clearing. One is a spine cleaning. The
other is either to push or scoop auric waste out
of specific areas.

B. Spine Cleaning

At this point the patient may need a spine
cleaning. (See Figure 22-13.) It is, in general, a
good thing to do since it cleans the main vertical
power current in the auric field. However, given
a one hour session, most times I do not do it
unless there is a spinal problem because other
things are usually more important and a normal
spine will clear during chelation. Part of this
technique was taught to me by my teacher C.B.

To do a spine cleaning, ask the patient to roll
over onto the front of his body. Be sure you have
a table with a face plate or nose hole so that the
patient can look straight down. He should not
have his head turned to the side for this work.

Massage the area of the sacrum. Using the
thumbs, massage the foramens (small holes in
the bone through which nerves pass) in the
sacrum. (That is the area above the gluteus max-
imus where the dimples are.) Look up the
sacrum in an anatomy book if you don't know
what this part of the body looks like. It is a
triangle-shaped set of fused bones with the tip
pointed downward that has five foramens along
each side of the triangle. The last lumbar verte¬
bra sits upon it, and the tailbone extends down¬
ward from its lower tip. Make small circles with
your thumbs in the area of the foramens of the
sacrum. You will be sending red-orange energy
through your thumbs. Work in this way all the
way up the spine, from the right side of the pa¬
tient's body, using your thumbs on each side of
each vertebra. Circling clockwise with the right
thumb and counterclockwise with the left usu¬
ally works best.

Now cup your hands together over the sec¬
ond chakra. Channel red-orange energy from
your hands into the chakra while making a slow
clockwise movement with your hands. To do
this you must be able to hold your energy flow
at the red-orange frequency. This technique is
taught in Chapter 23 on healing with color.
Charge the chakra. When it is charged, begin to
move your hands up the spine. Let the light
turn to a blue laser-like beam as your hands
leave the second chakra. Be sure you do not
"drop" the energetic connection as you move
up the spine. You will have to position your
body in a way so that you can move comfortably
along with your hands as they move up the
spine.

With your blue laser light, you are /cleaning
the spine and pushing all the clogged energy
out the top of the head through the crown cha¬
kra. Repeat the whole sequence at least three
times and until the main power current is
cleaned. You may want to lightly tap the fourth
and fifth chakras to help them open.

C. Cleansing Specific Areas of the Patient's Aura

During the chelation you will begin to sense
through High Sense Perception where you will
work next on the physical body. As you become

216 Hands of Light

Sharp blue light beam

more advanced, you probably won't need to
chelate through all the chakras before you start
working more directly on an area of clogged en¬
ergy. After a lot of practice you should at least
chelate up through the heart before concentrat¬
ing on one area. (Allow yourself to be led intui¬
tively.) More direct work is done by running
energy into a clogged aura to energize it and
knock the stagnated energy loose and/or by di¬
rectly pulling the clogged auric mucus out with
the hands.

To run energy directly into a specific area,
you can use your hands either apart or together.
With your hands on either side of the block
(front to back on bottom to top of the body), you

can direct the energy to move out of one area
and into another by pushing with your right
hand and pulling with the left (or vice versa).
(See Chapter 7 for push/pull/stop techniques.)
At times, this is right to do; at other times, you
will feel it more appropriate to use both hands
together. Either technique directs the energy di¬
rectly into a block and cuts deep into the aura.
Each also floods new energy deep into the aura
and is a good method to fill the chakras. Figure
22-14 illustrates both hand positions. For the
closed hand method, cup hands together with
crossed thumbs and palms facing downward
over the area into which you are directing the
energy. Make sure your hands come together

Full Spectrum Healing 217

solidly, leaving no space between them or be¬
tween your fingers. Fingers should be slightly
cupped. Vibrate your hands to increase energy
flow.

You will find that by doing this you can di¬
rect energy like a beam of light deep into the
body. It can fill, or it can knock things loose. The
guides will direct you as to what is needed and
run the appropriate energy through. If they are
using this technique to knock blocks loose, then
they will shortly change the frequency that they
are sending through and probably reverse the
energy flow and suck the block out. Simply al¬
low your hands to move as needed to accommo¬
date the outward pull. You may want to lift your
hand with the dead orgone energy and allow
the guides to lift it off your hand.

Another technique is to use your etheric
hands to pull the blocked energy out of the pa¬
tient's field. To pull this energy out, imagine
that your etheric fingers appear to get very long,
or the etheric parts of the fingers grow long and
penetrate the body of the patient and simply
scoop up the energy like a shovel or rake it to¬
gether to be scooped up. You simply pull it up
and out of the aura and hold it in your hand
while the guides enlighten it, i.e., energize it
until it turns into white light, and let it go (that
way you don't get your room full of dead en¬
ergy). Then you, as healer go in for the next
handful.

When appropriate, you can also pull clogged
energy out with the use of a crystal scoop,
which catches the energy and pulls it out (see

218 Hands of Light

Chapter 24). A crystal is a very powerful tool in
this kind of work, as it acts like a laser beam: it
goes in, cuts and collects the energy, which you
then pull out and let the guides turn to white
light.

It is not always good to use crystals. Some
people are just too sensitive for this kind of cut¬
ting action. Never use crystals after the ketheric
template work (a higher level work to be ex¬
plained later) is done. Using them then could
just tear out the template work. The patient
should not need crystal work after the template
work; it should have all been done beforehand
(that is, on any given area of the body). In
Mary's case described earlier, no crystals were
used.

While this work is being done, the healer
can scan the auric layers to see if the chakras or
organs need restructuring on the template lev¬
els. The guides will choose whether to work on
the etheric template level (fifth) or the ketheric
template level (seventh). The template work can
only be done after a good deal of cleaning on
the first four layers of the aura has been com¬
pleted. In fact, if the aura is very dirty, some¬
times it is hard to see the etheric template level
through the dark energy.

If the guides decide to do ketheric template
work (seventh layer), the healer must take the
crystals away from the patient because the crys¬
tals help hold the patient in his body. For the
ketheric template work, it is necessary for the
patient to partially leave the body; otherwise the
patient may experience a great deal of pain and
the work could not be done. I tried to sew up a
small tear in the seventh layer once without re¬
moving the crystals from the patient's body. The
patient began to scream in pain after about two
seconds work (my hands were not touching the
body). I quickly removed the crystals, finished
the sewing and healed the large red inflamma¬
tion I caused on levels 1, 2, 3 and 4 by the clear¬
ing techniques described above.

If the guides decide to do etheric template
work (fifth layer) at this point in the healing, it is
not necessary to remove the crystals. I believe
that this is because the etheric template works in
negative space and is not connected to the body
in a "feeling" way.

D. Exercise to Let the Guides Come
into Your Field to Work

If you are having trouble letting the guides
come into your field, I suggest the following ex¬
ercise. (This exercise can also be done before the
healing starts if you wish.) It is only to be done
after you have charged your field with exercise
22 (visualization) in Chapter 21.

Now that your field is charged and bal¬
anced, repeat the above exercise and change it
slightly to help facilitate the entrance of the
guides into your field for healing.

If you have your hands on someone, gently
remove them before doing this. Go back to your
own first chakra. See it spinning red. Breathe
the color twice. On the second inbreath, raise
your consciousness to the second chakra and al¬
low the red to turn to red-orange. Breathe out
red-orange.

Focus on the second chakra. Breathe in red-
orange. Breathe it out. Breathe in red-orange
again and let it turn to yellow while raising your
mind's eye to the third chakra. Breathe in yel¬
low. Breathe it out. Breathe in yellow and let it
turn to green as you move up to the heart cha¬
kra. Breathe in green; breathe it out. Breathe in
green; lift yourself to the throat chakra; let the
green become blue. Breathe in blue; breathe it
out. Breathe in blue and lift yourself to the third
eye as the blue turns to indigo. Breathe in violet;
breathe it out. Breathe in indigo and let it go to
white as you lift yourself to your crown and out
the top of your head. As you lift through the
crown, allow the guides to come into your field
through the rear aspect of the throat chakra. You
will feel them come around over your shoulders
and down into your arms, like an overlay.

You may feel your field become much fuller.
At this point, you may be able to see a guide's
arms interpenetrating yours and the light
streaming from them. Relax. Get used to the
feeling. If you feel the urge to put your hands on
an area of your body, do so. (Later, help a
friend. Allow your hands to be guided to a place
on a friend's body that needs healing. It may not
be where you think.) Let the beautiful healing
energy stream forth from your hands in love.
Never be afraid to put your hands on another
with love.

Full Spectrum Healing 219

4. Healing the Etheric Template Level of
the Aura (Fifth Layer of Auric Field)

If the guides decide to do etheric template work,
the healer will be signaled simply to lay hands
on the body in two places, usually over two cha¬
kras, and to allow the hands to rest there. From
this point on, the guides control everything that
goes on, and the healer is largely passive.

As I progressed in the etheric template heal¬
ing work, I began to witness whole operations
taking place. At first, I found this hard to believe
because they appeared to be so similar to an op¬
eration on the physical level performed by sur¬
geons in the operating room of a hospital. I also,
of course, thought I was projecting the whole
thing. I asked two friends of mine who are very
clairvoyant to come and sit in on some healings
to see if our experiences correlated. They did.

This is what we regularly saw: As I allowed
my hands to passively rest upon the patient's
body, my etheric hands would detach them¬
selves from my physical hands and sink deep
into the patient's body. Then the hands of the
guides who do etheric template work (whom I
call the surgeons) would reach through my
etheric hands and literally perform an opera¬
tion. When they did that, the size of my etheric
hands would expand greatly.

To do an operation, the guides would stick
tubes through my arms, down through my
hands and into the body of the patient. Appar¬
ently, they use all the same equipment that a
normal surgeon does—scalpels, clamps, scis¬
sors, needles, syringes, etc. They cut, scrape
things away, cut things out, do transplants and
sew things back up again. At one point, I saw a
large syringe float down my arm and into the
body of a patient whose spinal nerves were be¬
ing rejuvenated and sewn back together. I
looked up at my friend and asked, "Did you see
that?" She said, "Yes," and went on to describe
the same scene I was witnessing. Since then, we
have done many healings together, always corre¬
lating what we see.

All this work is done on the fifth level of the
auric field. This layer appears to exist in nega¬
tive space, as was described in Chapter 7. To me
through my High Sense Perception negative

space is similar to a negative of a photograph
where all the dark areas are light, and all the
light areas look dark. In negative space, all the
areas that we expect to be empty are filled, and
all those that we expect to be filled appear to be
empty. On this level, all of what would be
empty space looks dark cobalt blue, and all the
auric lines appear to be empty spaces within
that cobalt blue field. Once one has entered into
that level of reality, it seems perfectly normal.

The fifth level is the template for all form
that exists on the physical plane. If a form is
disrupted in the auric field, it will have to be
reestablished on the fifth level of the field for it
to regain its healthy form on the physical plane.
Thus all auric surgery must be done on the fifth
layer of the field. Etheric surgery, then, is essen¬
tially the task of creating a new negative space
for the etheric body of the patient to grow into
and become well.

During this type of operation, which I have
called spiritual surgery, the healer cannot under
any circumstances move her hands. In fact,
most of the time the hands are so paralyzed it
would be fairly hard to do anyway. Whenever I
have tried, it was a great effort. It takes a lot of
patience to simply sit there, sometimes for 45
minutes, while the guides do their work.

After the guides are finished, they will steril¬
ize their work and begin slowly closing up the
incision. The etheric hands of the healer slowly
begin to surface and merge with the healer's
physical hands. Again, this takes patience.
(Sometimes I get bored.) Finally, the hand on
the lower part of the patient's body (usually my
right hand) comes loose, and the guides usually
direct me to bring it up the body to the left
hand. I then slowly remove the left hand and
then, step by step, with delicate hand and finger
movements I reconnect the newly restructured
area of the etheric template with the template of
the part of the body around it. This is done by
slowly moving the hand up through the cha¬
kras. The healer's hands do not move away from
the body until the incision is closed and the new
and old fields are reconnected.

Let us return to the patient, Mary. For the
last parts of the chelation, Mary has been lying
on the healing table in a serene relaxed state.

Figure 22-15: Etheric Template Healing: Spiritual Surgery

Full Spectrum Healing 221

She has drifted a bit out of her body and is rest¬
ing. The auric field is continuing to utilize the
energy it has received to heal itself. Mary is
ready for etheric template work on her hiatal
hernia. As you place your hands upon the third
and fourth chakra (Figure 22-15), your etheric
hands begin to float downward and you begin to
become more aware of the inside of the body
through whatever your best way of accessing is.
You feel, hear or see it. You are sitting in nega¬
tive space, but it feels completely normal. Your
energy field around your body expands as your
vibrational rate increases. You sense a presence
behind you, maybe even more than one. Gently,
ever so gently, the guides slip through your au¬
ric field. It feels very familiar, very comfortable,
and most of all, it feels wonderful. You have
been lifted to a state of angelic serenity. You are
at peace with the universe. As you sit in surren¬
der to your own higher creative power, you ob¬
serve the guide's hands slipping into the body
of your patient through your etheric hands. You
watch them sewing up the hernia in the dia¬
phragm. At first you are incredulous, but then it
all seems so natural that you simply allow it to
happen. What is important here is that the pa¬
tient gets well. You trust in knowledge that goes
beyond your normal, narrow self-definitions
and allows the healing to take place. The guides
repair the tear and reconnect the new restruc¬
tured template with the rest of the fifth layer
template. Then you feel them beginning to with¬
draw their energy. You will be surprised how
deep your etheric hands were into the field of
the patient. You didn't notice it so much going
in, but now as the energy field begins to pull
out, you will feel it moving outward. The pa¬
tient may notice it too at this point. Next, you
will feel yourself gaining more control over your
right hand. Its connection to your patient's aura
loosens, and you begin to slowly withdraw it.
When it is fully withdrawn, flex your fingers a
bit to exercise the hand. Now with your right
hand sink into the fourth chakra and loosen the
left hand. Slowly, gently remove the left hand.
You are ready to move to seventh layer work.
But first, a few more tips on etheric template
healing.

During etheric template surgery, the guides
control the color frequencies, direction of flow
and location of the work. The more you trust
and follow, the more they will be able to do. In
addition to "normal" surgical procedures, they
sometimes direct you, the healer, to hold both
hands and arms across the body very still and
ask you to raise yourself to higher vibrations
and allow the strong force of lavender and even
sometimes silver to come through. You must not
move under this circumstance as the flow is very
strong and will disrupt not only your patient's
field, but yours as well. After sufficient energy
has been poured through to knock the configu¬
ration loose, the guides then reverse the energy
flow and suck the loosened energy back up and
out. This is a higher level of healing and proba¬
bly uses sixth level energies. It remoyes specific
etheric template forms from the field, like the
psychic forms of viruses, bacteria or, in one
case, white seedlike objects from the blood of a
leukemia patient so that they cannot regenerate
themselves in the person's physical body.

From time to time, a small group of us who
have developed High Sense Perception meet to
give mutual support to each other in regard to
our personal lives and dealing with all the is¬
sues that arise in our lives from being clairvoy¬
ant, clairaudient or clairsentient. We also do
exchange healings with each other (we each be¬
come the patient). This work is very productive
because not only do the healers see what is go¬
ing on, but so does the patient. This work has
verified many of my perceptions and also helps
create a clear framework with which to describe
these experiences. We are learning how to look
into each layer of the aura, what that experience
is like and what new healing procedures can
come from the information we receive.

5. Healing the Ketheric Template or
Restructuring the Golden Auric Grid
(Seventh Layer of Auric Field)

Many times when the auric field is disfigured on
the fifth level, it is disfigured on the seventh
level as well. So ketheric template restructuring
needs to be done. It is usually done before the

222 Hands of Light

healer concentrates on the sixth level healing,
although, by this time in the healing some sixth
level frequencies have automatically come
through. Seventh level work is very different
from fifth level work in that the healer is very
active. In the fifth level the healer's main task is
surrender and following. Here the challenge to
the healer is to be very active in breathing and in
finger and hand movement, yet still remain
highly sensitized and focused at a high fre¬
quency level. It takes a great deal of mind focus
and breath control to reach the seventh level.
The golden light at this level is very strong and
resilient. Many times it appears to be tiny
golden threads that are extremely strong.

The guides of the patient always come to
healings and assist. If you are alert, you will see
them walk into the healing room with the pa¬
tient. At this point in the healing they usually
pull the patient out of his body and care for him
so that a deep relaxation can take place and al¬
low for the template work to be done. Usually
the patient's experience is that of floating in a
peaceful state. He usually is not aware of how
deeply he has moved into an altered state of
consciousness until he gets up or tries to stand
up at the end of the healing.

Ketheric template work, which restructures
the seventh layer with golden light, consists of
two major parts: cleaning and restructuring the
grid structure of the organs, muscles, nerves or
other parts of the body and cleaning and re¬
structuring the chakras. The guide's hands work
directly through the healer's hands in an overlay
manner. The guides come down over the shoul¬
ders and into the hands and arms of the healer.
Tiny golden threads come out of the fingers of
the healer, which move very rapidly as guided.
The golden threads move much more rapidly
than the healer's intricate rapid finger move¬
ments. To restructure the ketheric grid of an or¬
gan, the guides usually remove the grid
structure of the organ from the body. This can
happen only if the consciousness of the patient
allows it. I am referring to the deeper conscious¬
ness, not the conscious awareness. At these mo¬
ments, the patient is in an altered state,
communicating with his guides, which he may

or may not remember when returning to the
body.

A. Ketheric Template Organ Restructuring

The hands of the healer will move with tre¬
mendous light-force and a strong burst of en¬
ergy to remove the ketheric field of the organ.
The organ then floats above the body where it is
cleaned and restructured by more rapid finger
movements, which are weaving the blue etheric
grid onto the golden template with white-gold
threads. The space inside the body is cleansed
and sterilized with light before the organ is re¬
placed. When the restructuring and sterilizing is
completed, the organ simply slips back into the
body. It feels almost as if it were sucked back in.
It is then sewn back into place and filled with
blue light to energize it. The area is then usually
filled with a cottony, soothing white light that
acts as an internal anesthetic. Then the whole
area is usually covered with a golden energy
bandage for protection.

Examples of such a healing are shown in the
Figures 22-16 and 22-17.1 received a phone call
from a client who had a lump in her breast. Her
doctors could not tell if it was an infection or a
tumor. They had tried to aspirate it, but could
not, and therefore had scheduled surgery. As I
was speaking on the phone with her, I immedi¬
ately got a picture in my mind of a dark red
lump in her left breast with dark gray spots ex¬
tending up under her armpit where her lymph
nodes would be. To check my "seeing," I asked
her if the lump was located in the left breast
slightly below and to the left of the nipple. With
that affirmed, I went on to tell her that I was
quite sure it was not cancer and was some sort
of infection like mastitis. I could tell this because
of the color of dark red, which indicates infec¬
tion. I also heard the guides telling me that it
was a form of mastitis. However, I also saw that
the axillary lymph nodes were very dark gray.
This disturbed me. I told her that the primary
problem was not the lump in the breast, but the
clogged lymph nodes, and that she needed to
do some cleansing of her whole body and this
particular system. In surgery a few days later,
the doctors removed the infected mammary

*>. r *■ *■' > * *'

y ■> .-• « * + p 1*'#*''*
,v v /. * Jr J£ $

* ,? »• r # *>* ■■*

> < * * < *
- * * * • ie v r .*, yk&&
? * ?••* * *••* -t#*Qjfc

*•*•*?. ».* *••<£ >,$m

* > .-? * * ** #• <St «£

^r4 3£*&. w ** .

4 •#? if * A *. * * '* * ****** j - : ^

I ?S *5ft *U£® **?-** « * ••> * * * *

* *» * ;*•*- ******** +• * * * * A* * * * v v «

4 * * ■;# lg * A * * « * * * * ^ ^ * ■** * * * '* *

’**% # * << •* * * * * * * * * **; *

^ ' *#******«»*'

SSt* r k* f?st *#*% *•* «■*• ****** 4 * * * •*

X ; ,• jt ^ •$}.*-•:*&'$» -4 * '¥# ^ ^ ^ *ft *■ &^ ^ ♦

J£m* : <*'%; *r*->*** * -■<? f ***••►* *••*<r* *'»'* * r *

*. * v -fe* .* >*« f fr *= •* v. * * •* -f * f-ffi * fr * *- * *»
>0« # A, « ***** $ •* 4* a. * % >« 4> * « # V * 'Hf S * *

5 4 :Jr > * .# + *■*■*: * * » •» * •# •»• ^ ^ * * ♦ * H

,,n g of Lymphatic Svstm

re 22-1

Full Spectrum Healing 225

glands and diagnosed her as having mastitis in¬
fection due to clogged-up lymph nodes.

When she came in for a healing about three
days after the operation, her system looked very
dogged. She had massive clogging of the lym¬
phatic system all over her body, which showed
up in dark green areas on either side of her ster¬
num and on the left side of her abdomen. Her
whole field was slightly gray. The red area on
the left breast had mostly cleared, leaving only
the scar showing as a bright red streak in the
aura, with fainter red around it left from the op¬
eration. After the normal chelation and cleaning
work had been done on the lower bodies, the
guides removed her entire lymphatic system
and cleaned it off before replacing it in the man¬
ner described earlier (Figure 22-16). Her whole
torso was recharged and shielded with first blue
light and then gold light, leaving the lymphatic
system (on the seventh layer) looking very clear
and golden. The red streak had disappeared.
Note that Figure 22-16 shows the guides work¬
ing through the healer cleaning the lymphatic
system, with the patient's guides at her head
holding her out of her body while the template
work is done.

B. Ketheric Template Chakra Restructuring
A similar sequence happens in the chakra
structuring, but the chakras are never removed.
There are several major ways that chakras be¬
come damaged. They can be torn open, the
screen over them may be damaged, a vortex can
be clogged and slowed in its spinning motion,
the point of the chakra may not be seated cor¬
rectly into the heart or root area of the chakra or
a vortex may be sticking out or flopping over
and look like a spring that has sprung. The
whole chakra can be almost gone, or a small
part of it can be affected. For example, in the
case of Mary with her hiatal hernia, one of the
small vortexes of the solar plexus looked typi¬
cally like a sprung spring. To heal this, you need
to push it back in and sew it down, restructure
the protective screen and give it a protective
cover in order to allow it to heal over a period of

time. All this is done with the guides directing
your hands and healing light. Your hands will
move automatically.

Let us return to the patient Mary, who is
now lifted out of her body, in an altered state,
and in the care of her spiritual teachers. Since
you have finished the fifth level healing and can
perceive the tear on the seventh layer, you know
it is time to move your consciousness up to the
seventh level to work. You begin by increasing
your nasal rasping breath rate. As your breath¬
ing rate increases, you focus your mind as much
as you can on lifting your consciousness. Don't
worry about hyperventilation; you will be using
all the energy you pull in for healing. As you lift
up into the seventh layer, you begin to experi¬
ence Divine Mind, where all that is is under¬
stood to be perfection. Soon gold light begins to
pour out of your hands, as the guides reconnect
through your seventh layer (Figure 22-17). Your
hands move almost involuntarily over Mary's
third chakra. You begin to see the gold light
threads sewing the small vortex in Mary's cha¬
kra. Your fingers are moving as rapidly as possi¬
ble; the golden threads move thousands of
times faster. The golden light forces the disfig¬
ured vortex to return to its normal position. You
don't believe how much energy is flowing
through you. You wonder if your body can toler¬
ate it. You continue breathing as the protective
shield is restructured. You may wonder if Mary
is noticing all this and wants to know what is
going on, but you can't talk. There is too much
to do to keep all of your being focused. Finally
the work is completed, and the chakra is nor¬
mal. Your breathing is slowing down. You are
glad it is over. Your hand may hurt, but you feel
wonderful.

Very swiftly, you chelate lightly through the
upper chakras and take a position at the head of
the massage table. Put your hands on each side
of Mary's head, gently run energy into her tem¬
ples to balance any remaining right/left im¬
balance. Now that the fifth and seventh layers
are restructured and can hold the auric form, it
is time to recharge it on the sixth level, with ce¬
lestial love.

226 Hands of Light

6. Healing on the Celestial Level (Sixth
Layer of Auric Field)

To heal on the sixth layer of the auric field, you
will be working primarily through your heart,
third eye and crown chakras. Cup your hands
over the patient's third eye with fingers together
and thumbs crossed over each other; raise your
vibrations to reach up for the light and then let it
flow down through and in front of you into the
central brain area of your patient (Figure 22-18).
Psychically reach for the highest spiritual reality
you know by first connecting through the heart
with universal love and then reaching up with
that consciousness for the light. It is very impor¬
tant to go through the heart and wait till you
enter into a state of universal love before going
up through the crown, otherwise the healing
can become very mental. It must be accompa¬
nied by deeply loving every particle of being of
the patient, Mary. Being connected to the Messi¬
anic consciousness or universal love entails
holding someone in your heart and entering
into a state of total acceptance and positive will
for her well-being and continued existence. It is
a celebration in love of the existence of the per¬
son. This means that you must enter into this
state of being, not just imagine it. Maintaining
this state, reach for the light and the highest,
broadest spiritual reality you can experience.

To raise your vibrations, you use both the
active and the receptive principles. First, strive
simply to increase the frequency of your vibra¬
tions. This is done through breathing, rasping
air across the back of the throat, through medi¬
tative focus and by reaching up with the mind's
eye into the light. Subjectively, it feels as if you
look up into the light and reach for it. You feel
lighter and less attached to your body as you go
up. It feels like a part of your consciousness lit¬
erally goes up the spine and stretches up from
your body and into the white light. Your feelings
become more and more pleasurable as you enter
into the light. You feel more and more universal
safety and love surrounding you and interpene¬
trating you. Your mind expands and you can un¬
derstand broad concepts that you cannot

understand in a normal state. You can accept a
greater reality, and it is easier for the guides to
get concepts through to you because you are not
so prejudiced about the nature of the world;
i.e., you have removed some of the blocks from
your brain. Each step higher into the light re¬
leases you more. As you practice through the
years, you are able to channel higher and higher
energies and concepts.

Now that you have accomplished a certain
degree of Iiftedness, stop reaching and allow the
white light to permeate your auric field, which
has been raised to a vibration in harmony with
the white light. It will flow down through your
field into that of the patient.

After the white light flows down into the
central brain area of the patient and that area's
vibrations are raised to that frequency, go up to
the next level of vibration. When the patient has
reached that level, move up to the next, and in
this step-by-step fashion, the central brain area
of the patient lights up. The patient's aura fills
with white-gold light that is infused with opal¬
escent colors. The patient sometimes sees spirit¬
ual images during this phase of the healing or
"falls asleep." (To me, this simply means she
does not yet have the capacity to retain the
memory of that experience when coming back to
a normal state of reality. Some day she will, and
this process helps develop it.)

Because this way of channelling is so strong,
you must lightly flick your hands to break the
connection to the sixth chakra before moving on
to the next step in the healing process. After
lighting up the thalamus area of the brain and
filling the aura with white light, if there is time,
I generally do some work directly on the outer
levels of the aura. With palms up, tracing paths
with my fingers, I usually comb out the light
rays of the celestial body. This motion is similar
to running your fingers through hair as you pull
it away from the head. You begin with your
hands near the skin and move outward perpen¬
dicular to the body, as if you are lifting the aura
up. This gives the patient a light feeling and en¬
hances the celestial body by adding light to it
and broadening it. If you have time, try it. Mary
will enjoy it.

.. ik i i #.. > y * *

228 Hands of Light

7. Sealing Ketheric Template Level

After the celestial level is brightened and broad¬
ened, I then move to the ketheric, the eggshell
form that seems to protect the aura. I smooth,
straighten and strengthen this form by moving
my hands over its outer edge. It may be too nar¬
row around the feet, too broad in places, have
lumps or restrictive bands in it. (Some of these
bands are related to past lives and will be dis¬
cussed in Chapter 24). It may be thin in places
and even have breaks or holes in it. These need
to be repaired, and the whole form needs to re¬
gain the shape of an egg with a nice, firm shell.
I do these things through simple manipulation.
If something is a lump, I smooth it out. If it
needs light, I run energy into it until it lights up.
If it needs to be strengthened, I run strengthen¬
ing energy into it. The outer levels of the aura
move and are manipulated very easily, so this
part of the healing takes a very short time.

To complete the healing on the seventh level
of the aura, I reach out over the patient's head
and bring my hands together. My hands are
about two and a half feet above the head in the
eggshell shield of the aura. I then make a large
sweeping motion around the entire body of the
patient. My left hand moves around to the left,
and my right hand moves around to the right.
Energy flows in an arc from my hands that
reach from above the head to below the feet of
the patient, enhancing the entire seventh level
of the aura. As I slowly move my hands to cir¬
cumscribe a circle of golden light around the
chest of the patient, the entire eggshell level of
the aura is strengthened.

To strengthen Mary's seventh layer and put
her in a protective shield to allow the healing to
continue to work in her aura, lift your hands
above her body. You are still sitting in a position
above her head as shown in Figure 22-19. The
height of the seventh layer varies between two
and one half to three feet above the body. If you
can't see it, sensitively feel with your hands in
the space above Mary. You will feel a very subtle
pressure as you move into the seventh layer.
Hold your hands, thumbs together, palms down
at the outer edge of Mary's auric field. You will
need your rasping breath to hold your energy

level and your consciousness at the seventh
layer. Now run golden light out of your hands
creating an arc from the head to the feet in
Mary's seventh layer. Hold the arc steady and
slowly widen it by moving your hands apart to
encircle the body. Your right hand moves to the
right and your left arcs to the left. Complete the
circle all around so that you have traced a whole
egg shell around Mary.

When this is completed, I break the connec¬
tion between my field and that of the patient's
with a soft brisk shake of the hands and move to
the right side of the patient. I now reconnect
with the seventh layer from the outside. (When
I was doing the healing before this, 1 was con¬
nected into the energy system. Now I have bro¬
ken away and am no longer part of that flow.)
Gently placing my hands on the outside of the
eggshell seventh layer, 1 silently honor my pa¬
tient and turn her healing back over to her. 1
honor who she is, her power to create health
and balance in her life, and my small part in
reminding her of who she are. 1 then break con¬
tact with the field again, sit down and come
back to a normal waking state of consciousness.
(By the time I enter into seventh layer healing, I
am also in a very high altered state of conscious¬
ness.) I pour myself back into my body, much
like putting a hand into a glove. I concentrate on
being inside every part of my body. I honor my
incarnation, who I am and what I have come
here for. I allow any healing energy that I may
need to come through my body at this time.

This last procedure helps the healer let go of
her patient, so that she will not "carry" her with
her all week. It is also good to honor the self in
this way, so that the work of healing can be inte¬
grated into the personal life of the healer. This
does not always happen automatically because
during so much of the time spent healing, the
healer is in an altered state of consciousness.
Sometimes it may feel as if someone else is that
nice person doing all that good work. I have
found that most of the healers I know have had
a hard life and need to honor themselves for it,
rather than judge themselves for their experi¬
ences. I believe it is all part of the training to
learn love and sympathy.

Now repeat the above with the patient Mary.

Imllf

Zszmm

slfs s i*Bj»

HKHmSS

j$wpp*-£.

***i£32I£3

fiffw8»£s

!g ?#*<*jtZ2

f£ffp££*!

i**m§2££*$

t2?£s*w»»<

MM*i- "
N<r#* .* ■
H&fcVc -■ .,

MMNteir*

i£?

W*Wi

fe»i

fe*s#

SHHp&n

mms »m

229

Figure 22-19: Sealing the Ketheric Template Level of the Aura to Complete the Healing

230 Hands of Light

Move to her right side; lightly make contact with
her seventh layer from the outside. Honor her,
and return her healing back over to her. Sit
down away from Mary somewhere in the heal¬
ing room. Pour yourself back into your body.
Honor yourself and your purpose.

The patient usually needs to rest a while af¬
ter a healing and will probably be groggy for
some time. This is a good time for you to make a
brief record of the healing for future reference. If
etheric template work has been done, I give
strict orders not to do any physical exercise and
to rest and eat very well for at least three days.

After a brief rest, ask Mary to sit on the edge
of the table a few minutes before she gets up, or
she may be dizzy. She will be curious as to what
you did. At this point, it is important not to go
back to the linear mind too much since that
would pull her out of the altered state of con¬
sciousness. Explain in brief terms what you did,
just enough to satisfy her, but not enough to
disturb her relaxed state.

During the healing, you probably became
aware of any further work Mary may need. If so,
discuss this with her and make recommenda¬
tions about her coming back the next week if
that is needed.

You have just completed a full healing. You
feel wonderful. Give both Mary and yourself a
full glass of spring water to drink. Figure 22-20
shows your patient Mary's aura after healing.
Compare it to her aura before healing in Figure
22-4.

That is the outline of a basic full spectrum
healing. During the first part of the healing in
the chelation and cleaning before the template
work, I may channel verbal information from
the patient's guides who have come to the heal¬
ing. The patient may ask questions that the
guides answer. However, as soon as the tem¬
plate work starts, I am unable to do both things
at once. The energetic template work with high
concentration simply seems to take up most of
my "brain capacity." The patient also benefits
from going into a deep relaxed state at this time
and talking pulls them out.

I continually receive new training from the
guides. As soon as I learn one level, they move
me up to the next. Sometimes a new set of spir¬

itual healers come in to work through me.

8. Healing on the Cosmic Levels of the

Aura (Eighth and Ninth Layers of

Auric Field)

Recently, I have begun to see two levels of auric
field above the golden template. They appear to
be crystalline in nature and of very fine, high
vibrations. Everything from the seventh down
is, in a sense, a vehicle to guide and support us
through this lifetime. This includes the past-life
bands in the ketheric, because they represent
karmic lessons that we have incarnated to learn
in this lifetime.

The eighth and ninth layers on the cosmic
level are, however, beyond that. They relate to
who we are beyond this lifetime. We are souls
reincarnating life after life, slowly progressing in
our evolutionary path towards God.

In the lower seven layers of our energy field
are stored all the experiences we have had in
this lifetime and also all the blueprints for possi¬
ble experiences we programmed when planning
this lifetime. We also constantly create new ex¬
periences. Because we have free will, we do not
always choose to have all these experiences.
Other people have free will also, so that the pos¬
sibility of experience is a complex affair. In other
words, the possible experiences far outnumber
those that we actually have. All these possible
experiences or probable realities are stacked in
the energy field. They are all designed to teach
our soul certain lessons we have chosen to
learn.

Sometimes these possible experiences are no
longer relevant to the growth of the soul and
need to be removed from the aura. This is done
from the eighth level of the aura. It is as if the
healer projects herself beyond the dimensions of
this lifetime, then reaches down into the seven
lower layers and simply removes the possible ex¬
perience with what I call the Eighth Level
Shield.

A. The Eighth Level Shield

The Eighth Level Shield is used to remove
trauma from this lifetime that is either severely
blocking a person's development or is simply no

Full Spectrum Healing 231

longer needed. That is, it no longer serves the
purpose of teaching whatever soul lesson the in¬
dividual had intended to be learned.

It is the higher consciousness of the patient
that decides when an Eighth Level Shield is ap¬
propriate, not the personality level. Most of the
time the patient will not be aware of it at all, but
sometimes those who have heard of the power¬
ful effect of the Eighth Level Shield will ask for
one. This usually does not work. The shield will
be given to the healer by her guides only when
it is appropriate. To lift a long-term trauma out
of someone's field can be very shocking. Some¬
times a shield is needed to protect the individ¬
ual from the greater freedom experienced when
a long-term trauma is lifted from the body. Basi¬
cally, the process consists of the healer putting
the shield into a patient's aura, drawing or actu¬
ally coaxing an old trauma to leave, filling the
hole left by the trauma with the rose light of
unconditional love and sealing it off. The patient
then has time to heal and get used to having
lifted the burden he has carried around with
him for years. (Not as easy as you might think-
freedom is frightening.) Eventually the shield
dissolves as the person develops positive experi¬
ence to remain in its place.

The sequence of setting a shield is quite
complicated and usually occurs after the general
cleaning and some template work is done. The
decision to do so is never made by the healer; it
is suggested by the guides. The shield appears
to be a flat blue "piece" of light of very imper¬
meable and durable quality. The shield fits along
the lower edge of the chakra just above the
trauma and is set into the root of the chakra.
The left hand makes an opening for setting the
shield. To do this, its energy field penetrates
deep into the body to the root of the chakra,
while the right hand slowly moves it into place.
This movement is overseen by the guides. The
shield protrudes out of the lower edge of the
chakra and extends down over the traumatized
area, slightly angularly out from the body. Its
lower end is open to provide an exit for the
trauma.

The left hand anchors the shield and cannot
be moved throughout the entire shielding and
trauma-exit process since it separates the upper

anatomical part of the auric field from what is
being worked on and serves as an entrance for
the guides to hold that part of the field separate
from the area where the trauma is located. At
the same time, the personal guides of the pa¬
tient usually take him out of his body to protect
and teach him.

Once the shield has been set, the healer
reaches under it with her right hand and begins
to communicate with the energy-consciousness
of the trauma to coax it to leave by reminding it
of its God connection. This method of healing
from such a high level is very different than the
way one removes blocks from the field from the
lower levels. By connecting directly to the
energy-consciousness of the trauma that is
ready to leave, the healer provides a way,
through shielding, for the trauma to leave. The
trauma leaves of its own accord. Any amount of
forcing simply disrupts the process and forces
the healer to start over. This method allows the
entire trauma to leave. In heeding from lower au¬
ric layers, many times the blocks in the field are
energetic signatures of trauma, rather than the
entire energy of the trauma itself. In a sense, in
the higher level of healing, the trauma is treated
as if it has its own being, since it is an integral
piece of energy-consciousness. When the
trauma leaves, all the effects of that trauma leave
with it, and the patient is finished dealing with
it. The shield allows for smooth integration of
the change into the patient's life and prevents
any disturbance in the patient's life which
would occur if the patient were not shielded. As
the trauma leaves, the guides lovingly take it
and fill it with light. Once the entire trauma has
left, the area is cauterized with gold or white
light, and the cavity is filled with the rose light
of unconditional love. The new rose field is then
reconnected to the field around it, all of which is
still located under the shield. The open exit area
at the base of the shield is then covered with a
gold seal, which is left in place. The healer then
disconnects her left hand from the shield, which
is left in. She slowly sinks her right hand energy
into where her left hand energy is seated. This
releases the left hand, which is then used to in¬
tegrate the new restructured and shielded area
to the rest of the patient's auric field. The healer

232 Hands of Light

slowly moves the left hand through the upper
part of the auric body, reconnecting the fields.

After setting the shield, the healer then
strengthens the main vertical power current of
the aura by running pulsating gold light through
it. The patient slowly reenters the body. This
may be all that is done in a healing. The healer
may go down to sixth level healing to enhance
the patient's serenity or may simply dose the
healing with the seventh.

The thing that has been the greatest chal¬
lenge for me in this type of work is to learn sim¬
ply to sit and coax the trauma to leave. This is
very different from scooping or pulling or
knocking it loose with high vibrations. It is diffi¬
cult to rise above the seventh layer and to stay
there in a complete state of peace and alignment
with God's will. One must control the breathing
with slow, long, in-out breaths and keep the
mind focused on surrender to God's will. The
Divine spark exists within every cell of a per¬
son's being, and that divine spark inexorably
follows Divine will. The healer must sit within
that Divine spark. In other words, I have to sit
with the trauma, make contact with that energy-
consciousness while I am in a state of alignment
with the Will of God and simply remind each
cell of that trauma and every cell of the body
that it carries with it a spark of God. I remind it
that it is God, light and wisdom and therefore
inexorably flows with and is one with the uni¬
versal will. This is not an easy thing to do. In
the beginning, I would tend to start pulling. If I
did that, it would mean that my will got in the
way, which meant I had dropped to a lower
level. That would knock the guides right out of
my body and my whole body would shudder.
Either they left my body as a signal, or they
could not tolerate my low-level "will" vibration.
We would then have to start all over.

An Eighth Level Shield is needed when pa¬
tients are unable to bear the freedom of a life¬
long trauma being lifted in a healing session;
they are likely to fill that space with another
negative experience. I was astounded one day
when I witnessed such a thing.

After a healing was completed, as the pa¬
tient was putting on his shoes, suddenly the
whole restructured golden field fell apart before

my eyes. In my astonishment I thought, "How
did you do that so fast?" I wanted to put him
right back on the table, but realized that was not
right and that something more was involved.
Later, Emmanuel, a spiritual teacher channelled
through my friend Pat (Rodegast) De Vitalis,
said that the patient now knew that he really
couldn't accept what he said he wanted, that he
was not ready to face certain aspects of his life
related to the healing. That would mean con¬
fronting himself with issues that were very pain¬
ful to him, which he simply did not want to do.

It was shortly after this experience that I
learned to put the shield in. I also realized that I
could not offer to give another healing to this
person because that would confront him with
his negative decision and possibly make things
worse. I can only wait for him to come to the
place in himself where he has decided to face
those outer issues in his life. Then he may de¬
cide to come to a healing, and we can put in the
shield so that he can be protected from the up¬
lifting of the burden while he heals internally.
After that,, the shield will dissolve and he will
slowly be able to experience the increased free¬
dom.

An interesting example of a shield healing is
shown in Figure 22-21. The patient, whom I
shall call Betty, was a businesswoman. Betty
was a therapy client. Her mother had died when
she was three years old. At the time she began
therapy with me several years earlier, she had
no idea what her natural mother looked like and
could not remember ever seeing a picture of her.
During the course of the therapy she was able to
obtain pictures of her mother and began recon¬
necting and relating to her. This helped the
woman develop more self-esteem since her nat¬
ural mother became a reality for her. She had
never been able to accept her stepmother. This
process also helped her improve her relations
with her stepmother. She carried a lot of pain in
her chest about the loss of her natural mother.

One day after several years in therapy, she
asked me why I never gave her a healing. I said
it was because she was so healthy. However, in
that moment the guides reminded me of the use
of the "new shield I had just learned to put in."
The next session was a healing. After going

Full Spectrum Healing 233

through the normal chelation and cleansing pro¬
cedure and checking her template level, which
did not need work, the guides proceeded to set
the shield and remove the trauma of losing her
mother while a small child. I was very moved
when I saw her mother appear in spirit form,
supported by her own guides. Instead of a team
of guides receiving and enlightening the energy-
consciousness substance of the trauma, I saw
her mother receive it with love. (See Figure 22-
21.) In the meantime, the guides of my patient
had pulled her out of her body to protect and
teach her. In the next step of the shield process,
the guides filled the cavity emptied of trauma
with the rose light of love. The heeding then con¬
tinued with the sealing of the bottom of the
shield with gold light as shown in Figure 22-22.
Then we reconnected the shielded area to the
upper and lower half of the auric field. We then
enhanced the main vertical power current in the
body. By the time this was completed, the
trauma held by the mother had turned to white
light.

B. Healing on the Ninth Level of the Aura

I know very little about this procedure. As I
watch the guides working from this level, it ap¬
pears to me as if they simply remove a whole
side of a person's energy bodies (and all the
fields with it) and put in a new set. All this ap¬
pears to my view as crystalline light. This proce¬
dure, when done, has the effect of healing the
patient very rapidly. My guess is that it has to
do with simply reincarnating in the same body
without having to go through the birth/
childhood experiences to set the life tasks. 1
have witnessed this a few times.

Guide Teams

Sometimes it appears to me that different guide
teams work on different levels, and at other
times it seems to be the same guides at different
levels. The guide teams who work on different
levels seem to have different characteristics.
Those who work on the astral level are con¬
cerned primarily with matters of the heart and
loving. They are very comforting, loving and
caring and speak poetically, teaching us to learn

to love ourselves with all our faults, etc. The
guides who do the ketheric and etheric template
work look to me to be very serious and quite
active and "want to get to work." They are con¬
cerned with the perfect template and simply
healing efficiently. They do not appear to have a
lot of feelings, but at the same time are very
supportive and accepting. They are more direc¬
tive. The Eighth Level Shield guides give a
sense of great acceptance and infinite patience
with love. The Ninth Level guides are very hard
for me to perceive but they seem a bit imper¬
sonal.

HEALING SESSION FORMAT

As a help to the new healer, I will once again list
the healing session format in a much shorter
form. Following this is a healing session analysis
that should help you analyze where you need to
practice and where you need to do your own
personal growth work.

1. Before the person enters, align yourself with
the light. Open your chakras using methods
taught in the section called "Channelling for
Healing."

2. Listen to why the person has come to you.
Why was she guided specifically to you? What
do you have to give to her"? Open to your inner
repertory.

3. Explain what you do.

4. Analyze the energy flow in her system.
What are the main blocks? How does she utilize
her energy? How does she misdirect it? What
are the results of her long-term misdirecting?
What is her major defense? (See Chapters 9, 10
and 12.)

5. Measure chakras with a pendulum. Record.
(See Chapter 10.)

6. Attune and align yourself with the light;
give an affirmation; align and balance your en-

Full Spectrum Healing 235

ergy system with the person's. Become aware of
your guides, if you have not yet done that. Peri¬
odically throughout the session you need to re¬
align and balance your system with the light,
your guides and the person's system.

7. Interpret the chakra's readings while run¬
ning energy through the solar reflex points of
the feet: Find the balance of reason, will and
emotion; the main closed center(s); the main
open center(s) through which the person can
work to deal with problems and to open the
closed chakras. Find the main issues. Read psy¬
chically any information you can pick up. What
is the initiating cause of illness? What are the
high self qualities you need to appeal to in order
to help the person heal herself? (See Chapters 9,
10 and 12.)

8. Chelate the lower auric bodies' chakras
while scanning the body systems. If you are a
beginner, you should skip to step 16. After more
practice, add steps 9 if needed, 10 and 11. After
you perceive the fifth, sixth and seventh layers
of the field, you can do steps 12, 13, 14 and 15.

9. Do a spine cleaning.

10. Work directly on the places you are drawn
to. Choose from various methods you know. As
you do so, observe the person's emotional state.
Does she take in energy or block emotionally?
Be with her. Go through the blocks with her.
Allow your guides to help you with specific ill¬
ness areas. Listen.

11. Clean specific blocks in the lower energy
bodies.

12. If you know how, this is the point at which
etheric or ketheric template work occurs.

13. Go to the celestial level (sixth); send white
light directly into the central brain area. Raise
your vibrations by vibrating your pituitary.
When the person's vibrations come up to yours,
go up to the next level and repeat. Do this until
the central brain area lights.

14. At this point, if you have not already done
so, you may see the person's guides, angels, vi¬
sions or get direct messages for the person.
Gently break the connection and close the open¬
ing.

15. From the position at the head of the table,
try to get a nice up-and-down vibrational cur¬
rent from the third ventricle through the spine
using the double hand technique.

16. At this point you may want to comb out
the celestial and astral body (especially if the
person is depressed or suppressed).

17. Enhance and strengthen the eggshell or
orb.

18. Move to the patient's right side; recontact
the seventh layer; honor your patient and her
self-healing power.

19. Gently break the connection, closing all
openings, and move away from the person.
Give yourself a few minutes to return fully into
your body and the earth plane. Allow the heal¬
ing energy to flow through you. Honor yourself;
affirm who you are and your work.

20. If the person has left her body and needs
help returning, gently pull her back- by grasping
the feet and sucking the energy towards you.

21. After each healing, remind the patient to
take a large glass of fresh water, and you do the
same.

HEALING SESSION ANALYSIS

1. What happened chronologically? How did
each step of the healing go? Which steps were
easy? Which did you have trouble with?

2. Answer item 4 of the Healing Session For¬
mat.

236 Hands of Light

3. Answer item 7 of the Healing Session For¬
mat.

4. What were the internal processes of the
healer and the client? Did you lose your center¬
ing and perhaps waste energy where it wasn't
needed? How? Relate this to the character struc¬
tures of the healer and the client.

5. What was accomplished in the healing? Did
you reach the person's inner light? What was
the nature of her high-self qualities? How did
you support her and bring her out?

6. On the basis of the above, what personal
work do you need to do?

7. Draw a before and an after picture of energy
flow.

8. What was the initiating cause of the illness?
How did you deal with it?

9. On the basis of the above, what healing work
would you concentrate on next time? What is
your prognosis? What is your guidance regard¬
ing this prognosis?

Chapter 22 Review

1. What is the first thing a healer does before
beginning a healing?

2. What is meant by running energy? By che¬
lating the body?

3. What does chelation do?

4. Does a healer consciously control the color
of light when running energy for chelation?
Why or why not?

5. If a healer's first chakra is closed on the

lower levels of the field, will she be able to
use the color red effectively in healing? Why
or why not?

6. For a heart patient, describe the direction of
chelation. Why is it done this way?

7. Describe the process of spine cleaning.

8. What is the difference between running en¬
ergy with one hand, two hands separately
or two hands together?

9. For fifth level healing, what happens if you
do not follow guidance and move your
hands before the guides are finished?

10. Name three ways a person can tear the sev¬
enth layer. (Also refer to Chapter 15.)

11. If there is a tear in the aura throughout the
entire field, which layers need to be sewn
up?

12. Will the energy leak stop if you are unable
to reach up into and sew the seventh layer if
it is torn?

13. Does chelation repair a torn auric field?

14. Why does the patient leave the body for sev¬
enth layer work?

15. In healing with white light, how does one
focus one's energy and consciousness?
Where do you hold your attention? How do
you scan?

16. Describe healing on each of the auric levels.

17. What is an Eighth Level Shield? What is it
used for? Who decides that it can be used?

18. Describe a procedure to end a healing that
allows you to psychically break away from
your patient until you wish to make contact
again.

19. What is the difference between channelling
for healing and channelling for information?

Food For Thought

20. Who does the healing?

Chapter 23

HEALING WITH COLOR AND SOUND

Healing with Colored Light,

Color Modulation

There are many times when a healer will need
to hold a certain color that is being channelled
through her. Holding a color also means holding
your field in a certain frequency range, which
you really must do throughout the entire heal¬
ing. You need to be sensitive enough to keep
your energy level at the range that is needed at
any given time by the patient. Some examples of
holding a certain color have already been given
in previous chapters on etheric template heal¬
ing, ketheric template healing (holding gold),
sixth level healing in which you go up into the
celestial frequencies, spine cleaning and chakra
charging, in which you hold the specific color of
a chakra until it is charged. At other times, you
may be requested by the guides to pour certain
colored light into your patient whenever and
wherever it is needed. At these times, you must
learn to be in a specific color and hold it.

In the last chapter I stated that it takes prac¬
tice to learn to produce a color of your choosing
to use in healing. For beginning students it is
very important to practice color modulation be¬
fore trying to control the color coming through
you. Most chelation is done without color con¬
trol. However, later in a healing the guides may
want you to "sit in" or hold steady a certain
color they wish to use. This means that if you do
not learn to control color, you may very well in¬
terfere with the color being sent through you by
changing your field unconsciously. Thus you

need to be able to hold your field steady in one
particular color.

Dolores Krieger in her book Therapeutic
Touch gives some very good color modulation
exercises. Essentially you must learn what it is
like to "be in" a certain color. It is not a matter of
thinking the color as in visualization. If you
think red, you will make yellow. If you think
green, you will make yellow. If you think blue,
you will make yellow. Healers call this "doing it
in yellow" because when you think you make
yellow. Many beginners do it in yellow; Thus to
make blue, you must "be" blue, whatever that
means to you. So you need to experiment for
yourself what it is like to be in a state of blue.

Exercises to Control
the Color You Send

How do you feel when you wear blue clothes or
sit in blue light that comes from a cathedral win¬
dow? What does blue mean to you? Again, you
must use the sense that you are most accus¬
tomed to using. Do you best access information
through seeing, hearing or feeling? What does
blue look like, sound like or feel like. Get one of
those leaded glass crystals that you can hang in
your window. Put your fingers in each of the
colors of the rainbow it produces. How does
each color feel? Get plates of colored glass, or
sheets of colored, clear plastic. Hold them in the
sunlight. Explore your relationship to each
color. Take colored pieces of paper or material all

237

238 Hands of Light

the same size. Mix them up in a pile. Close your
eyes and pick out two of them. Keep your eyes
closed. Explore your relationship to that color.
What does it feel like? Do you like it? Dislike it?
Does it provoke any feelings in you? Does it en¬
ergize or deenergize you? Does it make you feel
calm or uncomfortable? Place it on different
parts of your body; Would you like to wear this
color? Then after this, with eyes closed, decide
which color you like the best. If you like, you
can guess what color it is. Then open your eyes.
You will be surprised at how much information
you now have about your relationship to each
color. You will find that you carry prejudice
about what each color is "supposed" to do but
didn't.

Get a partner, hold hands, and each take a
turn at running energy to the other in a certain
color. See if your partner can tell what color it is.
Practice, practice, practice. Remember that in or¬
der to run red, you must have your first chakra
clear. To run orange, you must have your second
chakra clear, etc. You should clear your chakras
before doing these exercises. The exercises to
clear your chakras are given in Chapter 21.

The Meaning of Color
in the Aura

Many people come up to me and say, "What
color is my aura?" And then they ask, "What
does that color mean?" Many people get "Aura
Readings" in which the reader will say, "Your
aura is such and such a color and that means
such and such." As you can see from this book, I
don't normally do that. If someone says, "What
color is my aura." I usually say, "On which
layer?" Or I will simply read the predominant
colors on the unstructured levels and say some¬
thing like, "Primarily blue, with some yellow
and purple."

My colleague Pat (Rodegast) de Vitalis, who
channels a guide named Emmanuel, reads col¬
ors on the "soul" level. Emmanuel simply
shows her the "aura" of the person on the soul
level as it connects to the task in this lifetime.
These colors have a specific meaning to Pat, and

that is how she interprets what she sees. Her
color meaning list is given in Figure 23-1. Re¬
member that to use this list to interpret what
you are seeing, you must be looking at the same
level Pat is.

To read the colors of the soul level, clear
your mind through deep meditation, and then
ask to be given the colors of the soul level. After
some practice, these colors will appear on your
mind-screen. You may also see forms or figures
with these colors that you can describe to your
patients in order to help them understand the
meaning of the colors. If you see red, it means
passion or strong feelings. When mixed with
rose, it means love. Clear red means free or ex-

Figure 23-1

COLOR MEANING ON
SOUL-TASK LEVEL

Color

Used for:

Red

Passion, strong feelings. Love,
when mixed with rose.

Clear red: moving anger.

Dark red: stagnated anger
Red-orange: sexual passion

Orange

Ambition

Yellow

Intellect

Green

Healing, healer, nurturer

Blue

Teacher, sensitivity

Purple

Deeper connection to spirit

Indigo

Moving toward a deeper
connection to spirit

Lavender

Spirit

White

Truth

Gold

Connection to God. In the
service of humankind.

Godlike love.

Silver

Communication

Black

Absence of light, or profound
forgetting, thwarted ambition
(cancer)

Black Velvet

Like black holes in space,
doorways to other realities

Maroon

Moving into one's task

Healing with Color and Sound 239

pressed anger; dark red, held anger; red-orange
implies sexual passion. When the color is
orange, the person has ambition. When it is yel¬
low, it refers to intellect. A person with a lot of
green has a lot of healing and nurturing energy.
Blue is the color of the teacher and of sensitivity.
When purple is seen on the soul level, the per¬
son has a deeper connection to spirit, while in¬
digo means moving toward a deeper connection
to spirit. Lavender refers to spirit, and white to
truth. Gold is connection to God and the service
of humankind with godlike love. When a person
has silver in her soul level, it means she is con¬
nected to or has gifts in communication and is
able to communicate well. Velvet black is like
holes in space, which are doorways to other re¬
alities. Maroon means moving into one's task.
Black is the absence of light, or profound forget¬
ting, which leads to cancer, and which is seen
on the soul level as thwarted ambition.

Color in a Healing Session

All the colors of the rainbow are used in healing.
Each color has its own effect in the field. Of
course each color can be used to charge the cha¬
kra that metabolizes that color. Red is used to
charge the field, burn out cancer and warm cold
areas. Orange charges the field, increases sexual
potency and immunity. Yellow is used to clear a
foggy head and help the linear mind function
well. Green is used as a general balancer and
healer for all things. Blue cools and calms. It is
also used to restructure the etheric field and in
shielding. Purple helps the patient connect to
his spirit, while indigo opens the third eye and
enhances visualization and clears the head.
White is used to charge the field, bring peace
and comfort and take away pain. Gold is used to
restructure the seventh layer and to strengthen
and charge the field. Velvet black brings the pa¬
tient into a state of grace, silence and peace with
God. It is good in restructuring bones that have
crumbled horn cancer or other trauma. Purple-
blue takes away pain when doing deep tissue
work and work on bone cells. It also helps ex¬
pand the patient's field in order to connect to
her task.

In general, I do not control the color coming
through me when I do healing, but I am able to
sustain a color that comes through me. On rare
occasions I will send a certain color on purpose.
Table 23-2 gives the colors used in healing and
what I have seen them used for by the guides.
Charging each chakra is done by running the
color of that chakra into the field on whichever

Figure 23-2

COLOR USED IN HEALING

Color

Used for:

Red

Charging the field, burning
out cancer, warming cold areas

Orange

Charging the field, increasing
sexual potency, increasing
immunity

Yellow

Charging third chakra,
clearing a foggy head

Green

Charging fourth chakra,
balancing, general healing,
charging field

Blue

Cooling, calming, restructuring
etheric level, shielding

Purple

Connecting to spirit

Indigo

Opening third eye,
clearing head

Lavender

Purging field

White

Charging field, bringing peace
and comfort, taking away pain

Gold

Restructuring seventh layer.

strengthening field,
charging field

Silver

Strong purging of field
(opalescent silver is used to
charge sixth level)

Velvet Black

Bringing patient into a state of
grace, silence and peace
with God

Purple Blue

Taking away pain when doing
deep tissue work and work on
bone cells, helping expand
patient's field in order to
connect to his task

240 Hands of Light

level you axe working on. In general in our soci¬
ety, since we are already so mental, analytical
and intellectual, the color yellow is not used a
lot in the healing session.

The colors lavender and silver have been
used by my guides in a little different fashion
from the healing techniques mentioned earlier
in this book. When I have observed microor¬
ganisms in the field that need to be removed,
the guides use first lavender and then silver to
blast them out. First they send through lavender
light, which makes the microorganisms vibrate
at a high rate and apparently knocks them
loose. If lavender light doesn't get them all, the
guides will increase intensity and frequency and
go up to silver. This powerful current seems to
disconnect the microorganisms from their
space. The guides then reverse the direction of
energy flow through my body and suck all the
lavender and silver light back out, carrying the
microorganism with the light. This procedure is
rather like vacuuming with light. In a particular
case in which I was cleaning the blood of a leu¬
kemia patient, she received her first clear blood
test the day after the healing. That is the only
time I have had clinical results to check this pro¬
cedure.

At one point I began experimenting with the
effect of purple-blue light with a colleague. We
were doing exchange sessions. Daniel Blake of
the Structural Bodywork Institute (Santa Bar¬
bara, California) did deep-tissue work on me
and, in exchange, took my classes. While he
worked on me, we experimented with combin¬
ing color control with deep-tissue work. When
he was able to hold a strong purple-blue flame
coming out from his fingertips, he could go very
deeply into my muscle tissue without causing
pain. If he got distracted and "dropped" the
color, my muscle would hurt. Controlling the
color that came through made his work more
effective because he could go much deeper and
get a bigger change in muscle and structural
alignment. At one point in this work, he was
able to get to the bone level. By holding a
purple-blue flame mixed with white light, he
was able to straighten a slight twist in my femur.
As I watched what was happening with HSP, I
could see the cells of my femur realigning them¬

selves with each other. The physical sensation
was extremely pleasant. Heyoan made the com¬
ment that this twisting of the bone is related to
how the piezoelectric effect within the bone
helps direct bone growth. The piezoelectric ef¬
fect in bones is the following: When pressure is
put on bone tissue, as from walking, the pres¬
sure causes a small electrical current to flow
through the bone. The bone then grows faster in
the direction of the current. If pressure (through
walking) is put on a bone in a misaligned fash¬
ion, it will cause the bone to grow in a mis¬
aligned or twisted way. The original
misalignment in my body was the result of a car
accident. Daniel's treatment removed the slight
twist from my femur permanently.

At a certain point in my healing career, the
guides suggested I start using black light. This
seemed unusual to me, since the dark colors in
the aura usually are associated with illness. This
black, however, was not the black of cancer, but
a velvet black, like black velvet silk. It is like the
life potential held in the womb. It is the black
mystery of the unknown feminine within all of
us, which teems with undifferentiated life. Sit¬
ting within the black velvet void is another way
to be one with the creator, but this time without
form. To sit within the black velvet void means
sitting in silence and peace. It means completely
being there, in fullness and without judgment.
It means going into a state of Grace and bringing
your patient into that Grace with you. It means
completely accepting everything that is in that
moment. Heyoan and the other healing guides
and I often sit in this place with cancer patients
or other very serious illnesses for a whole hour
at a time. It is very healing. It brings the patient
into a state of oneness with the Divine.

Sounding for Healing

I have found that color in the aura is directly
related to sound. Sounding specific pitches into
the field not only produces specific colors in the
field but is also a powerful agent of healing.

Multiple Sclerosis (M.S.) is known among
healers as one of the most difficult diseases to
work with. It is very hard to effect a change in

Healing with Color and Sound 241

the field of someone with M.S. During one of
the intensive training weeks I offer, one of the
students had M.S. At times during the week,
the students and I would work on this student,
Liz. Several students were able to perceive a
large scar in her field in the sacral area. In the
first group healing we did with Liz, she received
a normal chelation and went through a lot of
feelings. The group healed her, held her and
cried with her. At the end of the second hour of
healing, however, I and one of the students who
had learned to use her HSP could see that the
scar was not touched. As the week progressed,
each student began to develop the particular
form of healing she felt most connected with.
Some liked crystals, some concentrated on love,
others on spiritual surgery and some on sound¬
ing. At the end of the week we worked on Liz
again. Each student gave her best in her chosen
form of healing. There were several students
sounding, two working with crystals, several sit¬
ting in love and some running energy. We
worked synchronistically as a group. We found
that the two of us who were working with crys¬
tals were able to lift the scar out of the field if we
worked with the sounders. The sound they
made would loosen the scar. We used the crys¬
tals as scalpels to cut the scar away once it had
been loosened with the sound. Then we would
direct the sounders to change the pitch just a
little, and another part of the scar would loosen.
After its removal another change in pitch would
loosen more scar. We proceeded in this way un¬
til the scar was removed completely. After the
healing Liz said that a certain pain that had been
in her leg for 15 years was no longer there. Her
walking was much improved and still is at the
time of writing, which is about four years later.
This is only one small part of Liz's self-healing
story. She has succeeded in regaining all the use
of her body, which was almost completely para¬
lyzed.

Since that time I have used sound regularly
in the healings I give. I use it directly on the
chakras to charge and strengthen them. I put
my mouth about an inch away from the body
where the chakra is located. Each chakra has a
different pitch, and each person's pitch for a
particular chakra is slightly different.

To find the pitch for each chakra, I vary the
range a bit until I hit a resonance. This reso¬
nance can be heard and felt by the patient. Since
I can also see the field, I watch the chakra re¬
spond to the sound. When I hit the right pitch,
the chakra tenses up and begins to spin rapidly
and evenly. Its color brightens up. After holding
the sound for some time, the chakra is charged
and strengthened enough to hold its new level
of energy. Then I move up to the next chakra. I
start with the first and move up through all
seven.

An interesting effect of this sounding, which
is usually very powerfully felt by the patient,
is to increase the patient's ability to visualize.
If a person has a very undercharged chakra,
chances are he will not be able to visualize that
color in his head. However, after a few minutes
of sounding over the corresponding chakra, the
patient is able to visualize the chakra's color.

Whenever I have done a sounding demon¬
stration in a group, everyone in the group can
tell when I have hit resonance with a chakra.

The same principles that are used for sound¬
ing into the chakras also work with the organs
and bones of the body. I sound into the particu¬
lar organ by holding my mouth about an inch
over the body surface where that organ is lo¬
cated. I watch the organ using HSP until I get
the appropriate sound that causes the greatest
amount of effect on the organ. The effect may be
energy flow, cleaning the organ or strengthen¬
ing it. I simply watch the response and go for it.
Over several months of regular healings, I was
able to heal ulcerative colitis in this way. The
patient was able to avoid a colostomy, which
had been recommended by several physicians.
Part of this patient's healing was to play a tape
recording of that sounding once or twice a day.

This type of sounding also works very well
for healing injured disks, enhancing tissue
growth, clearing stagnated fluids from the body,
tuning up the nervous system, and tuning the
organs of the body so that they impedance
match or harmonize with each other to function
better. I have found that different types of body
organs, tissues, bones and fluid all require a dif¬
ferent tone and modulation to enhance their
healthy functioning. In addition to sounding in

242 Hands of Light

the form of tones only, one can make different
types of sound. Traditional Indian teachings
give a Sanskrit letter and a particular sound for
each chakra. I have not yet worked with these,
but I can imagine that they are very powerful
forms of healing.

Some music groups, like Robbie Gass', per¬
form music to purposefully open the chakras. In
a concert I attended, Robbie directed his choir to
sing for two hours without stopping. Over that
time period, songs were chosen specifically to
open the chakras in a progressive series, starting
with the first chakra. By the time they finished,
most of the people in the audience had most of
their chakras opened and charged. Everyone
had a wonderful time. Music is very healing.

Chapter 23 Review

1. List examples of when a healer would con¬
sciously control the color of the light being
channelled, and explain why.

2. What is so difficult about channelling a cho¬
sen color?

3. What does "doing it in yellow" mean?

4. What, in general, do the following colors do
in healing: red, red-orange, gold, green,
rose, blue, purple and white?

5. What is the main use of the colors lavender
and silver? What is the difference between
the two?

6. How is black light used?

7. What is the effect of purple-blue light when
used with deep-tissue massage?

8. How do you modulate (create) a color to
channel? Give several ways.

9. Is there a relationship between color and
sound in healing? What is it?

10. By what physical principle does sounding
work in the auric field?

11. How can sounding be used for each chakra?
What is the effect on the chakra?

12. How can sounding be used on an organ,
and what is the effect of the sounding?

13. How do you find the right note to sound?
Give two ways by which you can tell it is the
right note?

14. Can you passively channel a sound your
guide makes? How is that different from the
active sounding we have been talking about
above?

Chapter 24

HEALING TRANSTEMPORAL TRAUMAS

Many people, at a certain point along their spir¬
itual path, begin to have transtemporal expe¬
riences that are referred to as past-life
experiences. Someone may be meditating and
"remember" being another person in another
era. Someone else, in doing deep therapy work
of reexperiencing traumas from this lifetime,
may suddenly find themselves reliving a trauma
that was experienced in "another lifetime."

Transtemporal experience probably cannot
be completely defined due to our limited sense
of time and space. I personally think that the
term past life is a very limited way to define such
an experience. As we have seen in Chapter 4,
both physicists and mystics agree that time is
not linear nor space only three-dimensional.
Many writers have spoken of multi-dimensional
and multi-temporal realities existing within each
other. Einstein speaks of a time-space contin¬
uum where all things of the past and future exist
now, somehow interwoven in multi-dimensional
reality. Itzhak Bentov says that linear time is
only a fabrication of the third dimensional real¬
ity (into which I am trying to squeeze this book).

Exercise to

Experience Nonlinear Time

In his book. Stalking the Wild Pendulum , he gives
an exercise to illustrate this point: Sit quietly in
meditation with a watch or clock clearly within
visible range so that all you have to do is slightly
slit your eyes to see the second hand as it moves

around with each minute. When you have
reached a high state of consciousness in your
meditation, simply slit open your eyes and look
at the second hand on the clock. What has hap¬
pened? Many people have the experience of this
hand either completely stopping or drastically
slowing down. Of course, as soon as you see
this, your emotional reaction will probably pull
you back into your normally comfortable reality
of linear time, and the second hand will jump
forward and resume its normal rate of move¬
ment. What has happened here? Bentov says
that time is experienced subjectively, not lin¬
early, and that we create a supposed linear time
structure for convenience.

Both Edgar Cayce and Jane Roberts speak of
multi-dimensional reality where all our past and
future are being lived now, each in its own di¬
mension, and say that each personality in each
dimension is a part of an expression of a greater
soul or greater being. According to Roberts, we
can penetrate into these other dimensions or
"lives" to bring knowledge and understanding
for transformation. By doing this, this dimen¬
sion or our present lives can transform our other
lives and dimensions. Or, said in more popular
terms, how we live now in what we call this life
affects both our past and future lives.

All of these things are quite hard to under¬
stand, but they serve to help point out and chal¬
lenge the limitations in our thinking about the
nature of reality.

On the therapeutic and healing levels, I have
found working with past lives very effective

243

244 Hands of Light

when handled in a manner in which the trans¬
formation process is kept as the main objective.
It is not something to play with or to use to
boost the ego. We all would rather think of our¬
selves as having been a great queen or leader of
some sort, rather than a peasant, beggar, mur¬
derer, etc. That is not at all the point. The use¬
fulness of reexperiencing past lives is clearly to
free the personality from problems that now
hold us back from attaining our greatest poten¬
tials and from completing our life's work (or life
task). Problems related to past-life experiences
always relate to what the personality is dealing
with in this present life, when the past-life
memory is unearthed in a natural and nonforc¬
ing way. This is a very important fact that must
be kept in mind by the healer or therapist whose
job it is to make sure that the interlife connec¬
tion is made. Past-life memory may then be ap¬
plied to this life circumstances to help heal this
life's problems.

Some therapists will spontaneously see a
past-life of a client when they are making body
contact with the client, for example, in a mother¬
ing type therapy where the therapist holds the
client the way a mother would hold a child. The
therapist can then utilize this information by
weaving it into a session in a sensitive manner.

"Seeing" and Healing
Past-Life Trauma

There are three major ways that I "see" and heal
past-life trauma, each related to what level or
levels of the aura on which the healing is done.
All levels, from the ketheric on down, are af¬
fected by past-life trauma. In the first four auric
levels, a past-life trauma looks like a normal en¬
ergy block in the field. On the etheric and
ketheric template levels, it shows up as a struc¬
tural problem and, in addition, on the ketheric,
the past life shows up as a ring or band in the
eggshell level of the field.

To "see" a past life, I may just be "given"
the past-life scene relevant to the present heal¬
ing situation or illness as the client is speaking
with me. Or I may hold my hands on a particu¬
lar block and then see the past life. To read the

past lives related to the bands in the eggshell
level, I simply put my hands in the band and
see the pictures of the past life. I will now de¬
scribe these three methods of healing in more
detail.

Healing Past-Life Blocks in the
Lower Four Levels of the Aura

A method of clearing past-life blocks, which I
learned from Petey Peterson at the Healing Light
Center in Glendale, California, is very effective
in removing past-life trauma that has been
blocking a person's freedom in this life.

This kind of work really addresses the blocks
from this lifetime, first. The healer focuses en¬
ergy into the block. This starts energy moving
out of the block and usually the trauma is re¬
leased. Hie first layers will be blocks that oc¬
curred in this lifetime; then after they are
cleared, the traumas from other lifetimes are un¬
covered and worked with in the same manner.
The healer must be experienced with and be
able to handle very strong, painful, fearful or
angry feelings in the client in order to do this
work. The healer must be there for the client
through all types of feelings that are experienced
and gone through. The healer must not with¬
draw her energy if affected by these strong feel¬
ings, but must continue to be there, steadily
running a supportive foundation energy that
sustains the client through the experience so
that he can complete and clear it.

To do this, one begins a healing in the nor¬
mal manner with alignment (Chapter 22) and
balancing the three energy systems of client,
healer and UEF guides. Then, during the chela¬
tion, the healer will become aware of the blocks
in the system. The healer is lead through intui¬
tion or guidance to the block which is appropri¬
ate to concentrate on in that particular session.
The healer then lays hands on that area of the
body and runs energy into that area. Many
times the left hand is on the back of the body
and the right hand on the front.

After a good amount of energy is flowing,
the healer will ask the client to allow his mem¬
ory to open and go back to the first time the

Healing Transtemporal Traumas 245

client put that block there. The healer continues
to run energy into the block while the client
goes backward in time. The healer usually gets
pictures of the event in question as the client is
trying to remember. The client will also either
see pictures or go into a feeling state (or both)
that relates to the experience. The client may
then reexperience that trauma fully as if living
through it again or he may just see the experi¬
ence as an observer. The healer may or may not
tell the client what the healer sees, depending
on whether or not it is appropriate to do so. It is
not always appropriate, especially if the client
does not see it. The healer must always respect
the client's energy system, which is what deter¬
mines how much information the client can tol¬
erate about any given trauma. If, however, the
client reexperiences the trauma, it is always
good for the healer to verify the information
through the healer's gift of "seeing."

The timing of discovery is very important in
these things. When past-life information is un¬
covered in the right moment, it will help the
person understand himself and learn to love
themselves better. If it is done with the wrong
timing, it can enhance a person's negativity ei¬
ther toward self or others. For example, if the
person has done something very violent to an¬
other person in a past life, he may not be able to
handle knowing about it in this lifetime without
placing great guilt upon himself. If he knows
the victim in this lifetime, the present life situa¬
tion may be made worse because of guilt. Or if
the situation is reversed and the patient is a
past-life victim of someone he knows in this life¬
time, he may find himself increasing and justify¬
ing a grudge he may already be holding against
that person.

After the trauma is experienced at whatever
level was appropriate, the healer asks the client
if he is ready to give it up and let it go. If the
answer is yes, the healer removes it from the
field by scooping it out. The process of experi¬
encing the trauma has loosened it from the
field, so it is easy to remove. Both the healer and
the client fill the open clear area where the
trauma was with unconditional love, which is a
rose colored light, working through the heart
chakra, as discussed in Chapter 23.

The client may say "no" to the question of
letting the trauma go. This means there is more
to be experienced, and he is not finished with it,
or the healer may see more work to be done.
The healer begins the process of running energy
again and helping the client to experience more
of the trauma. The healer increases both inten¬
sity and frequency of the energy s/he runs into
the block. This is repeated until the area has
cleared and the client is ready to let it go and
allow the area to be filled with the rose light of
unconditional love.

If the area has not cleared, there is usually
another trauma sitting under the first that was
experienced. I have seen as many as five trau¬
mas from different lifetimes layered upon each
other in the same area of the body. TTiese five
layers were left after the client had cleared the
layers of trauma from this lifetime. In other
words the traumas that are experienced by a
person are laid down in the field on top of each
other, probably chronologically. When you clear
one trauma, the next is left uncovered to be
dealt with and cleared.

Many times when a client reexperiences a
past life, there is a very strong field effect called
a direct current (DC) field shift by Rev. Rosalyn
Bruyere. In the shift. Rev. Bruyere says that the
whole auric field expands to a much greater size
than normal but still maintains its high vibration
rate. Almost twice as much energy stays in the
field for about 48 hours, and the client is very
vulnerable and impressionable. A great deal of
the unconscious memory is opened during this
time, so memories continue to flow into the con¬
sciousness of the individual. It is very important
for him to stay in a quiet, safe and nourishing
environment to allow the healing to continue
and complete itself. Unpleasant experiences
from external sources during this time will affect
the individual very deeply and should be
avoided. It is time for the field to reestablish
healthy flow patterns that, if allowed to stabilize
over 48 hours will, become part of the normal
flow of the system, thus making the healing per¬
manent. It is important for the healer to explain
to the patient what is happening and to empha¬
size the importance of the healing period and
encourage him to take good care of himself dur-

246 Hands of Light

ing that time. The power in this time must be
respected. This time period is similar to one
when someone goes into shock.

As the client goes backward in time, clearing
trauma after trauma, usually starting with this
lifetime and going to previous lifetimes, the
blocked area becomes clearer and clearer. Each
layer is filled with the rose light of unconditional
love before going onto the next layer to be
cleared. Thus, one can see that any natural puri¬
fication process that clears away body blocks
(and most spiritual paths do) will eventually
lead to past-life clearing. It is very important
that the past-life clearing be done at an appro¬
priate point in a person's path. That point is
reached when a good deal of clearing has al¬
ready taken place concerning this lifetime, when
a lot of the person's personal life is in order and
when he would not be so tempted to use past-
life experiences to avoid issues that need to be
dealt with in this lifetime, here and now.

At the appropriate time, past-life clearing
can release certain places in a person's life that
cannot seem to change, even though a lot of
spiritual work has been done to clear them.
Then past-life clearing can sometimes initiate
dramatic changes in a person's present life.

For example, one client who was in a very
destructive marriage where her husband would
hurt her physically was unable to leave the mar¬
riage until she reexperienced about 15 past life¬
times where she had been physically abused by
men in some form or another. She saw the con¬
tinuation of her pattern of dependency in which
she thought that men have all the power (and
also all the responsibility). She saw that she
lived out her belief in situations that proved
men did have more power than she on the phys¬
ical level. When she saw her pattern and knew
she had to face her dependency, stand on her
own two feet and face her fear of being alone,
she was ready to leave the marriage and rebuild
her life. Her life has dramatically changed in the
year since this occurrence, and she is free,
happy and healthy. She is letting go of her fear
of being alone and through this is regaining her
independence and taking responsibility for her
life.

Healing Fast-life Traumas on the
Etheric and Ketheric Template
Levels of the Aura

To heal a structural problem in the aura caused
by a past life, you follow the same procedure as
healing any structural problem on the template
level as described in Chapter 22. The important
difference here is that as soon as the healer
knows the trauma is from a past life, the healer
must help the client connect present life issues
to the past-life experience. The structural prob¬
lems on this level of the aura from past lifetimes
usually result in congenital problems in the
physical body. These issues are very important
to deal with as they are held very tightly and
deeply within the soul substance of the individ¬
ual. It is clear that part of the main task of the
individual with birth-related problems is to deal
with that problem both on the physical level and
the psychodynamic level. This work will then
lead to the spiritual issue that the soul has incar¬
nated to resolve in the first place. It is important
for the healer to keep in mind the scope of the
work that is being done. The object is not only
to heal the physical body, although that is what
usually brings the client to the healer in the first
place. The object is to heal the soul. On the tem¬
plate level, it is to straighten the auric field and
realign it with its natural flow—the universal
flow of all life.

In the case of a young man named John that
follows, I first saw the structural problems in the
aura. I also "saw" a picture of the past-life scene
that was related to the auric wound. Figures 24-
1 to 24-5 are drawings of the healing work that
followed.

This young man didn't tell me ahead of time
what the problem was. Figure 24-1 shows what
his field on the ketheric template looked like
when he arrived. Compare it to Figure 7-13 in
Chapter 7, which shows what the normal field
on the ketheric template level looks like. Instead
of beautiful golden fibers forming the spinning
petals of the chakras at his solar plexus, John
had a formation that looked rather like a sun¬
spot. A large mass of tangled red, yellow and

Healing Transtemporal Traumas 247

Gray and Fed clogged mucus

Figure 24-3: Past-Life Lance Revealed as Aura Clears

black energy created little whirlpools flowing off
from it that appeared mostly in gray. Most of the
other chakras were intact (and are not shown
here). The main vertical golden power current
that runs up and down the spine had a large
deviation to the right towards the sunspot area
and was very dark in that area. Small gray sec¬
ondary whirlpools formed on the rear part of
the aura too. As John talked about his life, I sud¬
denly saw him in a past life sometime around
the era of Genghis Khan. The scene was in a
battle where he was lustfully killing a soldier
from the "other army" with a hand weapon. He
had a rod with a chain, and on the end of the
chain was a metal ball with spikes with which

he impaled his enemy's head. At the same time
this happened, the enemy was plunging a lance
into John's solar plexus. Both were killed in this
interaction. This experience left him with the be¬
lief that any lusty, powerful expression of the
life-force energy leads to injury and death.

In this lifetime, John tended to hold back
any strong integrated expression of the life force
from within him. Instead, he divided his power
into separate parts for expression. His profes¬
sion of directing plays served as a tool to help
integrate the parts of himself. By expressing dif¬
ferent aspects of strong life force in the different
characters in the different plays, he could expe¬
rience the results of what a particular expression

248

Healing Transtemporal Traumas 249

caused. Thus, his plays gave him many mini¬
life-like experiences to help him learn how to ex¬
press his power.

When he came into the office, I was unaware
that John had scoliosis until he turned around
and I could see it with regular sight. He had
been bom with it and had never had an opera¬
tion to straighten his spine. Thus, my interpre¬
tation was that this congenital disease was a
direct outcome of that past life.

In the healing sequence, after chelation, I
used a crystal to scoop out the stagnated energy
in the wound near the solar plexus (Figure 24-
2). This stagnated energy was from the auric
bodies two and four. The crystal works very well
for this purpose and speeds up the process of
cleansing. It also protects the healer from ab¬
sorbing any of this stagnated energy.

Figure 24-3 shows what could be seen once
a lot of the stagnated energy from the second
and fourth auric levels had been cleared. I found
the lance embedded in his solar plexus on the
fifth energy level, or etheric template level. The
handle of the lance was completely embedded
within the auric field and curled into a spiral. To
remove it, first I had to straighten the handle
and then yank out the lance by the handle,
cleaned the wound more and revitalized the
area.

In the next few healings that followed, I
worked with the guides to restructure the aura
on the ketheric template (or seventh auric level).
First, I restructured the template of the organs
in that area and then the chakra. Figure 24-4
shows what I see while doing the chakra re¬
structuring. Tiny lines of gold-white light come
out of my fingertips which move very rapidly to
weave a golden structure of vortices that consti¬
tute the structure of that chakra. The blue
etheric level (first auric layer) is then filled in
and rests upon the golden level, just as the cells
of the body rest upon the blue (lower) etheric
level. After restructuring, the chakra then looks
like Figure 24-5, a beautiful lotus of golden spin¬
ning vortices.

After the chakra was restructured, I and the
guides restructured the main power current that
was darkened and out of alignment and recon¬

nected the chakra to it. Thus, when the set of
healings was completed, my client again looked
like Figure 7-13 in Chapter 7 with a complete set
of functioning chakras and main power current.

During the five or so sessions that it took to
do this work, the client progressively felt more
freedom of movement in that area of his body.
He felt less tension in the muscles of the back
that he used to compensate for his imbalanced
field. He also said that he felt more freedom in
his personal life.

I saw him a month later for a check up to
make sure everything held and then referred
him to someone who works primarily on the
body level for further physical restructuring now
that the energy restructuring was completed.
Just how much straighter his spine will become
is questionable. This would take a lot of very
deep healing. (See the section on purple-blue
light in Chapter 23.)

Healing Past-life Bands in the
Ketheric Template Layer

As noted earlier, another way to read past lives
is simply to put your hands into the bands of
color that appear at the ketheric or eggshell level
of the aura. By doing this and tuning into the
energy there, you can see the past lives flow be¬
fore your eyes.

The past-life band that is relevant to what is
happening right now in the person's present life
is found around the face and neck area of the
client and in the aura about two and one half to
three feet out. By putting your hands above the
face and following the band to the right with the
right hand and to the left with the left hand, you
can see the past life pass by in linear time. Just
what you do with this information is very im¬
portant. Again, it is not good to expose the cli¬
ent to something he is not ready for. If the client
has done a lot of purification work on himself,
then it may be okay to let him know what is
there. It may be very related to his present life. I
would never give this information out unless I
was very familiar with the client's process and
knew that he was ready for it.

250 Hands of Light

I have done very little to change these past-
life bands and think that very little should be
done with them. I sometimes run my hands
through them to make them clearer or "lighten"
them when they appear to be burdened. At
times I have seen the energy in such a band all
bunched up, in which case I usually spread it
out along the band. The person usually feels
some relief and a lightening of his load when I
do this.

It is my impression that these bands are re¬
lated to the task the person has undertaken in
this lifetime and needs to do in order to grow.
Many times I get the sense that I am invading a
very private personal space when I reach into
these areas, so I withdraw from them. It is very
important for the healer to respect the power of
the work that the client is doing in these high
levels of the field and only do what the healer
and client are ready for. This is actually a gen¬
eral rule for working on all levels of the aura:
Respect the work and humility of your position
in the great scheme of the universe while always
focusing on unconditional love, the greatest
healer of all.

Chapter 24 Review

1. How are blocks sometimes related to past-life
experiences seen on the psychological level?

2. Describe the relationship between blocks in
the HEF from this lifetime and those from
other lifetimes.

3. How can one do past-life therapy with the
use of laying-on of hands?

4. What is a very important thing to do in heal¬
ing after a past-life trauma has been removed
from the HEF?

5. When is past-life healing appropriate? When
is it not? Is it necessary?

6. How are past-life blocks laid down in the au¬
ric field?

7. What is a direct current (DC) shift? Describe
how it is related to past-life experience.

Food For Thought

8. What is a past life anyway, if time is not lin¬
ear?

PART VI

SELF HEALING AND THE
SPIRITUAL HEALER

"Physician, heal thyself."

Jesus

Introduction

TRANSFORMATION AND
SELF RESPONSIBILITY

You and only you are responsible for your
health. If you have a physical problem you must
make the final decision to follow a particular cu¬
rative program. Only with the greatest of care
should you make these decisions. To start with,
you choose from a vast array of help available to
you. Whom do you trust? How long do you fol¬
low a cure when you cannot tell whether or not
it is working? These questions can only be an¬
swered from your deep searching for what is
right for you.

If you don't trust a diagnosis, there is noth¬
ing wrong with a second or third opinion, or
another technique altogether. If you are con¬
fused about what has been said to you about
your particular ailment, ask the doctor more
questions, find some books, learn about what
you are involved with. Take charge of your
health. Most of all, do not let yourself be limited
by a negative prognosis. Rather take it as a mes¬
sage to look deeper into yourself and wider into
the available alternative methods. Standard
western medicine has rnany answers, but not

all. If it is not efficient in curing a certain dis¬
ease, then look elsewhere. Cover all bases. You
will be surprised about how much there is to
learn about yourself and your health. The
search will change your life in ways you would
never expect. I have met many people whose
illness has eventually brought them great joy, a
deep understanding and appreciation of life and
the fulfillment they were not able to achieve be¬
fore becoming ill.

If we can only change our attitude toward
illness to one of acceptance and understanding
that it is a message to be learned from, we
would alleviate a great deal of fear that we have
about illness, not only on a personal level but
perhaps on a national or global scale as well.

In this section, I will present my suggestions
on how to maintain your health. This includes
daily practices from which to choose as well as
comments on diet, space and clothing. But most
of all, you need love to maintain your health.
Self-love is the greatest healer, and self-love also
requires daily practice.

253

Chapter 25

THE FACE OF THE NEW MEDICINE:
PATIENT BECOMES HEALER

As our view of illness changes, so does our way
of treating it. As we become more efficient in
diagnosis and treating illness, we can individu¬
alize our curative programs more. Each individ¬
ual is unique and requires a slightly different
combination of agents used in the healing proc¬
ess. Each healing session is different. The healer
must be prepared with a wide background of
information, lots of love and good contact with
her spirit guides in healing and in channelling.
As we move into a more refined way of doing
healing, the practice becomes an art. Here is a
detailed case study of a patient I worked with
for over two years that demonstrates what I
think is a small peek at what is ahead for us. I
have chosen David because his work illustrates
all levels and phases of healing. It shows how
deep healing can go into the structure of person¬
ality when it is done over a long period of time.
Heyoan has said that "the precise substance
taken in the precise amount at the precise time
acts as a transformative substance." In this case
study I use a combination of laying-on of hands,
direct accessing of information and psycho¬
dynamic analysis. These combined with the pa¬
tient's own initiative and self-responsibility
effected not only a cure of the illness, but also
very deep life changes. These profound changes
were only possible because the patient took full
responsibility for his own healing.

Finding the initiating cause of an illness is
always a key part of a healing. Direct accessing

of information is always an invaluable tool for
this. In the case presented, the cause of the ill¬
ness is discussed from the point of view of the
physical life circumstance, the psychodynamics
involved, the patient's belief systems and the
patient's spiritual life plan.

The Healing of David

David grew up in California. His parents were
psychologists. He loved the ocean, surfing and
the sun. David received a Ph.D. in Kinesiology
from the University of California and then be¬
gan to teach. Later he spent some time in India,
where he fell in love with another American,
Anne, and also became quite ill. He and Anne
returned to the U.S. For the next four years, his
search for healing took him over the U.S., where
he received various diagnoses from possible
mononucleosis, chronic persistent hepatitis and
unknown viruses to "it's all in your head, there
is nothing wrong with you." Meanwhile his en¬
ergy was decreasing rapidly, and it was getting
more and more difficult for him to work. By the
time he got to my office, his energy would be
good for a day or two, then it would disappear,
and he would spend a day or two in bed.

David walked into my office with the energy
field shown in Figure 25-1. The most obvious
and serious problem was in the solar plexus cha¬
kra, which was torn open and needed to be

255

256

Figure 25-1: Case Study of David (Diagnostic View)

The Face of the New Medicine: Patient Becomes Healer 257

sewn back into form on all the structured layers
of the field, including the seventh. The second
most important problem was the distortion of
the first chakra. It was bent to the left and was
clogged. This caused a lack of ability to take en¬
ergy into the energy system through the base
chakra. The combination of a torn third chakra
that leaked energy and a clogged first chakra
caused a very depleted energy system. This de¬
pletion would be strongly felt physically because
the first chakra metabolizes the majority of en¬
ergy associated with physical strength, as dis¬
cussed in Chapter 11. In addition to these
problems, the aura also showed a depletion and
weakness in the second chakra, which is associ¬
ated not only with sexual function (which was
down), but also with the immune system. There
is a lymphatic center located there. The heart
center showed a block deep inside its vortex. It
is also associated with the immune system
through the thymus gland. This block was lo¬
cated two-thirds of the way down into the spiral
of the heart chakra. Whenever I have seen this
configuration in people, it has been associated
with an issue regarding the individual's rela¬
tionship to God and his belief about what God's
Will is. (More about that later.) The throat center
was undercharged. This center is associated
with communication, self-responsibility and
also giving and receiving. The third eye was
clogged and blocked all the way deep into the
head and into the pineal gland. The crown cha¬
kra was weak and undercharged. The whole
aura was deflated and dull.

Upon examining the organs, I could see a
great deal of clogging and dark energy in the
liver. There were layers of discoloration in the
liver. One was dark slimy green, one was an
ugly yellow, and deeper inside near the spine
there were areas that were almost black. The
etheric matrix of the liver itself was tom and de¬
formed. Upon closer inspection, I saw multiple
infectious organisms, some bacterial and some
viral in size and appearance. These organisms
spread throughout the middle abdominal area,
including the pancreas, spleen and digestive
tract. Over the pancreas there was a small,
swiftly spinning vortex making a high-pitched
screeching sound. This configuration is usually
associated with sugar metabolism problems like

diabetes or hypoglycemia. The overall field was
undercharged and weak. Instead of nice, bright
streamers coming from the sixth layer, they were
limp and dull. This was a very sick man.

For the student of healing, I suggest that at
this point you stop reading, analyze the field
and make out the healing plan that you would
follow. Where would you start first? Would you
use as much energy as you could possibly run
into this system to charge it? Why or why not?
When would you repair the seventh layer tear,
and why? What would you imagine could be the
initiating cause of this illness, and how does it
show in the auric field? Will this be a rapid re¬
covery or a slow one? Why? All these questions
will be answered in the following description on
the healing process that occurred.

The Healing Sequence:

First Phase: Clearing, Charging
and Restructuring the Field

For the first several weeks, healings were cen¬
tered on first chelating the field, straightening
the first chakra and then slowly but surely re¬
pairing the problem in the third chakra area. I
would sit sometimes for a half to three quarters
of an hour with my hands on David's liver and
third chakra area. It was impossible to charge
the aura very strongly because of the weakness
in the third chakra area. A strong energy charge
would have the possibility of ripping that chakra
more. It was relatively easy during these weeks
to straighten and clear the first chakra. This was
done systematically, whereas most of the focus
of each healing would center on the mid¬
abdominal area. Repairing the tears in the auric
field took a long time because the changes
needed were so great. The aura couldn't be
charged fully because the tear in the third cha¬
kra would either tear more or certainly leak
more energy if a strong charge were sent
through it. Each time David came in we would
chelate, charge and repair part of the area of the
third chakra, put a temporary "seal" or "ban¬
dage" over the tear and let it heal for a week.
The next week a little more was done. Each
week I would go deeper into the field to repair

258 Hands of Light

the structure of the aura, first cleansing, then
restructuring, in a step-by-step process. It was
necessary to repair the structure of the etheric
level first, then the etheric template level of the
liver and other anatomical structures in that area
as well as the chakra. As the weeks wore on,
David's energy began to level out. Rather than
the rapid up-and-down phases, he stayed at an
even low. This did not seem like progress to
him, but it did to me. I could see the field slowly
readjusting itself. Rather than the strong energy
flip-flops caused by his body's trying to com¬
pensate for the weakness, and then not being
able to maintain the compensation, his energy
leveled out to the actual level his body could
maintain in his condition. For David this was
very discouraging.

David's first chakra began to hold its
straightened position, and the second chakra
began to charge up. Finally, he began to regain
his energy and sexuality. He also started to feel
less vulnerable emotionally.

During most of David's first three months of
healing, Heyoan would not make comments to
him. Heyoan would simply say to me that David
had had quite enough psychological or spiritual
lectures, and it would be rather like "cosmic law
jammed down his throat." So I refrained from
doing much psychodynamics in this phase of
the work. It was not the most important thing at
this phase. Charging and repair were much
more important. The healer can only move as
fast as the patient is able to move. Finally,
David's field was strong enough to run enough
energy through it at a high vibration to repair
the seventh layer.

Then David began to want more informa¬
tion. He started asking questions about the
meaning of his illness in order to understand it
in terms of his personal life situation.

The Healing Sequence:

Second Phase: Psychodynamics
and Some Initiating Causes

David's inquiry came as his third chakra (the lin¬
ear mind) began to function more smoothly.
Slowly a picture formed of the human level of

causative factors of his illness.

Every child has strong connections with the
mother, as discussed in Chapter 8. This connec¬
tion is made when the child is in the womb and
after birth that connection can be seen through
the auric umbilical cord that remains between
mother and child. This cord connects their third
chakras. After birth there is also a strong heart
connection formed between child and mother
through their heart chakras.

The original tear in David's third chakra
happened at a time near puberty when he re¬
belled from a very domineering and controlling
mother. Before this time, David had done all he
could to please her. Both his psychologist par¬
ents had unwittingly misused their knowledge
of psychology to exert control over their son.

David's solution to gain autonomy was like
that of many teenagers. He broke ties with his
parents. Unfortunately, the only way he knew
how to do this was literally to break the tie that
bound him to his mother. He was left with loose
auric umbilical cords and a hole in the solar
plexus area. Of course the most natural thing to
do is to find someone else with whom to con¬
nect and thereby to replace mother. (At this
stage everyone thinks the problem is mother's,
not one's self.) Unfortunately, he discovered
that he kept connecting with women who were
controlling. His energy system would automati¬
cally attract someone who was controlling, sim¬
ply because that is the kind of energy David was
used to being connected to. That is what felt like
"normal" to him. (Like attracts like.) These un¬
satisfactory relationships led him on a search for
himself, and eventually to an ashram in India.
He began to see that the problem was inside
himself.

On the heart level, David's fourth chakra
never really connected strongly to his mother's.
She had, from the beginning, not accepted who
he was. When he did connect to her with his
heart, he found it necessary to become the per¬
son she wanted him to be. That meant self-
betrayal. David felt betrayal in his heart. Every
young man has a plight of the heart. Although
he strongly connects through his heart to his
mother, he must eventually learn to transfer that
to his mate, so that he can become a full man

The Face of the New Medicine: Patient Becomes Healer 259

with sexual potency—an experience he can
never have with his first love, his mother. If he
does not connect to the heart of his mother, then
he has no model for doing so when it is time to
find a mate and will have a difficult time loving.

David's problem in relationship was also one
of not knowing how to connect with love
through the heart. This brought him to India, to
a guru who, in David's words, had "One Big
Heart." Through this ashram experience, David
learned how to make the heart connection. First
with his guru, and then with Anne, who he met
there. However, he found that when connecting
through the heart to his guru, he also little by
little gave up his will. He was trying to learn
unconditional love, but conditions set in. As
David gave up his will, he began again to feel
betrayed, but this time the issue was not just
loving another human being, but loving human¬
ity and loving God. The issue was now revealed
in the form of David's will versus God's will.
This showed in the heart configuration in the
auric field. David had found that now that he
was no longer a "good boy" for Mom, he was
being a "good boy" for the guru and God. He
and Anne decided to leave, and another tear in
the third chakra was experienced when breaking
away from the guru. But he had gained the use
of his heart. For the first time in his life he was
deeply connected to a woman from the heart, as
well as through the solar plexus chakras.

The search for acceptance and perfect love is
very strong in the human soul and will lead it
through many lessons. I have found that people
who spent years living in a spiritual community
in the 70s learned to open up their hearts, but
slowly gave up a lot of autonomy—just as they
did in childhood. Many found it helpful to expe¬
rience profound love within the confines of a
structured community before they could bring it
out into the world on their own. This is espe¬
cially true if it was not experienced in the child¬
hood home. After having experienced love in a
community, and having unfortunately given up
some of their free will to do so, they need now
to hold that love in the heart and to surrender to
God's will as manifested within their own
heart—not to someone else's definition of God's
will.

As David's healing progressed, problems in
his relationship with his girlfriend that were
chronic became intolerable to David. He was
changing in ways that were not compatible to
his mate's vibrations because she did not change
in the same way. Their fields no longer pulsed in
harmony.

Anyone in a long-term relationship knows
this phenomenon. If you change and your mate
does not change at the same rate, there is a time
period when the two wonder who it is they are
living with. Will the other change and be com¬
patible? This is usually possible if both live with
patience and love. If not, eventually one will
move on. David and Anne began to work to¬
gether to solve their problems. With a great deal
of love and sincerity, they focused primarily on
the psychodynamics of the situation. David's
main interest had turned to his work, his free¬
dom and gaining his own personal power.
Anne, however, wanted to continue following
her guru and to build a different kind of life.

In addition to the cords that grow between
mother and child, people in relationships grow
cords of energy between each other. These are
connected through the chakras. In a healthy re¬
lationship these cords are clear bright gold, bal¬
anced and connected through most of the
chakras. In a lot of relationships, these cords
simply repeat the unhealthy connections that
were there from childhood between parent and
child. Many of these cords connect in the solar
plexus and are dark in color. During the process
of transforming a relationship from unhealthy to
healthy, the unhealthy cords must be discon¬
nected, energized and reconnected deep into
the individual's own core. They are cords of de¬
pendency that must be rooted back into the in¬
dividual so that he can rely upon himself. David
and his friend slowly disconnected their depen¬
dent cords. This is a very scary process. The
personal feeling sometimes is as if one is float¬
ing in space, not connected to anything. In do¬
ing this one leaves the "illusory safety" of
rigidity and replaces it with a flexible self-
reliance.

If you have ever gone through a divorce or
the death of a mate, you will understand this
phenomenon. Many people refer to their

260 Hands of Light

spouses as their "better half." I have heard be¬
reaved people speak of feeling tom apart or of
losing their better half. In such a serious
trauma, one feels as if one's whole front has
been tom off. This is literally true. Many times I
see those threads from the solar plexus dangling
about in space after such a painful separation.

The Healing Sequence:

Third Phase: Transformative
Substances

As David took his power back, he took more of
an active role in the healings. He began to ask
Heyoan very specific questions. He asked Hey-
oan what physical treatment he should be tak¬
ing. (I could still see the microorganisms in
David's mid-abdominal area. He needed some¬
thing.) David had heard of a serum from Can¬
ada that helped people with debilitating
diseases. Should he take that? "No," Heyoan
answered. "Well, it might help a little, but there
is another drug that would be powerful." Hey¬
oan told me it was related to what is used in the
treatment of malaria, like quinine. Then Heyoan
showed me a picture of a swimming pool and
said the first part of the word was chlorine, as in
a swimming pool. The drug's name was like
chlorine-quinine. Chloroquine. Heyoan said
that if David took that drug it would act to wash
the liver clean. He showed me a picture of
David's liver being washed clear with a silvery
liquid. Heyoan then added that David could get
this drug from a doctor in the New York area
where we lived. Heyoan also stated that David
should not take a standard dosage, but should
vary the dosage according to his needs, check¬
ing every day to see what he needed by using
his High Sense Perception and a pendulum.

David began his search. I was stunned when
he came back to my office the next week with
some chloroquine. I had never heard of it. David
had asked a doctor if he had ever heard of a
drug like the one Heyoan had described. The
doctor immediately took a book down from the
shelf describing the uses of chloroquine. It was
used in some cases of chronic persistent hepati¬

tis like David had. Since the doctor's diagnosis
agreed with Heyoan's, he prescribed chloro¬
quine in the normal dosages.

David began taking the drug and checking
the dosage with his pendulum on a daily basis.
The first five days on the drug affected David
strongly, not only physically but also emotion¬
ally. He went into the depths of emotional ag¬
ony. He experienced his problems (described
earlier) very strongly. He described one day's ex¬
perience as having spent the day "burrowing
into his girlfriend's belly." He knew it was a
cleansing. He wanted to reexperience the feel¬
ings in order to heal himself. After five days he
stopped the chloroquine as his pendulum read¬
ing suggested.

Heyoan told David to take cleansing teas and
vitamins for a week or two after the first bout
with the chloroquine. I could see from the auric
field that after taking the drug for five days
David's colon (slimy, yellow-brown) was clog¬
ging up from the discharge of toxins as he
cleared his infections. Cleansing teas were
needed. After several days off the chloroquine,
David "read" with the pendulum that it was
time to go back on it again. He did. He would be
on it for several days, then off for several. Each
time he took it, he would sink into another layer
of his personality that needed clearing. Each
time he did so, he would come out stronger,
more alive and more powerful. Each time he
took it, more of the microorganism cleared from
his body, and his aura grew brighter and fuller.
He was truly transforming himself. At times,
Heyoan would suggest another vitamin or cell
salt (like ferrum phosphate, iron phosphate) to
help the healing along.

I asked Heyoan why he had not mentioned
the chloroquine earlier? He said that David's
field was so damaged that he would not have
been able to stand the strong effects of the chlo¬
roquine until the repair was completed.

During the second phase of healing, when
David began dealing with psychodynamics, he
and Anne broke up several times. They had
been together over a decade and had a lot to
clear up between them. Slowly they got further
and further apart and finally separated. From
the auric point of view, since David's solar

The Face of the New Medicine: Patient Becomes Healer 261

plexus chakra was no longer torn and his auric
field was so brightly charged, he was no longer
compatible in vibrations with his old mate. Her
choice was to change m another way, to walk
her own path and to create her own new life.

As David regained his power, he started
dealing with his relationship to God and God's
will. He began to meditate to find God's will
within himself. As he did this, he began to clear
the deep holding within his heart chakra. He
began to surrender to his own heart. Emmanuel
(1985) has said,

Willing a release makes the
release tighter

because it does not yield to will.

It yields to yielding.

The final lesson for each soul

is the total surrender to
God's will

manifest in your own heart.

Sometime soon after David met a woman
and started a relationship. This relationship was
very supportive and nurturing to him. As I read
the relationship for David, I could see him being
soothed by the field of his new partner. It was as
if the effect of her company alone expanded his
auric field, whereas previously he had always
contracted his field in the presence of the person
he was in a relationship with.

The Healing Sequence:

Fourth Phase: Transmutation
and Rebirth

During the last month that I worked with David,
I began to see a configuration within his field
that I had never seen before. It appeared to be
uncovered by the work we had done. It looked
like a cocoon surrounding the spine. It is diffi¬
cult for me to say which level of the field it was
on. But it appeared that this cocoon held a lot of
dormant energy waiting to be tapped. I didn't
speak to David about this cocoon, but quietly
watched it as I worked primarily on clearing the

sixth chakra. All the rest of the aura was clear
and bright (Fig. 26-1B).

David came to his last session looking very
different. His aura was twice as bright and
much larger than usual. The cocoon had
opened. I asked what had happened to him? He
said that he had taken a drug popularily called
ecstasy or MDMA, a synthetic drug of the
phenylethylamine class synthesized from meth-
amphetamine and safrole, over the weekend.
Upon closer inspection, I could see that the
MDMA had opened the left side of the pineal
gland. The mucus from the third eye that had
been placed there partially from doing pot and
LSD was cleared away on the right side. There
was still work to be done, but the overall change
in David's field was amazing.

Since my observations had always shown
psychotrophic drugs to have a negative effect on
the aura, I asked Heyoan about it. He said,
"That depends on who takes it, and what their
field configuration is at the time of taking it.
Since David's sixth chakra was clogged, and it
was time for him to work on opening it, the
drug had a strong effect. But if the individual
involved needed to focus on a different chakra,
the effect would most likely be negative."

When a different patient asked if she could
take MDMA, Heyoan said, "No, I would not
recommend it for you. Rather take ovatrophine
to strengthen your second chakra, where you
need to work." (Ovatrophine is made of freeze-
dried beef ovaries.) She took ovatrophine and
had experiences similar to those David had
when he took chloroquine. Heyoan wishes to
emphasize that the new medicine deals on all
levels to heal the whole person. It focuses on
the soul's destiny as the main issue. What les¬
son is being learned, and how can the individ¬
ual best learn that lesson? Ultimately the lesson
is that you are a spark of the Divine. The more
you remember that, the closer to home you get.
Drugs can be used as transformative substances.
That is their purpose. They do not cure the dis¬
ease; they assist the individual to cure himself.
"The precise substance in the precise amount at
the precise times assists the individual to trans¬
form himself," says Heyoan.

David asked Heyoan a lot of questions dur-

262 Hands of Light

ing our last meeting. What was revealed about
his changing and the meaning of the cocoon
was encouraging for all of us to hear. David
asked what had happened to him about a
month earlier when he began to feel a deep pro¬
found change within himself that seemed per¬
manent. That's when I had started to see the
cocoon. At that time he began to feel he had
control over his life that was beginning to turn
out the way he wanted it. He had a beautiful
relationship, and he decided to move to the
west coast. Heyoan said that one month ago
David had actually completed his incarnation.
David had started the last round of completion
six years previously when he went to India.
That was the last cycle of this lifetime, in which
he had chosen to incarnate, to open his heart.
One month ago he had actually completed that
task. He, at that time, was free to leave, but had
chosen not to do so, but to reincarnate in the
same body. Heyoan said that future lifetimes
were laid down into the field before birth and
could be taken on at the completion of a life if
the individual so chose. This could be done
without leaving the body. "Think of how much
more efficient it is," Heyoan said. The cocoon
energy manifest around David's spine was the
energy consciousness of the life he was about to
begin. Heyoan said that the next three years
would be spent integrating two levels of his be¬
ing into one, and that would take some getting
used to. He would have much more energy and
much more knowledge available to him as he
integrated this energy into his reality. Heyoan
suggested that if David wished, he could change
his name. Heyoan added that the future did not
have to be like the past. Here is part of one of
their dialogues:

David: "What does it mean to reincarnate within
the same body?"

Heyoan: "In a sense, and here we must use
metaphor, you sit down with your spirit guides
before birth and choose your parents; choose a
set of probable realities; choose work to do; and
choose a set of energies that will then build a
body. You in a sense separate a portion of your
Greater Being, take that consciousness and cre¬

ate a body with it. You choose your parents and
the physical inherited qualities gained from
them.

"You sit down and you choose all that for a
specific purpose. If in a particular lifetime, you
complete that purpose and reach a certain goal,
then it is always very easy to add another life¬
time. You simply interweave the new conscious¬
ness that would be used in the next body into
the old body and consciousness.

"So you have done your work well and, as
you fuse your new consciousness within the
'old body,' you will find many changes occur¬
ring, for you are now integrating the two."

David: "They already are."

Heyoan: "Absolutely. Isn't it a wonderful thing?
When you die, or we prefer to say leave or drop
the body, and no longer need the body as a tool
for transformation, transmutation and transcen¬
dence, you will no longer create one. The body
is a tool, a vehicle that you have created to focus
on certain points within the self that you wish to
transform in a most efficient way. All of the sys¬
tems in your body are built precisely for that
transformation. You will see that in your work,
in the nervous system, in the automatic func¬
tioning of the body, down to the very cells of the
bones. You will find each portion of the body a
delicate and beautiful tool for the use of trans¬
formation. It is not a burden. It is a gift. It is
unfortunate that most human beings do not un¬
derstand that.

"If again we use the metaphor of sitting
down at the conference table with us to choose
your life, then you, the greater portion of you,
that is not completely incarnated (and we must
say that you couldn't possibly do that anyway),
that greater portion of you decides whether or
not the best place for you for the next transform¬
ative work is in a body or not. And when you
have made full use of these physical vehicles,
whichever one it may be, that is when you end
the round of life and death, as it is called, or the
wheel of incarnations on the physical plane. It
simply is that you no longer need this tool to
separate out a linear time, and a three-
dimensional space that makes it easier for you to

The Face of the Neu? Medicine: Patient Becomes Healer 263

see the particular points that you wish to trans¬
form. It is at that point where you decide—you,
the greater you, and you are a great soul, much
greater than that small portion that is incar¬
nated. You then decide whether or not it is,
shall we say, profitable to utilize the physical
body It is more or less like picking up a hoe or a
rake. Does the garden still need to be raked? If
so, why not do it with a rake, rather than the
hand, say?"

David: "And after one finishes his rounds of in¬
carnation on the physical plane?"

Heyoan: "Then enlightenment goes on in an¬
other way. We also are clearing ourselves and
moving toward God. There are an infinite num¬

ber of stages. For if you were to be carried from
one level of reality to the next to the next, you
would go into an infinite space. At this point
you can only go to a certain height because your
perception ability is not that broad. The more
enlightened one gets, the broader the percep¬
tion. There is really no end to it. Healing on the
higher levels becomes creativity.

"Your physical reality is now in transition
into the next phase, where transformation will
no longer focus on pain. Future transformation
and healing will encompass movement, music
and art in a creative way. Healing turns into cre¬
ativity as one moves into the light and holds it
within. As the darkness fades, the transforma¬
tion process becomes one of creativity rather
than of healing."

Chapter 26

HEALTH, A CHALLENGE
TO BE YOURSELF

This chapter focuses on specifics of self-care and
self-healing. The most important thing to learn
about your health is how to maintain it. In my
opinion, the most important principles to main¬
tain your health are the following:

1. Maintaining a deep connection to yourself
and your purpose in this life, both on the
personal level and the world level. This
means self-love and self-respect. (Chapters 3
and 26)

2. Understanding what health and healing
means to you and for you. (Chapters 14, 15
and 16)

3. Attending to yourself and taking care of
yourself. This means listening to inner guid¬
ance that tells you as soon as there is an im¬
balance somewhere and following through
on that guidance. (Chapters 1, 3, 17 and 19)

Taking Care of Yourself

To take good care of yourself, you need a daily
routine that includes meditation, exerdse, good
food, good hygiene, the right amount of rest for
you when it is needed, the right clothes, home,
pleasure, personal challenge, intimacy and
friends. Mix these with a good amount of love,
and you will reap great rewards. Your personal

needs will vary over the weeks and years. Be
flexible. What is right in one period may not be
in another. Rather than being told what regimen
you in particular need, it is most important for
you to determine that for yourself. That is what
the essence of heeding and good health is all
about: Self-responsibility and bringing the
power back home to the self. Here is a list of
self-care tips and healing exercises found in this
book. Remember, variety is the spice of life, and
personal growth thrives on change.

1. Meditation (Chapters 3, 17, 19 and 20). My
favorite meditation is one that was given by Em¬
manuel in a workshop that Pat, Emmanuel,
Heyoan and I gave. I call it the future/past medi¬
tation.

Sit comfortably, preferably with your back
straight. Pay attention to your breathing.
Breathe in and breathe out. With each inbreath,
breathe in the future, and all its potent possibili¬
ties. As you breathe out, breathe out the past
and all that went with it. Simply breathe in the
future and breathe out the past. For what you
breathe in is the future and what you breathe
out is the past. Let the past go. Breathe in the
future, and all that you wish to create. Breathe
out the past, and all those false limitations you
place upon yourself. The future does not have to
have anything to do with the past. Let the past
go. Continue to breathe in the future and
breathe out the past. See all of your past going

265

266 Hands of Light

out behind you, and the future coming to you.
See your past lifetimes flowing out behind you,
and your future lifetimes flowing toward you.
Breathe in the future and out the past. Watch
the flow of time and see yourself as the central
point of consciousness. You are the central point
of consciousness, and experience moves by you.
You sit in the center of reality. That you is un¬
changing. You exist outside the boundaries of
time. Now, in that moment between the in¬
breath of the future and the outbreath of the
past there is a pause. It is in that moment of
pause between breaths when you will slip into
the eternal now.

2. Physical exercises (Chapter 21). In addition
to these exercises there are lots of fitness centers
around the country now that offer aerobics,
nautilus, yoga and martial arts like t'ai chi. Do
you like to swim or jog? What gives you the
most pleasure? Do it.

3. Good food. This is not mentioned much in
this book. There are good diets listed in the
many diet books to be found in bookstores. I
recommend a diet that follows many of the rules
of the macrobiotic schools. Very little meat, or¬
ganic if you want it. I especially do not recom¬
mend red meat. Plenty of balanced grains,
vegetables, salads and some fruit. Eat what is in
season. According to season, the winter diet
leans more toward root vegetables and the sum¬
mer more toward fresh salads, vegetables and
fruits. Grains are needed all year round.

Be careful of the vitamins you take. Many
people have strong negative reactions to some of
the vitamins they take regularly, but don't know
it. If you are doing healing work, you will need
to supplement your diet with a good multi¬
mineral/multi-vitamin product and take extra
amounts of calcium, potassium, magnesium
and vitamin C. You may need some extra B vita¬
mins too. I am being purposely vague about
this, because each person's body needs vary.
You will want to find what you need to take, the
amount you need, when to take it and for how
long.

Pay attention to your food when you eat it.
Make it look appealing on the plate. Be aware

that the food is going into your body to nourish
you, give you energy and grow your cells. Chew
it, taste it and, most of all, enjoy it since food is
from the abundant earth.

For an experiment some time, follow the
food through your body once you swallow it.

Pay attention to your apestat, which is the
mechanism through which your body tells the
taste buds what it needs. That is different from
craving. What do you crave? Usually what you
crave is what you are allergic to. Don't eat it. In
three to ten days the craving will go away. Give
your body what it needs. Listen to its messages.
Of course if you crave one thing all the time,
then something is wrong. If you always want
sweet things, then find out why. You probably
haven't been feeding yourself properly, and
your body is making up for it by craving fast
energy.

Of course you know that many of the addi¬
tives used in food to preserve them are very bad
for you. Most of our foods also contain small
amounts of poisons from the pesticides, herbi¬
cides, fertilizers and chemicals found in the en¬
vironment. The best way to deal with this is to
eat only organically grown foods. Do not buy
processed foods with preservatives. Yes, organic
foods take longer to cook and cost more, but in
the long run you will save the money in medical
bills. Eat only fertile eggs.

If you cannot get organic vegetables and
eggs where you live, you can remove some of
the poisonous effect by soaking them in Clorox.
When you come home from the grocery store,
simply fill the sink with water, add one quarter
cup Clorox, and soak all your fresh produce and
eggs in it for twenty minutes. Rinse thoroughly,
wash off the dirt and put the food away. Also
use extra rinses, especially with dishes, to en¬
sure no detergent residues are being ingested
which can cause breakdowns of our defenses in
the digestive system.

Just remember, the fresher your food, the
healthier it is and the more life energy it has to
give you.

4. Good hygiene. Cleansing your body and car¬
ing for your skin, teeth and hair are important.
In cleansing your body use soaps or other skin

Health, a Challenge to Be Yourself 267

cleansers that are pH-balanced acid/alkali bal¬
anced for your skin. The skin has a natural acid
mantle that prevents infection. If you work
against that protection by using soaps and
creams that are alkaline, you will be working
against your body, rather than with it. Use a
shower brush on your skin when you shower.
This will help remove the old dead layer of skin
which your body sloughs off regularly to leave
room for the new cells to grow. Use a pH-
balanced skin lotion if you are in a dry climate.
It helps maintain the moisture in your skin. Use
natural, hypoallergenic and nontoxic soaps and
cosmetics whenever possible.

The same holds true for your hair. Don't use
rinses that leave heavy residue on the hair.
Make sure your shampoo is pH-balanced and is
nontoxic for you.

Be sure to floss your teeth once a day. Brush
your teeth at least twice a day. If you have gum
problems, use a mixture of 1 part salt to 8 parts
baking soda to brush with once a day.

5. Rest. The amount of rest you need is again a
personal thing. Are you a night or day person?
Listen to your body. When does your body need
rest? Does it like a full six to nine hours or
would it prefer less sleep time at night and naps
during the day? When you are tired, rest, no
matter what time of day it is. You will find that if
you lie down immediately, it will take only half
an hour or so to regain your energy again. Lis¬
ten to your body's needs. If you can't get a half
hour, try fifteen minutes. I bet you can find that
in your busy day.

6. Clothing. I have found that many synthetic
fabrics interfere with the natural energy flow of
the aura. These are acrylics, many polyesters
and nylon. Nylon stockings strongly interfere
with the energy flow up and down the legs and
are, in my opinion, related to many of the fe¬
male illnesses we have in our modem societies
now. I recommend that you only wear them
when you really must. Find substitutes. It is
best to avoid fabrics with aldehyde/
formaldehyde in them and made from petro¬
leum by-products—especially if you think you
might be hypersensitive.

Natural fibers have a strong positive effect
on the aura. They enhance and sustain it. Cot¬
tons, silks and wools are best. Fabrics that are
mixtures are also fine. 50% cotton fabrics are
great. Some synthetics seem to be fine also. My
body and energy field like rayon and some
things made of orlon, like socks.

When you look in the closet in the morning,
and there is "nothing to wear," it may be be¬
cause the color you need is not there. What
color do you need today? Your aura may be low
in a color, and you need to energize yourself
with that color by wearing it.

Stock your closet. Stock it with different tex¬
tures of clothes too. Have a variety of textures to
choose from, depending on how you feel that
day.

Does your style of clothes suit you, or do
you dress for others? Make sure what you wear
expresses who you are.

7. Home. Do you have the space and amount
of light you need? Is your home comfortable for
you? If you have time to care for them, plants
lend a nice healing energy to your space. Does
your home have the colors you need? Is the air
that you breathe fresh? If not, get an air ionizer/
precipitator. If you have fluorescent lights in
your home or workspace, get rid of them. Turn
them off. Use incandescent lights.

8. Pleasure. If you do not give yourself enough
time for pleasure, budget that time just as you
do your work time. Pleasure is just as important
as work. Do those things you always wanted to
do to have fun. Now is the time. Laugh regu¬
larly, discover the child in you and enjoy every
moment.

9. Personal challenge. Everyone has things they
have always wanted to do but put it off to next
year or assume they never can. Wrong assump¬
tion. This is the year. Whether it is a pleasure
trip, a creative challenge or a change in profes¬
sion, you really need to give yourself the chance
to at least try it. Is there a certain kind of work
you have always wanted to do? Check it out.
See what it would take and make a plan to deal
with this inner longing. Remember that your

268 Hands of Light

deepest inner longing, that which you want to do
more than anything, is precisely what you have come
into this life to do. Your best assurance of health is to
do it. Start now, explore what it would take and
begin. Even if it takes a long time to get there, if
you don't start out on the journey, you won't
reach the goal. If you do and continue to walk
toward it, you will. Your inner guidance will
guarantee it.

10. Intimacy and friends. We all need intimacy
and friends. Find what that means for you and
create it in your life. Make your own rules about
this. If there is someone you have always liked,
but haven't done anything about it because you
are too shy, take a chance. Tell that person you
like him or her and would like to be a friend.
You will be surprised how well that works. If it
doesn't, try another person.

11. Self-care in accident and illness. Before you
need one, find a local health care professional of
your choice. There are many available now, and
it is better to know what to do and where you
will go before you have to do it. Pick a physician
with whom you have a good rapport and whom
you really trust. There are healers, homeopaths,
naturopaths, acupuncturists, chiropractors,
masseuses, people that do kinesiology, nutri¬
tionists, etc.

For yourself, I suggest some courses on
home care or care of the family. Homeopathy is
a wonderful way for a woman or man to nurse
her or his own family back to health. I have
been using it for years and have found that in
practically every case I have encountered with
my children the right homeopathic remedy com¬
bined with a simple laying-on of hands did the
trick. I have treated all the typical child's prob¬
lems from strep throat to crunched fingers suc¬
cessfully with homeopathy.

12. The simple healing techniques I recommend
that you use for your family are the following:
Start with the chelation (Chapter 22). Everyone
can learn it. Then, after going through all the
chakras, put your hand directly on the place
that hurts. Sit in a state of love for the person
involved. It will make both of you feel wonder¬
ful.

If the area seems to be clogging up with en¬
ergy, you may want to pull some clogged stuff
out. Simply imagine your fingers growing three
inches longer and becoming filled with blue
light. Now reach into the place that is clogged
and scoop up handfuls of it and hold it up into
the air. Let it turn to white light. Since your fin¬
gers are now three inches longer than normal,
you can reach right through the skin and three
inches into the body. Go ahead, try it. It works,
and it is very easy.

Complete the healing by holding your hands
on your wife's/husband's/daughter's/son's head.
Then after a few minutes, comb their whole au¬
ric field with your long fingers. Make long
strokes from the head down to the toes holding
your hand about six inches away from the body.
Cover the whole body on all sides.

End by holding your hands in running water
for a while. Use a pleasant temperature.

If you are the one who is sick or has had an
injury, do as much of this for yourself as you
can. Get a friend to do it for you. If you have an
illness, each night when you go to bed put your
hands on that area. Send it love and energy. Vis¬
ualize yourself well and balanced. Ask what the
message is that is coming to you from your
body. Where and how have you not been listen¬
ing to yourself? What is the meaning of this in¬
jury or illness to you both on the personal level
and on the life task level? And most important,
love yourself, accept yourself. If you have a seri¬
ous illness, don't judge yourself for it. Love
yourself. You have the courage to make the mes¬
sage strong enough to hear. Y>u have decided to
face whatever it is that you need to face in order
to learn what it is you want to know. That is a
very courageous act. Respect yourself for it.
Love yourself. Love yourself. Love yourself. You
are a part of the Divine. You are one with God.
Here are two of Heyoan's self-healing medita¬
tions. They will help you:

Heyoan's Meditation
on Self-healing

1. "Scan your body in any way that you wish:
inner sight, intuition, feeling sense.

Health, a Challenge to Be Yourself 269

"Find the area of your body, with help of
your guide if you wish, that you are most
concerned about.

"If you do not find a problem area, you can
focus on something that is happening in
your life right now that you are concerned
about. Find the area in the body or life.

2. "If you wish, give it a form, color, substance,
shape, density. Is it sharp, dull? If it is a par¬
ticular pain, does it last a long time? Does it
ache? Is it sharp? Does it come and go?

"Is the situation in your life new? Old? How
do you feel when you are confronted with it
and what has your chronic or habitual re¬
sponse been? Consider any particular situa¬
tion that we arc; speaking of.

"Example: If there is a pain in your body,
what happens in your mind when you feel
it?

"Does your mind read and put terrible labels
on it?

"In the circumstances in your life, do you
feel anger or fear? Do you feel fear about
what is happening in your body? And what
do you do then with the response? What is
the habitual response that has (in a sense)
gotten you nowhere. You know the habitual
response doesn't work, because the pain is
still there. Especially if the pain is a chronic
one, the habitual response has not worked.
The message (the lesson, if you will) has not
gotten through. So, I would venture to say,
my dear, that whatever that response is, it is
completely wrong because it does not solve
the situation.

"Look at your life and your body—you have
fashioned it as a schoolroom in which to
learn, and any illness, any pain or any dis¬
ease is a message, a message to you to teach
you a lesson.

3. "So the next question I ask you is why
would you create such a pain in your body?

Why would you create such a situation in
your life? What is it that you can learn from
this? What is the situation or the pain saying
to you over and over again until you under¬
stand it? Or get it? For until you learn that
lesson you will continue to create the situa¬
tion, for you are your best teacher and you
have designed your lessons well and you
will not pass yourself into another lesson
until you have learned this one.

"If you have found that place in your body, I
would recommend that you put your hand
or hands there. Allow your greater con¬
sciousness to begin merging into that place
in your body. And as you do it, if you have
not already discovered it, find the nature of
the fear. When you have sensed the essence
of the nature of that fear, I recommend that
you feel it with love. What kind of love is
most suitable for this fear? Do this for any
area of your life or area of your body. Any
illness you have is a direct result and any
negative experience in your life is a direct
result of the fact that you have not fully
loved yourself—you have not fully followed
what you wish to do. How have you not
harkened to that inner voice? How have you
not let yourself be fully who you are? Any
illness is a direct message to you that tells you
how you have not been loving who you are, cher¬
ishing yourself in order to be who you are. This
is the basis of all healing.

4. "Another clue: The lesson is never ever
about something you have done wrong or
something bad about you.

5. "And so, having found the answer, you will
immediately find, most likely, pain and fear
when you have blocked yourself from doing
what you have really desired to do. And at
that point the Choice is to face the fear and
allow yourself to feel it and to work with it in
your life. For whenever there is fear, there
has been then the absence of love, for fear is
the opposite of love. So wherever there is
fear, you can be sure you are not in truth,
and most likely what you fear is not real, but
illusion. For you are not centered, you are

270 Hands of Light

not within the wholeness of your being
when you are afraid. When you take courage
to step into that fear you begin the healing
process on a new level.

"Homework before going to bed:

1. List your fears.

What do you fear?

Perhaps it will focus on your body.
Perhaps it will focus on your life situa¬
tion.

Perhaps they are general fears.

2. "Connect that fear with circumstances in
your life. Fear is always directly related to
something you are not doing that you
want to do. It blocks you from your great¬
ness and is also the doorway to it.

Make a list that says:

How You Have Not
Life Loved Yourself—

Fears Situations What/How You Wish To Be

"What does this all have to do with the aura?
It can be seen in the aura. There is form and
substance to these things. When you open
your perceptions wider you will be able to
look at people and see how they have not
loved themselves. And then you as a healer
will be the link to help them remember who
they are and help them love themselves. You
as a healer become love."

Meditation to Dissolve
Self-Limitations

"This is a good meditation for those who find
themselves confined in areas of their life in
which they do not wish to be confined. It is
good for self-exploration, good for practice of
healership, because illness is nothing but a

result of confining oneself within limited defini¬
tions of self. As a healer, you must be able to
first understand that process in yourself to sense
it in others—to help them define it and to help
them release those boundaries.

"All of these things have their form in the
auric field. They are energy and consciousness
that limits you. And thus while working with
the aura and healing, you can directly work on
the energetic form that is the substance of the
limitation.

1. Lift yourself to an expanded state.

2. Drop in the question: Who am I?

3. When you find an answer, search for a limi¬
tation that you have placed upon yourself by
the simple definition of who you are. When
you find that limitation, know that it is a
boundary you have placed upon yourself.

4. Throw that limitation outside the boundary,
and thus the boundary grows.

5. Again drop in the question, Who am I?
Whatever the answer will be, it will give you
another definition of self.

6. Separate out the Essence from the limited
definition.

7. Throw the limitation outside the boundary,
expand again.

8. Ask the question again, etc.

"Practice this meditation regularly during the
next coming week. No, I will not define Es¬
sence. It is something that you will define in the
exercise."

If you wish to become a healer, you can.
Your first challenge is to heal yourself. Focus on
that, then focus on finding ways to help others
heal themselves. This will lead you to your de¬
velopment as a healer. In the next chapter I will
talk about what that road may be like.

Health, a Challenge to Be Yourself 271

Chapter 26 Review

Food For Thought

1. Grade yourself on a scale of 1-10 on the
eleven self-care points listed in this chapter,
starting with (1) Meditation.

2. For the points where you gave yourself a low

score, find your lower self or shadow self re¬
action that blocks you. What is the belief and
limited conclusion that this reaction is based
on?

3. Relate this to an imbalanced chakra or cha¬
kras.

4. Do Heyoan's meditation for self-healing.

5. Do Heyoan's meditation to dissolve self¬
limitations.

Chapter 27

THE DEVELOPMENT OF A HEALER

Becoming a healer is a very individual and per¬
sonal process. There are no set rules on how
that should happen. Everyone's life is unique.
No one can bestow healership upon another. It
is something that grows from the inside. There
are many courses to take, a lot of technical mate¬
rial to study and different schools of thought as
to what is really happening in the healing proc¬
ess. Some do not call their practices spiritual at
all.

My path to healership was guided along the
spiritual way, which was most natural for me.
What is most natural for you? Walk your own
path, not the well-formed trail. You can take
what you choose from the well-formed trail and
use it to support and help you create your new
ideas. My guide Heyoan has made the following
comment about becoming a healer.

Dedication

"To become a healer means dedication. Not to
any specific spiritual practice, religion, or set of
rigid rules, but dedication to your particular
path of truth and love. This means that your
practice of that truth and love will probably
change as you travel through your life. There are
many roads to 'Heaven/ I dare say, as many as
there are souls returning home. If we were to
search throughout the history of the human be¬
ing, we would find many who have traveled be¬
fore us and found enlightenment. Many of
those particular ways that were traveled are no

longer known by the human race at this time in
history. Some are being recovered; others are
still lost. But no matter, for new ways are contin¬
ually being formed from the depths of the hu¬
man soul, from wherever each soul is at any
moment, to provide a way home. You see, my
dear, this is the process. It is the ever renewing
process of the creative force welling up inside of
you and everyone else. It is what coming home
is all about. When you learn to flow completely,
without resistance, with that inner creative
movement, then you are home. This is what be¬
ing home is."

Tests

As soon as you decided to dedicate yourself to
your true path and make that the central priority
of your life, you become aware of an overall
process taking place in your life. This life proc¬
ess carries you through inner landscapes that
change the nature of your personal reality. You
begin to see cause and effect relationships be¬
tween your inner personal reality and the
"outer" world.

I was carefully led (by my higher self and
guides) through a step-by-step process which
was designed to help me learn spiritual law. I
spent fairly long periods of time concentrating
on and learning about the nature of truth. Di¬
vine will and love. After a period of time con¬
centrating on one of these principles, I felt as if I
was being tested. I continually found myself in

273

274 Hands of Light

situations where it was very difficult to stay with
the truth, love, or to even have much of an idea
as to what Divine will might be. At times it ap¬
peared that my guides, the angels or God was
testing me, and I couldn't do much about it.
Eventually, I could see that these tests are de¬
signed (with my full agreement) by a conscious¬
ness much greater than mine. I am part of that
greater consciousness. Ultimately then, in a
sense, I design the tests. The small "ego-me"
usually wants no part of it. The wiser part of me
knows better.

The first thing you will face after committing
yourself to your path is your fear.

Dealing with Fear

Fear is the emotion that is associated with being
disconnected from the greater reality. Fear is the
emotion of separation. Fear is the opposite of
love, which is being connected to the unity of all
things.

Exercise to Find Your Fears

Ask yourself: What is my worst fear at this time
in my life? What assumptions about reality is
that fear based on? What really is so terrible
about that happening? Whatever you try to
avoid is related to your fear of feeling the emo¬
tions involved. What are they? Deep inside you
is a place where you know you can face and go
through anything.

If you look within, you will feel your de¬
mand that you do not have to experience what¬
ever it is you fear. However, if you let go and
surrender to your Divine Spark, you will see
that you probably need to face it. As you go
through the feared experience, your fear will
transform into loving compassion. This includes
the experience of dying. For, as Emmanuel says:

It is not a matter of
destroying fear,
but of knowing its nature
and of seeing it as a less
powerful force
than the power of love.

It is illusion.

Fear

is only looking in the mirror
and making faces
at oneself.

When looking back at my path, I can see
clear patterns of development. I was not so
aware of the greater pattern when it was hap¬
pening. I spent most of the time being aware of
the issues at hand in each moment.

Truth

When I first moved to the Phoenicia Pathwork
Center and began to practice "the Pathwork" in
the form of private sessions, groups and partici¬
pation as a member of a spiritual community, I
found myself immediately faced with the issue
of the truth. Was I speaking the truth, or was I
convincing myself of a certain reality for my
convenience? I was stunned at how I rational¬
ized myself into believing things to validate my
behavior and explain unpleasant experiences in
my life. My major defense was to blame some¬
one else. How much do you do this? Look for
the subtle ways, not the obvious ones.

Slowly, after examining your behavior you
will see that cause and effect works in much
clearer ways then you thought, and that you, in
fact, are creating those negative experiences in
some way or another. This is a tough one to
face. Buried under these painful creations, you
will find an intent to actually live your life that
way. This is called "negative intent." My nega¬
tive intent was based on two things. One was a
belief system that life is basically hard, a lot of
work and painful. This belief system is not just
general, but it is very specific for each person.

Exercise to Find Your
Negative Beliefs

For example, fill in the following sentences for

yourself. "All men are_All women

are_In a relationship I will be hurt

The Development of a Healer 275

the following ways_Maybe I will

get sick and die of_I will be ripped-

off in the following ways_I will lose

__ if I don't__." The other

thing my negative intent was based on was neg¬
ative pleasure; that is, I actually enjoyed nega¬
tive experiences.

Warning, don't fool yourself, no matter how
many workshops you have attended and how
much you have worked on yourself, you will
benefit from answering the questions. We all
have these patterns, though they may not be as
overt as they were before.

Everyone does this on some level of her per¬
sonality. For example, by blaming someone else
for your problems (mother, father, wife or hus¬
band), you have the pleasure of being the "good
one," while they are the "bad ones." Negative
pleasure has many variations and forms. You
can actually feel the pleasure in being hurt, in
being sick or in being a loser. Most of us repeat
patterns of being victimized because as the vic¬
tim we always receive a secondary gain. To ex¬
plain why we haven't succeeded, we pretend
we are the good ones that could have made it in
life if only someone else had not messed it up.
Hear your pleasure in why you can't do some¬
thing. Statements like, "I wanted to do it, but
my mother/father/wife/husband wouldn't let
me, or my back was too sore, or I didn't have
time because I have to work so much." These are
all excuses that contain a lot of negative plea¬
sure. Listen to yourself the next time you ex¬
plain why you haven't done something. Are you
in truth?

Why would we, as humans, behave this
way? Let us look at the etiology of negative plea¬
sure.

Negative pleasure is distorted natural or pos¬
itive pleasure. Negative pleasure is based on
separation. Positive pleasure is based on unity.
It does not in any way separate you from others.
Positive pleasure comes from your center or
core. It flows from deep within and seeks to cre¬
ate. It flows with movement and energy which
are pleasurable. Negative pleasure is created
when the original creative impulse flowing with
movement and energy from the core gets dis¬
torted or twisted and partially blocked in some

way. This happens primarily through early
childhood experiences which are crystallized
into our personalities. For example, a child
reaches for the pretty bright red burner on the
kitchen stove. The mother slaps away the hand
before it is burned. The pleasure impulse is
stopped. The child cries. The union of pain and
pleasure begins in a way as simple as this.

There are many other much more compli¬
cated experiences in childhood that link the neg¬
ative experience with pleasure. We are
constantly being told we cannot be who we are,
we cannot let our life force flow. Our choice is to
opt for negative pleasure, because it is con¬
nected to the original life impulse. We still feel
the life impulse. Even if the pleasure is negative,
it is still life; it is better than no movement and
no energy, which is death. Our distorted plea¬
sure impulse becomes habitual as we grow up.

In a sense, each time we distort our pleasure
impulse and do not allow ourselves to be who
we are, we die a small death. The purification
process is then to resurrect ourselves from each
of those small deaths and to regain the full flow¬
ing pleasure of energy, movement and con¬
sciousness which enhances our creative force.

I spent the first two years of living at the
Phoenicia Pathwork Center being meticulously
honest with myself, finding and separating out
the negative pleasure from the positive, finding
just how I created the negative experiences in
my life, and why. I looked for the faulty beliefs
or misconceptions on which my actions were
based.

Doing this will completely change your per¬
spective of reality as it did for me. If you are,
after all, responsible for creating negative experi¬
ences in your life, then you can change and cre¬
ate positive ones. It will work. It did for me, and
old problems began to clear away.

Divine Will

After two years of concentrating mostly on liv¬
ing by the truth as much as possible, I realized I
was having trouble with my will. The way I
used my will was creating problems in my life. It
was unsteady. I would change my decisions

276 Hands of Light

about things. I found many levels of "wanting"
or will issues inside. All of us have these. They
are from the defended self and are often found
in the will of the inner child, the teenager, or the
young adult. Most of these wills are rather de¬
manding. Out wills need to grow up. Deep in¬
side of us there exists a spark of the Divine will,
God's will. Many people experience Divine will
as outside of themselves. This means they must
always find someone else to tell them what to
do. This leads to a feeling of worthlessness. I
have found that a spark of Divine will exists
within every human being. It is essential that
you allow yourself time to search for it inside
yourself until you find it. It is there, you are not
the exception. What does it mean to follow
God's will anyway? It certainly doesn't mean to
follow God's will as defined by an outer author¬
ity. I decided to find out. I realized that I needed
to align all the little wills inside with the spark
of Divine will inside. I decided the best way to
do this (for me) was to develop a positive use of
my will by committing it to a daily practice.

I found a beautiful commitment from the
Guide Lectures (lectures coming through the
channel of Eva Pierrakos (1957-80), upon which
the Pathwork is based). It stated:

I commit myself to the will
of God.

I give my heart and soul to God.

I deserve the best in Life.

I serve the best cause in Life.

I am a divine manifestation
of God.

Each day, several times a day, I made this
commitment. I did this every day for two years,
until it became apparent to me that I was pretty
good at finding the Divine will inside.

Emmanuel said, "Your will and God's will
are the same . . . when something brings you
joy and fulfillment, it is the will of God speaking
through your own heart."

Examine your use of will. How much do you
"should" yourself according to an external set of
morals? How often do you listen and follow
your heart's desire? As you align yourself with
your Divine will, you may find it is time to con¬
centrate on loving as I did.

Love

Many of us have a very narrow view of what
love is. As I spent the next two years concentrat¬
ing on giving love in whatever way I could in
whatever way it was needed, I found many
forms of love, all of them saying: "I care for your
well-being in any way I can"; "I honor your soul
and respect your light"; "I support and trust
your integrity and light as a fellow traveler along
the way of life." You begin to learn that giving is
receiving, is giving, is receiving.

The hardest is to learn self-love. If you do
not infuse yourself with love, how can you give
it to others? Self-love takes practice. We all need
it. Self-love comes from living in ways that do
not betray yourself. It comes by living by your
truth.

Self-love needs to be practiced. Here are a
couple of simple exercises that will challenge
you.

Find the thing that is easiest for you to love,
like a small flower, a tree, an animal or a work of
art. Then simply sit with it and give it your pre¬
cious love. After doing so a number of times,
see if you can extend a bit of that precious love
of yours to yourself. Anyone having such a pre¬
cious gift as that love of yours is certainly worth
loving.

Another exercise is to sit in front of the mir¬
ror for ten minutes and love that person that
you see there. Do not be critical of her. We are
all so good at looking in the mirror and finding
every little flaw. That is not allowed here; only
positive compliments are allowed in this exer¬
cise. If you want a real challenge, every time you
criticize yourself, start all over. See if you can
make it to ten minutes without one criticism.

Faith

As I look back on it, after the completion of that
six-year period, great changes had taken place
within me. A great deal of the time, I was
aligned with a strong faith in the benign abun¬
dance of the universe. You can do this too. By
constantly trying to let go of your demanding
will, align it with Divine will, to find the truth in

The Development of a Healer 277

any situation and to respond with love in that
situation, you will develop faith—faith in your¬
self, faith in spiritual law, faith in the unity of
the universe, faith that whatever happens in
your life could be a stepping stone to greater
understanding, love and growth, and ultimately
self-purification toward the light of God.

Faith means carrying on with your truth
when all the outer signs that come to you tell
you that it couldn't possibly be true, but deep
inside, you know it is. This does not mean blind
belief. It means to keep aligned with your intent
to become aware of and follow through with the
truth and love as best you can, even though you
feel terrible.

When he was on the cross, Christ had the
faith to acknowledge that he no longer felt his
faith. He exclaimed, "Father, why hast thou for¬
saken me?" He was being meticulously honest
with himself. In that moment, he had lost his
faith. He did not hide this fact or try to change it
into something else. He loved himself by hon¬
estly expressing his dilemma. Later, he regained
his faith when he stated, "Father, into your
hands I commit my soul."

I have seen that people of a spiritual path go
through stages of faith. At first they begin to
learn the connections of cause and effect. They
find that a positive belief and positive actions
bring positive rewards. Their dreams begin to be
fulfilled. They begin establishing faith within
themselves. "It works!" They exclaim with de¬
light. However, after a while, they are ready to
test their faith from a deeper level. They are
probably not aware of this inner decision to test
themselves because that would change the na¬
ture of the test. What happens? All outer verifi¬
cation of the process of positive cause and effect
seem to disappear from life for awhile. Things
start going wrong. The positive feedback wanes,
and the person begins to waver. The old pessi¬
mism rears its ugly head. Where is spiritual law?
"Perhaps it was a Pollyannaish view of the uni¬
verse after all." This will probably happen to
you, too.

When this happens in your life, it is a sign of
greater growth. You begin to deal with much
longer-term cause and effect, both in your own
life and ultimately in your own life as part of the

evolution of the human race. The reward for liv¬
ing in truth becomes the pleasure of life in each
moment you live it. No waiting for the spiritual
goody. You are receiving it right now. Being in
the here and now means accepting the slow
process of human evolution, accepting your im¬
mediate limitations as perfection.

Dealing with Time

Faith helped me deal with something I have al¬
ways had trouble with: doing things in time. I
once asked my Mom what was the thing she
remembered me having the most trouble with
when I was growing up. She said, "Whenever
you wanted something, you had to have it right
away"

In these past few years, I have been learning
patience, and I am finally beginning to under¬
stand what it is about for me. Here is a thought
that may work for you too. Having patience is a
direct statement of faith in the Divine plan. It is the
acceptance that everything is right for you as it
is now, for you have created it this way. It means
also that you can change what exists now
through your own efforts of transformation. Im¬
patience ultimately means that you do not believe that
you can create what you want. It means lack of faith
in the self and the Divine plan. It takes time to
manifest what you wish on the physical plane.
To help me accept that reality, I developed the
following affirmation: "I want to honor my com¬
mitment to being on the physical plane by hon¬
oring the time that it takes to accomplish things
here." The apparent slowness between cause
and effect that is built into this plane is here for
a reason. We need to be able to see dearly the
cause and effect connections in relationships
that we do not understand. These relationships
are ultimately between parts of ourselves that
are not yet unified.

Power

At one point in my training in healing, I had a
sudden increase in the power flowing through
my hands. It came with what appeared to me to

278 Hands of Light

be a new set of guides. I was working on a per¬
son's infected toe. I would hold my hands a cer¬
tain way, which would send very strong
blue-silver light streaking through the toe. My
hands were about one inch away from the toe.
The patient would cry out in pain when I did
this because of the increased energy flow. When
I moved my hands differently, I could make a
soft white cloudy energy come out of my hands.
This would take all the pain away. The guides
kept directing me to switch between the two. I
was tired, and every fifteen minutes or so the
guides directed me to go to work on this
woman. There seemed to be an urgency about
it. The results of the little healings were power¬
ful. No infection, and no need to operate. I was
ecstatic, and told my healing teacher. I said, "C.,
there was so much power flowing through me!"
Her answer was, "Well, that is it; do you want to
heal with love or with power?" I decided I was
not ready to have that much power flowing
through me. I enjoyed it too much in a "Wow!
Look at me!" kind of way. I sent the guides
away. I didn't work with them until two years
later. Then I was ready. I had learned a great
deal more about love. Later I understood that it
was the spiritual surgeons from the fifth level
who were working with me.

Faith based on truth. Divine will, and love
brings power. Power that stems from deep
within the individual, from the Divine spark
within. Power is the result of aligning with, con¬
necting to, and allowing the Divine spark of life
within to flow. It comes from the core of the in¬
dividual, or what my guide Heyoan calls the
Holy of Holies. Having power means to be
seated within the center of one's being.

Power brings you the ability to be in and to
practice unconditional love. This means return¬
ing all that comes to you with love, without be¬
traying the self. You can only do this by loving
yourself first and being in truth. That means be¬
ing honest with yourself as to what you feel,
and committing yourself to move through that
place to another place of loving. You see, if you
deny the negative reactions you have by push¬
ing them down, you are not loving yourself or
others. If you feel and acknowledge them in
some way, you then make room for your love to

flow. You release yourself to move to a loving
place inside. Unconditional love allows the
action of grace in our lives.

Grace

With the practices of Truth, Divine will and
Love leading to Faith which leads to power, we
make room for the action of. Grace to come into
our life. Grace is received by letting go to Divine
Wisdom and is experienced as Bliss. It is experi¬
encing the unity in all things and our complete
safety no matter what happens. It is the state of
knowing that every experience we have, includ¬
ing pleasurable and painful experiences like ill¬
ness and death are simply lessons we create for
ourselves along the pathway back home to God.
It is living in synchronicity. Emmanuel said.

The state of Grace
needs the recipient
in order to be complete.

You are held in the hand of God
and totally loved.

And when that love can
be received

the circuit is completed.

Who Is Healed?

The healer must remember that it is the healing
of the soul that we are working for. It is impor¬
tant for healers to understand death in this way
and to treat the whole person, not just this in¬
carnation of the person. The healer must not
give up healing someone simply because he
may be physically dying.

It is important to keep two things in mind
when we are trying to understand just what we
are doing as healers. One is that there is deep
meaning in each person's experience of his ill¬
ness, and two is that death does not imply fail¬
ure, but probably healing. In order to remember
this, the healer must live in two worlds, the
spiritual and the physical. It is only by being
centered within herself and the universe that

The Development of a Healer 279

she can go through the experiences of contin¬
ually witnessing the deep pain that is so wide¬
spread in humanity. I asked my friend
Emmanuel about this with the following ques¬
tion: "If we create our illness, isn't going to a
healer a way to distract us from working on our¬
selves, working on the source of the disease?"

Emmanual said, "That all depends on why
you go to the healer, and which healer you go
to. That is an excellent question, and one, may I
dare say, that our healer has asked herself a lot.
What is the responsibility and, therefore, what
is to be given and what is to be received, and if
something is envisioned, is it to be said? The
questions never end, and yet there is a basic
fundamental reality that should give you com¬
fort. When there is the moment of realization
that perhaps there is another mode of healing,
then already a door has been opened, already
the consciousness has reached beyond the phys¬
ically manifested available medical care. Now, I
am not in any way degrading the medical pro¬
fession. Doctors do excellent work; some are
most guided and would be free to admit it to
you behind closed doors. There are others who,
whether they be in the medical profession or an¬
other form of making a living, simply are not
aware and are not at this point able to be aware.
This does not mean that they are mean, cruel,
vicious or evil; it simply means that they have
yet to come into the area of knowing. It be¬
hooves you to be willing to bless them and go
on your way and find someone who feels more
compatible with your consciousness, and you all
know how to do that. When you find the calling
to move into the area of spiritual healing (I do
not say psychic healing; I say spiritual healing),
then there is the awareness of spirit, and you are
welcomed by the healer and the spirits who are
there to work with that healer. Now often there
is not the healing that is expected. Often there
is, perhaps, identification and easing of discom¬
fort, but no miracle. Well, what does that mean?
It means that is as far as your consciousness will
go at that point. It means that there is some¬
thing else to learn; there is something else to
know. For every physical body is a schoolroom,
and every disease is a lesson. Not in a punitive
way, for you have written your own text; you

have chosen your own bodies that carry with
them all of the weaknesses that, yes, may be
said are genetic because your grandmother or
grandfather had something. But remember you
chose them as well. So you need to trust your
body not only in illness, but especially in ill¬
ness, for what is it saying to you? There are
many ways of hearing this, and a qualified spir¬
itual healer can be most effective there, to help
you hear what it is that your body is saying to
you. Certainly you are the one who is able best
to understand it for it is within your language
that your body has been formed, and it is to
you, directly, that it is speaking. But a spiritual
healer can alter that consciousness to the one¬
ness again and can bring you into alignment
with the truth. Whether you are able to sustain
that truth or whether you are able to heal an
ailing body at that moment depends on so many
factors that I could not even begin to enumerate
them now. But you, yourselves, are perfectly ca¬
pable of doing that. If there is, ultimately, what
in your human terms is a failure—if someone
would, heaven forbid, die—then you must see it
all as a blessed event. That soul has completed
its task, and there is a great and joyous welcom¬
ing committee greeting it in the primary reality.
After all, your physical being was not meant to
be infinite. You are not here to sit in these
clothes forever. I hope that pleases you. There¬
fore, there are no failures in spiritual healing;
there are only steps. Never be afraid to put your
hand on another with love and compassion.
Never hesitate to pray for someone. Do not de¬
mand results, for there is no way of knowing for
sure what a particular soul requires. I under¬
stand that this demands, or seems to demand,
an incredible amount of faith. Yes, it does."

As the body and mind become more puri¬
fied through the transformative processes de¬
scribed in this book, the amount of power
flowing through the healer increases and so
does the range of vibrations. The higher the
power, the more effective the healing, and the
more sensitive the healer.

Each time I have been given new insight and
power, this insight came after a self-initiated
test.

To go through such tests, one must be metic-

280 Hands of Light

ulously honest with the self. It is in the little
self-delusions where we tend to avoid looking at
our own lower seifs intent or actions that we
betray our integrity and decrease our power
from within. Each test is related to whatever is¬
sues we are dealing with in our lives at the
present time; we design our tests well, so that
when we have learned, there is no question
about graduation.

Exercises to Find

Your Readiness to Be a Healer

How truthful am I? How well do I use my will in
alignment with the universal will? How do I use
power? How well do I love? Can I give uncondi¬
tional love? Do I respect the authority of those to
whom I have chosen to give authority in order
to learn from them? Can I do this without sell¬
ing out my own inner authority? How do I be¬
tray my integrity? What is it that I long for?
What do I wish to create in my life? What are
my limitations as a woman, as a man, as a hu¬
man being, as a healer? Do I respect the integ¬
rity, the personal power, the will and the choices
of my patients? Do I see myself as a channel that
evokes the power from within the patient so that
they are healing themselves ultimately? What is
my personal stake in having someone get well?
Do I see death as a failure?

Exercise to Consider the
Nature of Healing

What is a healer?

What is a healing?

What is the main purpose of
a healing?

What is giving a healing?

Who heals?

Who is healed?

Heyoan has recently said, "Now, dear
reader, do not set judgment upon yourself from
the above questions. We are all walking a path of
purification, and love is the most healing agent

of all. Do not reject yourself, saying you can
never do all of this. You can and you will. It is
simply a matter of accepting where and who
you are now as perfect in your imperfections.
We of the spirit world hold you in great honor
and respect. You have chosen to become physi¬
cal beings as a great gift not only to yourselves,
but to the physically manifest universe as well.
Your personal changes toward health and
wholeness affect those around you, not only
those within your immediacy but all those senti¬
ent beings upon the face of the earth; indeed the
earth herself. You are all children of the earth.
You are of her; she is of you. Never forget that,
for as we move more and more into planetary
consciousness in the near future, you will be¬
come leaders of this great adventure into the
light. Above all, love and honor yourselves as
we honor you. After all we are in the presence
of the Divine when we are with you. You are
fully held in the arms of God and loved. Know
this, and you shall be home free."

When you understand that life is experi¬
enced as a pulsation, you expand and feel joy¬
ous, you move into the silence of peace, and
then you contract. Many people experience that
contraction as negative. Many of you will experi¬
ence wonderous joy, like being in the company
of angels during a workshop, or a healing. So
will the patient. But remember, by the very nat¬
ure of the expanded high energy state, you will
later contract, and feel more of the separated
consciousness that is inside of you. The sheer
force and intensity of the spiritual energy
knocks loose and begins to enlighten the stag¬
nated dark soul substance. As it comes back to
life again, you experience it as real. All of its
pain, anger, and agony. You may say to yourself.
"Why now I'm worse than I was before I
started." Let me assure you that this not true.
You are more sensitive. After experiencing these
ups and downs, these expansions and contrac¬
tions many times for each personal issue, you
will find that they do clear away. Months later
you will say, "Wow! I don't do that any more."
And you will weep with joy, just as you did the
first several times you came back into and expe¬
rienced the light. Remember, patience is the
word of faith.

The Development of a Healer 281

Chapter 27 Review

1. What are the main personal attributes a
healer must develop to remain clear?

2. What are life tests all about?

Food For Thought

3. What has your personal process of purifica¬
tion been to bring you to where you are now
on your path?

4. Are you ready to be a healer? On what levels?

5. In what area of your being would you be
most likely to misuse the power you have as

a healer? What is your lower self or shadow
self intent there? Upon what erroneous belief
is that intent based? How can you heal that
part of yourself, and realign yourself with
your inner Divine will?

6. Answer the questions under the heading
"Exercise to Find Your Fears."

7. Answer the questions under the heading
"Exercise to Find Your Negative Beliefs."

8. Do the self love exercise under the heading
"Love"

9. Answer the questions under the heading
"Exercise to Find Your Readiness to Be a
Healer."

Bibliography

Allen R., "Studies into Human Energy Fields Promises
Better Drug Diagnosis/' Electronic Design News, April
1974, Vol. 17, pp.

Anderson, Lynn, The Medicine Woman. New York,
Harper & Row, 1982,

Anonymous, Etheric Vision and What It Reveals.
Oceanside, Calif., The Rosicrudan Fellowship, 1965.

Anonymous, Some Unrecognized Factors in Medicine.
London, Theosophical Publishing House, 1939.

Bagnall, O., The Origins and Properties of the Human
Aura. New York, University Books, Inc., 1970.

Bailey, A. A., Esoteric Healing. London, Lucis Press, Ltd.,
1972.

Becker, R. O., Bachman, C., and Friedman, H., "The
Direct Current Control System" New York State Journal
of Medicine, April 15, 1962, pp.

Beesely, R. R, The Robe of Many Colours. Kent, The
College of Psycho-therapeutics, 1969.

Bendit, P. D., and Bendit, L. J., Man Incarnate. London,
Theosophical Publishing House, 1957.

Bentov, I., Stalking the Wild Pendulum. New York,
Bantam Books, 1977.

Besant, A., and Leadbeater, C, W., Thought-Forms.

Weaton, Ill., Theosophical Publishing House, 1971.
Blavatsky, H. R, The Secret Doctrine. Wheaton, Ill.,
Theosophical Publishing House, 1888.

Bohm, David, The Implicate Order. London, Routledge &
Kegan Paul, 1981.

Brennan, B., Function of the Human Energy Field in the
Dynamic Process of Health, Health and Disease. New

York, Institute for the New Age, 1980.

Bruyere, Rosalyn, Personal Communication. Glendale,
Calif. Healing Light Center, 1983.

Bruyere, Rosalyn, Wheels of Light. Glendale, Calif.,
Healing Light Center, 1987.

Burks, A. J., The Aura. Lakemont, Georgia, CSA Printers
& Publishers, 1962.

Butt, H. S., Musselman, L. K., Barton, D. S., and Kelly, N.
B., "Bioelectric Correlates of Human Ovulation". Yale
Journal of Biology and Medicine, 1937, Vol, 10, pp.
155-160.

Burr, H. S., and Lane, C. T., "Electrical Characteristics of
Living Systems " Yale Journal of Biology and Medicine,
1935, \bl. 8, pp. 31-35.

Burr, H. S., "Electrometries of Atypical Growth" \^le
Journal of Biology and Medicine, 1952, Vol. 25, pp. 67-
75.

Burr, H. S., and Northrop, F. S. G., "The Electro-Dynamic
Theory of Life," Quarterly Review of Biology, 1935, Vol.
10, pp. 322-333.

Burr. H. S., and Northrop, F. S. G., "Evidence for the
Existence of an Electrodynamic Field in the Living
Organisms." Proceedings of the National Academy of
Sciences of the United States of America, 1939, Vol. 24,
pp. 284-288.

Burr, H. S., The Fields of Life: Our Links with the
Universe. New York, Ballantine Books, 1972.

Burr, H. S., "The Meaning of Bio-Electric Potentials"
Journal of Biology and Medicine, 1944, Vol. 16, pp.
353-360.

Butler, W. E., How to Read the Aura, New York, Samuel
Weiser, Inc., 1971.

Capra, Frit} of, The Tao of Physics. Berkeley, Shambhala,
1975.

Cayce, Edgar, Auras. Virginia Beach, Virginia, ARE Press,
1945.

Cohen, Dr. David, Interview with The New York Times,
April 20, 1980.

De La Warr, G., Matter in the Making. London, Vincent
Stuart Ltd., 1966.

Dobrin, R., Conaway (Brennan), B., and Pierrakos, J.,
"Instrumental Measurements of the Human Energy
Field" New York, Institute for the New Age, 1978.
Presented at "Electro '78, IEEE Annual Conference,
Boston, May 23-25, 1978.

Dobrin, R., and Conaway (Brennan) B., "New Electronic
Methods for Medical Diagnosis and Treatment Using
the Human Energy Field." Presented at Electro '78, IEEE
Conference, Boston, May 23-25, 1978.

Dumitrescu, I., "Electronography." Electronography Lab,
Romania. Presented at Electro '78, IEEE Annual
Conference, Boston, May 23-25, 1978.

Eddington, Arthur The Philosophy of Physical Science.
Ann Arbor, University of Michigan Press, 1958.

Emmanuel, Quote from a guide coming through my
friend, Pat Rodegast, during a workshop we were
running at the Phoenicia Rathwork Center, Phoenicia,
New York, July 1983.

"Experimental Measurements of the Human Energy Field."
Energy Research Group, New York, 1973.

283

284 Hands of Light

"High Frequency Model for Kirlian Photography" Energy
Research Group, New York, 1973.

Gerber, J., Communication with the Spirit World of God.
Teaneck, New Jersey, Johannes Gerber Memorial
Foundation, 1979.

Hodson, G., Music Forms. London, The Theosophical
Publishing House, 1976.

Hunt, Dr. Valorie, Massey, W., Weinberg, R., Bruyere, R.,
and Hahn, R, "Project Report, A Study of Structural
Integration from Neuromuscular, Energy Field, and
Emotional Approaches" U.C.L.A., 1977.
lnyushin, V. M., and Chekorov, P. R., "Biostimulation
Through Laser Radiation of Bioplasma" Kazakh State
University, USSR. Translated by Hill and Ghosak,

. University of Copenhagen, 1975,

lnyushin, V. M., "On the Problem of Recording the
Human Biofield " Parapsychology in the USSR, Part II,
San Francisco, Calif., Washington Research Center,

1981.

lnyushin, V. M., Seminar paper, Alma-Ata, USSR, 1969.
Jaffe, Dr. Lionel, Interview with The New York Times,
April 20, 1980.

Karagulla, Schafica, Breakthrough to Creativity. Los
Angeles, De Vorss, 1967.

Kilner, Walter J., M.D., The Human Aura, {retitled and
new edition of The Human Atmosphere) New Hyde
Park, New York, University Books, 1965.

Krieger, D., The Therapeutic Touch. Englewood Cliffs,
N.J., Prentice-Hall, 1979.

Krippner, S., and Ruhin, D., (eds.). The Energies of
Consciousness. New York, Gordon and Breach, 1975.
Kunz, Dora, and Peper, Erik, "Fields and Their Clinical
Implications." The American Theosophist, December

1982, pp. .

Leadbeater, C. W., The Chakras. London, Theosophical
Publishing House, 1974.

Leadbeater, C. W., The Science of the Sacraments.

London, Theosophical Publishing House, 1975.
Leibnitz, Gottfreid, Monadology and Other Philosophical
Essays, trans. by Paul Schrecker and Ann Schrecker.
Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1965.

Le Shan, L., The Medium, the Mystic, and the Physicist.

New York, Ballantine Books, 1966.

Lowen, A., Physical Dynamics pf Character Structure.

New York, Grune & Stratton, 1958.

Mann, W. E., Orgone, Reich and Eros. New York, Simon &
Schuster, 1973.

Meek, G., Healers and the Healing Process. London,
Theosophical Publishing House, 1977.

Mesmer, F. A., Mesmerism, trans. by V. R. Myers.
London, Macdonald, 1948.

Moss, T., Probability of the Impossible: Scientific
Discoveries and Explorations in the Psychic World. Los
Angeles, J. P. Tarcher, 1974.

Motoyama, Dr. Hiroshi, The Functional Relationship
Between Yoga Asanas and Acupuncture Meridians.

Tokyo, Japan, I.A.R.P., 1979.

Murphy, Pat and Jim, '"Murphy's Theories, The Practical
and the Psychic" Healing Light Center, Glendale,
Calif., 1980.

Mylonas, Elizabeth, A Basic Working Manual and
Workbook for Helpers and Workers. Phoenicia
Path work Center, Phoenicia, New York, 1981.

Niel, A., Magic and Mystery in Tibet. Dover, New York,
1971.

Ostrander, S., and Schroeder, L., Psychic Discoveries
Behind the Iron Curtain. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,

Prentice-HaU/ 1970.

Pachter, Henry M., Paracelsus: Magic Into Science. New
York, Henry Schuinan, 1951.

Pierrakos, Eva, Guide Lectures, 1-258. New York, Center
for the Living Force, 1956-1979.

Pierrakos, John C., The Case of the Broken Heart. New
York, Institute for the New Age, 1975. (Monograph).
Pierrakos, John C., The Core Energetic Process. New York,
Institute for the New Age, 1977. (Monograph).
Pierrakos, John C., The Core Energetic Process in Group
Thepapy. New York, Institute for the New Age, 1975.
(Monograph).

Pierrakos, John C, The Energy Field in Man and Nature.

New York, Institute for the New Age, 1975.
(Monograph).

Pierrakos, John C., Human Energy Systems Theory. New
York, Institute for the New Age, 1975. (Monograph).
Pierrakos, John C., Life Functions of the Energy Centers of
Man. New York, Institute for the New Age, 1975.
(Monograph).

Pierrakos, John C., and Brennan, B., Personal
Communication, 1980.

Powell, A. E., The Astral Body. London, Theosophical
Publishing House, 1972.

Powell, A. E., The Causal Body. London, Theosophical
Publishing House, 1972.

Powell, A. E., The Etheric Double. London, Theosophical
Publishing House, 1973.

Ravitz, L. J., "Application of the Electrodynamic Field
Theory in Biology, Psychiatry, Medicine and Hypnosis,
L General Survey." Am. Journal of Clin. Hypnosis,
1959, Vol. 1, pp. 135-150.

Ravitz, L. J., "Bioelectric Correlates of Emotional States."
Conn. State Medical Journal, 1952, Vol. 16, pp. 499-
505.

Ravitz, L. J., "Daily Variations of Standing Potential
Differences in Human Subjects." Yale Journal of Biology
and Medicine, 1951, Vbl. 24, pp. 22-25.

Ravitz, L. J., The Use of PC Measurements in Psychiatric
Neuropsychiatry, Fall 1951, Vbl. 1, pp. 3-12.

Bibliography 285

Reich, Wilhelm, Character Analysis. London, Vision Press,
1950.

Reich, Wilhelm, The Cancer Biopathy. New York, Farrar,
Straus, and Giroux, 1973.

Reich, Wilhelm, The Discovery of the Orgone, VoL I, The
Function of the Orgasm, trans. by Theodore P. Wolfe,
New York, Orgone Institute Press, 1942. 2nd ed.. New
York, Farrar, Straus, and Giroux, 1961.

Reich, Wilhelm, The Discovery of the Orgone, Vol. II, The
Cancer Biopathy. trans. by Theodore P. Wolfe, New
York, Orgone Institute Press, 1948.

Roberts, J., The Nature of Personal Reality. New York,
Bantam, 1974.

Rodegast, Pat, and Stanton, Judith, "Emmanuel's Book"
Some Friends of Emmanuel, New York, 1985.

Rongliang, Dr. Zheng, "Scientific Research of Qigong"
Lanzhou University, People's Republic of China, 1982.

Sarfatti, J., "Reply to Bohin-Hiley," Psychoenergetic
Systems. London, Gordon & Breach, Vol. 2, 1976, pp.
1 - 8 .

Schwarz, Jack, The Human Energy Systems. New York,
Dutton, 1980.

Schwarz, Jack, Voluntary Controls. New York, Dutton,
1978.

Steiner, Rudolf, The Philosophy of Spiritual Activity,
Blauvelt, New York, Steiner Books, 1980.

Surgue, T., There is a Riven The Story of Edgar Cayce.
Virginia Beach, Virginia, ARE Press, 1957.

Tansely, D. V., Radionics and the Subtle Anatomy of Man.

Devon, England, Health Science Press, 1972.

Tansely, D. V., Radionics Interface with the Ether-Fields.

Devon, England, Health Science Press, 1975.

Targ, Russell, and Harary, Keith, The Mind Race. New
York, Ballantine, 1984.

Vithoulkas, G., Homeopathy, Medicine of the New Man.

New York, Avon Books, 1971.

Vladimirov, Y. A., Ultraweak Luminescence Accompany¬
ing Biochemical Reactions. USSR Academy of
Biological Sciences, Izdatelstvo "Nauka," Moscow.

\on Reichenbach, C., Physico-physiological Researches on
the Dynamics of Magnetism, Electricity, Heat, Light,
Crystallization, and Chemism, In Their Relation to
Vital Force. New York, Clinton-HaU, 1851.

Westlake, A., The Pattern of Health. Berkeley, Shambhala,
1973.

White, John, and Krippner, S., Future Science. New York,
Anchor Books, 1977.

White, John, Kundalini, Evolution and Enlightenment.

New York, Anchor Books, 1979.

Wilhelm, Richard., The Secret of the Golden Flower. New
York, Harcourt, Brace & World, Inc., 1962.

Williamson, Dr. Samuel, Personal Communication. New
York, 1982.

Zukav, Gary, The Dancing Wu Li Masters. New York,
William Morrow & Co., 1979.

INDEX

acupuncture lines, 185
exercises to open, 187-90
acupuncture points, 44, 45, 81, 203
adolescence, development in, 67
adrenal exhaustion, 75
adulthood, development in, 67-68
aggressiveness, 82, 84, 85-86, 87-88
AIDS, 143
akashic records, 155
alcohol, effects of, 92
allergies, 150

amethyst, 39, 199-200, 202
anger, 91-92
and defense systems, 106
and energy blocks, 101
angina, 101, 143
arthritis, 150
asthma, 150

astral body (fourth layer), 43, 51-52, 137, 138, 140, 141,
175

healing on, 148
astral plane, 137, 138
auditory sense, 154
aura, 3, 4, 5, 26, 89-90, 137
in adolescence, 67
adult development of, 67-68
anatomy of, 42
and anger, 91-92
in babyhood, 63-64
balance of energies in, 140-41, 147
and chakras, 43, 45, 48
charging, 195, 205

childhood development, 65-66, 67, 107

cleaning, 96-97, 199, 205

colors in, 33-34, 89-92, 97-98, 238-39

dissociated thought forms in, 93-95

drugs, effect on, 92, 142-43, 151, 261

dualistic field pattern of, 42-43

energy blocks in, 101-104

energy flow in, 43, 48

exercises to see, 41-42, 55-56, 90-91

in human development, 61-70

of inanimate objects, 39
interactions, 52

layers of, 42-43, 47, 51, 54-55, 137, 174-75
See also specific headings, i.e. etheric body
main vertical power current, 43, 45, 53-54
measurement of, 33-34
mucus in, 92-93
observing, 41-42, 90-91
of plants, 38-39
in pregnancy, 91

ana psychological development, 59
scientific observation of, 31-35
spiritual distortions in, 142
in spiritual tradition, 29
in transformation, 126
trauma, removal from, 230-33
of hees, 5, 38
weight in, 92-93
Azrael, 68-69

babyhood, development in, 63-65
Bach Flower remedies, 150
Bailey, Alice, 61
Bandler, Richard, 153
base chakra See first chakra
Becker, Robert, 20

beings, spiritual, 51 See also spirit guides
beliefs, negative, 78, 126, 274-75
belief systems, 10, 61, 93-95, 142, 147, 149, 274
Bell's Theorem, 27
Bell, J.S., 27

Bendit, Lawrence, 31-32

Bendit, Phoebe, 31, 32, 61, 68

Bentov, Itzhak, 154, 243

“beside himself" (defense), 104, 105, 114

Bio-Energetics, 32, 93

bioenergotherapy (BET), 150

bioenergetic stool, 96, 97

biofield, 33

bioplasma, 33, 34, 40

bioplasmic fields, 20

287

288 Index

birth, 62

"blah" block, 101, 102
Blake, Daniel, 240
Blavatsky, Madame, 61
Bohm, David, 25, 27, 179
Boirac, 30

boundary containment, 105, 106, 124

Brahman, 177-79

brain

holographic structure of, 25-26
breastfeeding, 65
breathing
colors, 195, 196
"mirrored", 208
brooding, 105, 106, 123
Bruyere, Rosalyn, 33, 42, 150, 205, 245
Buddhist tradition, 177-79
Burr, H., 20
Butler, William, 94

cancer, 7, 143, 144, 150, 155, 159
Cayce, Edgar, 243

celestial body, (sixth layer), 43, 53, 126, 139, 140, 141,
175

healing on, 148, 226
centering, meditation for, 198
chakra(s), 32, 34

accessing information through, 172-75

in adolescence, 67

adult development, 67-68

area of body governed by, 48

and auric field, 43, 45, 48

balanced, 82

blocked, 71, 82

childhood development, 65-66, 67

clearing, 205-15

colors in, 34, 48, 239-40

cords, 52, 64, 75-76, 259-60

at death, 69

diagnosis of, 81-88

ana disease, 143

disfigured, 143, 144, 145

and endocrine glands, 48

energy flow in, 45, 48, 49, 71-72

feeling centers, 46, 72, 73

functions, 45, 48

imbalanced, 143

in infancy, 63-64

location of, 44, 45

and mam vertical power current, 43, 45, 53-54
major, 44-45, 46, 48
mental centers, 46, 72, 73
minor, 44

open, 43, 45, 48, 71, 82, 190-95, 196-97
paired, 44, 45, 72-73, 74, 75, 76
and physical senses, 45
protective screen, 64, 65
psychological functions, 48-49, 71-79
restructuring, 225

rolfing, effect on, 34
roots of, 45, 51, 54
senses, 45, 172-75
as vortices of energy, 143, 144, 145
will centers, 46, 72, 73 , 85
channelling, 7, 14, 201

for healing, 203, 213, 218, 219-21, 222-25, 226

preparation for, 187, 203

receptive, 154

spirit guides, 170, 171-72

through chakras, 172-75

verbal, 169

character structure, 109-10
and life task, 126-27
masochistic, 121-23
oral, 116-17, 118
psychopathic, 117, 119-20
rigid, 123-25
schizoid, 110-16
chelation, 148, 205-15, 268
chemotherapy, 143, 157, 161
ch'i, 29, 33

childhood, development in, 67, 107
child, inner, 15-16
chloroquine, 260
clairvoyance, 5
Clairvoyant time, 24
cocaine, 92

coccygeal center See First chakra
coccyx, injury to, 4, 26
colitis, 101, 241
color

in aura, 33-34, 89-92, 97-98, 238-39
breathing, 195, 196
in chakras, 34, 48, 239-40
exercises to control sending, 237-38
in healing, 237, 239-40
colorizer, 32
compaction, 101, 102
complementarity, 24, 25
conception, 62
connectedness, 26, 76
human, 75

superluminal, 26-27, 28
consciousness
expanded, 5, 6, 28, 42
expression of, 138-39
levels of, 137-39

cords of connection (chakral), 52, 64, 75-76, 230-33
Core Energetic therapy, 32, 94, 96
cosmic level, 54
healing on, 230-33
Cox, Jim, 110

crown chakra (seventh), 44, 48
in babies, 63, 64
in channelling, 173, 174
at death, 68

and psychological functions, 73, 79
crystals,
and auras, 39
polarity in, 30, 31
use of, 199-200, 202-203, 217-18

Index 289

death, 68-70, 278, 279

defense systems See energetic defense systems

De La Warr, George, 31

de Vita Us, Pat (Rodegast), 232, 238

diaphragmatic center, (third chakra), 73, 76

Direct Current Control System, 20

discomfort, as guidance, 14

disease

dynamic processes of, 141-45
displaced character structure See psychopathic structure
Divine will, 275- 76
divinity, inner, 7, 109, 137
Dobrin, Richard, 32
DOR (dead orgone energy)
cleaning, 199-200
Drown, Ruth, 31

drugs, effect of, 92, 142-43, 151, 261
duality, 25, 26

Eidson, William, 32-33
ego will, 76-77

Eighth Level Shield, 230-33, 234
Einstein, Albert, 23, 243
Emmanuel, 161, 232, 238
on Divine will, 261, 276
on fear, 274
on Grace, 278

on healer responsibility, 279
emotional body (second layer), 43, 50, 138, 139, 140,
141, 175
healing on, 148
emotions, 89
negative, 91-92
and solar plexus, 75
and thought forms, 93-94
endocrine glands, 48
energetic defense systems, 104-107
of masochist, 123
of oral personaUty, 117
of psychopathic personality, 119
of rigid personaUty, 124
of schizoid, 114
energy, 24
balanced, 147
depletion, 103
drawing in, for heaUng, 201
physical, 72

physical vs. spiritual, 51
sexual, 72-75
energy blocks, 96, 127
"blah" block, 101, 102
compaction, 101, 102
depletion, 103
leaks, 103-104
mesh armor, 101-102
plate armor, 102-103

energy field(s), 3, 5, 6, 10, 19, 21, 26 See also aura

bioplasmic, 20
colors in, 7, 10
dynamic, 19

perceiving information in, 26
rebalancing, 205-15
vibrational level, 175, 177, 185
energy leak, 103-104
energy system

aUgnment (healer/patient/guides), 203
analysis of, 202
Erikson, Erik, 59

etheric body (first layer), 32, 43, 49-50, 138, 139, 140,
141, 175

healing on, 148, 149
past tire healing, 246-49

etneric template body (fifth layer), 43, 52-53, 139, 140,
141, 175

heaUng on, 148, 218, 219-21
exercises

to bring guides to field of work, 218
for charging aura, 195
to control color sending, 237-38
to enhance perceptions, 153-54
to experience nonlinear time, 243
to find negative beUefs, 274-75
on finding fears, 274
to gather energy for healing, 201
for grounding, 195, 198
on inner wall, 134-35
for internal vision, 165-66
joint, 187-90
on nature of healing, 280
to open acupuncture Unes, 187-90
to open chakras, 190-95, 196, 197
on readiness to be healer, 280
to see human aura, 41-42, 55-56, 90-91
to see universal energy, 37-39
for spiritual guidance, 170-71
explicate enfolded order, 25

faith, 276-77
faith heaUng, 5
Faraday, Michael, 22
fear, 92, 274
avoidance, 101-102
Ferguson, Marilyn, 35
fibroid tumors, 159
fields

morphogenetic, 27-28
odic, 30-31
thought, 20
field theory, 22-23
fifth chakra See throat chakra
first chakra, 44, 48
and psychological functions, 72, 73
in channelUng, 172-73
fluorescent lights, 199, 267
"flukey flu", 93
foot reflexology, 203, 204

290 Index

forehead chakra (sixth), 44, 48
and psychological functions, 73, 78-89
fourth chakra See heart chakra
free will choices, 61, 62, 155

Gabor, Dennis, 25
Gass, Robbie, 242
germ plasma, 64
Gestla, Karen, 33
God/Goddess force, 25
Grace, 278
Graves' disease, 32
Great Time, 23, 24
Grinder, John, 153
grounding, 93, 195, 198
growth (personal), 10, 61
and chakras, 45

guidance, spiritual, 14-16, 61, 62 See also spirit guides
exercises to receive, 170-71

harmonic induction, 40, 139, 185
healer, 147
dedication, 273
and diaphragmatic center, 76
and Divine will, 275-76
and energy depletion, 200
as energy transmitter, 185
and faitn, 276- 77
and fear, 274

and full spectrum healing, 149
and love, 276
and patience, 277
and physicians, 149-52
and power, 277-78
preparations for healing, 187-200
responsibility of, 155, 243-44, 278-80
role in spiritual surgery, 219-21
self-care, 185, 187, 199-200, 265-68
tests, 273-74
training for, 13-14
truth, search for, 274-75
and universal creative power, 28
healing, 28, 131-32
case study, illustrative, 255-63
and character structure, 124, 126
with color, 237-40
full spectrum, 147-49
gathering energy for, 201
heart chakra in, 76
holistic, 151-52
inner, 147-49
nature of (exercise), 280
outer, 147, 149
past life trauma, 244-50

as remembering, 131-32, 147
and self-love, 269
sounding in, 240-42
space, care of, 198

with spirit guides, 169-72, 218, 219-21
and therapy, 99
types of, 150-51
Healing Center, 76
healing sequence, 202, 203, 235
chelation, 205-15
cleansing specific area, 215-18
cosmic level healing, 230-33
energy system alignment, 203
energy system analysis, 202-203
etheric template healing, 219-21
ketheric template restructuring, 222-25
ketheric template sealing, 228-30
preparation for, 201
spine cleaning, 215, 216
health

creative process of, 139-40
and energy field, 7
maintenance, 265
and self-responsibility, 253
heart, pain in, 4
heart attack, 102-103, 161, 162
heart chakra (fourth), 44, 48, 49, 51, 53, 143, 201
in adolescence, 67
in channelling, 173, 174, 226
and psychological function, 71, 73, 76-77
Helmont, 30
hepatitis, 142

hernia (hiatal), 205, 220, 221, 225
Heyoan, 170, 240
on becoming a healer, 273, 280
on death, 69-70
on drugs, 261
on healing, 179, 182
on incarnation/reincamation, 262-63
on the inner wall, 69-70, 134
meditation on self-healing, 268-70
metaphor of reality, 177-72
High Auditory Perception 169-72
higher self, 7, 61, 109

High Sense Perception (HSP), 3, 4, 5, 6, 19, 29, 155,
177, 178, 179
developing, 10, 153
in diagnosis, 7, 81, 150
in research, 150
holistic medicine, 149, 151-52
hologram, 25-26, 35, 131
hook, 104, 105, 106
human body

and light emissions, 32-33
polarity in, 31

Human Energy Field (HEF), 5, 10, 11, 20, 34, 41
See also aura
holographic view of, 35
measurement of, 32-34
perceiving, 9
scientific observation, 31
in spiritual tradition, 29-30

Index 291

Hundredth Monkey Principle, 27
Hunt, Valorie, 33, 34, 35
hysterectomy, 3
hysteria, 117, 124

llliaster, 30

illness, 7, 131-32, 141-45
and chakra disturbance, 32
and energy flow, 45
and etheric body, 32
long-term, 68-69
personal meaning of, 145
and psychological problems, 99
psychosomatic, 7
^'reading" cause of, 166-67
imagination, 5
impedence matching, 32
implicate enfolded order, 25
incarnation, 61-62
individuation, 131, 133
information

direct access of, 153-56
from spirit guides, 169-72
intercourse, pain during, 4
internal vision, 154
examples of, 157-60
exercises to establish, 165-66
microscopic, 161-63
and precognition, 161
process of, 163-65
lnyushin, Victor, 20
"1-thou" relationship, 67, 68

joint(s)

exercises, 187-90
problems with, 104

Karagulla, Schafica, 32, 143
karma, 14, 61, 62, 142

ketheric body (seventh layer), 43, 53-54, 61, 139, 140,
141, 175

chakra restructuring in, 225
healing in, 147-48, 221, 222
organ restructuring in, 222-25
past life healing in, 246-50
sealing, 228-30
Kilner, William, 31
kinesthetic sense, 153-54
Kirlian photography, 39
koan, 26

Krieger, Dolores, 150
Krippner, Stanley, 40
kundalini yoga, 74, 194

Kuna, Dora, 32

lapis, 38

latency period, 67

laying-on of hands, 5, 9, 147, 149, 150

Leibnitz, 30

Le Shan, Lawrence, 24

leukemia, acute myeloblastic (AML), 161, 163
Liebeault, 30
life force, 72, 73
life plan, 61-62
life task, 61-62, 109
and character structure, 126-27
for masochist, 123
for oral structure, 117
for psychopath, 119, 121
for rigid structure, 124
for schizoid, 114, 116
liver, 157

love, 51, 53, 66, 67, 72, 76, 172, 276, 278
Lowan, Al, 110
LSD, 92

main vertical power current, 43, 45, 53-54, 68, 69,
76,215

manifestation, 179-82
marijuana, 92
masochistic structure, 121
energy field of, 121-23
life task of, 123
mastitis, 222, 224
matter

as energy, 24
fifth state of, 20
mutable, 24
Maya, 177-79

Maxwell, James Clerk, 22, 30
MDMA, 261

medicine, holistic, 149, 150-52
case study, illustrative, 255-63
meditation, 6, 26, 28, 51, 53
for auric level experience, 175-76
for centering, 198
color breathing, 195, 196
to dissolve self-limitations, 270
self-healing, 150, 268-70
memory-tension, 34

mental body (third layer), 43, 50-51, 138, 139, i40,
141, 175
healing in, 148

mental executive center, 73, 78- 79
mental grasp, 105, 106, 117
mesh armor, 101-102, 124
Mesmer, 30
microorganisms, 157
migraine, 150

292 Index

"mirrored" breathing, 208
miscarriage, 3

morphogenetic fields, 27-28
Motoyama, Hiroshi, 33, 185-86, 188
multiple sclerosis (MS), 240-41

nadis, 48

Native American Indian tradition, 23, 68, 199
negative intent, 274, 275
negative ion generators, 199
nerve plexus, 44, 48
nervous system diseases,
and BET, 150
Newton, Isaac, 21

Newtonian physics, 21-22, 23, 24, 133
ninth auric level, 54
healing on, 233
Northrop, F., 20

odic force, 30-31
Oh-Shinnah, 199
oral structure, 116
energy field of, 117
life task of, 117
oral sucking, 104, 105, 117
organ restructuring, 222-25
orgasm, 72, 73
inability to achieve, 74
pain during, 4
orgone, 31

dead orgone energy (DOR), 199- 200
ovarian cyst, 150, 159, 160

performer-audience phenomenon, 91
ersonal task, 61-62, 109-110, 127
eterson, Petey, 244
phantom leaf effect, 39
physical body
healing of, 148, 149
physical plane, 51, 137, 138
physicians, 149-50
Pierrakos, Eva, 32, 61, 62
Pierrakos, John, 32, 49, 72, 82, 110, 143
iezoelectric effect, 240
lanck. Max, 24
plate armor, 102-103, 124
leasure, negative/positive, 274-75
opow, A.S., 33

possessions, attachment to, 65-66
polarity, 30-31
porcupine, 104, 105, 114
power- will display, 105, 106, 124
prana, 29

precognition, 161, 162
Pribane, Karl, 25-26
probability wavws, 25
professional center (fifth chakra),

77-78

progression, principle of, 61
projection, 71-72
psychic spaces, 66
psychopathic structure, 117, 119
energy field of, 119, 120
pubic center, 72, 73, 74-75
Puthoff, Harold, 155
psychopathic structure,
life task of, 119, 121

P ain, 145
ap Smear, 4
paradox

in subatomic world, 24
Paracelsus, 30
parents, choosing, 62
passivity, 82, 85
past lives, 15, 24, 54, 243-44
bands, 54, 244, 249-50
blocks, healing, 244-46
trauma, healing, 244, 246-48
Pathwork Helpership Training, 13
patience, 277
patient as healer
case study, illustrative, 255-63
pelvic inflammatory disease, (PID), 101, 159, 160
pendulum,

in chakra diagnosis, 32, 81-88
perception, 174

beyond manifest world, 179-82
cone of, 177-79
enhancing, 153-54

Qigong masters, 33
quanta, 24

quartz, 199-200, 202-203
quickening, 62

radiation therapy, 143
radionics, 31, 150-51
radiopaque dye, 142-43
Ravita, Leonard, 20
"reading", 24
cause of illness, 166-67
long distance, 155
reality

"frequencies of', 51
holographic framework of, 26
metaphor of, 177-82
multi-dimensional, 28, 243
spaces of, 93-95
regressional therapy, 23
Reich, Wilhelm, 31, 109, 110
reincarnation, 262-63

Index 293

relativity, theory of, 23, 24, 27
rigid structure, 123
energy field of, 124, 125
life task of, 124
Roberts, Jane, 243
Rodegast, Pat, 161, 232
rolfing, 33, 34
Rongliang, Zheng, 33

sacral chakra (second), 44, 48, 65
in channelling, 173

and psychological function, 72, 73, 74-75
Sarfatti, Jack, 28
scanning, 163, 165 -66, 203
schizoid structure, 110-13
energy field of, 113-14, 115
life task of, 114, 116
Schwarz, Jack, 42, 54, 171
scientific method (western)
and self-definition, 20, 21-28
second chakra See sacral chakra
"seeing", 153, 154
past lives, 244
self-care, 265-68
self-hatred, 110
self-healing, 4, 7, 9, 11
as self transformation, 9
self-love, 113, 253, 268, 276
seventh chakra See crown chakra
sexual energy, 72-75
Sheldrake, Rupert, 27, 28
shin splints, 103

shoulder blades, chakra between (fourth), 76-77
sixth chakra See third eye
"smoking", 199

solar plexus (third chakra), 44, 48
in channelling, 173, 174
in latency, 67
in maturity, 68

and psychological functions, 73, 75- 76
sounding, 52, 240-42
soul

and illness, 131-32
space-time continuum, 23, 24, 243
spine cleaning, 215, 216
spirit guides, 14, 16, 61
channelling, 169-72, 203
in healer's field of work, 218
patient's, 222, 230
teams of, 223
spiritual healing, 5
spiritual plane, 51, 137, 138-39
spiritual traditions, 29-30
spirituality, 79

SQUID (superconducting quantum interference
device), 20
sterility, 150

superluminal connectedness, 26-27
surgery, 143

and etheric body, 32
spiritual, 219-21
sympathetic resonance, 40

Tansley, David, 44
Targ, Russell, 155
teacher, spiritual See spirit guides
tendonitis, 103
tension, 102-103
tentacles, 105, 106, 123
third chakra See solar plexus
third eye (sixth chakra), 44, 48
in channeling, 173, 174
and internal vision, 157, 163, 166
psychological functions, 73, 78- 79
thought fields, 20
thought forms, 50
dissociated, 93-95
throat chakra (fifth), 44, 48, 68
in channelling, 173, 174
psychological function, 73, 77-78
thyroid, enlarged, 4
time

Clairvoyant, 24
Great Time, 23, 24
linear vs. relative, 23-24, 26
nonlinear, exercise to experience, 243
-space continuum, 23, 24, 243
tissues, post surgery, 32
toxins, release of, 93
transactional analysis, 75-76

transformation, 37, 53, 86, 114, 126, 127, 260, 262-63
transtemporal trauma, 243-50
truth, 274

ulcers, 102, 142
umbilicus, psychic, 64, 66, 75
universal energy field (UEF), 31
accessing information from, 155-56
and aura, 41
and chakras, 45, 46
characteristics of, 39-40
exercises to see, 37-39
in healing, 147, 185, 206, 213
and health, 82

and Human Energy Field, 41
incoming path (to oody), 48, 49
and radionics, 150
in scientific tradition, 30-31
in spiritual tradition, 29
universe

as dynamic whole, 21, 25, 26, 28
holographic view of, 21, 25
multi-dimensional, 177
uterus, abnormal cells in, 3

294 Index

V Watson, Lyall, 27

— weakness, 4, 103, 104

veil weight, auric, 92-93

between spiritual/material world, 179, 180 exercises to experience, 93

verbal arrows, 105, 106, 117, 123 Westlake, Aubrey, 150

verbal denial, 104, 105, 117, 119 White, John, 29, 40

vibrational levels, 40, 61, 67, 68, 175, 177, 185, 213 withdrawal, 104, 105, 110, 114

vision, internal, 131, 157-59 wholeness, universal, 25

microscopic, 161, 163 Williamson, Samuel, 20

process of, 163-65 Wirkus, Mietek, 150

with precognition, 161, 162 womb, etheric, 62

visualization, 174 world task, 62, 67, 109

to open chakras, 191 wrists, weakness in, 4

visual sense, 154

Von Reichenbach, Wilhelm, 30-31

W Y

wall, inner, 69-70, 134-35 yin/yang, 29, 31, 82, 140, 142

If you would like to receive information about the Barbara Brennan School of Healing
and a schedule of lectures and workshops, please fill in the information requested
below and mail to:

The Barbara Brennan School of Healing
P.O. Box 2005
East Hampton, NY 11937
(516) 329-0951
FAX (516) 324-9745

I would like to be placed on the Barbara Brennan School of Healing mailing list.

NAME:_

ADDRESS:

PHONE #:

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Texts

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Barbara Brennan Hands Of Light A Guide To Healing Through The Human Energy Field Bantam( 1988)"

See other formats